M221 USer Guide

SQL Gateway
EIO0000002417 04/2020
Modicon M221
Logic Controller
User Guide
11/2020
EIO0000000976.02
www.schneider-electric.com
Table of Contents
1 Modicon M221 Logic Controller Part I

Programming Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 Modicon M221 Logic Controller Part II
Advanced Functions Library Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 Modicon M221 Logic Controller Part III
Hardware Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 Modicon TMH2GDB - Remote Graphic Display Part IV
User Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 Modicon TMC2 - Cartridges Part V
Programming Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 Modicon TMC2 - Cartridges Part VI
Hardware Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EIO0000000976.02 11/2020 2
Modicon M221
EIO0000003297 02/2020
Modicon M221
Logic Controller
Programming Guide
02/2020
EIO0000003297.01
The information provided in this documentation contains general descriptions and/or technical
characteristics of the performance of the products contained herein. This documentation is not
intended as a substitute for and is not to be used for determining suitability or reliability of these
products for specific user applications. It is the duty of any such user or integrator to perform the
appropriate and complete risk analysis, evaluation and testing of the products with respect to the
relevant specific application or use thereof. Neither Schneider Electric nor any of its affiliates or
subsidiaries shall be responsible or liable for misuse of the information contained herein. If you
have any suggestions for improvements or amendments or have found errors in this publication,
please notify us.
You agree not to reproduce, other than for your own personal, noncommercial use, all or part of
this document on any medium whatsoever without permission of Schneider Electric, given in
writing. You also agree not to establish any hypertext links to this document or its content.
Schneider Electric does not grant any right or license for the personal and noncommercial use of
the document or its content, except for a non-exclusive license to consult it on an "as is" basis, at
your own risk. All other rights are reserved.
All pertinent state, regional, and local safety regulations must be observed when installing and
using this product. For reasons of safety and to help ensure compliance with documented system
data, only the manufacturer should perform repairs to components.
When devices are used for applications with technical safety requirements, the relevant
instructions must be followed.
Failure to use Schneider Electric software or approved software with our hardware products may
result in injury, harm, or improper operating results.
Failure to observe this information can result in injury or equipment damage.
© 2020 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.
2 EIO0000003297 02/2020
Table of Contents
Safety Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
About the Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Part I Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Chapter 1 About the Modicon M221 Logic Controller . . . . . . . . . . . 19
TM221C Logic Controller Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
TM221M Logic Controller Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Chapter 2 Configuration Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2.1 Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Object Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Addressing I/O Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Maximum Number of Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
2.2 Task Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Tasks and Scan Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Maximum Number of Tasks and Priorities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
2.3 Controller States and Behaviors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Controller States Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Controller States Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Controller State Transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Persistent Variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Output Behavior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
2.4 Post Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Post Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Post Configuration File Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Part II Configuring the M221 Logic Controller . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Chapter 3 How to Configure a Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Building a Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Optional I/O Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Configuring the M221 Logic Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Updating Firmware using Executive Loader Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Chapter 4 Embedded Input/Output Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
4.1 Digital Input Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Configuring Digital Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
EIO0000003297 02/2020 3
4.2 Digital Output Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Configuring Digital Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
4.3 Analog Input Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Configuring Analog Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
4.4 High Speed Counter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Configuring High Speed Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Configuring Dual Phase and Single Phase Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Configuring Frequency Meter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
4.5 Pulse Generator Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Configuring Pulse Generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Configuring Pulse (%PLS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Configuring Pulse Width Modulation (%PWM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Configuring Pulse Train Output (%PTO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Configuring Frequency Generator (%FREQGEN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Chapter 5 I/O Bus Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
I/O Configuration General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Maximum Hardware Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Configuring Cartridges and Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Chapter 6 Embedded Communication Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
6.1 Ethernet Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Configuring Ethernet Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Configuring Modbus TCP or Modbus TCP IOScanner . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Configuring EtherNet/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
6.2 Serial Line Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Configuring Serial Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Configuring Modbus and ASCII Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Configuring the TMH2GDB Remote Graphic Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Configuring Modbus Serial IOScanner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Adding a Device on the Modbus Serial IOScanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
6.3 Supported Modbus Function Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Supported Modbus Function Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
6.4 State Machine Diagram for Modbus IOscanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
State Machine Diagram for Modbus IOscanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Chapter 7 SD Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
File Management Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
SD Card Supported File Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Clone Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Firmware Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
4 EIO0000003297 02/2020
Application Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Post Configuration Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Error Log Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Memory Management: Backing Up and Restoring Controller Memory 213
Part III Programming the M221 Logic Controller . . . . . . . . . 215
Chapter 8 I/O Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Digital Inputs (%I) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Digital Outputs (%Q) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Analog Inputs (%IW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Analog Outputs (%QW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Chapter 9 Network Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Input Assembly (EtherNet/IP) Objects (%QWE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Output Assembly (EtherNet/IP) Objects (%IWE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Input Registers (Modbus TCP) Objects (%QWM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Output Registers (Modbus TCP) Objects (%IWM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Digital Input (IOScanner) Objects (%IN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Digital Output (IOScanner) Objects (%QN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Input Register (IOScanner) Objects (%IWN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Output Register (IOScanner) Objects (%QWN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Modbus IOScanner Network Diagnostic Codes (%IWNS) . . . . . . . . . 238
Chapter 10 System Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
System Bits (%S). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
System Words (%SW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Input Channel Status (%IWS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Output Channel Status (%QWS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Glossary ......................................... 281
Index ......................................... 287
EIO0000003297 02/2020 5
6 EIO0000003297 02/2020
Safety Information
Important Information
NOTICE
Read these instructions carefully, and look at the equipment to become familiar with the device
before trying to install, operate, service, or maintain it. The following special messages may appear
throughout this documentation or on the equipment to warn of potential hazards or to call attention
to information that clarifies or simplifies a procedure.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 7
PLEASE NOTE
Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced, and maintained only by qualified
personnel. No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising out of
the use of this material.
A qualified person is one who has skills and knowledge related to the construction and operation
of electrical equipment and its installation, and has received safety training to recognize and avoid
the hazards involved.
8 EIO0000003297 02/2020
About the Book
At a Glance
Document Scope
This document describes the configuration and programming of the Modicon M221 Logic
Controller for EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic. For further information, refer to the separate
documents provided in the EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic online help.
Validity Note
This document has been updated for the release of EcoStruxureTM Machine Expert - Basic V1.1.
Related Documents
Title of Documentation Reference Number

EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic - Operating Guide EIO0000003281 (ENG)
EIO0000003282 (FRA)
EIO0000003283 (GER)
EIO0000003284 (SPA)
EIO0000003285 (ITA)
EIO0000003286 (CHS)
EIO0000003287 (POR)
EIO0000003288 (TUR)
EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic Generic Functions - Library EIO0000003289 (ENG)
Guide EIO0000003290 (FRE)
EIO0000003291 (GER)
EIO0000003292 (SPA)
EIO0000003293 (ITA)
EIO0000003294 (CHS)
EIO0000003295 (POR)
EIO0000003296 (TUR)
Modicon M221 Logic Controller Advanced Functions - Library EIO0000003305 (ENG)
EIO0000003307 (GER)
EIO0000003308 (SPA)
EIO0000003309 (ITA)
EIO0000003310 (CHS)
EIO0000003311 (POR)
EIO0000003312 (TUR)
EIO0000003297 02/2020 9
Modicon M221 Logic Controller - Hardware Guide EIO0000003313 (ENG)
EIO0000003314 (FRE)
EIO0000003315 (GER)
EIO0000003316 (SPA)
EIO0000003317 (ITA)
EIO0000003318 (CHS)
EIO0000003319 (POR)
EIO0000003320 (TUR)
TMH2GDB Remote Graphic Display - User Guide EIO0000003321 (ENG)
EIO0000003322 (FRA)
EIO0000003323 (GER)
EIO0000003324 (SPA)
EIO0000003325 (ITA)
EIO0000003326 (CHS)
EIO0000003327 (POR)
EIO0000003328 (TUR)
Modicon TMC2 Cartridge - Programming Guide EIO0000003329 (ENG)
EIO0000003330 (FRE)
EIO0000003331 (GER)
EIO0000003332 (SPA)
EIO0000003333 (ITA)
EIO0000003334 (CHS)
EIO0000003335 (POR)
EIO0000003336 (TUR)
Modicon TMC2 Cartridge - Hardware Guide EIO0000003337 (ENG)
EIO0000003338 (FRE)
EIO0000003339 (GER)
EIO0000003340 (SPA)
EIO0000003341 (ITA)
EIO0000003342 (CHS)
EIO0000003343 (POR)
EIO0000003344(TUR)
Modicon TM3 Expansion Modules Configuration - Programming EIO0000003345 (ENG)
EIO0000003347 (GER)
EIO0000003348 (SPA)
EIO0000003349 (ITA)
EIO0000003350 (CHS)
EIO0000003351 (POR)
EIO0000003352 (TUR)
10 EIO0000003297 02/2020
Modicon TM3 Digital I/O Modules - Hardware Guide EIO0000003125 (ENG)
EIO0000003126 (FRE)
EIO0000003127 (GER)
EIO0000003128 (SPA)
EIO0000003129 (ITA)
EIO0000003130 (CHS)
EIO0000003424 (POR)
EIO0000003425 (TUR)
Modicon TM3 Analog I/O Modules - Hardware Guide EIO0000003131 (ENG)
EIO0000003132 (FRE)
EIO0000003133 (GER)
EIO0000003134 (SPA)
EIO0000003135 (ITA)
EIO0000003136 (CHS)
EIO0000003426 (POR)
EIO0000003427 (TUR)
Modicon TM3 Expert Modules - Hardware Guide EIO0000003137 (ENG)
EIO0000003138 (FRE)
EIO0000003139 (GER)
EIO0000003140 (SPA)
EIO0000003141 (ITA)
EIO0000003142 (CHS)
EIO0000003428 (POR)
EIO0000003429 (TUR)
Modicon TM3 Safety Modules - Hardware Guide EIO0000003353 (ENG)
EIO0000003354 (FRE)
EIO0000003355 (GER)
EIO0000003356 (SPA)
EIO0000003357 (ITA)
EIO0000003358 (CHS)
EIO0000003359 (POR)
EIO0000003360 (TUR)
Modicon TM3 Transmitter and Receiver Modules - Hardware EIO0000003143 (ENG)
EIO0000003145 (GER)
EIO0000003146 (SPA)
EIO0000003147 (ITA)
EIO0000003148 (CHS)
EIO0000003430 (POR)
EIO0000003431 (TUR)
Modicon TM2 Expansion Modules Configuration - Programming EIO0000003432 (ENG)
EIO0000003434 (GER)
EIO0000003435 (SPA)
EIO0000003436 (ITA)
EIO0000003437 (CHS)
EIO0000003297 02/2020 11
EIO0000000029 (FRE)
EIO0000000030 (GER)
EIO0000000031 (SPA)
EIO0000000032 (ITA)
EIO0000000033 (CHS)
EIO0000000035 (FRE)
EIO0000000036 (GER)
EIO0000000037 (SPA)
EIO0000000038 (ITA)
EIO0000000039 (CHS)
SR2MOD02 and SR2MOD03 Wireless Modem - User Guide EIO0000001575 (ENG)
You can download these technical publications and other technical information from our website
at https://www.se.com/ww/en/download/.
The characteristics that are described in the present document, as well as other related
documents, should be the same as those characteristics that appear online. In line with our policy
of constant improvement, we may revise content over time to improve clarity and accuracy. If you
see a difference between the document and online information, use the online information as your
reference.
12 EIO0000003297 02/2020
Product Related Information
WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
 The designer of any control scheme must consider the potential failure modes of control paths
and, for certain critical control functions, provide a means to achieve a safe state during and
after a path failure. Examples of critical control functions are emergency stop and overtravel
stop, power outage and restart.
 Separate or redundant control paths must be provided for critical control functions.
 System control paths may include communication links. Consideration must be given to the
implications of unanticipated transmission delays or failures of the link.
 Observe all accident prevention regulations and local safety guidelines.1
 Each implementation of this equipment must be individually and thoroughly tested for proper
operation before being placed into service.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
1
For additional information, refer to NEMA ICS 1.1 (latest edition), "Safety Guidelines for the
Application, Installation, and Maintenance of Solid State Control" and to NEMA ICS 7.1 (latest
edition), "Safety Standards for Construction and Guide for Selection, Installation and Operation of
Adjustable-Speed Drive Systems" or their equivalent governing your particular location.
WARNING
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
 Only use software approved by Schneider Electric for use with this equipment.
 Update your application program every time you change the physical hardware configuration.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 13
Terminology Derived from Standards
The technical terms, terminology, symbols and the corresponding descriptions in this manual, or
that appear in or on the products themselves, are generally derived from the terms or definitions
of international standards.
In the area of functional safety systems, drives and general automation, this may include, but is not
limited to, terms such as safety, safety function, safe state, fault, fault reset, malfunction, failure,
error, error message, dangerous, etc.
Among others, these standards include:
Standard Description
IEC 61131-2:2007 Programmable controllers, part 2: Equipment requirements and tests.
ISO 13849-1:2015 Safety of machinery: Safety related parts of control systems.
General principles for design.
EN 61496-1:2013 Safety of machinery: Electro-sensitive protective equipment.
Part 1: General requirements and tests.
ISO 12100:2010 Safety of machinery - General principles for design - Risk assessment and risk
reduction
EN 60204-1:2006 Safety of machinery - Electrical equipment of machines - Part 1: General
requirements
ISO 14119:2013 Safety of machinery - Interlocking devices associated with guards - Principles
for design and selection
ISO 13850:2015 Safety of machinery - Emergency stop - Principles for design
IEC 62061:2015 Safety of machinery - Functional safety of safety-related electrical, electronic,
and electronic programmable control systems
IEC 61508-1:2010 Functional safety of electrical/electronic/programmable electronic safety-
related systems: General requirements.
related systems: Requirements for electrical/electronic/programmable
electronic safety-related systems.
related systems: Software requirements.
IEC 61784-3:2016 Industrial communication networks - Profiles - Part 3: Functional safety
fieldbuses - General rules and profile definitions.
2006/42/EC Machinery Directive
2014/30/EU Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive
2014/35/EU Low Voltage Directive
14 EIO0000003297 02/2020
In addition, terms used in the present document may tangentially be used as they are derived from
other standards such as:
IEC 60034 series Rotating electrical machines
IEC 61800 series Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems
IEC 61158 series Digital data communications for measurement and control – Fieldbus for use in
industrial control systems
Finally, the term zone of operation may be used in conjunction with the description of specific
hazards, and is defined as it is for a hazard zone or danger zone in the Machinery Directive
(2006/42/EC) and ISO 12100:2010.
NOTE: The aforementioned standards may or may not apply to the specific products cited in the
present documentation. For more information concerning the individual standards applicable to the
products described herein, see the characteristics tables for those product references.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 15
16 EIO0000003297 02/2020
Modicon M221
Introduction
EIO0000003297 02/2020
Part I
Introduction
Introduction
Overview
This part provides general information about the Modicon M221 Logic Controller and its
configuration and programming features.
What Is in This Part?

This part contains the following chapters:
Chapter Chapter Name Page
1 About the Modicon M221 Logic Controller 19
2 Configuration Features 31
EIO0000003297 02/2020 17
Introduction
18 EIO0000003297 02/2020
Modicon M221
About the Modicon M221 Logic Controller
EIO0000003297 02/2020
Chapter 1
What Is in This Chapter?

This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
TM221C Logic Controller Description 20
TM221M Logic Controller Description 26
EIO0000003297 02/2020 19
TM221C Logic Controller Description
Overview
The TM221C Logic Controller has various powerful features and can service a wide range of
applications.
Software configuration, programming, and commissioning are accomplished with the EcoStruxure
Machine Expert - Basic software described in the EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic Operating
Guide (see EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic, Operating Guide) and the M221 Logic Controller
- Programming Guide.
Programming Languages
The M221 Logic Controller is configured and programmed with the EcoStruxure Machine Expert -
Basic software, which supports the following IEC 61131-3 programming languages:
 IL: Instruction List
 LD: Ladder Diagram
 Grafcet (List)
 Grafcet (SFC)
Power Supply
The power supply of the TM221C Logic Controller is 24 Vdc (see Modicon M221 Logic Controller,
Hardware Guide) or 100...240 Vac (see Modicon M221 Logic Controller, Hardware Guide).
Real Time Clock

The M221 Logic Controller includes a Real Time Clock (RTC) system (see Modicon M221 Logic
Controller, Hardware Guide).
Run/Stop
The M221 Logic Controller can be operated externally by the following:
 a hardware Run/Stop switch (see Modicon M221 Logic Controller, Hardware Guide)
 a Run/Stop (see Modicon M221 Logic Controller, Hardware Guide) operation by a dedicated
digital input, defined in the software configuration (for more information, refer to Configuring
Digital Inputs (see page 90).)
 EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic software (for more information, refer to Toolbar
(see EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic, Operating Guide)).
 a TMH2GDB Remote Graphic Display (for more information, refer to Controller State Menu
(see Modicon TMH2GDB, Remote Graphic Display, User Guide)).
20 EIO0000003297 02/2020
Memory
This table describes the different types of memory:
Memory Type Size Used to

RAM 512 Kbytes of RAM memory: 256 Kbytes execute the application and contain data
for internal variables and 256 Kbytes for
application and data.
Non-volatile 1.5 Mbytes, of which 256 Kbytes is used save the application
to back up the application and data in case
of power outage.
Embedded Inputs/Outputs
The following embedded I/O types are available, depending on the controller reference:
 Regular inputs
 Fast inputs associated with counters
 Regular sink/source transistor outputs
 Fast sink/source transistor outputs associated with pulse generators
 Relay outputs
 Analog inputs
Removable Storage
The M221 Logic Controllers include an embedded SD card slot (see Modicon M221 Logic
The Modicon M221 Logic Controller allows the following types of file management with an SD card:
 Clone management (see page 200): back up the application, firmware, and post configuration
(if it exists) of the logic controller
 Firmware management (see page 202): download firmware to the logic controller, to a
TMH2GDB Remote Graphic Display , or to TM3 expansion modules
 Application management (see page 206): back up and restore the logic controller application,
or copy it to another logic controller of the same reference
 Post configuration management (see page 208): add, change, or delete the post configuration
file of the logic controller
 Error log management (see page 210): back up or delete the error log file of the logic controller
 Memory management (see page 213): back up and restore memory bits and words from a
controller
Embedded Communication Features

The following types of communication ports are available depending on the controller reference:
 Ethernet (see Modicon M221 Logic Controller, Hardware Guide)
 USB Mini-B (see Modicon M221 Logic Controller, Hardware Guide)
 Serial Line 1 (see Modicon M221 Logic Controller, Hardware Guide)
EIO0000003297 02/2020 21
Remote Graphic Display

For more information, refer to the Modicon TMH2GDB Remote Graphic Display - User Guide.
TM221C Logic Controller
Reference Digital Inputs Digital Outputs Analog Communication Ports Power Supply
Inputs
TM221C16R 5 regular inputs(1) 7 relay outputs Yes 1 serial line port 100...240 Vac
(see Modicon 4 fast inputs 1 USB programming
M221 Logic (HSC)(2) port
Controller,
Hardware
Guide)
TM221CE16R Yes 1 serial line port
(see Modicon 1 USB programming
M221 Logic port
Controller, 1 Ethernet port
Hardware
Guide)
TM221C16T 5 regular inputs(1) Source outputs Yes 1 serial line port 24 Vdc
(see Modicon 4 fast inputs 5 regular transistor outputs 1 USB programming
M221 Logic (HSC) (2) 2 fast outputs port
Controller, (PLS/PWM/PTO/FREQGEN)(3)
Hardware
Guide)
TM221CE16T Yes 1 serial line port
M221 Logic port
Hardware
Guide)
TM221C16U 5 regular inputs(1) Sink outputs Yes 1 serial line port 24 Vdc
4 fast inputs 5 regular transistor outputs 1 USB programming
(HSC) (2) 2 fast outputs port
TM221CE16U (PLS/PWM/PTO/FREQGEN)(3) 1 serial line port
M221 Logic port
Hardware
Guide)
NOTE: The TM221C Logic Controller uses removable screw terminal blocks.
(1) The regular inputs have a maximum frequency of 5 kHz.
(2) The fast inputs can be used either as regular inputs or as fast inputs for counting or event functions.
(3) The fast transistor outputs can be used either as regular transistor outputs, for PLS, PWM, PTO, or FREQGEN
functions, or reflex outputs for HSC.
22 EIO0000003297 02/2020
Inputs
TM221C24R 10 regular 10 relay outputs Yes 1 serial line port 100...240 Vac
(see Modicon inputs(1) 1 USB programming
M221 Logic 4 fast inputs port
Controller, (HSC)(2)
Hardware
Guide)
M221 Logic port
Hardware
Guide)
TM221C24T Source outputs Yes 1 serial line port 24 Vdc
(see Modicon 8 regular transistor outputs 1 USB programming
M221 Logic 2 fast outputs port
Hardware
Guide)
M221 Logic port
Hardware
Guide)
TM221C24U 10 regular Sink outputs Yes 1 serial line port 24 Vdc
inputs(1) 8 regular transistor outputs 1 USB programming
4 fast inputs 2 fast outputs port
TM221CE24U (HSC)(2) (PLS/PWM/PTO/FREQGEN)(3) Yes 1 serial line port
M221 Logic port
Hardware
Guide)
EIO0000003297 02/2020 23
Inputs
(see Modicon inputs(1) 1 USB programming
M221 Logic 4 fast inputs port
Controller, (HSC)(2)
Hardware
Guide)
M221 Logic port
Hardware
Guide)
(see Modicon 14 regular transistor outputs 1 USB programming
M221 Logic 2 fast outputs port
Hardware
Guide)
M221 Logic port
Hardware
Guide)
(see Modicon inputs(1) 12 regular transistor outputs 1 USB programming
M221 Logic 4 fast inputs 4 fast outputs port
Controller, (HSC)(2) (PLS/PWM/PTO/FREQGEN)(3)
Hardware
Guide)
TM221CE40U Yes 1 serial line port
M221 Logic port
Hardware
Guide)
24 EIO0000003297 02/2020
Delivery Content
The following figure presents the content of the delivery for a TM221C Logic Controller:
1 TM221C Logic Controller Instruction Sheet

2 TM221C Logic Controller
3 Battery holder with lithium carbon monofluoride battery, type Panasonic BR2032.
4 Analog cable
EIO0000003297 02/2020 25
TM221M Logic Controller Description
Overview
The TM221M Logic Controller has various powerful features and can service a wide range of
applications.
- Programming Guide.
 Grafcet (List)
 Grafcet (SFC)
Power Supply
The power supply of the TM221M Logic Controller is 24 Vdc (see Modicon M221 Logic Controller,
Hardware Guide).
Real Time Clock

The M221 Logic Controller includes a Real Time Clock (RTC) system (see Modicon M221 Logic
Run/Stop
 a hardware Run/Stop switch (see Modicon M221 Logic Controller, Hardware Guide)
 a Run/Stop (see Modicon M221 Logic Controller, Hardware Guide) operation by a dedicated
digital input, defined in the software configuration (for more information, refer to Configuring
Digital Inputs (see page 90))
 a TMH2GDB Remote Graphic Display (for more information, refer to Controller State Menu).
26 EIO0000003297 02/2020
Memory

RAM 512 Kbytes of RAM memory: 256 Kbytes execute the application and contains
for internal variables and 256 Kbytes for data
Non-volatile 1.5 Mbytes, of which 256 Kbytes is used save the application
to back up the application and data in case
of power outage.
 Regular inputs
 Fast inputs (HSC)
 Regular transistor outputs
 Fast transistor outputs (PLS/PWM/PTO/FREQGEN)
 Relay outputs
 Analog inputs
Removable Storage
The M221 Logic Controllers include an embedded SD card slot (see Modicon M221 Logic
 Firmware management (see page 202): download firmware updates directly to the logic
controller, and download firmware to a TMH2GDB Remote Graphic Display
 Memory management (see page 213): backup/restore of memory bits and words from a
controller
EIO0000003297 02/2020 27

The following communication ports are available on the front panel of the controller, depending on
the controller reference:
 Ethernet (see Modicon M221 Logic Controller, Hardware Guide)
 USB Mini-B (see Modicon M221 Logic Controller, Hardware Guide)
 SD Card (see Modicon M221 Logic Controller, Hardware Guide)

TM221M Logic Controller
Reference Digital Input Digital Output Analog Communication Terminal Type

Input Ports
TM221M16R 4 regular inputs(1) 8 relay outputs Yes 2 serial line ports Removable screw
(see Modicon 4 fast inputs 1 USB programming terminal blocks
Controller,
Hardware Guide)
TM221M16RG 4 regular inputs(1) 8 relay outputs Yes 2 serial line ports Removable spring
Controller,
Hardware Guide)
TM221ME16R 4 regular inputs(1) 8 relay outputs Yes 1 serial line port Removable screw
Hardware Guide)
TM221ME16RG 4 regular inputs(1) 8 relay outputs Yes 1 serial line port Removable spring
Hardware Guide)
NOTE: The TM221M Logic Controller uses a 24 Vdc power supply (see Modicon M221 Logic Controller, Hardware
Guide).
(1) The regular inputs I2, I3, I4, and I5 have a maximum frequency of 5 kHz.
The other regular inputs have a maximum frequency of 100 Hz.
(3) The fast transistor outputs can be used as regular transistor outputs, for PLS, PWM, PTO or FREQGEN functions,
or reflex outputs for HSC.
28 EIO0000003297 02/2020
Reference Digital Input Digital Output Analog Communication Terminal Type

Input Ports
TM221M16T 4 regular inputs(1) 6 regular transistor Yes 2 serial line ports Removable screw
(see Modicon 4 fast inputs outputs 1 USB programming terminal blocks
M221 Logic (HSC)(2) 2 fast transistor port
Controller, outputs
Hardware Guide) (PLS/PWM/PTO/F
REQGEN)(3)
TM221M16TG 4 regular inputs(1) 6 regular transistor Yes 2 serial line ports Removable spring
Controller, outputs
REQGEN)(3)
TM221ME16T 4 regular inputs(1) 6 regular transistor Yes 1 serial line port Removable screw
Controller, outputs 1 Ethernet port
REQGEN)(3)
TM221ME16TG 4 regular inputs(1) 6 regular transistor Yes 1 serial line port Removable spring
(see Modicon 4 fast inputs outputs USB programming terminal blocks
Controller, outputs 1 Ethernet port
REQGEN)(3)
TM221M32TK 12 regular inputs(1) 14 regular Yes 2 serial line ports HE10 (MIL 20)
(see Modicon 4 fast inputs transistor outputs 1 USB programming connectors
M221 Logic (HSC)(2) 2 fast outputs port
Controller, (PLS/PWM/PTO/F
Hardware Guide) REQGEN)(3)
TM221ME32TK 12 regular inputs(1) 14 regular outputs Yes 1 serial line port HE10 (MIL 20)
(see Modicon 4 fast inputs 2 fast outputs 1 USB programming connectors
M221 Logic (HSC)(2) (PLS/PWM/PTO/F port
Controller, REQGEN)(3) 1 Ethernet port
Hardware Guide)
NOTE: The TM221M Logic Controller uses a 24 Vdc power supply (see Modicon M221 Logic Controller, Hardware
Guide).
(3) The fast transistor outputs can be used as regular transistor outputs, for PLS, PWM, PTO or FREQGEN functions,
or reflex outputs for HSC.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 29
Delivery Content
The following figure presents the content of the delivery for a TM221M Logic Controller:
1 TM221M Logic Controller Instruction Sheet

2 TM221M Logic Controller
4 Analog cable
30 EIO0000003297 02/2020
Modicon M221
Configuration Features
EIO0000003297 02/2020
Chapter 2
Introduction
This chapter provides information related to M221 Logic Controller memory mapping, task, states,
behaviors, objects, and functions. The topics explained in this chapter allow the operator to
understand the featured specifications of M221 Logic Controller that are primarily needed to
configure and program the controller in EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic.

This chapter contains the following sections:
Section Topic Page
2.1 Objects 32
2.2 Task Structure 49
2.3 Controller States and Behaviors 54
2.4 Post Configuration 69
EIO0000003297 02/2020 31
Section 2.1
Objects
Objects
What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Objects 33
Object Types 34
Addressing I/O Objects 40
Maximum Number of Objects 44
32 EIO0000003297 02/2020
Objects
Overview
In EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic, the term object is used to represent an area of logic
controller memory reserved for use by an application. Objects can be:
 Simple software variables, such as memory bits and words
 Addresses of digital or analog inputs and outputs
 Controller-internal variables, such as system words and system bits
 Predefined system functions or function blocks, such as timers and counters.
Controller memory is either pre-allocated for certain object types, or automatically allocated when
an application is downloaded to the logic controller.
Objects can only be addressed by a program once memory has been allocated. Objects are
addressed using the prefix %. For example, %MW12 is the address of a memory word, %Q0.3 is the
address of an embedded digital output, and %TM0 is the address of a Timer function block.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 33
Object Types
Introduction
The language object types for the M221 Logic Controller are described in the following table:
Object Type Object Object Function Description

Memory objects %M Memory bits Stores memory bit.
(see EcoStruxure Machine
Expert - Basic, Generic
Functions Library Guide)
%MW Memory words Stores 16-bit memory word.
%MD Memory double words Stores 32-bit memory word.
%MF Memory floating point Stores memory floating point in a mathematical
(see EcoStruxure Machine argument which has a decimal in its expression.
%KW Constant words Stores 16-bit constant word.
%KD Constant double words Stores 32-bit constant word.
%KF Constant floating points Stores constant floating point in a mathematical
(see EcoStruxure Machine argument which has a decimal in its expression.
System objects %S System bits Stores system bit.
(see page 240)
%SW System words Stores system word.
(see page 252)
%IWS Input channel status word Contains diagnostic information concerning analog
(see page 277) input channels.
%QWS Output channel status Contains diagnostic information concerning analog
word (see page 279) output channels.
34 EIO0000003297 02/2020

I/O objects %I Input bits (see page 218) Stores value of the digital input.
%Q Output bits (see page 219) Stores value of the digital output.
%IW Input words Stores value of the analog input.
(see page 220)
%QW Output words Stores value of the analog output.
(see page 222)
%FC Fast counters Execute fast counts of pulses from sensors, switches,
(see Modicon M221 Logic and so on.
Controller, Advanced
%HSC High speed counters Execute fast counts of pulses from sensors, switches,
(see Modicon M221 Logic and so on, that are connected to the fast inputs.
%PLS Pulse (see Modicon M221 Generates a square wave pulse signal on dedicated
Logic Controller, Advanced output channels.
%PWM Pulse width modulation Generates a modulated wave signal on dedicated
(see Modicon M221 Logic output channels with a variable duty cycle.
%PTO Pulse train output Generates a pulse train output to control a linear
(see Modicon M221 Logic single-axis stepper or servo drive in open loop mode.
%FREQGEN Frequency Generator Generates a square wave signal on a dedicated
(see Modicon M221 Logic output channel with programmable frequency and
Controller, Advanced duty cycle of 50%.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 35

Network objects %QWE Input assembly The values of EtherNet/IP Input assembly frames
(EtherNet/IP) sent by the logic controller.
(see page 224)
NOTE: For more details about directionality, refer to
Configuring EtherNet/IP (see page 154).
%IWE Output assembly The values of EtherNet/IP Output assembly frames
(EtherNet/IP) received by the logic controller.
(see page 226)
NOTE: For more details about directionality, refer to
Configuring EtherNet/IP (see page 154).
%QWM Input registers (Modbus The values of Modbus mapping table Input registers
TCP) (see page 227) sent by the logic controller.
%IWM Output registers (Modbus The values of Modbus mapping table Output registers
TCP) (see page 229) received by the logic controller.
%IN Digital inputs (IOScanner) The values of Modbus Serial or TCP IOScanner
(see page 230) digital input bits.
%QN Digital outputs (IOScanner) The values of Modbus Serial or TCP IOScanner
(see page 232) digital output bits.
%IWN Input registers (IOScanner) The values of Modbus Serial or TCP IOScanner
(see page 234) digital input words.
%QWN Output registers The values of Modbus Serial or TCP IOScanner
(IOScanner) digital output words.
(see page 236)
%IWNS IOScanner network The values of Modbus Serial or TCP IOScanner
diagnostic codes network diagnostic bits.
(see page 238)
36 EIO0000003297 02/2020

Software objects %TM Timers (see EcoStruxure Specifies a time before triggering an action.
Machine Expert - Basic,
Generic Functions Library
Guide)
%C Counters Provides up and down counting of actions.
%MSG Messages Stores the status message at the communication port.
%R LIFO/FIFO registers Stores memory up to 16 words of16 bits each in 2
(see EcoStruxure Machine different ways, queue, and stacks.
%DR Drums (see EcoStruxure Operates on a principle similar to an
Machine Expert - Basic, electromechanical drum controller which changes
Generic Functions Library step according to external events.
Guide)
%SBR Shift bit registers Provides a left or right shift of binary data bits (0 or 1).
%SC Step counters Provides a series of steps to which actions can be
(see EcoStruxure Machine assigned.
SCH Schedule blocks Controls actions at a predefined month, day, and
(see EcoStruxure Machine time.
%RTC RTC (see EcoStruxure Allows reading or writing the value of the Real Time
Machine Expert - Basic, Clock (RTC) on the logic controller.
Generic Functions Library
Guide)
PID PID (see Modicon M221 Provides a generic control loop feedback in which
Logic Controller, Advanced output is proportional, integral, and derivative of the
Functions Library Guide) input.
%X Grafcet steps Bit objects associated with individual Grafcet (SFC)
(see EcoStruxure Machine steps. Object is set to 1 when the corresponding step
Expert - Basic, Generic is active, and set to 0 when the step is deactivated.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 37

PTO objects Refer to Pulse Train Output (see Modicon M221 Logic Controller, Advanced Functions Library
Guide).
Drive objects Refer to Drive Objects (see Modicon M221 Logic Controller, Advanced Functions Library Guide).
Communication %READ_VAR Read Var The %READ_VAR function block is used to read data
objects (see EcoStruxure from a remote device on Modbus SL or Modbus
Machine Expert - TCP.
Basic, Generic
Functions Library
Guide)
%WRITE_VAR Write Var The %WRITE_VAR function block is used to write
(see EcoStruxure data to an external device using the Modbus SL or
Machine Expert - Modbus TCP protocol.
Basic, Generic
Functions Library
Guide)
%WRITE_READ_VAR Write Read Var The %WRITE_READ_VAR function block is used to
(see EcoStruxure read and write data stored in internal memory words
Machine Expert - to an external device using the Modbus SL or
Basic, Generic Modbus TCP protocol.
Functions Library
Guide)
%SEND_RECV_MSG Send Receive The %SEND_RECV_MSG function block is used to
Message send or receive data on a serial line configured for
(see EcoStruxure the ASCII protocol.
Machine Expert -
Basic, Generic
Functions Library
Guide)
%SEND_RECV_SMS Send Receive SMS The %SEND_RECV_SMS function block is used to
(see EcoStruxure send or receive SMS messages through a GSM
Machine Expert - modem connected to a serial line.
Basic, Generic
Functions Library
Guide)
38 EIO0000003297 02/2020

User-defined %RET0 Return value The return value of a user-defined function.
function and user- (see EcoStruxure
defined function Machine Expert -
block objects Basic, Operating
Guide)
%PARAM Parameter Parameters of a user-defined function or user-
(see EcoStruxure defined function block.
Machine Expert - The parameters are different for each object type.
Basic, Operating
Guide)
%VAR Local variable Local variables of a user-defined function or user-
(see EcoStruxure defined function block.
Machine Expert - The local variables are different for each object type.
Basic, Operating
Guide)
Memory objects and software objects are generic objects used in EcoStruxure Machine Expert -
Basic, whereas system objects and I/O objects are controller-specific. All controller-specific objects
are discussed in the Programming (see page 215) section.
For programming details of memory objects, software objects, and communication objects, refer
to the EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic Generic Functions Library Guide.
For programming details of PID, Drive, and PTO objects, refer to the Advanced Functions Library
Guide.
For more information on user-defined functions and user-defined function blocks, refer to
EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic Operating Guide (see EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic,
Operating Guide).
EIO0000003297 02/2020 39
Addressing I/O Objects
Addressing Examples
This table presents addressing examples for various object types:
Object Type Syntax Example Description

Memory objects
Memory bits %Mi %M25 Internal memory bit 25.
Memory words %MWi %MW15 Internal memory word 15.
Memory double words %MDi %MD16 Internal memory double word 16.
Memory floating points %MFi %MF17 Internal memory floating point 17.
Constant words %KWi %KW26 Constant word 26.
Constant double words %KDi %KD27 Internal constant double word 27.
Constant floating points %KFi %KF28 Internal constant floating point 28.
System objects
System bits %Si %S8 System bit 8.
System words %SWi %SW30 System word 30.
I/O objects
Digital inputs %Iy.z %I0.5 Digital input 5 on the controller
(embedded I/O).
Digital outputs %Qy.z %Q3.4 Digital output 4 on the expansion
module at address 3 (expansion
module I/O).
Analog inputs %IWy.z %IW0.1 Analog input 1 on the controller
(embedded I/O).
Analog outputs %QW0.m0n %QW0.100 Analog output 0 on the cartridge 1.
Fast counters %FCi %FC2 Fast counter 2 on the controller.
High speed counters %HSCi %HSC1 High speed counter 1 on the
controller.
Pulse %PLSi %PLS0 Pulse output 0 on the controller.
Pulse width modulation %PWMi %PWM1 Pulse width modulation output 1 on
the controller.
a 100 + device number on SL1, 200 + device number on SL2, 300 + device number on ETH1.
b Channel number of the Modbus Serial IOScanner or Modbus TCP IOScanner device.
c Object instance identifer in the channel.
i Object instance identifier that indicates the instance of the object on the controller.
m Cartridge number on the controller.
n Channel number on the cartridge.
y Indicates the I/O type. It is 0 for the controller and 1, 2, and so on, for the expansion modules.
z Channel number on the controller or expansion module.
40 EIO0000003297 02/2020

Pulse train output %PTOi %PTO1 Pulse train output 1 on the
controller.
Frequency generator %FREQGENi %FREQGEN1 Frequency generator 1 on the
controller.
Network objects
Input assembly %QWEi %QWE8 Input assembly instance 8.
(EtherNet/IP)
Output assembly %IWEi %IWE6 Output assembly instance 6.
(EtherNet/IP)
Input registers (Modbus %QWMi %QWM1 Input register instance 1.
TCP)
Output registers %IWMi %IWM0 Output register instance 0.
(Modbus TCP)
Digital inputs %INa.b.c %IN300.2.1 Modbus TCP IOScanner slave
(IOScanner) device 0 on ETH1, channel 2,
digital input 1.
Digital outputs %QNa.b.c %QN101.1.0 Modbus Serial IOScanner slave
(IOScanner) device 1 on SL1, channel 1, digital
output 0.
Input registers %IWNa.b.c %IWN302.3.0 Modbus TCP IOScanner slave
(IOScanner) device 2 on ETH1, channel 3, input
register 0.
Output registers %QWNa.b.c %QWN205.0.4 Modbus Serial IOScanner slave
(IOScanner) device 5 on SL2, channel 0, output
register 4.
IOScanner network %IWNSa %IWNS302 Status of Modbus TCP IOScanner
diagnostic codes slave device 2 on ETH1.
%IWNSa.b %IWNS205.3 Status of channel 3 of Modbus
Serial IOScanner slave device 5 on
serial line SL2
EIO0000003297 02/2020 41

Software objects
Timers %TMi %TM5 Timer instance 5.
Counters %Ci %C2 Counter instance 2.
Message %MSGi %MSG1 Program compilation status
message 1.
LIFO/FIFO registers %Ri %R3 FIFO/LIFO registers instance 3.
Drums %DRi %DR6 Drum register 6 on the controller.
Shift bit registers %SBRi %SBR5 Shift bit register 5 on the controller.
Step counters %SCi %SC5 Step counter 5 on the controller.
Schedule blocks SCH i SCH 3 Schedule block 3 on the controller.
RTC RTCi RTC 1 Real-time clock (RTC) instance 1.
PID PID i PID 7 PID feedback object 7 on the
controller.
Grafcet Steps Xi X1 Grafcet step 1.
PTO objects
MC_Power_PTO %MC_POWER_PTOi %MC_POWER_PTO1 MC_POWER_PTO function block
(motion function block) instance 1.
MC_Reset_PTO %MC_RESET_PTOi %MC_RESET_PTO0 MC_RESET_PTO function block
(administrative function instance 0.
block)
Communication objects
Read Var %READ_VARi %READ_VAR2 READ_VAR function block instance
2.
Write Var %WRITE_VARi %WRITE_VAR4 WRITE_VAR function block
instance 4.
Write Read Var %WRITE_READ_VARi %WRITE_READ_VAR0 WRITE_READ_VAR function block
instance 0.
Send Receive Message %SEND_RECV_MSGi %SEND_RECV_MSG6 SEND_RECV_MSG function block
instance 6.
Send Receive SMS %SEND_RECV_SMSi %SEND_RECV_SMS0 SEND_RECV_SMS function block
instance 0.
42 EIO0000003297 02/2020

User-defined function and user-defined function block objects
Return value %RETi %RET0 Return value of a user-defined
function.
Parameters %PARAMi %PARAM0 Parameter of a user-defined
function.
Local variables %VARi %VAR0 Local variables of a user-defined
function.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 43
Maximum Number of Objects
Maximum Number of Objects Description

This table provides information about the maximum number of objects supported by the M221
Logic Controller:
Objects M221 Logic Controller References

Modular References Compact References
TM221M16R• TM221M16T• TM221C••R TM221C••T
TM221ME16R• TM221ME16T• TM221CE••R TM221CE••T
TM221M32TK TM221C••U
TM221ME32TK TM221CE••U
Memory objects
%M(1) 512 512 512 512
1024 1024 1024 1024
%MW 8000 8000 8000 8000
%MD 7999 7999 7999 7999
%MF
%KW 512 512 512 512
%KD 511 511 511 511
%KF
System objects
%S 160 160 160 160
%SW 234 234 234 234
%IWS 1 created automatically for each analog input
%QWS 1 created automatically for each analog output
I/O objects
%I 8 8 9 9
(for TM221M16T• (for TM221C16• and (for TM221C16•
and TM221ME16T•) TM221CE16•) and TM221CE16•)
16 14 14
(for TM221M32TK (for TM221C24• and (for TM221C24•
and TM221CE24•) and TM221CE24•)
TM221ME32TK)
24 24
(for TM221C40• and (for TM221C40•
TM221CE40•) and TM221CE40•)
(1) The value 512 is for software version < 1.3.
(2) If functional level < 6.0. If functional level ≥ 6.0, the maximum number of objects is 512.
44 EIO0000003297 02/2020

%Q 8 8 7 7
(for TM221M16T• (for TM221C16• and (for TM221C16•
and TM221ME16T•) TM221CE16•) and TM221CE16•)
16 10 10
(for TM221M32TK (for TM221C24• and (for TM221C24•
and TM221CE24•) and TM221CE24•)
TM221ME32TK) 16 16
(for TM221C40• and (for TM221C40•
TM221CE40•) and TM221CE40•)
%IW 2 2 2 2
%QW 0 0 NOTE: Analog outputs are not built in
with the controller. Use cartridges
TMC2AQ2V and/or TMC2AQ2C to add
analog outputs to your controller
configuration.
2 (if 1 cartridge is 2 (if 1 cartridge is
used) used)
4 (if 2 cartridges are 4 (if 2 cartridges
used with are used with
TM221C40R or TM221C40T or
TM221CE40R) TM221CE40T or
TM221C••U or
TM221CE••U)
%FC 4 4 4 4
%HSC Up to 4 Up to 4 Up to 4 Up to 4
%PLS 0 2 0 2
%PWM
%PTO
%FREQGEN
Network objects
%QWE 20 20 20 20
(for TM221ME16R•) (for TM221ME16T• (for TM221CE16•) (for TM221CE16•)
and
TM221ME32TK)
EIO0000003297 02/2020 45

%IWE 20 20 20 20
and
TM221ME32TK)
%QWM 20 20 20 20
and
TM221ME32TK)
%IWM 20 20 20 20
and
TM221ME32TK)
%IN 128 128 128 128
%QN 128 128 128 128
%IWN 128(2) 128(2) 128(2) 128(2)
%QWN 128(2) 128(2) 128(2) 128(2)
%IWNS 1 for each configured Modbus Serial IOScanner or Modbus TCP IOScanner device,
plus 1 for each channel
%QWNS 1 for each configured Modbus Serial IOScanner or Modbus TCP IOScanner device,
plus 1 for each channel
Software objects
%TM 255 255 255 255
%C 255 255 255 255
%MSG 2 2 1 1
(for TM221C••R) (for TM221C••T
and TM221C••U)
2 2
(for TM221CE••R) (for TM221CE••T
and TM221CE••U)
%R 4 4 4 4
%DR 8 8 8 8
%SBR 8 8 8 8
46 EIO0000003297 02/2020

%SC 8 8 8 8
%SCH 16 16 16 16
%RTC 2 2 2 2
PID 14 14 14 14
Drive objects
%DRV 16 16 16 16
Communication objects
%READ_VAR 32 (if functional level ≥ 10.1) or 16 (if functional level < 10.1).
%WRITE_VAR 32 (if functional level ≥ 10.1) or 16 (if functional level < 10.1).
%WRITE_READ_VAR 32 (if functional level ≥ 10.1) or 16 (if functional level < 10.1).
%SEND_RECV_MSG 16 16 16 16
%SEND_RECV_SMS 1 1 1 1
User-defined function objects
%RET0 1 per user-defined function
%PARAM 5 per user-defined function
%VAR 48 (including any existing %PARAM)
User-defined function block objects
%Q_ 32 (if functional level ≥ 10.0) or 8 (if functional level < 10.0).
%I_ 32 (if functional level ≥ 10.0) or 8 (if functional level < 10.0).
%PARAM 48 (including any existing %VAR)
%VAR 48 (including any existing %PARAM)
EIO0000003297 02/2020 47
Maximum Number of PTO Objects Description

This table provides information about the maximum number of PTO objects supported by the M221
Logic Controller:
Categories/Objects M221 Logic Controller References

TM221M16R• TM221M16T• TM221C40U
TM221ME16R• TM221ME16T• TM221CE40U
TM221C••R TM221M32TK
TM221CE••R TM221ME32TK
TM221C••T
TM221CE••T
TM221C16U
TM221CE16U
TM221C24U
TM221CE24U
Motion/Single-axis
%MC_POWER_PTO 0 86
%MC_MOVEVEL_PTO
%MC_MOVEREL_PTO
%MC_MOVEABS_PTO
%MC_HOME_PTO
%MC_SETPOS_PTO
%MC_STOP_PTO
%MC_HALT_PTO
Motion/Motion Task
%MC_MotionTask_PTO 0 2 4
Administrative
%MC_READACTVEL_PTO 0 40
%MC_READACTPOS_PTO
%MC_READSTS_PTO
%MC_READMOTIONSTATE_PTO
%MC_READAXISERROR_PTO
%MC_RESET_PTO
%MC_TOUCHPROBE_PTO
%MC_ABORTTRIGGER_PTO
%MC_READPAR_PTO
%MC_WRITEPAR_PTO
48 EIO0000003297 02/2020
Section 2.2
Task Structure
Task Structure

Topic Page
Tasks and Scan Modes 50
Maximum Number of Tasks and Priorities 53
EIO0000003297 02/2020 49
Tasks and Scan Modes
Overview
The Modicon TM221M Logic Controller supports the following task types:
 Master task
 Periodic task
 Event task
The master tasks can be configured in either of the following scan modes:
 Freewheeling mode
 Periodic mode
For more information, refer to the Configuring Program Behavior and Tasks (see EcoStruxure
Machine Expert - Basic, Operating Guide).
Tasks
Master tasks are triggered by continuous cyclic scanning or by the software timers by specifying
the scan period 1...150 ms (default 100 ms) in the periodic mode.
Periodic tasks are triggered by software timers, so are configured by specifying the scan period
1...255 ms (default 255 ms) in the periodic mode.
Event tasks are triggered by the physical inputs or the HSC function blocks. These events are
associated with embedded digital inputs (%I0.2...%I0.5) (rising, falling or both edges) or with the
high speed counters (when the count reaches the high speed counter threshold). You can
configure up to two events for each HSC function block, depending on the configuration.
You must configure one priority for each event task. The priority range is 0...7 and the priority 0 has
the highest priority.
Scan Modes
The freewheeling mode is a continuous cyclic scanning mode. In this mode, a new scan starts
immediately after the previous scan has completed.
This figure presents the relationship between master tasks and periodic tasks when the master
task is in freewheeling mode:
50 EIO0000003297 02/2020
In freewheeling mode, the master task sleep time is at least 30% of the total cycle time with a
minimum of 1 millisecond. This percentage may be higher depending on the user application
(periodic task scan time, event task scan time, communication interaction, and so on).
In periodic mode, the logic controller waits until the configured scan time has elapsed before
starting a new scan. Every scan is therefore the same duration.
This figure presents the relationship between master tasks and periodic tasks when the master
task is in periodic mode:
If the processor goes to the HALTED state when the master task is configured in freewheeling
mode, verify whether the periodic task scan delay time is significant in comparison to the periodic
task period. If so, try:
 reconfiguring the master freewheeling task as a cyclic task
 increasing the periodic task period.
Event priorities control the relationship between the event tasks, master tasks, and periodic tasks.
The event task interrupts the master task and periodic task execution.
This figure presents the relationship between event tasks, master tasks, and periodic tasks in the
periodic mode:
The event tasks are triggered by a hardware interruption that sends a task event to the event task.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 51
Watchdog Timer
You can configure a specific application watchdog timer for the master task and periodic task. If
the task execution time exceeds the configured watchdog timer period, the logic controller goes to
the HALTED state.
A system watchdog timer verifies whether the program is using more than 80% of the processing
capacity. In this case, the logic controller goes in the HALTED state.
52 EIO0000003297 02/2020
Maximum Number of Tasks and Priorities
Description
This table summarizes the task types, available scan modes for each task, scan mode triggering
conditions, operator configurable ranges, maximum number of each task, and their execution
priorities:
Task Type Scan Mode Triggering Condition Configurable Range Maximum Priority
Number of
Tasks
Master Freewheeling Normal Not applicable 1 Lowest
Periodic Software timer 1...150 ms
Periodic Periodic Software timer 1...255 ms 1 Higher than master
task and lower than
event tasks
Event Periodic Physical inputs %I0.2...%I0.5 4 Highest
%HSC function blocks Up to 2 events per 4
%HSC object
EIO0000003297 02/2020 53
Section 2.3
Controller States and Behaviors
Controller States and Behaviors
Introduction
This section provides you with information on controller states, state transitions, and behaviors in
response to system events. It begins with a detailed controller state diagram and a description of
each state. It then defines the relationship of output states to controller states before explaining the
commands and events that result in state transitions. It concludes with information about persistent
variables and the effect of EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic task programming options on the
behavior of your system.

Topic Page
Controller States Diagram 55
Controller States Description 56
Controller State Transitions 60
Persistent Variables 63
Output Behavior 65
54 EIO0000003297 02/2020
Controller States Diagram
Controller States Diagram

This figure describes the controller states:
EIO0000003297 02/2020 55
Controller States Description
Introduction
This section provides a detailed description of the controller states.
WARNING
 Never assume that your controller is in a certain controller state before commanding a change
of state, configuring your controller options, uploading a program, or modifying the physical
configuration of the controller and its connected equipment.
 Before performing any of these operations, consider the effect on all connected equipment.
 Before acting on a controller, always positively confirm the controller state by viewing its LEDs,
confirming the condition of the Run/Stop input, checking for the presence of output forcing, and
reviewing the controller status information via EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic.
NOTE: The system word %SW6 indicates the logic controller state (EMPTY, STOPPED, RUNNING,
HALTED, and POWERLESS).
When using the Start In Run feature, the controller will start executing program logic when power
is applied to the equipment. It is essential to know in advance how automatic reactivation of the
outputs will affect the process or machine being controlled. Configure the Run/Stop input to help
control the Start In Run feature. In addition, the Run/Stop input is designed to give local control
over remote RUN commands. If the possibility of a remote RUN command after the controller had
been stopped locally by EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic would have unintended
consequences, you must configure and wire the Run/Stop input to help control this situation.
WARNING
UNINTENDED MACHINE START-UP
 Confirm that the automatic reactivation of the outputs does not produce unintended
consequences before using the Start In Run feature.
 Use the Run/Stop input to help control the Start In Run feature and to help prevent the
unintentional start-up from a remote location.
 Verify the state of security of your machine or process environment before applying power to
the Run/Stop input or before issuing a Run command from a remote location.
56 EIO0000003297 02/2020
When using the Unconditional Start In Run feature, the controller will attempt to start executing
program logic when power is applied to the equipment, independent of the reason the controller
had previously stopped. This occurs even if there is no charge in the battery, or if the battery is not
present. Therefore, the controller will start with all memory values re-initialized to zero or other
predetermined default values. It is conceivable that if the controller attempts to restart, for example,
after a short power outage, the values in memory at the time of the outage would be lost, and
restarting the machine may have unintended consequences as there was no battery to maintain
memory values. It is essential to know in advance how an unconditional start will affect the process
or machine being controlled. Configure the Run/Stop input to help control the Unconditional Start
In Run feature.
WARNING
UNINTENDED MACHINE OPERATION
 Conduct a thorough risk analysis to determine the effects, under all conditions, of configuring
the controller with the Unconditional Start In Run feature.
 Use the Run/Stop input to help avoid an unwanted unconditional restart.
For more information about the Unconditional Start In Run feature, refer to Application Behavior
(see EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic, Operating Guide).
EIO0000003297 02/2020 57
Controller States Table

This table provides detailed description of the controller operating states:
Controller State Description Communication Application LED

Execution PWR RUN ERR
BOOTING The logic controller does not have Restricted No On Off On
a valid firmware.
The communication channels are
enabled to allow updating of the
runtime firmware.
It is not possible to login with
EcoStruxure Machine Expert -
Basic.
Outputs are set to initialization
values (see page 65).
EMPTY This state indicates that there is Yes No On Off 1 flash
not a valid application.
It is possible to login with
Basic (download/animation table).
Inputs are forced to 0.
STOPPED This state indicates that the logic Yes No On Flashing Off
controller has a valid application
which is stopped.
Inputs are read.
Outputs are set to fallback values
(see page 66), or forced values
(see page 67) from EcoStruxure
Machine Expert - Basic.
Status alarm output is set to 0.
RUNNING This state indicates that the logic Yes Yes On On Off
controller is executing the
application.
Inputs are read by the application
tasks.
Outputs are written by the
application tasks, or from
Basic in online mode (animation
table, output forcing
(see page 67)).
58 EIO0000003297 02/2020
Controller State Description Communication Application LED

Execution PWR RUN ERR
HALTED This state indicates that the Yes No On Flashing On
application is stopped because an
application or system watchdog
timeout error has been detected.
(see page 210)
Objects retain their values,
allowing analysis of the cause of
the detected error. The tasks are
stopped at the last instruction.
The communication capabilities
are the same as in STOPPED state.
Inputs are not read, and keep their
last values.
Outputs are set to fallback values
(see page 66).
POWERLESS This state indicates that the logic Yes (only USB) No Off Flashing Off
controller is powered only by the
USB cable. This mode can be used
to update the firmware (by USB) or
to download/upload the user
application (by USB).
To change the state of the logic
controller, connect the main power
so that the logic controller boots
and reloads the installed
components.
It is possible to login with
Basic (download/upload/animation
table).
Inputs are forced to 0.
NOTE: The system word %SW6 indicates the logic controller state (EMPTY, STOPPED, RUNNING,
HALTED, and POWERLESS).
EIO0000003297 02/2020 59
Controller State Transitions
Boot Controller
Effect: Command a reboot of the logic controller. For details about power-on sequence, refer to the
controller states diagram (see page 55).
Methods:
 Power cycle
 Reboot by script
 The script on an SD card can issue a REBOOT as its last command.
Application Download
Effect: Download the application into the logic controller memory.
Optionally, select the Reset Memories option to reset to 0 (default choice) or retain the present
value of all memory words and bits on application download (see EcoStruxure Machine Expert -
Basic, Operating Guide).
Methods:
 EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic online button:
 Select the PC to controller (download) command.
Effect: Erase the application in the logic controller and set the logic controller in EMPTY state.
Download the application into the logic controller memory. If download is successful, a Cold
Start is done and the logic controller is set in STOPPED state.
 Application file transfer by SD card:
 Effect: At the next reboot, erase the application in the logic controller and download the
application files from the SD card to the controller memory. If download is successful, a Cold
Start is done and the controller is set in STOPPED state.
Initialize Controller
Effect: Set the controller in EMPTY state, and then, after a Cold Start, in STOPPED state.
Methods:
 Select the Initialize controller command.
 Remote Graphic Display.
60 EIO0000003297 02/2020
RUN Controller
Effect: Command a transition to the RUNNING controller state.
Methods:
 Run/Stop (see Modicon M221 Logic Controller, Hardware Guide) switch on front face:
 It commands a transition to RUNNING state on rising edge.
 Run/Stop (see Modicon M221 Logic Controller, Hardware Guide) input:

 The input must be configured in the application (Configuring Digital Inputs (see page 90)).
 It commands a transition to RUNNING state on rising edge.

 Select the Run Controller command.
 Application starting mode (see EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic, Operating Guide) setting:
 Start in Run, Start in Previous State, or Unconditional Start in Run
STOP Controller
Effect: Command a transition to the STOPPED state.
Methods:
 Run/Stop (see Modicon M221 Logic Controller, Hardware Guide) switch on front face:
 It forces a transition to STOPPED state on low level.
 Run/Stop (see Modicon M221 Logic Controller, Hardware Guide) input:

 The input must be configured in the application (Configuring Digital Inputs (see page 90)).
 It forces a transition to STOPPED state on low level.

 Select the Stop Controller command.
 Application starting mode (see EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic, Operating Guide) setting:
 Start in Stop or Start in Previous State.
 Download command:
 It needs the controller to be set in STOPPED state (after the download the controller is in
STOPPED state).
EIO0000003297 02/2020 61
Error Detected (Transition to HALTED State)

Effect: Command a transition to the HALTED state.
Reasons for switching to HALTED state:
 Application Watchdog timeout (configured by the user) (see EcoStruxure Machine Expert -
Basic, Operating Guide)
 System Watchdog timeout (system overrun, over 80% of the processing capacity is used)
(see page 52)
Cold Start
Cold Start is defined to be a power-up with all data initialized to its default values, and program
started from the beginning with program variables cleared. Software and hardware settings are
initialized.
Cold Start occurs for the following reasons:
 Boot controller without validated application online modification.
 Apply power to a logic controller without a charged backup battery.
 Download application
 Initialize logic controller
Effects of the Cold Start:

 Initialize the function blocks.
 Clear the user memory.
 Put system objects %S and system words %SW to their initial values.
 Reload parameters from post configuration (changes in the post configuration are applied).
 Restore application from non-volatile memory (unsaved online changes are lost).
 Restart the internal components of the controller.
Warm Start
The Warm Start resumes running the program, in its previous operating state, with the counters,
function blocks, and system words and bits maintained.
62 EIO0000003297 02/2020
Persistent Variables
Automatic Save on Power Outage

The controller automatically saves the first 50 memory words (%MW0 to %MW49) in the non-volatile
memory following any interruption of power. The data is restored to the memory word region during
the initialization, even if the controller performs a cold start due to a missing or depleted battery.
These automatically saved persistent variables are reinitialized:
 After each new download, if the Reset Memories checkbox is selected in download settings
 Following an initialization command.
 On system bit %S0 activation (refer to System Bits (see page 240)).
Save by User Request

You can save memory words in the non-volatile memory or in the SD card. To perform the save
operation:
1. Select the destination with %S90 (refer to System Bits (see page 240)):
 Set to 0: non-volatile memory (default)
 Set to 1: SD card
2. Set the number of memory words to be saved in the system word %SW148 (refer to System
Words (see page 252)).
3. Set the system bit %S93 to 1 (refer to System Bits (see page 240)).
When the save operation is finished:
 The system bit %S93 is reset to 0.
 The system bit %S92 is set to 1, indicating that memory words have been successfully saved in
non-volatile memory (%S90 set to 0).
 The system word %SW147 indicates the SD card operation result (%S90 set to 1).
NOTE: You can initiate a memory save while the logic controller is in the RUNNING state. However,
depending on the number of memory variables you specify, the save operation may not be
accomplished within a single logic scan cycle. As a consequence, the memory values may not
necessarily be consistent because the value of the memory variables can change from one scan
to another. If you wish to have a consistent set of values for the variables, consider first putting the
logic controller into the STOPPED state.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 63
Restore by User Request

You can restore the previously saved memory words. To perform the restore operation:
1. Set the system bit %S92 to 1.
The non-volatile memory operation has no effect if %S92 is 0 (no values were previously saved).
2. Select the source with %S90 (refer to System Bits (see page 240)):
 Set to 0: non-volatile memory (default)
 Set to 1: SD card
3. To restore from the non-volatile memory, set the number of memory words in the system word
%SW148 (refer to System Words (see page 252)). When restoring from SD card, the complete
Memory Variables.csv file is processed.
4. Set the system bit %S94 to 1 (refer to System Bits (see page 240)).
When the restore operation is finished:
 The system bit %S94 is reset to 0 by the system.
 The system word %SW148 is updated with the number of objects restored (for example if you
specify 100 words to restore and only 50 had previously been saved, the value of %SW148 will
be 50).
 The system word %SW147 indicates the SD card operation result (%S90 set to 1).
Delete by User Request

You can delete the previously saved memory words on the non-volatile memory. To perform the
delete operation:
 Set the system bit %S91 to 1 (refer to System Bits (see page 240)).
 When the delete operation is finished, the system bits %S91 and %S92 and the system word
%SW148 are reset to 0 by the logic controller.
This operation does not erase the variables in RAM memory.
NOTE: It is not possible to delete only selected variables; the entire set of saved variables is
deleted (meaning %SW148 has no impact on the erase operation, the erase operation is carried
out regardless of the value of %SW148).
64 EIO0000003297 02/2020
Output Behavior
Introduction
The controller defines output behavior in response to commands and system events in a way that
allows for greater flexibility. An understanding of this behavior is necessary before discussing the
commands and events that affect controller states.
The possible output behaviors and the controller states to which they apply are:
 Managed by application
 Initialization values
 Fallback behavior (see EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic, Operating Guide)
 Fallback values
 Maintain values
 Output forcing
Managed by Application
Your application manages outputs normally. This applies in the RUNNING state.
Hardware Initialization Values

This output state applies in the BOOTING, EMPTY, and POWERLESS states.
In the initialization state, the outputs assume the following values:
 For embedded outputs:
 Fast source transistor output: 0 Vdc
 Fast sink transistor output: 24 Vdc
 Regular source transistor output: 0 Vdc
 Regular sink transistor output: 24 Vdc
 Relay output: Open
 For expansion module outputs:

 Regular source transistor output: 0 Vdc
 Regular sink transistor output: 24 Vdc
 Relay output: Open
Software Initialization Values

This output state applies when downloading or when resetting the application. It applies at the end
of the download or at the end of a warm start or cold start.
Input objects (%I and %IW), network objects (%QWE and %QWM), and Modbus Serial IOScanner input
objects (%IN and %IWN) are set to 0. Output objects (%Q and %QW), network objects (%IWE and
%IWM), and Modbus Serial IOScanner output objects (%QN and %QWN) are set according to the
selected fallback behavior.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 65
Fallback Management
The objective of the fallback behavior is to control the outputs when the controller leaves the
RUNNING state.
Fallback values are applied on the transition from RUNNING to STOPPED or HALTED states, except
for special cases described below.
Fallback Behavior Configuration

Fallback behavior is configured on the Programming tab, Tasks → Behavior window:
 When Fallback values is selected, on a fallback occurrence, output values take the values
configured in Fallback value.
 When Maintain values is selected, outputs keep their values on a fallback occurrence, except
for outputs configured in pulse generator (PWM, PLS, PTO, FREQGEN) or reflex functions.
Fallback Execution
On a fallback occurrence:
 If Fallback values is selected, the outputs take the values configured in Fallback value.
 If Maintain values is selected, the outputs keep their values.
Special cases:
 Alarm output, PTO, and FREQGEN: The fallback is never applied. Their fallback values are
forced to 0.
 PLS, PWM) and reflex outputs:
 If Fallback values is selected, the outputs take the values configured in Fallback value.
 If Maintain values is selected, the outputs are set to 0.
NOTE:
 After a download, the outputs are set to their fallback values.
 In EMPTY state, the outputs are set to 0.
 As the data image reflects the physical values, fallback values are also applied to the data
image. However, using system bit %S9 to apply fallback values does not modify the values of
the data image.
Fallback Values
This output state applies in the STOPPED and HALTED states.
During fallback, the outputs assume the following values:
 For embedded outputs:
 Fast transistor output: according to fallback setting
 Regular transistor output: according to fallback setting
 Relay output: according to fallback setting
 Expert I/O functions (HSC, PLS, PWM, PTO, and FREQGEN):
- Source output: 0 Vdc
- Sink output: 24 Vdc
66 EIO0000003297 02/2020
 For expansion module outputs:

 Regular transistor output: according to fallback setting
 Relay output: according to fallback setting
NOTE: An exception to the application of fallback values is in the case of an I/O expansion bus
error. For more information, refer to I/O Configuration General Description (see page 122).
Output Forcing
The controller allows you to force the state of selected outputs to a defined value for the purposes
of system testing, commissioning, and maintenance.
You can force the value of an output while your controller is connected to EcoStruxure Machine
Expert - Basic or with a TMH2GDB Remote Graphic Display (see Modicon TMH2GDB, Remote
Graphic Display, User Guide).
To do so, either use the Force command in an animation table, or force the value using the F0 or
F1 buttons in the Ladder editor.
Output forcing overrides all other commands to an output irrespective of the task logic that is being
executed.
The forcing is not released by any online change nor logout of EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic.
The forcing is automatically released by Cold Start (see page 62) and Download application
(see page 60) command.
The forcing does not apply for expert I/O functions (HSC, PLS, PWM, PTO, and FREQGEN).
WARNING
 You must have a thorough understanding of how forcing will affect the outputs relative to the
tasks being executed.
 Do not attempt to force I/O that is contained in tasks that you are not certain will be executed
in a timely manner, unless your intent is for the forcing to take affect at the next execution of
the task whenever that may be.
 If you force an output and there is no apparent affect on the physical output, do not exit
EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic without removing the forcing.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 67
Output Rearming
In the case of a short-circuit or current overload, the common group of outputs automatically enters
into thermal protection mode (all outputs in the group are set to 0), and are then periodically
rearmed (each second) to test the connection state. However, you must be aware of the effect of
this rearming on the machine or process being controlled.
NOTE: The output rearming does not apply to sink outputs.
WARNING
Inhibit the automatic rearming of outputs if this feature is an undesirable behavior for your
machine or process.
NOTE: Only the short-circuit between an output set to TRUE and 0 V is detected. The short-circuit
between an output set to FALSE and 24 V is not detected.
If necessary, you can use system bits and words to both detect that a short circuit or overload has
occurred and on which cluster of outputs it has occurred. System bit %S10 can be used to detect
within your program that an output error has occurred. You can then use the system word %SW139
to determine programmatically in which cluster of outputs a short circuit or overload has occurred.
The automatic rearming feature can be disabled by setting the system bit %S49 to 0 (%S49 is set
to 0 by default).
68 EIO0000003297 02/2020
Section 2.4
Post Configuration
Post Configuration
Introduction
This section describes how to manage and configure the post configuration file of the Modicon
M221 Logic Controller.

Topic Page
Post Configuration 70
Post Configuration File Management 72
EIO0000003297 02/2020 69
Post Configuration
Introduction
Post configuration is an option that allows you to modify some parameters of the application
without changing the application. Post configuration parameters are defined in a file called
Machine.cfg, which is stored in the controller.
By default, all communication parameters are set in the configuration of the application. However,
under certain conditions, some or all of these parameters can be modified automatically via the
mechanism Post Configuration. One or more communication parameters can be specified in the
post configuration file, and those parameters can override the parameters specified by the
configuration. For example, one parameter may be stored in the post configuration file to change
the Ethernet IP address of the controller while leaving the other Ethernet parameters, such as the
gateway address, unchanged.
Parameters
The post configuration file allows you to modify network parameters.
Ethernet parameters:
 Address configuration mode
 IP address
 Subnet mask
 Gateway address
 Device name
Serial line parameters, for each serial line in the application (embedded port or TMC2SL1
cartridge):
 Physical medium
 Baud rate
 Parity
 Data bits
 Stop bit
 Modbus address
 Polarization (for RS-485)
70 EIO0000003297 02/2020
Operating Mode
The post configuration file is read and applied:
 after a Warm Start (see page 62)
 after a Cold Start (see page 62)
 after a reboot (see page 60)
 after an application download (see page 60)
 after an Ethernet reconfiguration caused by an Ethernet cable reconnection (exclusively for the
Ethernet part of the post configuration file (see page 133))
For further details on controller states and transitions, refer to Controller States and Behaviors
(see page 54).
EIO0000003297 02/2020 71
Post Configuration File Management
Introduction
The post configuration file can be transferred, modified, or deleted with an SD card. Refer to Post
Configuration Management (see page 208).
NOTE: A post configuration file example is available in the directory
Firmwares & PostConfiguration\PostConfiguration\add_change\usr\cfg of the
EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic installation directory.
Post Configuration File Format

A valid configuration must use the following format:
 The character '#' means beginning of comment, everything after this sign until the end of the line
is ignored. Comments are not saved in the post configuration area of the M221 Logic Controller.
 Rule is channel.parameter=value (no space around the '=' sign).
 Channel and parameter are case-sensitive.
 Allowed channel, parameter, and values are in the following table.
Channel Parameter Description Value

ETH IPMODE Address configuration mode 0 = Fixed
1 = BOOTP
2 = DHCP
IP IP address Dotted decimal string
MASK Subnet mask Dotted decimal string
GATEWAY Gateway address Dotted decimal string
NETWORKNAME Device name on the network ASCII string (maximum 16 characters)
SL1 HW Physical medium 0 = RS-232
SL2 1 = RS-485
BAUDS Data transmission rate 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400,
57600 or 115200
PARITY Parity for error detection 0 = None
1 = Odd
2 = Even
DATAFORMAT Data format 7 or 8
STOPBIT Stop bit 1 or 2
MODBUSADDR Modbus address 1...247
POLARIZATION Polarization (for cartridges 0 = No
only) 1 = Yes
72 EIO0000003297 02/2020
NOTE:
When using a post configuration file for Ethernet configuration, it is not mandatory to specify all the
parameters:
 If the M221 Logic Controller is configured (by the user application) in DHCP or BOOTP mode,
the network parameters IP (IP address), MASK (subnet mask) and GATEWAY (gateway
address) are not configured in the file.
 If a parameter is not configured in the post configuration file, the M221 Logic Controller uses the
value configured in the user application (see Ethernet configuration (see page 132)).
 If the M221 Logic Controller is configured in DHCP or BOOTP mode by the user application and
if fixed IP mode (IPMODE=0) is configured in the post configuration file, configure the network
parameters (IP (IP address), MASK (subnet mask) and GATEWAY (gateway address)) as they
are not configured by the user application. Otherwise, the M221 Logic Controller starts with the
default Ethernet configuration.
Post Configuration File Transfer

After creating and modifying your post configuration file, it must be transferred to the logic
controller. The transfer is performed by copying the post configuration file to an SD card with a
script.
Refer to Adding or Changing a Post Configuration (see page 208).
Modifying a Post Configuration File

Use a text editor to modify the post configuration file on the PC.
NOTE: Do not change the text file encoding. The default encoding is ANSI.
NOTE: The Ethernet parameters of the post configuration file can be modified with EcoStruxure
Machine Expert - Basic. For more information, refer to Connecting to a Logic Controller
Deleting the Post Configuration File

Refer to Removing a Post Configuration File (see page 209).
NOTE: The parameters defined in the application will be used instead of the corresponding
parameters defined in the post configuration file.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 73
74 EIO0000003297 02/2020
Modicon M221
Configuring the M221 Logic Controller
EIO0000003297 02/2020
Part II
Overview
This part provides information about how to configure the M221 Logic Controller references.

3 How to Configure a Controller 77
4 Embedded Input/Output Configuration 89
5 I/O Bus Configuration 121
6 Embedded Communication Configuration 131
7 SD Card 195
EIO0000003297 02/2020 75
76 EIO0000003297 02/2020
Modicon M221
How to Configure a Controller
EIO0000003297 02/2020
Chapter 3
Overview
This chapter describes how to build a configuration in EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic and
configure the M221 Logic Controller.

Topic Page
Building a Configuration 78
Optional I/O Expansion Modules 83
Configuring the M221 Logic Controller 87
Updating Firmware using Executive Loader Wizard 88
EIO0000003297 02/2020 77
Building a Configuration
Introduction
Configure a controller by building a configuration in EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic. To build
a configuration, first create a new project or open an existing project.
Refer to EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic Operating Guide for information on how to:
 create or open an existing project
 replace the default logic controller
 add an expansion module to the logic controller
 add a cartridge to the logic controller
 save the project.
Some general information about the EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic user interface is provided
below.
EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic Window

Once you have selected a project to work with, EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic displays the
main window.
At the top of the main window, a toolbar (see EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic, Operating
Guide) contains icons that allow you to perform common tasks, including opening the Start Menu.
Next to the toolbar, the status bar (see EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic, Operating Guide)
displays informational messages about the state of the connection to the logic controller.
Below the toolbar and the status bar, the main window is divided into a number of modules. Each
module controls a different stage of the development cycle, and is accessible by clicking the
module tab.
This figure presents the toolbar, status bar, and the module tabs in the main window:
1 Toolbar
2 Status bar
3 Tabs
78 EIO0000003297 02/2020
Item Description
Toolbar Provides easy access to commonly used functions.
For more information, refer to the Toolbar (see EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic,
Operating Guide).
Status bar Displays status and information messages on the system status.
For more information, refer to the Status bar (see EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic,
Operating Guide).
Tabs To develop an application, work your way through the module tabs from left to right:
 Properties
Set up the project properties.
 Configuration
Replicate and configure the hardware configuration of the logic controller and
associated expansion modules.
 Programming
Develop the program in one of the supported programming languages.
 Display
Build an operator interface for a Remote Graphic Display device.
Refer to the TMH2GDB Remote Graphic Display User Guide for details.
 Commissioning
Manage the connection between EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic and the logic
controller, upload/download applications, test, and commission the application.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 79
Hardware Tree
The hardware tree is displayed on left-hand side in the Configuration window. It shows a structured
view of the hardware configuration. When you add a controller, an expansion module, or a
cartridge to the project, several nodes are automatically added to the hardware tree.
NOTE: The nodes in the hardware tree are specific to the controller and the hardware
configuration. These nodes depend on the I/O functions that the controller, expansion modules,
and cartridges provide.
This figure presents the hardware tree of the controller configuration:
Item Description
Digital inputs Use to configure the embedded digital inputs of the logic controller.
Digital outputs Use to configure the embedded digital outputs of the logic controller.
Analog inputs Use to configure the embedded analog inputs of the logic controller.
High Speed Counters Use to configure the embedded high speed counting functions (HSC).
Pulse Generators Use to configure the embedded pulse generator functions
(PLS/PWM/PTO/FREQGEN).
IO Bus Use to configure the expansion modules and cartridges connected to the
logic controller.
ETH1 Use to configure the embedded Ethernet communications.
Modbus TCP Use to configure the Modbus TCP protocol for Ethernet communications.
EtherNet/IP adapter Use to configure the EtherNet/IP adapter for Ethernet communications.
SLn (Serial line) Use to configure the embedded serial line or the serial line added using a
cartridge.
n Serial line number (1 or 2, controller-specific).
80 EIO0000003297 02/2020
Editor
The editor area is displayed in center of the Configuration window. It displays the graphical
representation of hardware configuration of the devices. The hardware configuration in a project
can be:
 only a controller
 a controller with cartridges
 a controller with expansion modules
 a controller with cartridges and expansion modules.
The editor area displays:

 a short description about the device when you click the device image or when you click the
device node in the hardware tree.
 configuration properties of the item selected in the hardware tree.
If you add an expansion module to the configuration, the expansion module appears at the right-
hand side of the controller or the previously added expansion module. Cartridges are added on the
controller in the cartridge slot.
When configuring a controller, a cartridge, or an expansion module, the configuration properties of
the node selected in the hardware tree are displayed below the graphical configuration. These
properties allow you to configure the device.
This figure presents the configuration of a controller with an expansion module (the controller is
selected):
EIO0000003297 02/2020 81
Catalog
The catalog area is displayed on right-hand side in the Configuration window. It displays the
complete range of the logic controllers, expansion modules, and cartridges that can be configured
using EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic. It also provides a short description of the selected
device.
You can drag-and-drop the objects from the catalog area to the editor area. You can also replace
the existing controller by a different controller with simple drag-and-drop from the catalog.
This figure presents the catalog of the logic controllers and the expansion modules:
82 EIO0000003297 02/2020
Optional I/O Expansion Modules
Presentation
I/O expansion modules can be marked as optional in the configuration. The Optional module
feature provides a more flexible configuration by the acceptance of the definition of modules that
are not physically attached to the logic controller. Therefore, a single application can support
multiple physical configurations of I/O expansion modules, allowing a greater degree of scalability
without the necessity of maintaining multiple application files for the same application.
Without the Optional module feature, when the logic controller starts up the I/O expansion bus
(following a power cycle, application download or initialization command), it compares the
configuration defined in the application with the physical I/O modules attached to the I/O bus.
Among other diagnostics made, if the logic controller determines that there are I/O modules
defined in the configuration that are not physically present on the I/O bus, an error is detected and
the I/O bus does not start.
With the Optional module feature, the logic controller ignores the absent I/O expansion modules
that you have marked as optional, which then allows the logic controller to start the I/O expansion
bus.
The logic controller starts the I/O expansion bus at configuration time (following a power cycle,
application download, or initialization command) even if optional expansion modules are not
physically connected to the logic controller.
The following module types can be marked as optional:
 TM3 I/O expansion modules
 TM2 I/O expansion modules
NOTE: TM3 Transmitter/Receiver modules (TM3XTRA1 and the TM3XREC1) and TMC2
cartridges cannot be marked as optional.
The application must be configured with a functional level (see EcoStruxure Machine Expert -
Basic, Operating Guide) of at least Level 3.2 for modules marked as optional to be recognized as
such by the logic controller.
You must be fully aware of the implications and impacts of marking I/O modules as optional in your
application, both when those modules are physically absent and present when running your
machine or process. Be sure to include this feature in your risk analysis.
WARNING
Include in your risk analysis each of the variations of I/O configurations that can be realized
marking I/O expansion modules as optional, and in particular the establishment of TM3 Safety
modules (TM3S…) as optional I/O modules, and make a determination whether it is acceptable
as it relates to your application.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 83
Marking an I/O Expansion Module as Optional in Offline Mode

To add a module and mark it as optional in the configuration:
Step Action
1 Drag-and-drop the I/O expansion module from the catalog to the editor.
2 In the Device information area, select the Optional module check box:
To mark an existing I/O expansion module as optional in the configuration:
Step Action
1 Select the I/O expansion module in the editor.
2 In the Device information area, select the Optional module check box.
Optional I/O Expansion Modules in Online Mode

EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic operates in online mode when a physical connection to a logic
controller has been established.
When in EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic online mode, the modification of the Optional module
feature is disabled. You can visualize the downloaded configuration in the application:
 An I/O expansion module represented in yellow is marked as optional and not physically
connected to the logic controller at start-up. An information message to that effect is displayed
in the Device information area.
 An I/O expansion module represented in red is not marked as optional and not detected at start-
up. An information message to that effect is displayed in the Device information area.
84 EIO0000003297 02/2020
The selection of the Optional module feature is used by the logic controller to start the I/O bus. The
following system words are updated to indicate the status of the physical I/O bus configuration:
System Word Comment

%SW118 Bits 13 and 14 are pertinent to the I/O module status relative to the I/O bus.
Logic controller status word Bit 13, if FALSE, indicates that there are mandatory modules as defined by the
I/O expansion bus configuration that are absent or otherwise inoperative when
the logic controller attempts to start the I/O expansion bus. In this case, the I/O
bus does not start.
Bit 14, if FALSE, indicates that one or more modules have ceased
communication with the logic controller after the I/O expansion bus is started.
This is the case whether an I/O expansion module is defined as mandatory or
as an optional module but present at start-up.
%SW119 Each bit, starting with bit 1 (bit 0 is reserved), is dedicated to a configured I/O
I/O expansion module expansion module and indicates whether the module is optional (TRUE) or
configuration mandatory (FALSE) when the controller attempts to start the I/O bus.
%SW120 Each bit, starting with bit 1 (bit 0 is reserved), is dedicated to a configured I/O
I/O expansion module status expansion module and indicates the status of the module.
When the logic controller attempts to start the I/O bus, if the value of %SW120
is non-zero (indicating that an error is detected for at least one of the modules),
the I/O expansion bus does not start unless the corresponding bit in %SW119
is set to TRUE (indicating the module is marked as an optional module).
When the I/O bus is started, if the value of %SW120 is modified by the system,
it indicates that an error is detected on one or more I/O expansion modules
(regardless of the Optional module feature).
For more information, refer to System Words (see page 252).
EIO0000003297 02/2020 85
Shared Internal ID Codes

Logic controllers identify expansion modules by a simple internal ID code. This ID code is not
specific to each reference, but identifies the structure of the expansion module. Therefore, different
references can share the same ID code.
If you declare two modules with the same internal ID code next to each other in the configuration
and both are declared as optional, a message appears at the bottom of the Configuration window.
There must be at least one non-optional module between two optional modules.
This table groups the module references sharing the same internal ID code:
Modules sharing the same internal ID code

TM2DDI16DT, TM2DDI16DK
TM2DRA16RT, TM2DDO16UK, TM2DDO16TK
TM2DDI8DT, TM2DAI8DT
TM2DRA8RT, TM2DDO8UT, TM2DDO8TT
TM2DDO32TK, TM2DDO32UK
TM3DI16K, TM3DI16/G
TM3DQ16R/G, TM3DQ16T/G, TM3DQ16TK, TM3DQ16U, TM3DQ16UG, TM3DQ16UK
TM3DQ32TK, TM3DQ32UK
TM3DI8/G, TM3DI8A
TM3DQ8R/G, TM3DQ8T/G, TM3DQ8U, TM3DQ8UG
TM3DM8R/G
TM3DM24R/G
TM3SAK6R/G
TM3SAF5R/G
TM3SAC5R/G
TM3SAFL5R/G
TM3AI2H/G
TM3AI4/G
TM3AI8/G
TM3AQ2/G
TM3AQ4/G
TM3AM6/G
TM3TM3/G
TM3TI4/G
TM3TI4D/G
TM3TI8T/G
86 EIO0000003297 02/2020
Controller Configuration
Controller configuration depends on the number and type of embedded input/outputs, I/O objects,
and communication ports.
Use the Configuration tab to configure the properties of your controller and the expansion modules.
Select a node in the hardware tree to configure the properties of the controller.
This table shows the available configurations of the M221 Logic Controller:
Reference Digital Digital Analog High Speed Pulse Ethernet Serial

Input Output Input Counter Generator Line
TM221M16R• X X X X – – X
TM221C••R
TM221C••U X X X X X – X
TM221ME16R• X X X X – X X
TM221CE••R
TM221M16T• X X X X X – X
TM221M32TK
TM221C••T
TM221ME16T• X X X X X X X
TM221ME32TK
TM221CE••T
TM221CE••U
X Available for configuration in EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic. For information on how to configure:
 Digital inputs, refer to Configuring Digital Inputs (see page 90)
 Digital outputs, refer to Configuring Digital Outputs (see page 94)
 Analog inputs, refer to Configuring Analog Inputs (see page 96)
 High speed counters, refer to Configuring High Speed Counters (see page 99)
 Pulse generators, refer to Configuring Pulse Generators (see page 110)
 Ethernet, refer to Configuring Ethernet (see page 132)
 Serial lines, refer to Configuring Serial Line (see page 171).
EIO0000003297 02/2020 87
Updating Firmware using Executive Loader Wizard
Overview
You can update the firmware of the controller using the Executive Loader wizard.
Refer to Controller States and Behavior (see page 54) for information concerning the state of the
firmware in your controller.
Updating the Firmware of the Controller

To launch the ExecLoader wizard, follow these steps:
Step Action
1 Close all Windows applications, including virtual machines.
2 Click Start → Programs → Schneider Electric → EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic →
EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic Firmware Update or run the ExecLoaderWizard.exe from
EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic installation folder\Execloader folder.
88 EIO0000003297 02/2020
Modicon M221
Embedded Input/Output Configuration
EIO0000003297 02/2020
Chapter 4
Overview
This chapter describes how to configure the embedded I/O objects of the M221 Logic Controller.
The number of embedded inputs and outputs depends on the controller reference. For more
information, refer to the tables for:
 TM221C Logic Controller (see page 22)
 TM221M Logic Controller (see page 28)

Section Topic Page
4.1 Digital Input Configuration 90
4.2 Digital Output Configuration 94
4.3 Analog Input Configuration 96
4.4 High Speed Counter Configuration 98
4.5 Pulse Generator Configuration 109
EIO0000003297 02/2020 89
Section 4.1
Digital Input Configuration
Digital Input Configuration
Configuring Digital Inputs
Introduction
By default, all digital inputs are used as regular inputs. Some of the digital inputs are fast and can
be used by configuring the high speed counters (see page 99) while other inputs can be configured
as event sources.
Digital Inputs Configuration

This table describes how to configure the digital inputs:
Step Action
1 Click the Digital inputs node in the hardware tree to display the digital input properties.
This figure shows the properties of the digital inputs in the editor area:
2 Edit the properties to configure the digital inputs.

For detailed information on the digital input configuration parameters, refer to the table below.
90 EIO0000003297 02/2020
This table describes each parameter of the digital input configuration:
Parameter Editable Value Default Value Description

Used No True/False False Indicates whether the input channel is being used in a program
or not.
Address No %I0.x – Displays the address of the digital input on the controller,
where x represents the channel number.
If the controller has 8 digital input channels, x varies from 0...7.
If the controller has 16 digital input channels, x varies from
0...15.
For example, %I0.2 is the third digital input channel of the
logic controller.
Symbol Yes – – Allows you to specify a symbol to associate with the digital
input object.
Double-click in the Symbol column, type the name of the
symbol and press Enter.
Used by No any Filtering Displays the name of the component that uses the input
channel.
For example, if the input channel is used by a subroutine, this
field displays User logic. The possible values in this field are:
 User logic
 Filtering
 Latch
 Run/Stop
 Event
 %HSCx
where x is the high speed counter instance on the controller
 %FCy
where y is the fast counter instance on the controller
If an input is being used by more than one operation, all
values, separated by commas, are displayed in this field.
Filtering Yes No Filter 3 ms Allows you to select the noise filter duration for the input
3 ms channel.
12 ms Using a filter for the digital inputs reduces the noise on the
controller input.
If you select filter for an input, you cannot configure that input
for:
 Latch
 Event
EIO0000003297 02/2020 91

Latch Yes True/False False Allows you to enable or disable latching for the inputs
configured as events (%I0.2...%I0.5).
By default, this option is disabled due to default value of
Filtering. Set the Filtering to No Filter to enable the Latch
option.
Latching enables pulses with a duration shorter than the
controller scan time to be memorized.
When a pulse duration is shorter than a scan time and has a
value greater than or equal to 1 ms, the controller latches the
pulse, which is then updated in the next scan.
If you enable Latch for an input, you cannot configure that
input for:
 Filtering
 Run/Stop
 Event
Run/Stop Yes True/False False Allows you to configure 1 digital input as an additional
Run/Stop switch.
If you configure a digital input as Run/Stop switch, you cannot
use the input in any other function block (for example, high
speed counter function block, fast counter function block, and
so on).
If you enable Run/Stop for an input, you cannot configure that
input for:
 Latch
 Event
Event Yes Not Used Not Used Allows you to select an event that triggers the inputs
Falling Edge %I0.2...%I0.5.
Rising Edge By default, this option is disabled due to the default value of
Both edges Filtering. Set Filtering to No Filter to enable the Event option.
When you select an event from the drop-down list (other than
Not Used):
 The Priority parameter is enabled to allow you to set the
priority of the event.
 An event task is created and displayed (see EcoStruxure
Machine Expert - Basic, Operating Guide) in the
Configuration tab.
Priority Yes 0...7 7 Allows you to set the priority of the triggering event for the
inputs %I0.2...%I0.5.
You can set the priority of each event using the Priority
parameter that is editable only for the inputs configured as
event.
Assign each configured event a different priority: if 2 events
have same priority, a detected error message appears in the
window.
92 EIO0000003297 02/2020

Subroutine No any empty Displays the number of the subroutine associated with an input
configured as an event.
Comment Yes – – Allows you to specify a comment to associate with the digital
input object.
Double-click in the Comment column, type the comment and
press Enter.
Additional configuration details are displayed in the Programming tab. For more information, refer
to Digital Inputs (%I) (see page 218).
EIO0000003297 02/2020 93
Section 4.2
Digital Output Configuration
Digital Output Configuration
Configuring Digital Outputs
Introduction
By default, all digital outputs are used as regular outputs. For controllers equipped with transistor
outputs, 2 outputs are fast transistor outputs and can be used by configuring the pulse generators
(see page 110).
Digital Outputs Configuration

This table describes how to configure the digital outputs:
Step Action
1 Click the Digital outputs node in the hardware tree to display the digital output properties.
This figure shows the properties of the digital outputs in the editor area:
2 Edit the properties to configure the digital outputs.

For detailed information on the digital output configuration parameters, refer to the table below.
94 EIO0000003297 02/2020
This table describes each parameter of the digital output configuration:

Used No True/False False Indicates whether the output channel is being used
in a program or not.
Address No %Q0.x – Displays the address of the digital output on the
controller, where x represents the channel number.
If the controller has 8 digital output channels, x
varies from 0...7.
If the controller has 16 digital output channels, x
varies from 0...15.
For example, %Q0.2 is the third digital output
channel on the controller.
Symbol Yes – – Allows you to specify a symbol to associate with the
digital output object.
Double-click in the Symbol column, type the name
of the symbol and press Enter.
Used by No any empty Displays the name of the component that uses the
output channel.
For example, if the output channel is used as status
alarm, it displays Alarm.
Status Alarm Yes True/False False Allows you to enable or disable the status alarm for
the output (%Q0.0...%Q0.7).
You can configure only one output channel for the
status alarm.
You cannot configure an output as status alarm if
the output is used in a program.
The value of the status alarm is 1 when the
controller is in the state RUNNING, and 0 in all other
state
Fallback value Yes 1 or 0 0 Specify the value to apply to this output (fallback to
0 or fallback to 1) when the logic controller enters
the STOPPED or an exception state. The default
value is 0. If Maintain values fallback mode is
configured, the output retains its current value when
the logic controller enters the STOPPED or an
exception state.
This field is disabled for the output configured as
Status Alarm.
Comment Yes – – Allows you to specify a comment to associate with
the digital output object.
Double-click in the Comment column, type the
comment and press Enter.
to Digital Outputs (%Q) (see page 219).
EIO0000003297 02/2020 95
Section 4.3
Analog Input Configuration
Analog Input Configuration
Configuring Analog Inputs
Introduction
The analog inputs do not have any configurable property in EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic.
By default, analog inputs are used as regular inputs.
Analog Inputs Configuration

This table describes how to configure the analog inputs:
Step Action
1 Click the Analog inputs node in the hardware tree to display the analog input properties.
This figure shows the properties of the analog inputs in the editor area:
2 Edit the properties to configure the analog inputs.

For detailed information on the analog input configuration parameters, refer to the table below.
This table describes each parameter of the analog input configuration:

Used No True/False False Indicates whether the input channel is being used in a
program or not.
Address No %IW0.x – Displays the address of the analog input on the
controller, where x represents the channel number.
If the controller has 2 analog input channels, x is either
0 or 1. For example, %IW0.1 is the second analog
input channel on the controller.
Symbol Yes – – Allows you to specify a symbol to associate with the
analog input object.
Double-click in the Symbol column, type the name of
the symbol and press Enter.
96 EIO0000003297 02/2020

Type No 0 - 10 V 0 - 10 V Indicates the channel mode. For example, 0 - 10 V
refers to the channel that can be used for an electrical
input of voltage type in the range 0...10 V.
Scope No Normal Normal Indicates the range of values for a channel.
Minimum No 0 0 Indicates the lower measurement limit.
Maximum No 1000 1000 Indicates the upper measurement limit.
Filter No 0 0 Indicates the filtering value. Multiply by the Filter Unit
value to obtain the filtering time.
Filter Unit No 100 ms empty Specifies the unit of time for the filtering value.
Sampling No – empty –
Units No any empty Indicates the unit of the analog input.
Comment Yes – – Allows you to specify a comment to associate with the
analog input object.
Double-click in the Comment column, type the
comment and press Enter.
to Analog Inputs (%IW) (see page 220).
EIO0000003297 02/2020 97
Section 4.4
High Speed Counter Configuration
High Speed Counter Configuration

Topic Page
Configuring High Speed Counters 99
Configuring Dual Phase and Single Phase Counters 103
Configuring Frequency Meter 107
98 EIO0000003297 02/2020
Configuring High Speed Counters
Introduction
You can configure high speed counters to perform any one of the following functions:
 Single Phase
 Dual Phase [Pulse / Direction]
 Dual Phase [Quadrature X1]
 Frequency Meter
For information on how to select a function, refer to High Speed Counter in Counter Modes
(see Modicon M221 Logic Controller, Advanced Functions Library Guide) or High Speed Counter
in Frequency Meter Mode (see Modicon M221 Logic Controller, Advanced Functions Library
Guide).
The High Speed Counter function block works at a maximum frequency of 100 kHz for all counting
modes with a range of 0 to 65535 in single word and 0 to 4294967295 in double word.
The High Speed Counter function blocks use dedicated inputs and auxiliary inputs and outputs.
These inputs and outputs are not reserved for the exclusive use of High Speed Counter function
blocks:
 If the dedicated input/output is not used by an HSC instance, it is available for the application
as a regular digital input/output.
 If the application does not use an HSC dedicated input/output as a regular digital input/output,
it is available for the corresponding HSC instance.
Single Phase I/O Assignment
Main Inputs Auxiliary Inputs Reflex Outputs

%HSC0 %I0.0 - %I0.2 %I0.3 %Q0.2 %Q0.3
%HSC1 %I0.6 - %I0.5 %I0.4 %Q0.4 %Q0.5
%HSC2 %I0.1 - - - %Q0.2 %Q0.3
%HSC3 %I0.7 - - - %Q0.4 %Q0.5
Single Phase Pulse input Not used Preset input Catch input Reflex Reflex
output 0 output 1
EIO0000003297 02/2020 99
Dual Phase Pulse / Direction I/O Assignment

%HSC0 %I0.0 %I0.1 %I0.2 %I0.3 %Q0.2 %Q0.3
%HSC1 %I0.6 %I0.7 %I0.5 %I0.4 %Q0.4 %Q0.5
Pulse / Direction Pulse input Direction Preset input Catch input Reflex Reflex
input output 0 output 1
Dual Phase Quadrature I/O Assignment

%HSC0 %I0.0 %I0.1 %I0.2 %I0.3 %Q0.2 %Q0.3
%HSC1 %I0.6 %I0.7 %I0.5 %I0.4 %Q0.4 %Q0.5
Quadrature X1 Pulse input Pulse input Preset input Catch input Reflex Reflex
Phase A Phase B output 0 output 1
Frequency Meter I/O Assignment

%HSC0 %I0.0 - - - - -
%HSC1 %I0.6 - - - - -
Frequency Meter Pulse input Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used
100 EIO0000003297 02/2020

High Speed Counters Configuration

This table describes how to configure the high speed counters:
Step Description
1 Click the High Speed Counters node in the hardware tree.
Result: The High Speed Counters list is displayed:
2 Click ... in under Configuration to select the type of high speed counter to assign and to display the High
Speed Counter Assistant window.
For detailed information on the high speed counter, refer to the table below.
This table describes each parameter of the high speed counters configuration:

Used No TRUE/FALSE FALSE Indicates whether the high speed counter
is being used in a program or not.
Address No %HSCi Indicates the address of the high speed
counter, where i is the object number.
Symbol Yes – – Allows you to specify a symbol to
associate with the high speed counter
object.
Double-click in the Symbol column to edit
the field.
Type No Not Configured Not Configured Indicates the counter operational mode.
Single Phase
Dual Phase
Frequency Meter
EIO0000003297 02/2020 101


Configuration Yes [...] Disabled Allows you to configure the high speed
(Button) counter parameters using the High Speed
Counter Assistant window.
Comment Yes – – Allows you to specify a comment to
associate with the high speed counter
object.
Double-click in the Comment column to
edit the field.
For details on the configuration of the Dual Phase [Pulse / Direction], Dual Phase
[Quadrature X1], Dual Phase [Quadrature X2], Dual Phase [Quadrature X4], and
Single Phase, refer to Configuring Dual Phase and Single Phase Counters (see page 103).
For details on the configuration of the Frequency Meter, refer to Configuring Frequency Meter
(see page 107).
102 EIO0000003297 02/2020

Configuring Dual Phase and Single Phase Counters
High Speed Counter Assistant

This figure presents an instance of the assistant window for %HSC0 configured as the Dual Phase
[Pulse / Direction]:
Item Description
1 Displays the title of the assistant dialog window for the selected HSC instance %HSCi.
2 Allows you to select the HSC type, mode, and dual phase counter type.
3 Displays the dedicated inputs, auxiliary inputs, and reflex outputs.
Properties in this area of the assistant window are different for each counter type and the HSC
instance. For more details, refer to Dedicated I/O Assignments (see page 100).
EIO0000003297 02/2020 103

Common Parameters
This table describes parameters common to all counter types:

Type of HSC Yes Not Configured - Indicates the selected counter operational
Single Phase mode and allows you to change it.
Dual Phase The options depend on the instance and on
Frequency Meter the type of HSC in the other instances. Refer
to Dedicated I/O Assignments
(see page 100).
Counting Mode No Free Large - Indicates the selected counter operational
mode.
The options depend on the instance and on
the type of HSC in the other instances. Refer
(see page 100).
Input Mode Yes Pulse / Direction - Indicates the selected counter operational
Quadrature X1 mode and allows you to change it.
Quadrature X2 The options depend on the instance and on
Quadrature X4 the type of HSC in the other instances. Refer
(see page 100).
Double Word Yes TRUE/FALSE FALSE Allows you to toggle between input data size
of Word (16 bits) and Double Word (32 bits).
Enabling this field changes the data size
from Word (16 bits) to Double Word (32 bits).
Preset Yes 0...65535 0 Allows you to specify the preset value for
(Word) (Word) counting functions.
0...4294967295 0
(Double Word) (Double
Word)
Threshold S0 Yes 0...65535 65535 Allows you to specify the value of the HSC
(Word) (Word) flag S0 that contains the value of the
0...4294967295 4294967295 threshold TH0.
(Double Word) (Double
Word)
Threshold S1 Yes 0...65535 0...65535 Allows you to specify the value for the HSC
(Word) (Word) flag S1 that contains the value of the
0...4294967295 0... threshold TH1.
(Double Word) 4294967295
(Double
Word)
104 EIO0000003297 02/2020


Trigger Yes Not Used Not Used Allows you to select a triggering function for
Falling Edge an event (for both threshold TH0 and TH1)
Rising Edge from the list.
Both edges Selecting a triggering function makes the
Priority parameter editable.
Priority Yes 0...7 7 Allows you to set the priority of the triggering
function of an event (for both threshold TH0
and TH1).
This field is greyed until you select a
triggering function.
Subroutine No any empty Displays the subroutine associated with an
input configured as an event (for both
threshold TH0 and TH1).
Normal Input Yes TRUE/FALSE FALSE Configurable as Preset Input by selecting the
Use as check box, only on %HSC0 and
%HSC1, respectively %I0.2 and %I0.5.
Normal Input Yes TRUE/FALSE FALSE Configurable as Catch Input by selecting the
Use as check box, only on %HSC0 and
Reflex Output 0 Yes TRUE/FALSE FALSE Configure Reflex output 0 %Q0.2 for either
%HSC0 or %HSC2.
Configure Reflex output 0 %Q0.4 for either
%HSC1 or %HSC3.
Reflex Output 1 Yes TRUE/FALSE FALSE Configure Reflex output 1 %Q0.3 for either
%HSC0 or %HSC2.
Configure Reflex output 1 %Q0.5 for either
%HSC1 or %HSC3.
Value < S0 Yes TRUE/FALSE FALSE Allows you to enable or disable the condition
in which the counter is constantly compared
to the output value to set the reflex output
when the output value is lower than the value
of HSC flag S0.
S0 <= Value < S1 Yes TRUE/FALSE FALSE Allows you to enable or disable the condition
when the output value is higher than or
equals to the value of the HSC flag S0 and
the output value is lower than the value of the
HSC flag S1.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 105


Value >= S1 Yes TRUE/FALSE FALSE Allows you to enable or disable the condition
when the output value is higher than or
equals to the value of HSC flag S1.
Dual Phase [Pulse / Direction] Parameters

This table describes parameters specific to Dual Phase [Pulse / Direction]:

Pulse Input No TRUE/FALSE TRUE Configured as pulse input, only on %HSC0 and %HSC1,
respectively %I0.0 and %I0.6.
Direction Input No TRUE/FALSE TRUE Configured as directional input, only on %HSC0 and
 TRUE = down counting
 FALSE = up counting
Dual Phase [Quadrature X1], Dual Phase [Quadrature X2], and Dual Phase [Quadrature
X4] Parameters
This table describes parameters specific to Dual Phase [Quadrature X1], Dual Phase
[Quadrature X2], and Dual Phase [Quadrature X4]:

Pulse Input No TRUE/FALSE TRUE Configured as pulse input for phase A, only
Phase A on %HSC0 and %HSC1, respectively %I0.0
and %I0.6.
Pulse Input No TRUE/FALSE TRUE Configured as pulse input for phase B, only
Phase B on %HSC0 and %HSC1, respectively %I0.1
and %I0.7.
Single Phase Parameters

This table describes a parameter specific to Single Phase:

Pulse Input No TRUE/FALSE TRUE You can configure up to four HSC in Single
Phase HSC type, they use, as a pulse input:
 %I0.0 for %HSC0
 %I0.6 for %HSC1
 %I0.1 for %HSC2
 %I0.7 for %HSC3
106 EIO0000003297 02/2020

Configuring Frequency Meter
High Speed Counter Assistant

This figure presents the High Speed Counter Assistant (%HSC0) window for the counter type
Frequency Meter:
EIO0000003297 02/2020 107

Frequency Meter Parameters

This table describes each parameter of the High Speed Counter Assistant (%HSCi) window for the
counter type Frequency Meter:

Type of HSC Yes Not Configured Frequency Indicates the selected counter
Single Phase Meter operational mode and allows you to
Dual Phase change it.
Frequency Meter The Frequency Meter is configurable
on %HSC0 and/or %HSC1. Refer to the
Frequency Meter I/O Assignment
(see page 100).
Double Word Yes TRUE/FALSE FALSE Use a 32-bit preset word.
Enabling this field changes the data size
from Word (16 bits) to Double Word
(32 bits).
Time Window Yes 100 ms 1s Allows you to select the time base to
1s measure the frequency between
100 Hz and 100 kHz.
Pulse Input No TRUE/FALSE TRUE Indicates the input used as pulse input,
%I0.0 for %HSC0 or %I0.6 for %HSC1.
Additional configuration details are displayed in the Programming tab.

For more details on the High Speed Counter function block, refer to the Modicon M221 Logic
Controller Advanced Functions Library Guide, chapter High Speed Counter Function Block
(%HSC).
108 EIO0000003297 02/2020

Section 4.5
Pulse Generator Configuration
Pulse Generator Configuration

Topic Page
Configuring Pulse Generators 110
Configuring Pulse (%PLS) 112
Configuring Pulse Width Modulation (%PWM) 114
Configuring Pulse Train Output (%PTO) 116
Configuring Frequency Generator (%FREQGEN) 119
EIO0000003297 02/2020 109

Configuring Pulse Generators
Introduction
The pulse generator function blocks, Pulse (PLS), Pulse Width Modulation (PWM), Pulse
Train Output (PTO) and Frequency Generator (FREQGEN) are used to generate square
or modulated wave signals on dedicated output channels %Q0.0 or %Q0.1.
The PWM outputs feature a modulated wave signal with a variable width and duty cycle, while the
PTO outputs generate a a square wave to control a linear single-axis stepper or servo drive in open
loop mode. The PLS also creates a square wave for a programmed number of pulses.
Pulse Generators Configuration

This table describes how to configure the pulse generators:
Step Action
1 Click the Pulse Generators node in the hardware tree to display the pulse generator properties.
This figure presents the properties of the pulse generators in the editor area:
2 Edit the properties and click [...] to configure the pulse generator output.
For detailed information on the pulse generator configuration parameters, refer to the table below.
This table describes the parameters of the pulse generator:

Used No True/False False Indicates whether the pulse generated output is
being used in a program or not.
Address No %PLSx %PLSx/%PWMx/ Displays the address of the Pulse output,
%PWMx %PTOx/%FREQGENx Pulse Width Modulation output, Pulse
%PTOx Train Output, or Frequency Generator
%FREQGENx where x is the output number.
Symbol Yes – – Allows you to specify a symbol to associate with
the pulse generator object.
Double-click in the Symbol column to edit the
field.
Type No Not Configured Not Configured Displays the type of the pulse generator used for
PLS the output channel.
PWM
PTO
FREQGEN
110 EIO0000003297 02/2020


Configuration Yes [...] Enabled Allows you to configure the pulse generator
(Button) using the Pulse Generator Assistant window.
Comment Yes – – Allows you to specify a comment to associate
with the pulse generator object.
Double-click in the Comment column to edit the
field.
PLS Configuration
Refer to Configuring Pulse (%PLS) (see page 112).
For more details on the Pulse function block, refer to the Modicon M221 Logic Controller
Advanced Functions Library Guide, chapter Pulse (%PLS) (see Modicon M221 Logic Controller,
Advanced Functions Library Guide).
PWM Configuration
Refer to Configuring Pulse Width Modulation (%PWM) (see page 114).
For more details on the Pulse Width Modulation function block, refer to the Modicon M221
Logic Controller Advanced Functions Library Guide, chapter Pulse Width Modulation (%PWM)
(see Modicon M221 Logic Controller, Advanced Functions Library Guide).
PTO Configuration
Refer to Configuring Pulse Train Output (%PTO) (see page 116)
For more details on the Pulse Train Output function block, refer to the Modicon M221 Logic
Controller Advanced Functions Library Guide, chapter Pulse Train Output (%PTO) (see Modicon
M221 Logic Controller, Advanced Functions Library Guide).
Frequency Generator Configuration

Refer to Configuring Frequency Generator (%FREQGEN) (see page 116)
For more details on the FREQGEN function block, refer to the Modicon M221 Logic Controller
Advanced Functions Library Guide, chapter Frequency Generator (%FREQGEN) (see Modicon
EIO0000003297 02/2020 111

Configuring Pulse (%PLS)
Pulse Generator Assistant for PLS

This graphic presents the Pulse Generator Assistant window when the Type of pulse generator is
set to PLS:
112 EIO0000003297 02/2020

The table describes each parameter available when the channel is configured in PLS mode:
Parameter Value Default Value Description

Type of pulse Not Configured PLS Allows you to choose the type of pulse generator and configure
generator PLS the output properties.
PWM Select:
PTO  PLS to configure the output channels in PLS mode. Refer to
FREQGEN Configuring Pulse (%PLS) (see page 112).
 PWM to configure the output channels in PWM mode. Refer
to Configuring Pulse Width Modulation (%PWM)
(see page 114).
 PTO to configure the output channels in PTO mode. Refer to
Configuring Pulse Train Output (%PTO) (see page 116).
 FREQGEN to configure the output channels in FREQGEN
mode. Refer to Configuring Frequency Generator
(%FREQGEN) (see page 119).
Double Word True/False False Allows you to toggle between the data size of Word (16 bits)
and Double Word (32 bits).
By default, this parameter is disabled, which indicates that the
current data size is Word (16 bits).
Enabling this field changes the data size to Double Word
(32 bits).
Time Base 0.1 ms 1s Allows you to select the time base for the frequency
1 ms measurement.
10 ms
1s
Preset Refer to the table 0 Allows you to specify the preset value for the pulse output.
below for complete
range of preset
values for PLS type
pulse generator.
This table presents the range of values of the Preset parameter:
Type Time Base Preset Value Range

PLS 0.1 ms 1...20000
1 ms 1...2000
10 ms 1...200
1s 1 or 2

For more details on the Pulse function block, refer to the Modicon M221 Logic Controller
Advanced Functions Library Guide, chapter Pulse (%PLS) (see Modicon M221 Logic Controller,
Advanced Functions Library Guide).
EIO0000003297 02/2020 113

Configuring Pulse Width Modulation (%PWM)
Pulse Generator Assistant for PWM

set to PWM:
114 EIO0000003297 02/2020

The table describes each parameter available when the channel is configured in PWM mode:

Type of pulse Not Configured PWM Allows you to choose the type of pulse generator and
generator PLS configure the output properties.
PWM Select:
PTO  PLS to configure the output channels in PLS mode.
FREQGEN Refer to Configuring Pulse (%PLS) (see page 112).
 PWM to configure the output channels in PWM mode.
Refer to Configuring Pulse Width Modulation
(%PWM) (see page 114).
 PTO to configure the output channels in PTO mode.
Refer to Configuring Pulse Train Output (%PTO)
(see page 116).
 FREQGEN to configure the output channels in
FREQGEN mode. Refer to Configuring Frequency
Generator (%FREQGEN) (see page 119).
Time Base 0.1 ms 1s Allows you to select the time base for the frequency
1 ms measurement.
10 ms
1s
Preset Refer to the table below 0 Allows you to specify the preset value for the PWM
for complete range of output.
preset values for PWM
type pulse generator.
This table presents the range of values of the Preset parameter:
Type Time Base Preset Value Range

PWM 0.1 ms 1...10000
1 ms 1...1000
10 ms 1...100
1s 1

For more details on the Pulse Width Modulation function block, refer to the Modicon M221
Logic Controller Advanced Functions Library Guide, chapter Pulse Width Modulation (%PWM)
(see Modicon M221 Logic Controller, Advanced Functions Library Guide).
EIO0000003297 02/2020 115

Configuring Pulse Train Output (%PTO)
Pulse Generator Assistant for PTO

set to PTO:
116 EIO0000003297 02/2020

The table describes each parameter available when the channel is configured in PTO mode:
Parameter Value Default Description

General Type of pulse Not Configured PTO Allows you to choose the type of pulse generator
generator PLS and configure the output properties.
PWM Select:
PTO  PLS to configure the output channels in PLS
FREQGEN mode. Refer to Configuring Pulse (%PLS)
(see page 112).
 PWM to configure the output channels in PWM
mode. Refer to Configuring Pulse Width
Modulation (%PWM) (see page 114).
 PTO to configure the output channels in PTO
mode. Refer to Configuring Pulse Train
Output (%PTO) (see page 116).
 FREQGEN to configure the output channels
in FREQGEN mode. Refer to Configuring
Frequency Generator (%FREQGEN)
(see page 119).
Output mode Clock Wise / Pulse / Direction Select the pulse Output mode (see Modicon
Counter Clock M221 Logic Controller, Advanced Functions
Wise Library Guide).
Pulse / Direction
NOTE: The Clock Wise / Counter Clock Wise
output mode is only valid for PTO0. This mode
disables PTO1.
Pulse %Q0.0 for PTO0, %Q0.0 for When Pulse / Direction is selected in Output
%Q0.1 for PTO1 PTO0, %Q0.1 mode, select the output that provides the motor
for PTO1 operating speed.
Direction Not used %Q0.2 When Pulse / Direction is selected in Output
%Q0.0...16 mode, select the output that provides the motor
(depending on rotation direction.
controller Set to Not used (disabled) if directional output is
reference) not required for the application.
NOTE: The application must be configured with
a functional level of at least Level 5.0 to enable
the Not used option.
Clock Wise %Q0.0 %Q0.0 When Clock Wise / Counter Clock Wise is
selected in Output mode, select the output that
provides the signal for forward motor operating
speed and direction.
Counter Clock %Q0.1 %Q0.1 When Clock Wise / Counter Clock Wise is
Wise selected in Output mode, select the output that
provides the signal for reverse motor operating
speed and direction.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 117


Mechanics Backlash 0...65535 0 Set backlash compensation value. The specified
Compensation number of backlash compensation pulses are
not added to the position counter.
See Backlash Compensation (see Modicon
M221 Logic Controller, Advanced Functions
Library Guide).
Software Enable the Enabled Enabled Select whether to use the software position
Position software Disabled limits.
Limits position limits
Low Limit -2147483648... -2147483648 Set the software limit position to be detected in
2147483647 the negative direction.
High Limit -2147483648... 2147483647 Set the software limit position to be detected in
2147483647 the positive direction.
Motion Max. velocity 0...100000 100000 Set the pulse output maximum velocity (in Hz).
Start velocity 0...100000 0 Set the pulse output start velocity (see Modicon
Library Guide) (in Hz). 0 if not used.
Stop velocity 0...100000 0 Set the pulse output stop velocity (see Modicon
Library Guide) (in Hz). 0 if not used.
Max. acc. 1...100000 100000 Set the acceleration maximum value (in Hz/ms).
Fast stop dec. 1...100000 5000 Set the deceleration value in case an error is
detected (in Hz/ms)
Max. dec. 1...100000 100000 Set the deceleration maximum value (in Hz/ms).
Homing REF input Not Used Not Used Select whether to use the REF input to set the
Input homing position.
Contact type Normally opened Normally Select whether the switch contact default state is
Normally closed opened open or closed.
NOTE: The input type is only available when
REF input is selected.
Probe PROBE input Not Used Not Used Select whether to use the PROBE input.
activation Input
NOTE: Refer to Regular Input Characteristics
for details on the physical characteristics of the
selected input.

For more details on the Pulse Train Output function block, refer to the Modicon M221 Logic
Controller Advanced Functions Library Guide, chapter Pulse Train Output (%PTO) (see Modicon
118 EIO0000003297 02/2020

Configuring Frequency Generator (%FREQGEN)
Pulse Generator Assistant for FREQGEN

set to FREQGEN:
The Frequency Generator (FG) function generates a square wave signal with programmable
frequency and duty cycle of 50%. The controller uses an internal clock generator and provides an
output signal on a dedicated output channel (%Q0.0). This output signal can directly command a
constant motion of the axis. The target frequency is always positive.
For more details on the FREQGEN function block, refer to the Modicon M221 Logic Controller
Advanced Functions Library Guide, chapter Frequency Generator (%FREQGEN) (see Modicon
EIO0000003297 02/2020 119

120 EIO0000003297 02/2020

Modicon M221
I/O Bus Configuration
EIO0000003297 02/2020
Chapter 5
Overview
This chapter describes how to configure the I/O bus (expansion modules) of the M221 Logic
Controller.

Topic Page
I/O Configuration General Description 122
Maximum Hardware Configuration 126
Configuring Cartridges and Expansion Modules 130
EIO0000003297 02/2020 121

I/O Configuration General Description
Introduction
In your project, you can add I/O expansion modules to your M221 Logic Controller to increase the
number of digital and analog inputs and outputs over those native to the logic controller itself
(embedded I/O).
You can add either TM3 or TM2 I/O expansion modules to the logic controller, and further expand
the number of I/O via TM3 transmitter and receiver modules to create remote I/O configurations.
Special rules apply in all cases when creating local and remote I/O expansions, and when mixing
TM2 and TM3 I/O expansion modules (refer to Maximum Hardware Configuration (see page 126)).
The I/O expansion bus of the M221 Logic Controller is created when you assemble the I/O
expansion modules to the logic controller. I/O expansion modules are considered as external
devices in the logic controller architecture and are treated, as such, differently than the embedded
I/Os of the logic controller.
I/O Expansion Bus Errors

If the logic controller cannot communicate with one or more I/O expansion modules that is (are)
contained in the program configuration and those modules are not configured as optional modules
(refer to Optional I/O Expansion Modules (see page 83)), the logic controller considers it as an I/O
expansion bus error. The unsuccessful communication may be detected during the startup of the
logic controller or during runtime, and there may be any number of causes. Causes of
communication exception on the I/O expansion bus include, among other things, disconnection of
or physically missing I/O modules, electromagnetic radiation beyond published environmental
specifications, or otherwise, inoperative modules.
During runtime, if an I/O expansion bus error is detected, the diagnostic information is contained
in %SW118 and %SW120 system words, and the red LED indicator labeled ERR flashes.
Active I/O Expansion Bus Error Handling

System bit %S106 is set to 0 by default to specify the use of active I/O error handling. The
application can set this bit to 1 to use passive I/O error handling instead.
By default, when the logic controller detects a TM3 module in bus communication error, it sets the
bus to a "bus off" condition whereby the TM3 expansion module outputs, the input image and the
output image are set to 0. A TM3 expansion module is considered to be in bus communication error
when an I/O exchange with the expansion module has been unsuccessful for at least two
consecutive bus task cycles. When a bus communication error occurs, bit n of %SW120 is set to
1, where n is the expansion module number, and %SW118 bit 14 is set to 0.
122 EIO0000003297 02/2020

Normal I/O expansion bus operation can only be restored after eliminating the source of the error
and performing one of the following:
 Power cycle
 New application download
 Application request through a rising edge on bit %S107
 With EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic by selection of the Initialize Controller command
Passive I/O Expansion Bus Error Handling

The application can set system bit %S106 to 1 to use passive I/O error handling. This error
handling is provided to afford compatibility with previous firmware versions and previous
controllers that the M221 Logic Controller replaces.
When passive I/O error handling is in use, the controller attempts to continue data bus exchanges
with the modules during bus communication errors. While the expansion bus error persists, the
logic controller attempts to re-establish communication on the bus with incommunicative modules,
depending on the type of I/O expansion module, TM3 or TM2:
 For TM3 I/O expansion modules, the value of the I/O channels is maintained (Maintain values)
for approximately 10 seconds while the logic controller attempts to re-establish communication.
If the logic controller cannot re-establish communications within that time, all affected TM3 I/O
expansion outputs are set to 0.
 For the TM2 I/O expansion modules that may be part of the configuration, the value of the I/O
channels is maintained indefinitely. That is to say, the outputs of the TM2 I/O expansion
modules are set to Maintain values until either power is cycled on the logic controller system, or
you issue an Initialize Controller command with EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic.
In either case, the logic controller continues to solve logic and the embedded I/O continues to be
managed by the application (Managed by application (see page 65)) while it attempts to re-
establish communication with the incommunicative I/O expansion modules. If the communication
is successful, the I/O expansion modules resume to be managed by the application. If
communication with the I/O expansion modules is unsuccessful, you must resolve the reason for
the unsuccessful communication, and then cycle power on the logic controller system, or issue an
Initialize Controller command with EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic.
The value of the incommunicative I/O expansion modules input image is maintained and the output
image value is set by the application.
Further, if the incommunicative I/O module(s) disturb the communication with unaffected modules,
the unaffected modules will also be considered in error and their corresponding bit in %SW120 will
be set to 1. However, with the ongoing data exchanges that characterize the Passive I/O
Expansion Bus Error Handling, the unaffected modules will nonetheless apply the data sent, and
will not apply the fallback values as for the incommunicative module.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 123

Therefore, you must monitor within your application the state of the bus and the error state of the
module(s) on the bus, and to take the appropriate action necessary given your particular
application.
WARNING
 Include in your risk assessment the possibility of unsuccessful communication between the
logic controller and any I/O expansion modules.
 If the “Maintain values” option deployed during an I/O expansion bus error is incompatible with
your application, use alternate means to control your application for such an event.
 Monitor the state of the I/O expansion bus using the dedicated system words and take
appropriate actions as determined by your risk assessment.
For more information on the actions taken upon start-up of the logic controller when an I/O
expansion bus error is detected, refer to Optional I/O Expansion Modules (see page 83).
Restarting the I/O Expansion Bus

When active I/O error handling is being applied, that is, TM3 outputs set to 0 when a bus
communication error is detected, the application can request a restart of the I/O expansion bus
while the logic controller is still running (without the need for a Cold Start, Warm Start, power cycle,
or application download).
System bit %S107 is available to request restarts of the I/O expansion bus.The default value of
this bit is 0. The application can set %S107 to 1 to request a restart of the I/O expansion bus. On
detection of a rising edge of this bit, the logic controller reconfigures and restarts the I/O expansion
bus if all of the following conditions are met:
 %S106 is set to 0 (that is, I/O expansion bus activity is stopped)
 %SW118 bit 14 is set to 0 (I/O expansion bus is in error)
 At least one bit of %SW120 is set to 1 (at least one expansion module is in bus communication
error)
If %S107 is set to 1 and any of the above conditions is not met, the logic controller takes no action.
124 EIO0000003297 02/2020

Match Software and Hardware Configuration

The I/O that may be embedded in your controller is independent of the I/O that you may have
added in the form of I/O expansion. It is important that the logical I/O configuration within your
program matches the physical I/O configuration of your installation. If you add or remove any
physical I/O to or from the I/O expansion bus or, depending on the controller reference, to or from
the controller (in the form of cartridges), then you must update your application configuration. This
is also true for any field bus devices you may have in your installation. Otherwise, there is the
potential that the expansion bus or field bus no longer function while the embedded I/O that may
be present in your controller continues to operate.
WARNING
Update the configuration of your program each time you add or delete any type of I/O expansions
on your I/O bus, or you add or delete any devices on your field bus.
Presentation of the Optional Feature for I/O Expansion Modules

I/O expansion modules can be marked as optional in the configuration. The Optional module
feature provides a more flexible configuration by the acceptance of the definition of modules that
are not physically attached to the logic controller. Therefore, a single application can support
multiple physical configurations of I/O expansion modules, allowing a greater degree of scalability
without the necessity of maintaining multiple application files for the same application.
You must be fully aware of the implications and impacts of marking I/O modules as optional in your
application, both when those modules are physically absent and present when running your
machine or process. Be sure to include this feature in your risk analysis.
WARNING
Include in your risk analysis each of the variations of I/O configurations that can be realized
marking I/O expansion modules as optional, and in particular the establishment of TM3 Safety
modules (TM3S…) as optional I/O modules, and make a determination whether it is acceptable
as it relates to your application.
NOTE: For more details about this feature, refer to Optional I/O Expansion Modules (see page 83).
EIO0000003297 02/2020 125

Maximum Hardware Configuration
Introduction
The M221 Logic Controller is a control system that offers an all-in-one solution with optimized
configurations and an expandable architecture.
Local and Remote Configuration Principle

The following figure defines the local and remote configurations:
(1) Local configuration

(2) Remote configuration
M221 Logic Controller Local Configuration Architecture

Optimized local configuration and flexibility are provided by the association of:
 M221 Logic Controller
 TM3 expansion modules
Application requirements determine the architecture of your M221 Logic Controller configuration.
The following figure represents the components of a local configuration:
(B) Expansion modules (see maximum number of modules)
126 EIO0000003297 02/2020

NOTE: You cannot mount a TM2 module before any TM3 module as indicated in the following
figure:
M221 Logic Controller Remote Configuration Architecture

Optimized remote configuration and flexibility are provided by the association of:
 TM3 transmitter and receiver modules
NOTE: You cannot use TM2 modules in configurations that include the TM3 transmitter and
receiver modules.
The following figure represents the components of a remote configuration:
(1) Logic controller and modules

(C) Expansion modules (7 maximum)
EIO0000003297 02/2020 127

Maximum Number of Modules

The following table shows the maximum configuration supported:
References Maximum Type of Configuration

TM221C16• 7 TM3 / TM2 expansion Local
TM221CE16• modules
TM221C24•
TM221CE24•
TM221C40•
TM221CE40•
TM221M16R•
TM221ME16R•
TM221M16T•
TM221ME16T•
TM221M32TK
TM221ME32TK
TM3XREC1 7 TM3 expansion modules Remote
NOTE: TM3 transmitter and receiver modules are not included in a count of the maximum number of
expansion modules.
NOTE: The configuration with its TM3 and TM2 expansion modules is validated by EcoStruxure
Machine Expert - Basic software in the Configuration window taking into account the total power
consumption of the installed modules.
NOTE: In some environments, the maximum configuration populated by high consumption
modules, coupled with the maximum distance allowable between the TM3 transmitter and receiver
modules, may present bus communication issues although the EcoStruxure Machine Expert -
Basic software allows for the configuration. In such a case you will need to analyze the
consumption of the modules chosen for your configuration, as well as the minimum cable distance
required by your application, and possibly seek to optimize your choices.
128 EIO0000003297 02/2020

Current Supplied to the I/O Bus

The following table shows the maximum current supplied by the controllers to the I/O Bus:
Reference IO Bus 5 Vdc IO Bus 24 Vdc

TM221C16R 325 mA 120 mA
TM221CE16R
TM221C16T 325 mA 148 mA
TM221CE16T
TM221C16U 325 mA 148 mA
TM221CE16U
TM221C24R 520 mA 160 mA
TM221CE24R
TM221C24T 520 mA 200 mA
TM221CE24T
TM221C24U 520 mA 200 mA
TM221CE24U
TM221C40R 520 mA 240 mA
TM221CE40R
TM221C40T 520 mA 304 mA
TM221CE40T
TM221C40U 520 mA 304 mA
TM221CE40U
TM221M16R• 520 mA 460 mA
TM221ME16R•
TM221M16T• 520 mA 492 mA
TM221ME16T•
TM221M32TK 520 mA 484 mA
TM221ME32TK
NOTE: Expansion modules consume current from the 5 Vdc and 24 Vdc supplied to the I/O Bus.
Therefore, the current delivered by the logic controller to the I/O Bus defines the maximum number
of expansion modules that can be connected to the I/O Bus (validated by EcoStruxure Machine
Expert - Basic software in the Configuration window).
EIO0000003297 02/2020 129

Configuring Cartridges and Expansion Modules
Introduction
In your project, you can add the following devices to the controller:
 TMC2 Cartridges
 TM3 Digital I/O Modules
 TM3 Analog I/O Modules
 TM3 Expert I/O Modules
 TM2 Digital I/O Modules
 TM2 Analog I/O Modules
TMC2 Cartridges
For more information about cartridge configuration, refer to the following programming and
hardware guides:
Cartridge Type Hardware Guide Programming Guide

TMC2 Cartridges TMC2 Cartridges Hardware Guide TMC2 Cartridges Programming Guide
TM3 Expansion Modules

For more information about module configuration, refer to the following programming and
hardware guides of each expansion module type:
Expansion Module Type Hardware Guide Programming Guide

TM3 Digital I/O Expansion Modules TM3 Digital I/O Expansion Modules TM3 Expansion Modules
Hardware Guide Programming Guide
TM3 Analog I/O Expansion Modules TM3 Analog Modules Hardware Guide
TM3 Expert I/O Expansion Modules TM3 Expert I/O Modules Hardware
Guide
TM3 Safety Modules TM3 Safety Modules Hardware Guide
TM3 Transmitter and Receiver Modules TM3 Transmitter and Receiver
Modules Hardware Guide

For more information about module configuration, refer to the programming and hardware guides
of each expansion module type:
Expansion Module Type Hardware Guide Programming Guide

TM2 Digital I/O Modules TM2 Digital I/O Modules Hardware TM2 Expansion Modules
Guide Programming Guide
TM2 Analog I/O Modules TM2 Analog I/O Modules Hardware
Guide
130 EIO0000003297 02/2020

Modicon M221
Embedded Communication Configuration
EIO0000003297 02/2020
Chapter 6
Overview
This chapter describes how to configure the communication features of the M221 Logic Controller.

Section Topic Page
6.1 Ethernet Configuration 132
6.2 Serial Line Configuration 170
6.3 Supported Modbus Function Codes 190
6.4 State Machine Diagram for Modbus IOscanner 192
EIO0000003297 02/2020 131

Section 6.1
Ethernet Configuration

Topic Page
Configuring Ethernet Network 133
Configuring Modbus TCP or Modbus TCP IOScanner 140
Configuring EtherNet/IP 153
132 EIO0000003297 02/2020

Configuring Ethernet Network
Introduction
You can configure the TCP/IP connection to the logic controller by configuring the Ethernet
network. The Ethernet establishes a local area network (LAN) between the logic controller and
other devices. The Ethernet configuration provides you the ability to configure the IP address of
the network device.
NOTE: The controller-PC link uses the TCP/IP protocol. It is required for this protocol to be installed
on the PC.
You can obtain the IP address by the following protocols:
 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)
 Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP)
You can also specify the IP address by specifying the following addresses:
 IP address
 Subnet mask
 Gateway address
NOTE: Schneider Electric adheres to industry best practices in the development and implemen-
tation of control systems. This includes a "Defense-in-Depth" approach to secure an Industrial
Control System. This approach places the controllers behind one or more firewalls to restrict
access to authorized personnel and protocols only.
WARNING
UNAUTHENTICATED ACCESS AND SUBSEQUENT UNAUTHORIZED MACHINE
OPERATION
 Evaluate whether your environment or your machines are connected to your critical
infrastructure and, if so, take appropriate steps in terms of prevention, based on Defense-in-
Depth, before connecting the automation system to any network.
 Limit the number of devices connected to a network to the minimum necessary.
 Isolate your industrial network from other networks inside your company.
 Protect any network against unintended access by using firewalls, VPN, or other, proven
security measures.
 Monitor activities within your systems.
 Prevent subject devices from direct access or direct link by unauthorized parties or unauthen-
ticated actions.
 Prepare a recovery plan including backup of your system and process information.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 133

Ethernet Services
The logic controller supports the following services:
 Modbus TCP Server
 Modbus TCP Client
 EtherNet/IP Adapter
 Modbus TCP Slave Device
This table presents the maximum number of TCP server connections:
Connection Type Maximum Number of Connections

Server 8
Client 1
Each server based on TCP manages its own set of connections.

When a client tries to open a connection that exceeds the poll size, the logic controller closes the
oldest connection, other than the connection with EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic.
The server connections stay open as long as the logic controller stays in its present operational
state (RUNNING, STOPPED, or HALTED).
The server connections are closed when a transition is made from its present operational state
(RUNNING, STOPPED, or HALTED), except in case of power outage (because the controller does
not have time to close the connections).
The server connections can be closed when the EtherNet/IP originator or Modbus TCP Master
requests to close.
134 EIO0000003297 02/2020

This table describes how to configure the Ethernet:
Step Action
1 Click the ETH1 node in the hardware tree to display the Ethernet properties.
This figure presents the Ethernet properties in the editor area:
2 Edit the properties to configure the Ethernet.

For detailed information on the Ethernet configuration parameters, refer to the table below.
NOTE: The Security Parameters displayed depend on the functional level (see EcoStruxure
Machine Expert - Basic, Operating Guide) selected for the application.
This table describes each parameter of the Ethernet configuration:

Ethernet
Device name No any M221 (if the Displays the name of the device that is
controller used connected with the Ethernet network.
in the The characters a...z, A...Z, 0...9 and the
configuration is underscore character (_) are allowed.
M221 Logic
Controller)
(1) You can select any one option for IP addressing. Selecting any one option disables the other options.
(2) These options are enabled only if you select the option Fixed IP Address for IP addressing.
(3) w, x, y, and z are the bytes that store the address and each byte can store a value in the range 0...255.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 135


IP address by DHCP Yes(1) TRUE/FALSE FALSE Allows you to obtain the IP address from the
DHCP server on the network.
IP address by BOOTP Yes(1) TRUE/FALSE FALSE Allows you to obtain the IP address from the
Boot PROM configuration server on the
network.
Fixed IP address Yes(1) TRUE/FALSE TRUE Allows you to specify the IP address
manually for host or network interface
identification.
IP address Yes(2) w.x.y.z(3) 0.0.0.0 Allows you to specify the IP address of the
device in the Ethernet network. See Address
Classes (see page 139)
Assigning 0.0.0.0 (the default) as IP address
for the M221 Logic Controller forces the
firmware to generate an IP address from the
MAC address.
The generated IP address is
10.10.XXX.YYY, where XXX and YYY are
the decimal values of the last 2 bytes (EE.FF)
of the MAC address (AA.BB.CC.DD.EE.FF)
Example:
MAC address: 00:80:78:19:19:73
EE (19 hex) = 25 decimal)
FF (73 hex) = 155 decimal
IP address generated: 10.10.25.155.
The firmware also generates an IP address
from the MAC address if the specified IP
address is identified as being a duplicate
address on the network.
Bit 9 of system word %SW118 is set to 1 (see
System Words Description (see page 253))
and system word %SW62 is set to 1 (see
System Words Description (see page 253))
when a duplicated IP address is detected.
The MAC address of the logic controller is
stored in %SW107-%SW109 (see System
Words Description (see page 253)).
Subnet mask Yes(2) w.x.y.z(3) 0.0.0.0 Allows you to specify the address of the
subnetwork to authorize a group of devices
for data exchange. It determines which bits in
an IP address correspond to the network
address and which bits correspond to the
subnet portions of the address. See Subnet
Mask (see page 139)
136 EIO0000003297 02/2020


Gateway address Yes(2) w.x.y.z(3) 0.0.0.0 Allows you to specify the IP address of the
node (a router) on a TCP/IP network that
serves as an access point to another
network. See Gateway Address
(see page 139)
Transfer Rate No – Auto Displays the selected mode for Ethernet
speed. Auto stands for “Auto Negotiation".
Security Parameters
The security parameters allow you to enable or disable communication protocols and features.
Programming protocol Yes TRUE/FALSE TRUE Allows you to enable or disable programming
enabled via the Ethernet port.
Also enables or disables the software object
access via animation tables or HMI devices.
EtherNet/IP protocol Yes TRUE/FALSE TRUE Allows you to enable or disable the
enabled EtherNet/IP protocol to connect to a network
for data exchange.
Modbus server enabled Yes TRUE/FALSE TRUE Allows you to enable or disable the Modbus
TCP server.
As a consequence, this enables or disables
access to memory objects %M and %MW using
standard Modbus requests.
Auto discovery protocol Yes TRUE/FALSE TRUE Allows you to enable or disable the auto
enabled discovery protocol to automatically detect
devices on supported Ethernet fieldbusses.
NOTE: When a protocol listed in Security Parameters is disabled, requests from the corresponding
server type are ignored. The corresponding configuration screen remains accessible; however,
program execution is not affected.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 137

Address Management
This diagram presents the different types of address systems for the M221 Logic Controller:
NOTE: If a device programmed to use the DHCP or BOOTP addressing methods is unable to
contact its respective server, the controller uses the default IP address. It will, however, constantly
repeat its request.
The IP process restarts in the following cases:
 Controller reboot
 Ethernet cable reconnection
 Application download (if IP parameters change)
 DHCP or BOOTP server detected after a prior addressing attempt was unsuccessful or when
the DHCP address lease expires.
138 EIO0000003297 02/2020

Address Classes
The IP address is linked:
 to a device (the host)
 to the network to which the device is connected
An IP address is always coded using 4 bytes.

The distribution of these bytes between the network address and the device address may vary.This
distribution is defined by the address classes.
The different IP address classes are defined in this table:
Address Class Byte1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4

Class A 0 Network ID Host ID
Class B 1 0 Network ID Host ID
Class C 1 1 0 Network ID Host ID
Class D 1 1 1 0 Multicast Address
Class E 1 1 1 1 0 Address reserved for subsequent use
Subnet Mask
The subnet mask is used to address several physical networks with a single network address. The
mask is used to separate the subnetwork and the device address in the host ID.
The subnet address is obtained by retaining the bits of the IP address that correspond to the
positions of the mask containing 1, and replacing the others with 0.
Conversely, the subnet address of the host device is obtained by retaining the bits of the IP
address that correspond to the positions of the mask containing 0, and replacing the others with 1.
Example of a subnet address:
IP address 192 (11000000) 1 (00000001) 17 (00010001) 11 (00001011)

Subnet mask 255 (11111111) 255 (11111111) 240 (11110000) 0 (00000000)
Subnet address 192 (11000000) 1 (00000001) 16 (00010000) 0 (00000000)
NOTE: The device does not communicate on its subnetwork when there is no gateway.
Gateway Address
The gateway allows a message to be routed to a device that is not on the current network.
If there is no gateway, the gateway address is 0.0.0.0.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 139

Configuring Modbus TCP or Modbus TCP IOScanner
Introduction
You can configure the Ethernet port for Modbus TCP or Modbus TCP IOScanner as:
 Modbus mapping (see page 140)
 Client mode (see page 142)
Only one instance of IOScanner can be defined: if you configure it on a serial port, you cannot
configure it on an Ethernet port and vice versa. Refer to Configuring Modbus Serial IOScanner
(see page 180).
The maximum number of TCP and Serial IOScanner objects depends on the functional level. For
more information, refer to Maximum Number of Objects.
If a communication interruption occurs, the IOScanner stops. For more information on the status
(see page 253), refer to %SW212.
Use the following system bits to reset or suspend the Modbus TCP IOScanner (refer to System
Bits Description (see page 241)): %S112 and %S115.
Configuring Modbus TCP: Modbus Mapping

This table describes how to configure Modbus mapping:
Step Action
1 In the Configuration window, click ETH1→ Modbus TCP to display the Modbus TCP properties.
The following illustration shows the properties displayed in the editor area:
2 Select Enabled to edit the properties to configure Modbus mapping.

NOTE: If the Enabled button is grayed out, verify that the Functional Level of your application
(Programming → Tasks → Behavior tab) is at least Level 3.2.
3 Click Apply.
140 EIO0000003297 02/2020

This table describes each parameter of the Modbus mapping configuration:
Parameter Editable(1) Value Default Value Description

Enabled Yes TRUE/FALSE FALSE Select to enable Modbus mapping.
NOTE: If you deselect the Enabled check
box, and you have used network variables
in your program, they are no longer valid
and your program can no longer be
compiled. If you wish to temporarily disable
the Modbus TCP/IP services without
invalidating the use of its network variables,
you can deactivate the Security Parameters
for the protocol in the Ethernet properties
window (see page 133).
Unit ID Yes 1...247 - Specify the unit ID of the local server.
Modbus TCP requests originating from a
device with the same unit ID are sent to the
Modbus mapping table instead of the
regular Modbus server.
Output Yes 1...20 10 The number of output registers available.
registers Output registers are used to store the
(%IWM) values of Modbus TCP (%IWM) objects
(see page 229).
Input registers Yes 1...20 10 The number of input registers available.
(%QWM) Input registers are used to store the values
of Modbus TCP (%QWM) objects
(see page 227).
(1)
Only if the Modbus server enabled option is selected in the Security Parameters section of the Ethernet properties
windows (see page 138).
Modbus TCP Slave Device I/O Mapping Table

When the Modbus TCP slave device has been configured, Modbus commands sent to its unit ID
(Modbus address) access network objects (%IWM and %QWM) of the controller, instead of the regular
Modbus words accessed when the unit ID is 255. This facilitates read/write operations by a
Modbus master I/O scanner application.
If the unit ID selected in the master is not the one configured in the M221 slave (or vice versa), data
is read or written to regular Modbus words %MWx instead of network objects %IWMx and %QWMx. No
Modbus error is returned.
Access to the Modbus TCP slave I/O mapping table (%IWM/%QWM) is done with the same priority as
access to regular Modbus words (%MW).
EIO0000003297 02/2020 141

The Modbus TCP slave device responds to a subset of the Modbus function codes, but does so in
a way that differs from Modbus standards, with the purpose of exchanging data with the external
I/O scanner. The following Modbus function codes are supported by the Modbus TCP slave device:
Function Code Function Comment

Dec (Hex)
3 (3 hex) Read output register Allows the master I/O scanner to read network object %QWM of
the device
4 (4 hex) Read input registers Allows the master I/O scanner to read network object %IWM of
the device
6 (6 hex) Write single register Allows the master I/O scanner to write a single network object
%IWM of the device
16 (10 hex) Write multiple registers Allows the master I/O scanner to write to multiple network
objects %IWM of the device
23 (17 hex) Read/write multiple Allows the master I/O scanner to read network object %QWM and
registers write network object %IWM of the device
Configuring Modbus TCP: Client Mode

This table describes how to configure client mode:
Step Action
1 In the Configuration window, click ETH1→ Modbus TCP to display the Modbus TCP properties.
The following illustration shows the properties displayed in the editor area:
2 Add a remote device. Refer to Adding Remote Devices (see page 143).
3 If you want to configure Modbus TCP IOScanner, select Enable Modbus TCP IOScanner.
NOTE: If the Enable Modbus TCP IOScanner button is grayed out, verify that the Functional
Level of your application (Programming → Tasks → Behavior tab) is at least Level 6.0 and that
there is no instance configured in Serial line → Modbus Serial IOScanner.
You can configure and add remote devices for Modbus TCP even if Modbus TCP IOScanner is
enabled.
142 EIO0000003297 02/2020

Adding Remote Devices

The following table describes the parameters of Client mode: remote device table (max 16) to add
a device:
Parameter Editable(1) Value Default Value Description

IP address Yes w.x.y.z(2) – Allows you to specify the IP address of
the device to add. Also, refer to Adding
Remote Devices.
Generic Yes Selection Generic Allows you to select the type of device to
Drive add. Drive and Predefined are available
Predefined if Modbus TCP IOScanner is enabled.
NOTE: TM3 bus couplers are part of
Predefined.
(1)
Only if the Modbus server enabled option is selected in the Security Parameters section of the Ethernet
properties window (see page 133).
(2)
w, x, y, and z are the bytes that store the address and each byte can store a value in the range.
This table describes how to add a remote device:
Step Action
1 Enter the IP address in the IP address field.
2 Select Generic, Drive, or Predefined.
Drive and Predefined are only enabled if Enable Modbus TCP IOScanner is selected.
3 Click the Add button.
The Add button is disabled if:
 The maximum of 16 devices is already configured.
 The IP address is in an incorrect format.
Result: A list of remote devices that you have added appears on the screen.
4 Click Apply.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 143

This table describes each column of the table listing the remote devices:

ID No 0...15 0 Unique device identifier assigned by
EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic.
Name Yes 1...32 characters Device x (1) The name of the device.
The device
name must be
unique.
Address No – – %DRVn is used to configure the device
%DRVn(2) %DRVn in the application using Drive function
blocks.
Type No Type of the – To change the device type, you must
device remove the device from the list (by
right-clicking and choosing Delete),
then add the correct device type.
Index No 1...16 – The index number of the devices which
are remotely connected.
IP address Yes w.x.y.z(2) – Address used to identify the device
within the network. Duplicate slave
addresses are allowed.
Response timeout Yes 0...65535 10 The connection timeout duration.
(x 100 ms) The period of time (in units of 100 ms)
during which the controller attempts to
establish a TCP connection to the
remote device. At the end of this period,
if a TCP connection is still not
established, the controller stops
connection attempts until the next
connection request with an EXCH
instruction.
Reset variable Yes %Mn – Specify the address of the memory bit
to use to reset the device (re-send the
initialization requests). When the
specified memory bit is set to 1 by the
application, the device is reset.
Scanned No TRUE/FALSE TRUE Allows to see which device is
configured for
Modbus TCP IOScanner.
(1)
w, x, y, and z are the bytes that store the address and each byte can store a value in the range 0...255.
(2)
x and n are integers respectively incremented each time a device or a drive device is added.
(3)
Enabled if Modbus Serial IOScanner is not configured in Serial line node →Protocol Settings.
144 EIO0000003297 02/2020


Init Request Unit ID Yes 0...255 255 Specify the unit ID of the local device.
Modbus TCP requests originating from
a device with the same unit ID are sent
to the Modbus mapping table instead of
the regular Modbus server.
Init. requests (3) Yes – Click to display the Initialization request
assistant window (see page 146).
Channels Unit ID Yes 0...255 255 Specify the unit ID of the local device.
Modbus TCP requests originating from
a device with the same unit ID are sent
to the Modbus mapping table instead of
the regular Modbus server.
Channels (3) Yes – Click to display the Channel assistant
window (see page 148).
(1)
w, x, y, and z are the bytes that store the address and each byte can store a value in the range 0...255.
(2)
x and n are integers respectively incremented each time a device or a drive device is added.
(3)
Enabled if Modbus Serial IOScanner is not configured in Serial line node →Protocol Settings.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 145

Configuring Initialization Requests

Initialization requests are device-specific commands sent by the Modbus TCP IOScanner or
Modbus Serial IOScanner to initialize a slave device. The Modbus TCP IOScanner or Modbus
Serial IOScanner does not start cyclic data exchange with the device until all its initialization
requests have been acknowledged by the device. During the initialization phase, network objects
are not updated.
Up to 20 initialization requests can be defined for each slave device.
The Initialization request assistant window presents the defined initialization requests:
Preconfigured initialization requests are displayed with a lock symbol and a gray background.
Some parameters cannot be modified for predefined initialization requests.
According to the device type that you selected, some initialization requests may be configured.
146 EIO0000003297 02/2020

This table describes the properties of initialization requests:

ID No 0...19 0 Unique initialization request identifier.
Message type Yes, if See Supported Mbs 0x05 - Write Select the Modbus function code for
initialization Modbus Function single bit (coil) the type of exchange to use for this
request is not Codes initialization request.
predefined. (see page 191)
NOTE: If configuring a generic
device that does not support the
default Mbs 0x05 - Write single bit
(coil) request type, you must replace
the default value with a supported
request type.
Offset Yes, if 0...65535 0 Offset of the first register to initialize.
initialization
request is not
predefined.
Length Yes, if 1 for Mbs 0x05 - 1 Number of objects (memory words or
initialization Write single bit bits) to be initialized. For example, if
request is not (coil) writing multiple words with Offset = 2
predefined. 1 for Mbs 0x06 - and Length = 3, %MW2, %MW3, and
Write single word %MW4 are initialized.
(register)
128 for Mbs 0x0F -
Write multiple bits
(coils)
123 for Mbs 0x10 -
Write multiple
words (reg.)
Initialization Yes, if 0...65535 if memory 0 Value to initialize the targeted
value initialization words (registers) registers with.
request is not are being initialized
predefined. 0...1 if memory bits
(coils) are being
initialized
Comment Yes, if - Empty Optionally, type a comment to
initialization associate with this request.
request is not
predefined.
Click Add to create new initialization requests.

Select an entry then use the up arrow and down arrow buttons to change the order in which the
initialization requests are sent to the device.
When the initialization requests have been defined, click OK to save the configuration and close
the Initialization request assistant.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 147

Channel Assistant
Up to 10 channels can be defined for each slave device. Each channel represents a single Modbus
request.
NOTE: The number of objects defined (items of data read and written) is validated when you click
Apply on the properties window.
The Channel assistant window lists the defined channels:
Preconfigured channels are displayed with a lock symbol and a gray background. Some
parameters cannot be modified for predefined channels.
148 EIO0000003297 02/2020

This table describes the properties of channels:

ID No 0...19 0 Unique initialization identifier.
Name Yes 0...32 characters Device_channel0 Double-click to edit the name of the
channel.
Configuration Yes - Click to display the Channel Assistant
window.
Message type No - - The Modbus function code that was
selected in the Channel Assistant
window.
Trigger No - - The trigger type and cycle time that
was selected in the Channel
Assistant window.
R Offset No - - The READ object offset that was
window.
R Length No - - The READ object length that was
window.
Error No - - The error management policy that
management was selected in the Channel
Assistant window.
W Offset No - - The WRITE object offset that was
window.
W Length No - - The WRITE object length that was
window.
Comment Yes - Empty Optionally, type a comment to
associate with this channel.
Click Add to create a new channel.

When the channels have been defined, click OK to save the configuration and close the Channel
assistant.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 149

Configuring Channels
Use the Channel assistant window to configure channels.
The following example shows a channel configured for a Read/Write Multiple Words request
(Modbus function code 23). It reads one word from the register with offset 16#0C21 and writes two
words to the register with offset 16#0C20. This request is executed when there is a rising edge of
the defined Trigger (see table below):
150 EIO0000003297 02/2020


Name Yes 0...32 characters Device 0_Channel0 Enter a name for the channel.
Message type Yes See Supported Mbs 0x17 - Select the Modbus function code for
Modbus Function Read/Write mult. the type of exchange to use on this
Codes words (reg.) channel.
(see page 191)
Trigger Yes Cyclic Cyclic Choose the trigger type for the data
Rising edge exchange:
 Cyclic: The request is triggered
with the frequency defined in the
Cycle Time (x 10 ms) field
 Rising edge: The request is
triggered upon detection of a rising
edge of a memory bit. Specify the
address of the Memory bit to use.
Cycle time Yes 1...6000 20 Specify the periodic trigger cycle
(x 10 ms) time, in units of 10 ms.
(If Cyclic is
selected)
Memory bit Yes %Mn - Specify a memory bit address, for
(If Rising edge is example, %M8. The data exchange is
selected) triggered when a rising edge of this
memory bit is detected.
describe the purpose of the channel.
READ objects
Offset Yes 0...65535 0 Address of the first memory word
(register) or bit (coil) to read.
Length Yes See Supported - Number of memory words (registers)
Modbus Function or bits (coils) to read.
Codes
(see page 191) for
maximum length
Error Yes Set to zero Set to zero Specify how to manage the situation
management Retain last value when data can no longer be read from
the device:
 Select Set to zero to set the last
data values received to zero.
 Select Retain last value to keep
the last data values received.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 151


WRITE objects
(register) or bit (coil) to write.
Modbus Function or bits (coils) to write.
Codes
(see page 191) for
maximum length
Click OK to complete channel configuration.
152 EIO0000003297 02/2020

Configuring EtherNet/IP
Introduction
This section describes the configuration of the EtherNet/IP connection to the controller.
For further information about EtherNet/IP, refer to www.odva.org
EtherNet/IP Adapter Configuration

The following table describes how to display the EtherNet/IP Adapter configuration window:
Step Action
1 Click the EtherNet/IP adapter node that appears below the ETH1 node in the hardware tree.
This figure presents the properties of the EtherNet/IP Adapter in the editor area:
2 Select Enabled to edit the properties to configure the EtherNet/IP Adapter.

NOTE: If the Enabled button is grayed out, verify that the Functional Level of your application
(Programming → Tasks → Behavior tab) is at least Level 3.2.
For detailed information on the EtherNet/IP Adapter configuration parameters, refer to the table
below.
3 Click Apply.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 153

EtherNet/IP Adapter Properties

This table describes each parameter of the EtherNet/IP Adapter configuration:

Enabled Yes TRUE/ FALSE Select to enable the EtherNet/IP Adapter configuration.
FALSE
NOTE: If you deselect the Enabled check box, and you
have used network variables in your program, they are no
longer valid and your program can no longer be compiled.
If you wish to temporarily disable the EtherNet/IP Adapter
services without invalidating the use of its network
variables, you can deactivate the Security Parameters for
the protocol in the Ethernet properties window
(see page 133).
When disabled, by deselecting the Enabled checkbox,
configured fallback values (see page 224) of %QWE objects,
as well as symbols and comments, are lost.
Input assembly (Target -->Originator, %QWE)
Instance Yes 1...255 100 The identifier of the Input assembly.
Size (words) Yes 1...20 20 The size of the Input assembly.
Output assembly (Originator-->Target, %IWE)
Instance Yes 1...255 150 The identifier of the Output assembly.
Size (words) Yes 1...20 20 The size of the Output assembly.
NOTE: Output means output from the Scanner controller (%IWE for the Adapter).
Input means input from the Scanner controller (%QWE for the Adapter).
The following graphic presents the directionality of Input assembly and Output assembly in
EtherNet/IP communications:
154 EIO0000003297 02/2020

EDS File
A template electronic data sheet (EDS) file, M221_EDS_Model.eds, is provided in EcoStruxure
Machine Expert - Basic installation folder \Firmwares & PostConfiguration.
Modify the file as described in the user guide to be found in the same folder.
Profile
The controller supports the following objects:
Object class Class ID Cat. Number of Effect on Interface Behavior

(hex) Instances
Identity Object (see page 156) 01 1 1 Provides the identification of the
device and general information
about it.
Supports the reset service.
Message Router Object 02 1 1 Provides a message connection
(see page 159) that allows the client to address a
service to any object class or
instance residing in the device.
Assembly Object 04 2 2 Binds attributes of multiple
(see page 162) objects, which allows data to or
from each object to be sent or
received over a single connection.
Connection Manager Object 06 – 1 Manages the characteristics of a
(see page 164) communication connection.
TCP/IP Interface Object F5 1 1 Provides the mechanism to
(see page 166) configure the TCP/IP network
interface of a device.
Ethernet Link Object F6 1 1 Maintains link specific counters
(see page 168) and status information for an IEEE
802.3 communication interface.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 155

Identity Object (Class ID = 01 hex)

The following table describes the class attributes of the Identity Object (Instance 0):
Attribute ID Access Name Data Type Value Details

(hex)
1 Get Revision UINT 01 Implementation revision of the Identity
Object
2 Get Max Instances UINT 01 The largest instance number
3 Get Number of UINT 01 The number of object instances
Instances
4 Get Optional UINT, UINT [ ] 00 The first 2 bytes contain the number of
Instance optional instance attributes. Each
Attribute List following pair of bytes represents the
number of other optional instance
attributes.
6 Get Max Class UINT 07 The largest class attributes value
Attribute
7 Get Max Instance UINT 07 The largest instance attributes value
Attribute
The following table describes the Class Services:
Service Code (hex) Name Description

01 Get Attribute All Returns the value of all class attributes
0E Get Attribute Single Returns the value of the specified attribute
The following table describes the Instance Services:

05 Reset (1) Initializes EtherNet/IP component (controller reboot)
(1) Reset Service description:
When the Identity Object receives a Reset request, it:
 determines whether it can provide the type of reset requested
 responds to the request
 attempts to perform the type of reset requested
156 EIO0000003297 02/2020

The Reset common service has one specific parameter, Type of Reset (USINT), with the following
values:
Value Type of Reset

0 Reboot the controller
NOTE: This value is the default value if this parameter is omitted.
1 Reset Warm
2 Not supported
3...99 Reserved
100...199 Not used
200...255 Reserved
The following table describes the Instance attributes:

(hex)
1 Get Vendor ID UINT F3 Schneider Automation identifier
2 Get Device type UINT 0E Device is a logic controller
3 Get Product code UINT 1003 M221 Logic Controller product code
4 Get Revision Struct of – Product revision of the controller.(1)
USINT, Equivalent to the 2 low bytes of the
USINT controller version.
Example: For the M221 Logic
Controller firmware version 1.3.2.0,
the value read is 1.3
5 Get Status WORD (1) – See definition in the table below
6 Get Serial number UDINT – Serial number of the controller
XX + 3 least significant bytes of the
MAC address
7 Get Product name Struct of – Maximum length is 32.
USINT, Example: TM221CE16T
STRING
(1) Mapped in a WORD:
 MSB: minor revision (second USINT)
 LSB: major revision (first USINT)
EIO0000003297 02/2020 157

Status Description (Attribute 5):
Bit Name Description

0 Owned Unused
1 Reserved –
2 Configured TRUE indicates the device application has been reconfigured.
3 Reserved –
4...7 Extended Device  0: self-testing or undetermined
Status  1: firmware update in progress
 2: at least one invalid I/O connection error detected
 3: no I/O connections established
 4: non-volatile configuration invalid
 5: non recoverable error detected
 6: at least one I/O connection in RUNNING state
 7: at least one I/O connection established, all in idle mode
 8: reserved
 9...15: unused
8 Minor TRUE indicates the device detected an error, which, under most circumstances,
Recoverable is recoverable.
Error This type of event does not lead to a change in the device state.
9 Minor TRUE indicates the device detected an error, which, under most circumstances,
Unrecoverable is not recoverable.
Error This type of event does not lead to a change in the device state.
10 Major TRUE indicates the device detected an error, which requires the device to
Recoverable report an exception and enter into the HALT state.
Error This type of event leads to a change in the device state, but, under most
circumstances, is recoverable.
11 Major TRUE indicates the device detected an error, which requires the device to
Unrecoverable report an exception and enter into the HALT state.
Error This type of event leads to a change in the device state, but, under most
circumstances is not recoverable.
12...15 Reserved –
158 EIO0000003297 02/2020

Message Router Object (Class ID = 02 hex)

The following table describes the class attributes of the Message Router Object (Instance 0):

(hex)
1 Get Revision UINT 01 Implementation revision of the Message
Router Object
Instance
4 Get Optional Struct of UINT, – The first 2 bytes contain the number of
Instance UINT [ ] optional instance attributes. Each
Attribute List following pair of bytes represents the
number of other optional instance
attributes (from 100 to 119).
5 Get Optional UINT 00 The number and list of any implemented
Service List optional services attribute (0: no optional
services implemented)
Attribute
7 Get Max Instance UINT 77 The largest instance attributes value
Attribute
NOTE: Use instance 0 to read the Class Attributes information.


The following table describes the Instance Services (Instance 1):

EIO0000003297 02/2020 159

Attribute ID Access Name Data Type Value Description

(hex)
1 Get Implemented Object Struct of – Implemented Object list. The first 2
List UINT, UINT [ ] bytes contain the number of
implemented objects. Each following
pair of bytes represents another
implemented class number.
This list contains the following objects:
 01: Identity
 02: Message Router
 04: Assembly
 06: Connection Manager
 F5: TCP/IP
 F6: Ethernet Link
2 Get Number available UINT 08 Maximum number of concurrent CIP

(Class 1 or Class 3) connections
supported
100 Get Total incoming Class1 UINT – Total number of incoming packets
packets received received for all implicit (Class 1)
during the last second connections during the last second
101 Get Total outgoing Class1 UINT – Total number of outgoing packets sent
packets sent during the for all implicit (Class 1) connections
last second during the last second
packets received received for all explicit (Class 3)
during the last second connections during the last second
103 Get Total outgoing Class3 UDINT – Total number of outgoing packets sent
packets sent during the for all explicit (Class 3) connections
last second during the last second
104 Get Total incoming UINT – Total number of incoming unconnected
unconnected packets packets received during the last
received during the last second
second
105 Get Total outgoing UINT – Total number of outgoing unconnected
unconnected packets packets sent during the last second
sent during the last
second
106 Get Total incoming UINT – Total unconnected Class 1 or Class 3
EtherNet/IP packets packets received during the last
received during the last second
second
160 EIO0000003297 02/2020


(hex)
107 Get Total outgoing UINT – Total unconnected Class 1 or Class 3
EtherNet/IP packets packets sent during the last second
sent during the last
second
packets received received for all implicit (Class 1)
connections
109 Get Total outgoing Class1 UINT – Total number of outgoing packets sent
packets sent for all implicit (Class 1) connections
packets received received for all explicit (Class 3)
connections. This number includes the
packets that would be returned if an
error had been detected (listed in the
next two rows).
111 Get Total incoming Class3 UINT – Total number of incoming Class 3
packets Invalid packets that targeted an unsupported
Parameter Value service/class/instance/attribute/memb
er
112 Get Total incoming Class3 UINT – Total number of incoming Class 3
packets Invalid Format packets that had an invalid format
113 Get Total outgoing Class3 UINT – Total number of packets sent for all
packets sent explicit (Class 3) connections
unconnected packets packets. This number includes the
received packets that would be returned if an
error had been detected (listed in the
next two rows).
unconnected packets packets that targeted an unsupported
Invalid Parameter service/class/instance/attribute/memb
Value er
unconnected packets packets that had an invalid format
Invalid Format
117 Get Total outgoing UINT – Total number of all unconnected
unconnected packets packets sent
sent
118 Get Total incoming UINT – Total number of unconnected (Class 1)
EtherNet/IP packets or Class 3 packets received
119 Get Total outgoing UINT – Total number of unconnected (Class 1)
EtherNet/IP packets or Class 3 packets sent
EIO0000003297 02/2020 161

Assembly Object (Class ID = 04 hex)

The following table describes the class attributes of the Assembly Object (Instance 0):

(hex)
1 Get Revision UINT 02 Implementation revision of the Assembly
Object
2 Get Max Instances UINT – The largest instance number of created
objects of this class.
Example: If input instances = 200, output
instances = 100, this attribute returns 200.
3 Get Number of Instances UINT 02 The number of object instances
4 Get Optional Instance Struct of: – The first 2 bytes contain the number of
Attribute List UINT optional instance attributes. Each following
UINT [ ] pair of bytes represents the number of other
optional instance attributes.
5 Get Optional Service List UINT 00 The number and list of any implemented
optional services attribute (0: no optional
services implemented)
6 Get Max Class Attribute UINT 07 The largest class attributes value
7 Get Max Instance Attribute UINT 04 The largest instance attributes value


10 Set Attribute Single Modifies the value of the specified attribute
18 Get Member Reads a member of an Assembly object instance
19 Set Member Modifies a member of an Assembly object instance
162 EIO0000003297 02/2020

Instances Supported
Output means OUTPUT from Originator controller (= %IWE for the M221 Logic Controller).
Input means INPUT from Originator controller (= %QWE for the M221 Logic Controller).
The controller supports 2 Assemblies:
Name Instance Data Size

Input Assembly (EtherNet/IP) (%QWE) Configurable from 1...255 1...20 words
Output Assembly (EtherNet/IP) (%IWE) Configurable from 1...255 1...20 words
NOTE: The Assembly object binds together the attributes of multiple objects so that information
sent to or received from each object can be communicated over a single connection. Assembly
objects are static.
The assemblies in use can be modified through the parameter access of the network configuration
tool (RSNetWorx). You must perform a power cycle of the logic controller to register a new
assembly assignment.

1 Get Number of Member UINT 1...20 Number of members for this
Object List assembly
2 Get Member List ARRAY of – Array of 1 structure where each
Struct structure represents one member
3 Get/Set Instance Data ARRAY of – Data Set service only available for
Byte Controller output
4 Get Instance Data Size UINT 2...40 Size of data in bytes
Member list content:
Name Data Type Value Type of Reset

Member data size UINT 4...40 Member data size in bits
Member path size UINT 6 Size of the EPATH (see table below)
Member path EPATH – EPATH to the Member
EPATH is:
Word Value (hex) Semantic

0 2004 Class 4
1 24xx Instance xx, where xx is the instance value (for example: 2464 hex = instance 100)
2 xxxx See the Common Industrial Protocol Specification Volume 1 - Appendix C for the
format of this field
EIO0000003297 02/2020 163

Connection Manager Object (Class ID = 06 hex)

The following table describes the class attributes of the Assembly Object (Instance 0):

(hex)
1 Get Revision UINT 01 Implementation revision of the
Connection Manager Object
2 Get Max UINT 01 The largest instance number
Instances
Instances
4 Get Optional Struct of: – The number and list of the optional
Instance UINT attributes. The first word contains the
Attribute List UINT [ ] number of attributes to follow and each
following word contains another attribute
code.
Following optional attributes include:
 Total number of incoming connection
open requests
 The number of requests rejected
because of the non-conforming format
of the Forward Open
because of insufficient resources
because of the parameter value sent
with the Forward Open
 The number of Forward Close
requests received
requests that had an invalid format
requests that could not be matched to
an active connection
 The number of connections that have
timed out because the other side
stopped producing, or a network
disconnection occurred
Attribute
7 Get Max UINT 08 The largest instance attributes value
Instance
Attribute
164 EIO0000003297 02/2020



01 Get Attribute All Returns the value of all instance attributes
4E Forward Close Closes an existing connection
52 Unconnected Send Sends a multi-hop unconnected request
54 Forward Open Opens a new connection
The following table describes the Instance attributes (Instance 1):

1 Get Open Requests UINT – Number of Forward Open service
requests received
2 Get Open Format Rejects UINT – Number of Forward Open service
requests which were rejected due
to invalid format
3 Get Open Resource UINT – Number of Forward Open service
Rejects requests which were rejected due
to lack of resources
4 Get Open Other Rejects UINT – Number of Forward Open service
requests which were rejected for
reasons other than invalid format
or lack of resources
5 Get Close Requests UINT – Number of Forward Close service
requests received
6 Get Close Format UINT – Number of Forward Close service
Requests requests which were rejected due
to invalid format
7 Get Close Other UINT – Number of Forward Close service
Requests requests which were rejected for
reasons other than invalid format
8 Get Connection Timeouts UINT – Total number of connection
timeouts that have occurred in
connections controlled by this
Connection Manager
EIO0000003297 02/2020 165

TCP/IP Interface Object (Class ID = F5 hex)

This object provides the mechanism to configure a TCP/IP network interface device.
The following table describes the class attributes of the TCP/IP Interface Object (Instance 0):

(hex)
TCP/IP Interface Object
3 Get Number of Instance UINT 01 The number of object
instances
6 Get Max Class Attribute UINT 07 The largest class attributes
value
7 Get Max Instance Attribute UINT 06 The largest instance attributes
value

Instance Codes
Only instance 1 is supported.

0E Get Attribute Single Returns the value of the specified instance attribute
166 EIO0000003297 02/2020

The following table describes the Instance Attributes (Instance 1):

1 Get Status DWORD Bit level  0: The interface configuration attribute has not
been configured.
 1: The interface configuration contains a valid
configuration.
All other bits are reserved and set to 0.
2 Get Configuration DWORD Bit level  0: BOOTP Client
Capability  2: DHCP Client

3 Get Configuration DWORD Bit level  0: The interface configuration is valid.
 1: The interface configuration is obtained with
BOOTP.
 2: The interface configuration is obtained with
DHCP.
 3: Reserved
 4: DNS Enable

4 Get Physical Link UINT Path size Number of 16-bit words in the Path element
Padded Path Logical segments identifying the physical link object.
EPATH The path is restricted to one logical class segment
and one logical instance segment. The maximum size
is 12 bytes.
5 Get Interface UDINT IP Hexadecimal format
configuration Address Example: 55 DD DD DE = 85.221.221.222
UDINT Network Hexadecimal format
Mask Example: FF 0 0 0 = 255.0.0.0
UDINT Gateway Hexadecimal format
Address Example: 55 DD DD DE = 85.221.221.222
UDINT Primary 0: no primary name server address has been
Name configured.
UDINT Secondar 0: no secondary name server address has been
y Name configured. Otherwise, the name server address shall
be set to a valid Class A, B, or C address.
STRING Default ASCII characters. Maximum length is 16 characters.
Domain Padded to an even number of characters (padding
Name not included in length).
0: no Domain Name is configured
EIO0000003297 02/2020 167


6 Get Host Name UINT – Host name length
STRING – ASCII characters. Maximum length is 64 characters.
Padded to an even number of characters (padding
not included in length).
0: no Host Name is configured
Ethernet Link Object (Class ID = F6 hex)

This object maintains link specific counters and status information for an Ethernet 802.3
communications interface.
The following table describes the class attributes of the Ethernet Link Object (Instance 0):

(hex)
Ethernet Link Object
3 Get Number of Instances UINT 01 The number of object
instances
6 Get Max Class Attribute UINT 07 The largest class attributes
value
7 Get Max Instance Attribute UINT 03 The largest instance attribute
value

Instance Codes
Only instance 1 is supported.

0E Get Attribute Single Returns the value of the specified instance attribute
168 EIO0000003297 02/2020

The following table describes the Instance Attributes (Instance 1):

1 Get Interface Speed UDINT – Speed in Mbps (10 or 100)
2 Get Interface Flags DWORD Bit level  0: link status
 1: half/full duplex
 2...4: negotiation status
 5: manual setting / requires
reset
 6: local hardware error detected
All other bits are reserved and set

to 0.
3 Get Physical ARRAY of – This array contains the MAC
Address 6 USINT address of the product.
Format: XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX
EIO0000003297 02/2020 169

Section 6.2
Serial Line Configuration

Topic Page
Configuring Serial Lines 171
Configuring Modbus and ASCII Protocols 175
Configuring the TMH2GDB Remote Graphic Display 179
Configuring Modbus Serial IOScanner 180
Adding a Device on the Modbus Serial IOScanner 181
170 EIO0000003297 02/2020

Configuring Serial Lines
Introduction
The M221 Logic Controller references are equipped with at least 1 serial line. The controller
references without the Ethernet feature support 2 serial lines:
 SL1 (serial line)
 SL2 (serial line)
Each serial line can be configured for one of the following protocols:
 Modbus (RTU or ASCII) (see page 175). Serial lines are configured for the Modbus RTU
protocol by default.
 ASCII (see page 175)
 Modbus Serial IOScanner (see page 180). Only one instance can be configured: if configured
on one serial line, it cannot be used on the other serial line.
NOTE: Care must be taken when both the Modbus Serial IOScanner and Message (%MSG)
function blocks (see EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic, Generic Functions Library Guide) are
used in your application, as this can lead to the cancellation of on-going IOScannner
communication.
The application must be configured with a functional level (see EcoStruxure Machine Expert -
Basic, Operating Guide) of at least Level 5.0 to support the Modbus Serial IOScanner.
NOTE: The TMH2GDB Remote Graphic Display (see page 179) protocol can only be configured
on SL1.
Modem Support
A modem connection allows you to:
 Remotely access the controller for the purpose of programming and/or monitoring. In this case,
a local modem must be connected to the PC running the EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic
software, and a modem connection must be configured (see EcoStruxure Machine Expert -
 Perform data exchanges between controllers using the Modbus protocol.
 Send or receive messages with any device using the Send Receive Message function block.
 Send or receive SMS to or from mobile phone or other devices able to send or receive SMS
messages.
Serial lines support the following features to simplify modem connections:
 An initialization (Init) command to send an initial configuration to the modem. This command is
automatically sent by the controller after an application download or at power on.
 System bit %S105 to be able to send the Init command to the modem again.
 System word %SW167 to provide the status of the Init command operation.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 171


This table describes how to configure the serial line:
Step Action
1 Click the SL1 (Serial line) or SL2 (Serial line) node in the hardware tree to display the serial line
configuration.
2 Select the Protocol to use on the serial line.

For detailed information on the serial line configuration parameters, refer to the following table.
3 Click Apply.
4 In the hardware tree select the Modbus, ASCII, Display, or Modbus Serial IOScanner node that
appears below the SL1 (Serial Line) or SL2 (Serial Line) node.
172 EIO0000003297 02/2020

This table describes protocol and serial line settings of the serial line:

Protocol Settings
Protocol Yes Modbus Modbus Select a protocol from the drop-down list.
ASCII
NOTE: When using an SR2MOD03
TMH2GDB
modem and the Send Receive SMS
Modbus Serial
IOScanner function block, select the ASCII protocol.
Serial Line Settings

Baud rate Yes 1200 19200 Allows you to select the data transmission
2400 rate (bits per second) from the drop-down
4800 list.
9600
19200
38400
57600
115200
Parity Yes None Even Allows you to select the parity of the
Even transmitted data for error detection.
Odd Parity is a method of error detection in
transmission.
When parity is used with a serial port, an
extra data bit is sent with each data
character, arranged so that the number of
bits set to 1 in each character, including
the parity bit, is always odd or always
even.
If a byte is received with an incorrect
number of bits set to 1, the byte is invalid.
Data bits Yes 7 8 Allows you to select the data bit from the
(only for the 8 drop-down list.
ASCII protocol The number of data bits in each character
can be 7 (for true ASCII) or 8.
Stop bits Yes 1 1 Allows you to select the stop bit from the
2 drop-down list.
Stop bit is a bit indicating the end of a byte
of data. For electronic devices usually 1
stop bit is used. For slow devices like
electromechanical teleprinters, 2 stop bits
are used.
(1) TM221 embedded SL1 and embedded SL2 contains fixed internal high impedance bias network resistors (4.7 kΩ).
Do not use external line termination resistors (standard 150 Ω) without additional external low impedance line
polarization resistors (standard 450 Ω…650 Ω) to secure a proper idle voltage state of minimum 200 mV between the
D1 and D0 data lines.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 173


Physical medium Yes RS-485 RS-485 Allows you to select the physical medium
RS-232 for communication.
You can select either RS-485 or RS-232
medium. For the embedded serial line 2,
only RS-485 medium is available.
A physical medium in data
communications is the transmission path
over which a signal propagates. It is an
interface for interconnection of devices
with the logic controller.
NOTE: When using an SR2MOD03,
select the RS-232 option.
Polarization (for the No No No (for This parameter is disabled for the
controller) 4.7 kΩ RS232) controller(1).
4.7 kΩ (for
RS485)
Polarization (for Yes Yes No Polarization resistors are integrated in
cartridges) No cartridge modules.
This parameter allows you to switch on or
off polarization.
174 EIO0000003297 02/2020

Configuring Modbus and ASCII Protocols
Device Settings for Modbus and ASCII Protocols

This table describes the parameters when the Modbus or ASCII protocol is selected:

Device Settings
Device Yes None None Select a device from the drop-down
Generic Modem list.
SR2MOD01 Select SR2MOD03 to use the
SR2MOD03 %SEND_RECV_SMS function block.
Init command Yes - - The Init command is a set of Hayes
commands sent to the modem
connected on the serial line. It is an
ASCII string limited to 128
characters.
The logic controller uses this string
to configure and verify the modem.
The Init command is sent to the
modem:
 At power on
 If the %S105 system bit is set to 1.
%SW167 provides the status of the

initialization command sent to the
modem.
A default Init command is used by
EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic
for SR2MOD03 modem. For more
information, refer to the SR2MOD02
and SR2MOD03 Wireless Modem
User Guide.
NOTE: To use the SMS function
block, change the default Init
command to:
AT&F;E0;S0=2;Q0;V1;+WIND=0
;+CBST=0,0,1;&W;+CNMI=0,2,
0,0,0;+CSAS;+CMGF=0;+CMEE=
1 (see Recv_SMS Function Block
(see EcoStruxure Machine Expert -
Basic, Generic Functions Library
Guide)).
EIO0000003297 02/2020 175

Configuring the Modem Init Command

The Init command is a set of Hayes commands sent to initialize a modem. The default Init
command provided by EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic configuration screen is to be used with
a modem to match with the default serial line configuration for remote access, exchanges between
controllers or sending/receiving messages.
Use a PC terminal software if you need to adapt the Init command.
SR2MOD01 Hayes Command

The default Init command provided by EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic is:
ate0\n0\v1&d0&k0s0=1s89=0$EB0#p0$sb19200n0s28=1s37=13&w0
SR2MOD03 Hayes Command

The default Init command provided by EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic is:
AT&F;E0;S0=2;Q0;V1;+WIND=0;+CBST=0,0,1;&W;+CMGF=1;+CNMI=0,2,0,0,0;+CSAS
To send or receive SMS, the command must be modified to:
AT&F;E0;S0=2;Q0;V1;+WIND=0;+CBST=0,0,1;&W;+CNMI=0,2,0,0,0;+CSAS;+CMGF=0
;+CMEE=1
Protocol Settings for Modbus

This table describes the parameters when the Modbus protocol is selected:

Transmission mode Yes RTU RTU Allows you to select the protocol
ASCII transmission mode for
communication from the drop-down
list.
Select ASCII to use the
%SEND_RECV_SMS function block.
Protocol advanced parameters are
displayed based on the selected
protocol.
Addressing Yes Slave Slave Allows you to select the addressing
Master mode. You can only select either of
the Slave or Master addressing.
Selecting any of the addressing
modes clears the present one.
A device configured as a slave can
send Modbus requests.
176 EIO0000003297 02/2020


Address [1...247] Yes 1...247 1 Allows you to specify the address ID
of the slave.
NOTE: This field is displayed only
for the addressing of the slave. For
master, this field does not appear on
the screen.
Response timeout Yes 0...255 10 Defines the maximum time that the
(x 100 ms) controller waits for a response
before terminating the exchange in
error. Enter 0 to disable the timeout.
Time between frames Yes 1...255 10 The period of time between frames
(ms) (corresponds to inter-frame delay
used in other products).
NOTE: The value is subject to
adjustment to conform to Modbus
standard 3.5 character time delay.
Protocol Settings for ASCII

This table describes the parameters when the ASCII protocol is selected:

error. Enter 0 to disable the timeout.
and the function block SMS, enter 0
to disable the timeout.
Stop condition
Frame length received Yes (only if the 1...255 0 (if check box is Allows you to specify the length of
check box is not selected) the received frame.
selected) 1 (if check box is
NOTE: You can configure only one
selected)
parameter for stop condition that is
either Frame length received or
Frame received timeout (ms).
Frame received Yes (only if the 1...255 0 (if check box is Allows you to specify the timeout
timeout (ms) check box is not selected) duration for the received frame.
selected) 10 (if check box
is selected)
and the function block SMS, select
the checkbox and enter 200.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 177


Frame structure
Start character Yes (only if the 1...255 0 (if check box is Allows you to specify the start
check box is not selected) character of the frame.
selected) 58 (if check box The ASCII character corresponding
is selected) to the start character value is
displayed on right-hand side of the
value field.
First end character Yes 1...255 0 (if check box is Allows you to specify the first end
not selected) character of the frame.
10 (if check box
NOTE: To be able to disable the
is selected)
First end character, configure at
least one stop condition parameter.
The ASCII character corresponding
to the first end character value is
value field.
Second end character Yes (only if the 1...255 0 (if check box is Allows you to specify the second end
check box is not selected) character of the frame.
selected) 10 (if check box
NOTE: This field is disabled when
is selected)
the disabled First end character is
disabled.
The ASCII character corresponding
to the second end character value is
value field.
Send frame Yes TRUE/FALSE FALSE Allows you to enable or disable the
characters automatic addition of start, first end,
and second end characters (when
defined) in the frames sent.
178 EIO0000003297 02/2020

Configuring the TMH2GDB Remote Graphic Display
Protocol Settings for Display

This table describes the parameters when the Display protocol is selected:

EIO0000003297 02/2020 179

Configuring Modbus Serial IOScanner
Description
Only one instance of IOScanner can be defined: if you configure it on a Ethernet port, you cannot
configure it on an serial port. Refer to Configuring Modbus TCP IOScanner.
The maximum number of TCP and Serial IOScanner objects is:
 128, if the Functional Level < 6.0.
 512, if the Functional Level ≥ 6.0.
If a communication interruption occurs, the IOScanner stops. For more information on the status
(see page 253), refer to %SW210 or %SW211.
To reset or suspend the Modbus Serial IOScanner, refer to %S110, %S111, %S113 and %S114 in
the System Bits Description (see page 241)).
Protocol Settings
This table describes the parameters when the Modbus Serial IOScanner protocol is selected:

Transmission mode Yes RTU RTU Select the protocol transmission
ASCII mode for communication from the
drop-down list.
error.
Enter 0 to disable the timeout.
180 EIO0000003297 02/2020

Adding a Device on the Modbus Serial IOScanner
Introduction
This section describes how to add devices to be scanned by the Modbus Serial IOScanner.
You can add up to 16 Modbus slave devices.
EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic is supplied with a number of predefined device types.
Predefined device types have predefined initialization requests and preconfigured channels to
facilitate integration of the devices in the network.
A generic slave device is also provided, for which initialization requests and channels must be
configured.
Adding a Device on the Modbus Serial IOScanner

To add a device on the Modbus Serial IOScanner:
Step Action
1 Choose either:
 Drive and select one of the supported device types from the dropdown list.
 Others and select the device type from the dropdown list.
If you cannot find your device type in either list, select Generic device and configure it.
2 Click Add.
3 Configure the device as described in Device Settings (see page 181).
4 Click Apply.
Device Settings
This table describes the parameters when the Modbus Serial IOScanner protocol is selected:

ID No 0...15 0 Unique device identifier assigned by
Basic.
Name Yes 1...32 characters Device x(1) Specify a unique name for the
The device name device.
must be unique.
Address No – – %DRVn is used to configure the
%DRVn (1) (2) %DRV0 device in the application using Drive
function blocks (see Modicon M221
Logic Controller, Advanced
Functions Library Guide).
(1) x and n are integers incremented each time a device or a drive device is added.
(2) Only if Drive is selected as the device type.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 181


Type No Type of the device – The device type is not editable. To
change the device type, you must
remove the device from the list (by
right-clicking and choosing Delete),
then add the correct device type.
Slave address Yes 1...247 1 Address used to identify the device
within the network. Duplicate slave
addresses are allowed.
Response timeout Yes 0...255 10 The timeout (in milliseconds) used in
(x 100 ms) data exchanges with the device.
This value can be adapted
individually to the device and
overrides the Response timeout set
for the master in the Protocol
Settings.
Reset variable Yes %Mn – Specify the address of the memory
bit to use to reset the device (re-send
the initialization requests). When the
specified memory bit is set to 1 by
the application, the device is reset.
Init. requests Yes - Click to display the Initialization
request assistant window
(see page 183).
Channels Yes - Click to display the Channel
assistant window (see page 185).
(1)
x and n are integers incremented each time a device or a drive device is added.
(2)
Only if Drive is selected as the device type.
182 EIO0000003297 02/2020

Configuring Initialization Requests

Initialization requests are device-specific commands sent by the Modbus TCP IOScanner or
Modbus Serial IOScanner to initialize a slave device. The Modbus TCP IOScanner or Modbus
Serial IOScanner does not start cyclic data exchange with the device until all its initialization
requests have been acknowledged by the device. During the initialization phase, network objects
are not updated.
Up to 20 initialization requests can be defined for each slave device.
The Initialization request assistant window presents the defined initialization requests:
Preconfigured initialization requests are displayed with a lock symbol and a gray background.
Some parameters cannot be modified for predefined initialization requests.
According to the device type that you selected, some initialization requests may be configured.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 183

This table describes the properties of initialization requests:

ID No 0...19 0 Unique initialization request identifier.
Message type Yes, if See Supported Mbs 0x05 - Write Select the Modbus function code for
initialization Modbus Function single bit (coil) the type of exchange to use for this
request is not Codes initialization request.
predefined. (see page 191)
NOTE: If configuring a generic
device that does not support the
default Mbs 0x05 - Write single bit
(coil) request type, you must replace
the default value with a supported
request type.
Offset Yes, if 0...65535 0 Offset of the first register to initialize.
initialization
request is not
predefined.
Length Yes, if 1 for Mbs 0x05 - 1 Number of objects (memory words or
initialization Write single bit bits) to be initialized. For example, if
request is not (coil) writing multiple words with Offset = 2
predefined. 1 for Mbs 0x06 - and Length = 3, %MW2, %MW3, and
Write single word %MW4 are initialized.
(register)
128 for Mbs 0x0F -
Write multiple bits
(coils)
123 for Mbs 0x10 -
Write multiple
words (reg.)
Initialization Yes, if 0...65535 if memory 0 Value to initialize the targeted
value initialization words (registers) registers with.
request is not are being initialized
predefined. 0...1 if memory bits
(coils) are being
initialized
Comment Yes, if - Empty Optionally, type a comment to
initialization associate with this request.
request is not
predefined.
Click Add to create new initialization requests.

Select an entry then use the up arrow and down arrow buttons to change the order in which the
initialization requests are sent to the device.
When the initialization requests have been defined, click OK to save the configuration and close
the Initialization request assistant.
184 EIO0000003297 02/2020

Channel Assistant
Up to 10 channels can be defined for each slave device. Each channel represents a single Modbus
request.
NOTE: The number of objects defined (items of data read and written) is validated when you click
Apply on the properties window.
The Channel assistant window lists the defined channels:
EIO0000003297 02/2020 185

Preconfigured channels are displayed with a lock symbol and a gray background. Some
parameters cannot be modified for predefined channels.

ID No 0...19 0 Unique initialization identifier.
Name Yes 0...32 characters Device_channel0 Double-click to edit the name of the
channel.
Configuration Yes - Click to display the Channel Assistant
window.
Message type No - - The Modbus function code that was
window.
Trigger No - - The trigger type and cycle time that
was selected in the Channel
Assistant window.
R Offset No - - The READ object offset that was
window.
R Length No - - The READ object length that was
window.
Error No - - The error management policy that
management was selected in the Channel
Assistant window.
W Offset No - - The WRITE object offset that was
window.
W Length No - - The WRITE object length that was
window.
associate with this channel.
Click Add to create a new channel.

When the channels have been defined, click OK to save the configuration and close the Channel
assistant.
186 EIO0000003297 02/2020

Configuring Channels
Use the Channel assistant window to configure channels.
The following example shows a channel configured for a Read/Write Multiple Words request
(Modbus function code 23). It reads one word from the register with offset 16#0C21 and writes two
words to the register with offset 16#0C20. This request is executed when there is a rising edge of
the defined Trigger (see table below):
EIO0000003297 02/2020 187


Name Yes 0...32 characters Device 0_Channel0 Enter a name for the channel.
Message type Yes See Supported Mbs 0x17 - Select the Modbus function code for
Modbus Function Read/Write mult. the type of exchange to use on this
Codes words (reg.) channel.
(see page 191)
Trigger Yes Cyclic Cyclic Choose the trigger type for the data
Rising edge exchange:
 Cyclic: The request is triggered
with the frequency defined in the
Cycle Time (x 10 ms) field
 Rising edge: The request is
triggered upon detection of a rising
edge of a memory bit. Specify the
address of the Memory bit to use.
Cycle time (x 10 Yes 1...6000 20 Specify the periodic trigger cycle
ms) time, in units of 10 ms.
(If Cyclic is
selected)
Memory bit Yes %Mn - Specify a memory bit address, for
(If Rising edge is example, %M8. The data exchange is
selected) triggered when a rising edge of this
memory bit is detected.
describe the purpose of the channel.
READ objects
(register) or bit (coil) to read.
Modbus Function or bits (coils) to read.
Codes
(see page 191) for
maximum length
Error Yes Set to zero Set to zero Specify how to manage the situation
management Retain last value when data can no longer be read from
the device:
 Select Set to zero to set the last
data values received to zero.
 Select Retain last value to keep
the last data values received.
188 EIO0000003297 02/2020


WRITE objects
(register) or bit (coil) to write.
Modbus Function or bits (coils) to write.
Codes
(see page 191) for
maximum length
Click OK to complete channel configuration.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 189

Section 6.3
Supported Modbus Function Codes
Presentation
This section lists the supported Modbus function codes and their effect on controller memory
variables for:
 Modbus Serial (see page 190)
 Modbus Serial IOScanner (see page 191)
 Modbus TCP (see page 191)
 Modbus TCP IOScanner (see page 191)
Modbus Serial
The following Modbus requests are supported:
Supported Modbus Supported Sub- Description

Function Code Dec (Hex) Function Code
1 (1 hex) or 2 (2 hex) – Read multiple internal bits %M
3 (3 hex) or 4 (4 hex) – Read multiple internal registers %MW
5 (5 hex) – Write single internal bit %M
6 (6 hex) – Write single internal register %MW
8 (8 hex) 0 (0 hex), 10 Diagnostics
(0A hex)...18 (12 hex)
15 (0F hex) – Write multiple internal bits %M
16 (10 hex) – Write multiple internal registers %MW
23 (17 hex) – Read/write multiple internal registers %MW
43 (2B hex) 14 (0E hex) Read device identification (regular service)
NOTE:
The impact of Modbus function codes used by a master M221 Logic Controller depends on the
slave device type. In the major types of slave device:
 Internal bit means %M
 Input bit means %I
 Internal register means %MW
 Input register means %IW
190 EIO0000003297 02/2020

Depending on the type of slave and the slave address, an internal bit should be a %M or %Q; an
input bit should be a %I or %S, an input register should be a %IW or a %SW and an internal register
should be a %MW or a %QW.
For more details, refer to the documentation of the slave device.
Modbus Serial IOScanner and Modbus TCP IOScanner

This table lists the Modbus function codes supported by the Modbus Serial IOScanner and
Modbus TCP IOScanner:
Function Code Dec Description Available For Maximum

(Hex) Configuration Length (Bits)
1 (1 hex) Read multiple bits (coils) Channel 128
2 (2 hex) Read multiple bits (discrete inputs) Channel 128
3 (3 hex) Read multiple words (holding registers) Channel 125
4 (4 hex) Read multiple words (input registers) Channel 125
5 (5 hex) Write single bit (coil) Channel 1
Initialization Value
(default message type
for initialization
values)
6 (6 hex) Write single word (register) Channel 1
15 (0F hex) Write multiple bits (coils) Channel 128
16 (10 hex) Write multiple words (registers) Channel 123
23 (17 hex) Read/write multiple words (registers) Channel (default 125 (read)
message type for 121 (write)
channel configuration)
Modbus Mapping Table for Modbus TCP

Modbus TCP slave devices support a subset of the Modbus function codes. Function codes
originating from a Modbus master with matching unit ID are directed to the Modbus mapping table
and access network objects (%IWM and %QWM) of the controller. Refer to Modbus TCP Slave
Device I/O Mapping Table (see page 141).
EIO0000003297 02/2020 191

Section 6.4
State Machine Diagram for Modbus IOscanner
Description
The following graphic shows the states of the Modbus IOScanner:
192 EIO0000003297 02/2020

The following table displays the system objects for each IOScanner position:
s
Object Description SL1 SL2 Ethernet

State of the IOScanner %SW210 %SW211 %SW212
IoScanReset %S110 %S111 %S112
IoScanSuspend %S113 %S114 %S115
IoScanResetDev %Mx defined in the device configuration
EIO0000003297 02/2020 193

194 EIO0000003297 02/2020

Modicon M221
SD Card
EIO0000003297 02/2020
Chapter 7
SD Card
SD Card
Introduction
The Modicon M221 Logic Controller allows file transfers with an SD card.
This chapter describes how to manage Modicon M221 Logic Controller files with an SD card.
You can use the SD card when you want to store data. Refer to Data Logging.

Topic Page
File Management Operations 196
SD Card Supported File Types 198
Clone Management 200
Firmware Management 202
Application Management 206
Post Configuration Management 208
Error Log Management 210
Memory Management: Backing Up and Restoring Controller Memory 213
EIO0000003297 02/2020 195

SD Card
File Management Operations
Introduction
 Firmware management (see page 202): download firmware directly to the logic controller, and
load firmware to the Remote Graphic Display
 Memory management (see page 213): Back up and restore memory objects of the controller
NOTE:
 Logic controller logic solving and services execution continues during file transfers.
 Certain commands require a power cycle of the logic controller. See the description of the
commands for more information.
 The Modicon M221 Logic Controller accepts only SD cards formatted in FAT or FAT32.
With the use of the SD card, powerful operations can be automatically conducted affecting the
behavior of your logic controller and resident application. Care must be taken when inserting an
SD card into the controller; you must be aware of the affect that the contents of the SD card will
have on your logic controller.
NOTE: File management with SD card uses script files. These scripts can be automatically created
with the Memory Management task (see EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic, Operating Guide).
WARNING
 You must have operational knowledge of your machine or process before connecting an SD
card to your logic controller.
 Ensure that guards are in place so that any potential affect of the contents of the SD card will
not cause injury to personnel or damage to equipment.
196 EIO0000003297 02/2020

SD Card
If you remove power to the device, or there is a power outage or communication interruption during
the transfer of the application, your device may become inoperative. If a communication
interruption or a power outage occurs, reattempt the transfer. If there is a power outage or
communication interruption during a firmware update, or if an invalid firmware is used, your device
will become inoperative. In this case, use a valid firmware and reattempt the firmware update.
NOTICE
INOPERABLE EQUIPMENT
 Do not interrupt the transfer of the application program or a firmware change once the transfer
has begun.
 Re-initiate the transfer if the transfer is interrupted for any reason.
 Do not attempt to place the device into service until the file transfer has completed
successfully.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 197

SD Card
SD Card Supported File Types
Introduction
This table lists the file locations and types of file that can be managed:
SD card folder Description Default file name

/ Script file Script.cmd
/ Script log Script.log
/disp/ Remote Graphic Display firmware file TMH2GDB.mfw
/sys/os Logic controller firmware file M221.mfw
/TM3 TM3 analog expansion modules firmware TM3_Ana.mfw
/usr/app Application file *.smbk
/usr/cfg Post configuration file Machine.cfg
/usr/mem Memory back up file Memories.csv
/sys/log Detected error log file PlcLog.csv
Script File Commands

A script file is a text file stored in the root directory of the SD card containing commands to manage
exchanges with the controller. Script files must be encoded in ANSI format.
This table describes the supported script commands:
Command Description
Download Download a file from the SD card to the controller.
Upload Upload files contained in controller memory to the SD
card.
Delete Delete files contained in a controller.
198 EIO0000003297 02/2020

SD Card
Script File Examples

Download commands:
Download "/usr/cfg"
Download "/sys/os/M221.mfw"
Download "/disp/TMH2GDB.mfw"
Upload commands:
Upload "/usr/app/*"
Upload "/usr/cfg/Machine.cfg"
Delete commands:
Delete "/usr/app/*"
Delete "/sys/log/PlcLog.csv"
NOTE: Post configuration files specified in Upload or Delete commands must have the extension
.cfg or .CFG.
If no post configuration file is specified, or the specified file name does not exist, the default file
name Machine.cfg is assumed.
Script Log
A script.log file is automatically created in the SD card root directory after script operations.
The status of the script operations can be verified reading this file.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 199

SD Card
Clone Management
Cloning
Cloning allows you to automatically back up the application, firmware, and post configuration (if it
exists) of the Modicon M221 Logic Controller to the SD card.
The SD card can then be used to later restore the firmware, application, and post configuration (if
it exists) to the logic controller, or copy them to another logic controller with the same reference.
Before cloning a controller, the M221 Logic Controller verifies whether the application is copy-
protected or not. For details, refer to Password Protecting an Application (see EcoStruxure
NOTE:
 The SD card must be empty and correctly formatted to perform this procedure.
 The SD card name must be different from DATA, refer to Data Logging.
 The detected error log and data memory are not cloned.
 If the application is password-protected, the clone operation is blocked (the SD LED is flashing).
Creating a Clone SD Card

This procedure describes how to copy the application, firmware, and post configuration (if it exists)
from the controller to an SD card:
Step Action
1 Format an SD card on the PC.
2 Insert the SD card into the controller.
Result: The clone operation starts automatically and the SD LED is illuminated.
3 Wait until the end of the operation (until the SD LED is off or flashing).
If an error is detected, the SD LED flashes and the detected error is logged in Script.log file.
NOTE: The clone operation lasts 2 or 3 minutes. The clone operation has a low priority in order to
minimize impact on the user logic and communication performance of the logic controller.
Depending on the amount of free time in your program, the operation may require more time to
complete if the logic controller is in RUNNING state compared to the STOPPED state.
4 Remove the SD card from the controller.
200 EIO0000003297 02/2020

SD Card
Restoring or Copying from a Clone SD Card

This procedure describes how to download the application, firmware, and post configuration (if it
exists) stored in the SD card to your controller:
Step Action
1 Remove power from the controller.
2 Insert the SD card into the controller.
3 Restore power to the controller.
Result: The clone operation is in progress.
NOTE: The SD LED is turned on during the operation.
If an error is detected, the SD and ERR LEDs flash and the detected error is logged in
Script.log file.
5 Remove the SD card to restart the controller.
NOTE: Downloading a cloned application to the controller first removes the existing application
from controller memory, regardless of any user access-rights that may be enabled in the target
controller.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 201

SD Card
Firmware Management
Overview
You can use an SD card to download firmware updates directly to the logic controller, a Remote
Graphic Display, or TM3 analog expansion modules.
Refer to Controller States and Behavior (see page 54) for information on the logic controller
operating states and status of the LEDs.
To perform firmware management, the SD card name must be different from DATA, refer to Data
Logging.
Downloading Firmware to the Controller

This table describes how to download a firmware to the logic controller using an SD card:
Step Action
2 Insert an empty SD card into the PC that is running EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic.
3 Create a file called script.cmd in the SD card root directory.
4 Edit the file and insert the following command:
Download "/sys/os"
5 Create the folder path \sys\os in the SD card root directory and copy the firmware file in the os
folder:
NOTE: A firmware file example and the script are available in the folder Firmwares &
PostConfiguration\M221\ of the EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic installation folder.
The firmware file name for the M221 Logic Controller is M221.mfw.
6 Remove the SD card from the PC and insert it into the SD card slot of the logic controller.
Result: Copying of the firmware file begins. During the operation, the SD system LED on the logic
controller is illuminated.
NOTE: Avoid removing power from the logic controller while the operation is in progress.
Script.log file.
9 Remove the SD card.
10 Reconnect the USB programming cable to the logic controller and login to the logic controller with
the EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic software.
202 EIO0000003297 02/2020

SD Card
Downloading Firmware to the Remote Graphic Display

NOTE: Before downloading, verify whether the firmware version to be installed is compatible with
the installed EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic software version and the logic controller firmware
version. Refer to Compatibility of the Remote Graphic Display (see Modicon TMH2GDB, Remote
Graphic Display, User Guide)
This table describes how to download a firmware to the Remote Graphic Display using an SD card:
Step Action
1 Apply power to the logic controller.
2 Connect the Remote Graphic Display to the logic controller (see Modicon TMH2GDB, Remote Graphic
Display, User Guide).
Download "/disp/TMH2GDB.mfw"
6 Create the folder path /disp/ in the SD card root directory and copy the firmware file in the disp folder:
NOTE: The firmware file and an example script are available in the folder Firmwares &
PostConfiguration\TMH2GDB\ of the EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic installation folder.
The firmware file name for the Remote Graphic Display is TMH2GDB.mfw.
7 Remove the SD card from the PC and insert it into the SD card slot of the M221 Logic Controller.
Result: The logic controller begins transferring the firmware file from the SD card to the Remote Graphic
Display. During this operation:
 the message File Transfer is displayed on the Remote Graphic Display
 the SD system LED on the M221 Logic Controller is illuminated
 system word %SW182 is set to 5 (Display firmware transfer in progress)
NOTE: Do not disconnect the Remote Graphic Display or remove power from the M221 Logic Controller
while the operation is in progress. The firmware update takes 5 to 6 minutes.
If an error is detected, the SD and ERR LEDs flash and the detected error is logged in Script.log file.
NOTE: Restoring the file system on the Remote Graphic Display (red backlight) is part of the process.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 203

SD Card
Downloading Firmware to TM3 Analog Expansion Modules

The firmware can be updated in TM3 analog expansion modules that have a firmware version
greater than or equal to 26. If necessary, the version of firmware can be confirmed using
Firmware updates are performed using a script file on an SD card. When the SD card is inserted
in the SD card slot of the M221 Logic Controller, the logic controller updates the firmware of the
TM3 analog expansion modules on the I/O bus, including those that are:
 Connected remotely, using a TM3 Transmitter/Receiver module
 In configurations comprising a mix of TM3 and TM2 expansion modules.
This table describes how to download a firmware to one or more TM3 expansion modules using
an SD card:
Step Action
1 Apply power to the controller.
2 Ensure that the controller is in the EMPTY state by deleting the application in the controller. You
can do this with EcoStruxure Machine Expert by using one of the following script commands:
Delete "usr/*"
Delete "usr/app"
3 Insert an empty SD card into the PC.
Download "/TM3/<filename>/*"
NOTE: <filename> is the file name of the firmware you wish to update. The asterisk signifies
that all modules will be updated.
To download the firmware to one specific TM3 expansion module, replace the asterisk with the
position of the expansion module in the configuration. For example, to specify the module at
position 4:
Download "/TM3/<filename>/4"
6 Create the folder path /TM3/ in the SD card root directory and copy the firmware file to the TM3
folder.
NOTE: A firmware file (the firmware file valid at the time of the installation of EcoStruxure
Machine Expert) and an example script are available in the folder Firmwares &
PostConfiguration\TM3\ of the EcoStruxure Machine Expert installation folder.
204 EIO0000003297 02/2020

SD Card
Step Action
7 Remove the SD card from the PC and insert it into the SD card slot of the controller.
Result: The controller begins transferring the firmware file from the SD card to the updatable
TM3 expansion modules or to the one module specified in step 5. During this operation, the SD
system LED on the controller is illuminated.
NOTE: The firmware update takes 10 to 15 seconds for each expansion module being updated.
Do not remove power from the controller, or remove the SD card, while the operation is in
progress. Otherwise, the firmware update may be unsuccessful and the modules may no longer
function correctly. In this case, run the Recovery Procedure (see Modicon TM3 (EcoStruxure
Machine Expert - Basic), Expansion Modules Configuration, Programming Guide) to reinitialize
the firmware on the modules.
Script.log file.
If you remove power to the device, or there is a power outage or communication interruption during
the transfer of the application, your device may become inoperative. If a communication
interruption or a power outage occurs, reattempt the transfer. If there is a power outage or
communication interruption during a firmware update, or if an invalid firmware is used, your device
will become inoperative. In this case, use a valid firmware and reattempt the firmware update.
NOTICE
 Do not interrupt the transfer of the application program or a firmware change once the transfer
has begun.
 Re-initiate the transfer if the transfer is interrupted for any reason.
 Do not attempt to place the device into service until the file transfer has completed
successfully.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 205

SD Card
Application Management
Overview
You can use an SD card to back up and restore your controller application, or copy it to another
controller with the same reference.
To perform application management, the SD card name must be different from DATA, refer to Data
Logging.
Backing Up an Application
This table describes how to back up the controller application on the SD card:
Step Action
1 Create a script.cmd file with a text editor on your PC.
2 Edit the file and insert the following line:
Upload "/usr/app"
3 Copy the script file to the root folder of the SD card.
4 Insert the prepared SD card in the controller.
Result: Copying of the application file begins. During the operation, the SD system LED on the
logic controller is illuminated.
NOTE: The application backup process has a low priority in order to minimize impact on the
program and communication performance of the logic controller. Depending on the amount of
free time in your program, the operation may take considerably longer to complete if the logic
controller is in RUNNING state compared to the STOPPED state.
Script.log file.
Result: The application file (*.smbk) is saved on the SD card.
206 EIO0000003297 02/2020

SD Card
Restoring an Application or Copying an Application to Another Controller

This table describes how to transfer the controller application from the SD card to the controller:
Step Action
1 Take an SD card previously created and edit the script.cmd file in the root folder of the SD
card with a text editor.
2 Replace the content of the script by the following line:
Download "/usr/app"
Result: Copying of the application file begins. During the operation, the SD system LED on the
Script.log file.
7 Remove the SD card to restart the controller.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 207

SD Card
Post Configuration Management
Overview
You can use an SD card to add, change, or delete the post configuration file of your controller.
To perform post configuration management, the SD card name must be different from DATA, refer
to Data Logging.
Adding or Changing a Post Configuration

This table describes how to add or change the controller post configuration:
Step Action
1 Create a file called script.cmd.
Download "/usr/cfg"
3 Copy the post configuration file (Machine.cfg) to the folder \usr\cfg and the script file to the
root folder of the SD card:
NOTE: A post configuration file example and the associated script are available in the directory
Firmwares & PostConfiguration\PostConfiguration\add_change\ of the
EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic installation directory.
4 If necessary, edit the Machine.cfg file to configure your post configuration parameters.
Result: Downloading of the post configuration file begins. During the operation, the SD system
LED on the logic controller is illuminated.
NOTE: Before the download the file format is verified, as well as if all of the channels,
parameters, and values configured are valid; in case of detected error the download is aborted.
NOTE: If a post configuration parameter is incompatible with the physical configuration, it is
ignored.
Script.log file.
7 Do a power cycle or an initialization command to apply the new post configuration file.
208 EIO0000003297 02/2020

SD Card
Reading a Post Configuration File

This table describes how to read the post configuration file of the controller:
Step Action
Upload "/usr/cfg"
Result: Copying of the post configuration file begins. During the operation, the SD system
LED on the logic controller is illuminated.
NOTE: The application backup process has a low priority to minimize impact on the
program and communication performance of the logic controller. Depending on the amount
of free time in your program, the operation may take considerably longer to complete, if the
logic controller is in RUNNING state compared to the STOPPED state.
Script.log file.
Result: The post configuration file is saved on the SD card.
Removing a Post Configuration File

This table describes how to remove the post configuration file of the controller:
Step Action
2 Create a file called script.cmd.
Delete "/usr/cfg"
4 Copy the script file available in the directory Firmwares &
PostConfiguration\PostConfiguration\remove\ of the EcoStruxure Machine Expert
- Basic installation directory to the root directory of the SD card.
Result: The post configuration file is removed. During the operation, the SD system LED on the
Script.log file.
7 Do a power cycle or an initialization command to apply the application parameters.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 209

SD Card
Error Log Management
Overview
You can use the SD card to back up or delete the error log file of the logic controller.
To perform error log management, the SD card name must be different from DATA, refer to Data
Logging.
Backing Up the Error Log

This table describes how to back up the logic controller error log file on the SD card:
Step Action
Upload "/sys/log"
4 Insert the prepared SD card in the logic controller.
Result: Transfer of the error log file begins. During the operation, the SD system LED on the logic
Script.log file.
Result: The error log file (PlcLog.csv) is saved on the SD card.
Deleting the Error Log

This table describes how to delete the error log file in the logic controller:
Step Action
Delete "/sys/log"
4 Insert the prepared SD card in the logic controller.
Result: Deleting of the error log file begins. During the operation, the SD system LED on the logic
Script.log file.
Result: The error log file (PlcLog.csv) is deleted from the logic controller.
210 EIO0000003297 02/2020

SD Card
Error Log Format

The logic controller provides an error list containing the last 10 detected errors in the log memory.
Each error entry into the error log file is composed of the following parts:
 Date and time
 Level
 Context
 Error code
 Priority (internal use only)
After an upload through the SD card, the code is represented as in the example below:
02/06/14, 12:04:01, 0x0111000100
This table describes the meaning of the hexadecimal error representation:
Group Error code Error Description Result

(hex)
General 08000011xx Invalid hardware calibration parameters Ethernet channel is inoperative
%SW118.bit10 set to 0
ERR LED flashes
Operating system 0F01xxxxxx Operating system error detected Transition to HALTED state
Memory 0F030009xx Internal memory allocation error Transition to HALTED state
management detected
SD card 010C001Bxx Error while accessing an SD card; the The SD card operation is canceled.
operation exceeded an internal timeout
(3000 ms).
Watchdog timer 0104000Axx Logic controller resource utilization Watchdog timeout signaled:
greater than 80% - first detection %S11 set to 1
ERR LED flashes
0804000Bxx Logic controller resource utilization Transition to HALTED state
greater than 80% - second consecutive
detection
0804000Cxx Task watchdog timer in master task Transition to HALTED state
0804000Dxx Task watchdog timer in periodic task Transition to HALTED state
Battery 0105000Exx Battery is depleted Depleted battery signaled:
%S75 set to 1
BAT LED illuminated
RTC 01060012xx RTC is invalid Invalid RTC signaled:
%SW118.bit12 set to zero
%S51 set to 1
User application 0807000Fxx Application is not compatible with Transition to EMPTY state
firmware
08070010xx Checksum error detected Transition to EMPTY state
EIO0000003297 02/2020 211

SD Card
Group Error code Error Description Result

(hex)
Ethernet 010B0014xx Duplicate IP address detected Duplicate IP signaled:
%SW62 set to 1
%SW118.bit9 set to 0
ERR LED flashes
Embedded I/O 010D0013xx Short-circuit detected on protected Over-current signaled:
output %SW139 set to 1 (depending on the
output block)
ERR LED flashes
Read non-volatile 01110000xx Read error detected - file not found Unsuccessful read operation
memory 01110001xx Read error detected - incorrect logic
controller type
01110002xx Read error detected - incorrect header
01110003xx Read error detected - incorrect area
descriptor
01110004xx Read error detected - incorrect area
descriptor size
Write non-volatile 01120002xx Write error detected - incorrect header Unsuccessful write operation
memory 01120004xx Write error detected - incorrect area
descriptor size
01120005xx Write error detected - unsuccessful
erase
01120006xx Write error detected - incorrect header
size
Persistent variable 01130007xx Checksum error detected in persistent Persistent variables cannot be
variables restored
01130008xx Size error detected in persistent
variables
Ethernet IP 01140012xx Unsuccessful Ethernet IP variable Variable cannot be created,
creation unsuccessful operation
212 EIO0000003297 02/2020

SD Card
Memory Management: Backing Up and Restoring Controller Memory
Overview
You can use an SD card to back up and restore controller memory objects, or copy the memory
objects to another controller.
Backing Up Controller Memory
Step Action
Upload "/usr/mem"
Result: Copying of the memory begins. During the operation, the SD system LED on the logic
NOTE: The memory backup process has a low priority to minimize impact on the program and
communication performance of the logic controller. Depending on the amount of free time in your
program, the operation may take considerably longer to complete if the logic controller is in
RUNNING state compared to the STOPPED state.
Script.log file.
Result: The memory file (*.csv) is saved on the SD card.
Restoring Controller Memory or Copying to Another Controller
Step Action
1 Edit the script.cmd file in the root folder of the SD card with a text editor.
2 Replace the content of the script by the following line:
Download "/usr/mem"
Result: Copying of the memory file begins. During the operation, the SD system LED on the logic
Script.log file.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 213

SD Card
214 EIO0000003297 02/2020

Modicon M221
Programming the M221 Logic Controller
EIO0000003297 02/2020
Part III
Overview
This part provides information about the system and I/O objects specific to the M221 Logic
Controller. These objects are displayed in the Programming tab.
For descriptions of all other objects, refer to EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic Generic
Functions Library Guide.

8 I/O Objects 217
9 Network Objects 223
10 System Objects 239
EIO0000003297 02/2020 215

216 EIO0000003297 02/2020

Modicon M221
I/O Objects
EIO0000003297 02/2020
Chapter 8
I/O Objects
I/O Objects

Topic Page
Digital Inputs (%I) 218
Digital Outputs (%Q) 219
Analog Inputs (%IW) 220
Analog Outputs (%QW) 222
EIO0000003297 02/2020 217

I/O Objects
Digital Inputs (%I)
Introduction
Digital input bit objects are the image of digital inputs on the logic controller.
Displaying Digital Input Properties

Follow these steps to display properties of the digital inputs:
Step Action
1 Select the Tools tab in the left-hand area of the Programming window.
2 Click I/O objects → Digital inputs.
Result: Digital input properties appear on the screen.
Digital Inputs Properties

This table describes each property of the digital input:

Used No True/False False Indicates whether the input channel is being
referenced in a program.
Address No %I0.i – Displays the address of the digital input on
the controller, where i represents the
channel number.
If the controller has n digital input channels,
the value of i is given as 0...n-1.
For example, %I0.2 is the digital input at the
digital input channel number 2 of the logic
controller.
Symbol Yes – – The symbol associated with this address.
Double-click in the Symbol column and type
the name of the symbol to associate with this
input.
If a symbol already exists, you can right-click
in the Symbol column and choose Search
and Replace to find and replace
occurrences of this symbol throughout the
program and/or program comments.
Comment Yes – – A comment associated with this address.
Double-click in the Comment column and
type an optional comment to associate with
this channel.
218 EIO0000003297 02/2020

I/O Objects
Digital Outputs (%Q)
Introduction
Digital output bit objects are the image of digital outputs on the logic controller.
Displaying Digital Output Properties

Follow these steps to display properties of the digital outputs:
Step Action
2 Click I/O objects → Digital outputs.
Result: Digital output properties appear on the screen.
Digital Outputs Properties

This table describes each property of the digital output:

Used No True/False False Indicates whether the output channel is
being referenced in a program.
Address No %Q0.i – Displays the address of the digital output on
the controller, where i represents the
channel number.
If the controller has n digital output channels,
For example, %Q0.3 is the digital output at
the digital output channel number 3 of the
logic controller.
output.
Comment Yes – – The comment associated with this address.
this channel.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 219

I/O Objects
Analog Inputs (%IW)
Introduction
Analog input word objects are the digital values of an analog signal connected to the logic
controller.
Two 0-10V analog inputs are embedded in the logic controller. The embedded analog inputs use
a 10 bits resolution converter so that each increment is approximately 10 mV (10V/210-1). Once
the system detects the value 1023, the channel is considered to be saturated.
Refer to M221 Hardware Guide (see Modicon M221 Logic Controller, Hardware Guide) and TMC2
Cartridges Hardware Guide used in the configuration for more details.
Displaying Analog Input Properties

Follow these steps to display properties of the analog inputs:
Step Action
2 Click I/O objects → Analog inputs.
Result: Analog input properties appear on the screen.
220 EIO0000003297 02/2020

I/O Objects
Analog Inputs Properties

This table describes each property of the analog input:

Used No True/False False Indicates whether the input channel is being
Address No %IW0.i – Displays the address of the embedded
analog input on the controller, where i
represents the channel number.
If the controller has n analog input channels,
For example, %IW0.1 is the analog input at
the analog input channel number 1 of the
logic controller.
%IW0.x0y – Displays the address of the analog output
channel on the cartridge, where x is the
cartridge number and and y is the channel
number.
input.
type a comment to associate with this
address.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 221

I/O Objects
Analog Outputs (%QW)
Introduction
Analog output word objects are the digital values of the analog signals recieved from the logic
controller using cartridges.
Two 0-10 V analog outputs and two 4-20 mA analog outputs are embedded in the cartridges
TMC2AQ2C and TMC2AQ2V respectively.
Refer to TMC2 Cartridges Hardware Guide used in the configuration for more details.
Displaying Analog Output Properties

Follow these steps to display properties of the analog outputs:
Step Action
2 Click I/O objects → Analog outputs.
Result: Analog output properties appear on the screen.
Analog Outputs Properties

This table describes each property of the analog output:

Used No True/False False Indicates whether the output channel is
being referenced in a program.
Address No %QW0.x0y – Displays the address of the analog output
channel on the cartridge, where x is the
cartridge number and and y is the channel
number.
output.
type a comment to associate with this
address.
222 EIO0000003297 02/2020

Modicon M221
Network Objects
EIO0000003297 02/2020
Chapter 9
Network Objects
Network Objects

Topic Page
Input Assembly (EtherNet/IP) Objects (%QWE) 224
Output Assembly (EtherNet/IP) Objects (%IWE) 226
Input Registers (Modbus TCP) Objects (%QWM) 227
Output Registers (Modbus TCP) Objects (%IWM) 229
Digital Input (IOScanner) Objects (%IN) 230
Digital Output (IOScanner) Objects (%QN) 232
Input Register (IOScanner) Objects (%IWN) 234
Output Register (IOScanner) Objects (%QWN) 236
Modbus IOScanner Network Diagnostic Codes (%IWNS) 238
EIO0000003297 02/2020 223

Network Objects
Input Assembly (EtherNet/IP) Objects (%QWE)
Introduction
Input assembly objects are the digital values of EtherNet/IP Input assembly frames received on the
logic controller.
Displaying Input Assembly Properties

Follow these steps to display properties of Input assembly objects:
Step Action
2 Click Network objects → Input assembly (EtherNet/IP).
Result: The properties window appears.
Input Assembly Properties

This table describes each property of an Input assembly object:

Used No TRUE/FALSE FALSE Indicates whether the object is being
Address No %QWEi – The address of the Input assembly, where i
is the instance identifier.
For the maximum number of instances, refer
to Maximum Number of Objects
(see page 44).
object.
224 EIO0000003297 02/2020

Network Objects

Fallback value Yes -32768...32767 0 Specify the value to apply to this object when
exception state.
NOTE: If Maintain values fallback mode is
configured, the object retains its value when
exception state. The value 0 is displayed
and cannot be edited. For more details, refer
to Fallback Behavior (see EcoStruxure
Comment Yes – – A comment associated with this object.
this object.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 225

Network Objects
Output Assembly (EtherNet/IP) Objects (%IWE)
Introduction
Output assembly objects are the digital values of EtherNet/IP Output assembly frames received on
the logic controller.
Displaying Output Assembly Properties

Follow these steps to display properties of Output assembly objects:
Step Action
2 Click Network objects → Output assembly (EtherNet/IP).
Output Assembly Properties

This table describes each property of an Output assembly object:
Parameter Editable Value Default value Description

Address No %IWEi – The address of the Output assembly, where
i is the instance identifier.
(see page 44).
object.
this object.
226 EIO0000003297 02/2020

Network Objects
Input Registers (Modbus TCP) Objects (%QWM)
Introduction
Input registers objects are the digital values of Modbus TCP mapping table input registers received
on the logic controller.
Displaying Input Registers Properties

Follow these steps to display properties of Input registers objects:
Step Action
2 Click Network objects → Input registers (Modbus TCP).
Input Registers Properties

This table describes each property of an Input registers object:

Address No %QWMi – The address of the Input registers object,
where i is the instance identifier.
(see page 44).
object.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 227

Network Objects

Fallback value Yes -32768...32767 0 Specify the value to apply to this object when
exception state.
configured, the object retains its value when
exception state. The value 0 is displayed
and cannot be edited. For more details, refer
to Fallback Behavior (see EcoStruxure
this object.
228 EIO0000003297 02/2020

Network Objects
Output Registers (Modbus TCP) Objects (%IWM)
Introduction
Output registers objects are the digital values of Modbus TCP mapping table output registers
received on the logic controller.
Displaying Output Registers Properties

Follow these steps to display properties of Output registers objects:
Step Action
2 Click Network objects → Output registers (Modbus TCP).
Output Registers Properties

This table describes each property of an Output registers object:

Address No %IWMi – The address of the Output registers object,
where i is the instance identifier.
(see page 44).
object.
this object.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 229

Network Objects
Digital Input (IOScanner) Objects (%IN)
Introduction
Digital input (IOScanner) objects are the digital values received from Modbus Serial IOScanner or
Modbus TCP IOScanner devices.
Displaying Digital inputs (IOScanner) Properties

Follow these steps to display properties of Digital inputs (IOScanner) objects:
Step Action
2 Click Network objects → Digital inputs (IOScanner).
Digital inputs (IOScanner) Properties

This table describes each property of an Digital inputs (IOScanner) object:

Used No TRUE/FALSE FALSE Indicates whether the object is being referenced in
the program.
Address No %IN(i+x).y.z) – The address of the object, where:
 i: index:
 100 for SL1
 200 for SL2
 300 for ETH1(Modbus TCP IOScanner)
 x: device ID
 y: channel ID
 z: object instance identifier
For the maximum number of instances, refer to

Maximum Number of Objects (see page 44).
Channel No Name of the - The name of the channel being used to receive the
configured data from the device.
channel.
230 EIO0000003297 02/2020

Network Objects

Double-click in the Symbol column and type the
name of the symbol to associate with this object.
If a symbol already exists, you can right-click in the
Symbol column and choose Search and Replace
to find and replace occurrences of this symbol
throughout the program and/or program
comments.
Double-click in the Comment column and type an
optional comment to associate with this object.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 231

Network Objects
Digital Output (IOScanner) Objects (%QN)
Introduction
Digital output (IOScanner) objects are the digital values sent to Modbus Serial IOScanner or
Displaying Digital outputs (IOScanner) Properties

Follow these steps to display properties of Digital outputs (IOScanner) objects:
Step Action
2 Click Network objects → Digital outputs (IOScanner).
Digital outputs (IOScanner) Object Properties

This table describes each property of a Digital outputs (IOScanner) object:

Used No TRUE/FALSE FALSE Indicates whether the object is being referenced
in a program.
Address No %QN(i+x).y.z – The address of the object, where:
 i: index:
 100 for SL1
 200 for SL2
 x: device ID
 y: channel ID

Channel Yes Name of the - The name of the channel being used to send the
configured data to the device.
channel.
Fallback Yes 0 or 1 0 Specify the value to apply to this object when the
value logic controller enters the STOPPED or an
exception state.
configured, the object retains its value when the
logic controller enters the STOPPED or an
exception state. The value 0 is displayed and
cannot be edited. For more details, refer to
Fallback Behavior.
232 EIO0000003297 02/2020

Network Objects

If a symbol already exists, you can right-click in
the Symbol column and choose Search and
Replace to find and replace occurrences of this
symbol throughout the program and/or program
comments.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 233

Network Objects
Input Register (IOScanner) Objects (%IWN)
Introduction
Input register (IOScanner) objects are the register values received from Modbus Serial IOScanner
or Modbus TCP IOScanner devices.
Displaying Input registers (IOScanner) Properties

Follow these steps to display properties of Input registers (IOScanner) objects:
Step Action
2 Click Network objects → Input registers (IOScanner).
Input registers (IOScanner) Properties

This table describes each property of an Input registers (IOScanner) object:

the program.
Address No %IWN(i+x).y.z – The address of the object, where:
 i: index:
 100 for SL1
 200 for SL2
 x: device ID
 y: channel ID

Channel No Name of the - The name of the channel being used to receive
configured the data from the device.
channel.
234 EIO0000003297 02/2020

Network Objects

comments.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 235

Network Objects
Output Register (IOScanner) Objects (%QWN)
Introduction
Output register (IOScanner) objects are the register values sent to Modbus Serial IOScanner or
Displaying Output registers (IOScanner) Properties

Follow these steps to display properties of Output registers (IOScanner) objects:
Step Action
2 Click Network objects → Output registers (IOScanner).
Output registers (IOScanner) Object Properties

This table describes each property of a Output registers (IOScanner) object:

a program.
Address No %QWN(i+x).y.z – The address of the object, where:
 i: index:
 100 for SL1
 200 for SL2
 x: device ID
 y: channel ID
For the maximum number of objects, refer to

Channel Yes Name of the - The name of the channel being used to send the
configured data to the device.
channel.
236 EIO0000003297 02/2020

Network Objects

Fallback Yes -32768...32767 0 Specify the value to apply to this object when the
value logic controller enters the STOPPED or an
exception state.
configured, the object retains its value when the
logic controller enters the STOPPED or an
exception state. The value 0 is displayed and
cannot be edited. For more details, refer to
Fallback Behavior (see EcoStruxure Machine
Expert - Basic, Operating Guide).
comments.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 237

Network Objects
Modbus IOScanner Network Diagnostic Codes (%IWNS)
Device Diagnostic Codes

The following table shows the possible values of the diagnostic codes returned by device x in the
corresponding Modbus IOScanner network diagnostic object (%IWNS(100+x) for SL1, or
%IWNS(200+x) for SL2, %IWNS(300+x) for ETH1):
Value Description
0 Device not scanned.
1 Device is being initialized by Modbus IOScanner (Initialization request of device being sent).
2 Device is present and ready to be scanned (initialization requests sent, if any).
3 Device not scanned correctly due to a communication error detected on a channel of the
device.
4 Device not initialized correctly due to a communication error detected during initialization
request of the device.
5 Device not correctly identified because the vendor name or product code returned by the
device does not match the expected values.
6 Communication error occurred during identification and initialization. Possible reasons are:
incommunicative or absent device, incorrect communication parameters, or unsupported
Modbus function.
Channel Diagnostic Codes

The following table shows the possible values of the diagnostic codes returned by device x and
channel y in the corresponding Modbus IOScanner network diagnostic object (%IWNS(100+x).y
for SL1, %IWNS(200+x).y for SL2, %IWNS(300+x).y for ETH1):
Value Description
0 Channel is active
-1 Channel is inactive
Other Value of the Communication error code (CommError) (see EcoStruxure Machine Expert -
Basic, Generic Functions Library Guide)
238 EIO0000003297 02/2020

Modicon M221
System Objects
EIO0000003297 02/2020
Chapter 10
System Objects
System Objects

Topic Page
System Bits (%S) 240
System Words (%SW) 252
Input Channel Status (%IWS) 277
Output Channel Status (%QWS) 279
EIO0000003297 02/2020 239

System Objects
System Bits (%S)
Introduction
This section provides information about the function of system bits.
Displaying System Bits Properties

Follow these steps to display properties of the system bits:
Step Action
2 Click System objects → System Bits.
Result: System bit properties appear on the screen.
System Bits Properties

This table describes each property of the system bit:

Used No TRUE/FALSE FALSE Indicates whether the system bit is being
Address No %Si – Displays the system bit address, where i is
the bit number that represents the
sequential position of the system bit in the
memory.
If the controller has maximum n system bits,
For example, %S4 is system bit 4.
Symbol Yes – – The symbol associated with the system bit.
the name of the symbol to associate with the
system bit.
occurrences of the symbol throughout the
Comment Yes – – A comment associated with the system bit.
the system bit.
240 EIO0000003297 02/2020

System Objects
System Bits Description

This table presents the description of the system bits and how they are controlled:
System Function Description Init Control

Bit State
%S0 Cold Start Normally set to 0, it is set to 1 by: 0 S or U
 A power return with loss of data (battery malfunction), →S,
 The program or an animation table. SIM
This bit is set to 1 during the first complete scan. It is reset
to 0 by the system before the next scan.
%S1 Warm Start Normally set to 0. It is set to 1 by a power return with data 0 S and U
backup, by a program or an animation table.
It is reset to 0 by the system at the end of the complete scan.
%S4 Time base: 10 ms The rate of status changes is measured by an internal clock. – S, SIM
%S5 Time base: 100 ms They are not synchronized with the controller scan. (except
%S6 Time base: 1 s Example: %S4 %S4)
%S7 Time base: 1 min
%S9 Fallback outputs When %S9 is set to 1: 0 U

 For outputs configured as Status Alarms, PTO, or
FREQGEN, the outputs are set to 0.
 Fallback values are applied to the physical digital and
analog outputs (embedded outputs, TM2/TM3 expansion
module outputs and TMC2 cartridge outputs). The data
image is unaffected by %S9. The data image reflects the
logic applied by the application. Only the physical outputs
are affected.
 The fallback values are applied regardless of the fallback
behavior (see EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic,
Operating Guide) mode configured for specific outputs.
When %S9 is set to 0, the data image values are re-applied
to the physical outputs.
NOTE: When the controller is in the STOPPED state and
Maintain values fallback behavior is configured, a rising
edge on %S9 applies fallback values to the physical outputs
and to data image values.
S Controlled by the system
U Controlled by the user
U→S Set to 1 by the user, reset to 0 by the system
S→U Set to 1 by the system, reset to 0 by the user
SIM Applied in the Simulator
EIO0000003297 02/2020 241

System Objects

Bit State
%S10 I/O communication status Normally set to 1 (TRUE on control panel). This bit can be 1 S
set to 0 (FALSE on control panel) by the system when an I/O
communication interruption is detected. When %S10=0, the
ERR LED flashes.
%S11 Watchdog overflow Normally set to 0. This bit can be set to 1 by the system when 0 S
the program execution time (scan time) exceeds the
maximum scan time (application watchdog).
Watchdog overflow causes the controller state to change to
HALTED.
%S11 is also set to 1 by the system if the processing load is
greater than 80% of the processing capacity (refer to
%SW75 (see page 252)). If the processor load is greater
than 80% on any two consecutive measurements, the
controller goes to HALTED state. Otherwise, %S11 is reset.
%S12 Logic controller in This bit indicates that the controller is RUNNING. 0 S, SIM
RUNNING state The system sets the bit to:
 1 when the controller state is RUNNING,
 0 for STOPPED, BOOTING, or any other state.
%S13 First cycle in RUNNING Normally set to 0. Set to 1 by the system during the first scan 0 S, SIM
state after the controller state has been changed to RUNNING.
%S14 I/O force activated Normally set to 0. Set to 1 by the system if at least one input 0 S, SIM
or output is being forced.
%S15 Input forced Normally set to 0. Set to 1 by the system if at least one input 0 S, SIM
is being forced.
%S16 Output forced Normally set to 0. Set to 1 by the system if at least one output 0 S, SIM
is being forced.
%S17 Last ejected bit Normally set to 0. It is set by the system according to the 0 S→U,
value of the last ejected bit. SIM
It indicates the value of the last ejected bit.
242 EIO0000003297 02/2020

System Objects

Bit State
%S18 Arithmetic overflow or Normally set to 0. It is set to 1 in the case of an overflow 0 S→U,
error when a 16-bits operation is performed, that is: SIM
 A result greater than + 32767 or less than - 32768, in
single length,
 A result greater than + 2147483647 or less than -
2147483648, in double length,
 A result greater than + 3.402824E+38 or less than -
3.402824E+38, in floating point,
 Division by 0,
 The square root of a negative number,
 BTI or ITB conversion not significant: BCD value out of
limits.
It must be tested by the program after each operation where
there is a risk of an overflow; then reset to 0 by the program
if an overflow occurs.
%S19 Scan period overrun Normally set to 0, this bit is set to 1 by the system in the 0 S→U
(periodic scan) event of a scan period overrun (scan time greater than the
period defined by the program at configuration or
programmed in %SW0).
This bit is reset to 0 by the program.
%S20 Index overflow Normally set to 0, it is set to 1 when the address of the 0 S→U,
indexed object becomes less than 0 or more than the SIM
maximum size of an object.
It must be tested by the program after each operation where
there is a risk of overflow; then reset to 0 if an overflow
occurs.
%S21 Grafcet initialization Normally set to 0, it is set to 1 by: 0 U→S,
 A cold restart, %S0 = 1, SIM
 The program, in the preprocessing program part only,
using a Set Instruction (S %S21) or a set coil –(S)– %S21,
 The terminal.
At state 1, it causes Grafcet initialization. Active steps are

deactivated and initial steps are activated.
It is reset to 0 by the system after Grafcet initialization.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 243

System Objects

Bit State
%S22 Grafcet reset Normally set to 0, it can only be set to 1 by the program in 0 U→S,
pre-processing. SIM
At state 1, it causes the active steps of the entire Grafcet to
be deactivated. It is reset to 0 by the system at the start of
the execution of the sequential processing.
%S23 Preset and freeze Grafcet Normally set to 0, it can only be set to 1 by the program in 0 U→S,
(List) the pre-processing program module. SIM
Set to 1, it validates the pre-positioning of Grafcet (List).
Maintaining this bit at 1 freezes Grafcet (List) execution. It is
reset to 0 by the system at the start of the execution of the
sequential processing.
%S28 String overflow Set to 1, it indicates that there is an overflow in a memory 0 S→U,
object when managing strings. SIM
%S33 Read or Write selection for Normally set to 0. 0 U→S
Ethernet server  Set to 0, the %SW33 to %SW38 contains the Ethernet
configuration read/change parameters in use (IP declared or IP assigned by BOOTP
or automatic IP self assigned). These parameters are
those configured in the application or those of the post
configuration in SD card (in this case, %SW98 or %SW99
or %SW100 is different from 0).
 Set to 1 (if there is no post configuration in use), then the
new configuration is given by %SW33 to %SW38.
This bit can be set to its initial state 0 by the program and the
system (on cold restart). Then, the Ethernet is reset to apply
the application configuration whatever the current
configuration is.
This bit cannot be set to 1 if a post configuration is in use.
%S34 Ethernet Autonegotiation Set to 0 to allow the autonegotiation of the speed and half or 0 U
full duplex mode.
Set to 1 to force some specific configuration set in %S35 and
%S36.
NOTE: A modification in the state of %S34, %S35, or %S36
provokes a reinitialization of the Ethernet channel. As a
consequence, the Ethernet channel may not be available for
several seconds after the modification.
244 EIO0000003297 02/2020

System Objects

Bit State
%S35 Ethernet half/full duplex In case of the %S34 = 0 (autonegotiation) this bit will be set – U or S
mode by the system, and it will be read only for the user. But is the
%S34 = 1, the mode will be forced based on the value of this
bit set by the user:
 Set to 0 if Half Duplex,
 Set to 1 if Full Duplex.

%S36 Ethernet speed In case of the %S34 = 0 (autonegotiation) this bit will be set – U or S
by the system, and it will be read only for the user. But is the
%S34 = 1, the mode will be forced based on the value of this
bit set by the user:
 Set to 0 if 10 Mbps,
 Set to 1 if 100 Mbps.

%S38 Permission for events to Normally set to 1. 1 U→S
be placed in the events  Set to 0, events cannot be placed in the events queue.
queue  Set to 1, events are placed in the events queue as soon
as they are detected,
This bit can be set to its initial state 1 by the program and the
system (on cold restart).
%S39 Saturation of the events Normally set to 0. 0 U→S
queue  Set to 0, all events are reported.
 Set to 1, at least one event is lost.
This bit can be set to 0 by the program and the system

(on cold restart).
EIO0000003297 02/2020 245

System Objects

Bit State
%S49 Output rearming Normally set to 0, this bit can be set to 1 or 0 by the program. 0 U→S
(see page 65)  Set to 0, the automatic re-arming of outputs following a
short circuit is disabled.
 Set to 1, the automatic re-arming of outputs following a
short circuit is enabled.
NOTE: The bit is reset to 0 on a cold start; otherwise, the bit
value is retained.
The system bit %S10 can be used to detect within your
program that an output error has occurred. You can then use
the system word %SW139 to determine programmatically in
which cluster of outputs a short circuit or overload has
occurred.
NOTE: %S10 and %SW139 are reset to their initial state
when %S49 is set to 1.
246 EIO0000003297 02/2020

System Objects

Bit State
%S50 Updating the date and Normally set to 0, this bit can be set to 1 or 0 by the program. 0 U→S
time using words %SW49 to  Set to 0, the date and time can be read.
%SW53  Set to 1, the date and time can be updated but not read.
While %S50 is set to 1, the controller date and time are no

longer updated by the system and cannot be read by the
user program.
The internal RTC controller is updated on a falling edge of
%S50.
Process details:
 If %S50=0, the controller regularly updates the system
words %SW49-53 from its internal clock. Reading
%SW49-53 then provides the controller internal date &
time.
 Setting %S50 to 1 stops this update and allows to write
to %SW49-53 without being overwritten by the above
process.
 When the controller detects a falling edge of %S50 (from
1 to 0), it applies the values of %SW49-53 to its internal
clock and restarts the update of %SW49-53.
This %S50 process is also the mechanism used by
EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic to update the controller
time from the RTC management view. So if EcoStruxure
Machine Expert - Basic detects that %S50 is already set to
1, a message informs that EcoStruxure Machine Expert -
Basic cannot read the exact value of the controller internal
clock. However, this situation does not prevent updates to
the controller date & time from the RTC management view
but, if used, %S50 will be reset by EcoStruxure Machine
Expert - Basic.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 247

System Objects

Bit State
%S51 Time-of-day clock status Normally set to 0, this bit can be set to 1 or 0 by the program. 0 U→S,
 Set to 0, the date and time are consistent. SIM
 Set to 1, the date and time must be initialized by the
program.
When this bit is set to 1, the time of day clock data is not
valid. The date and time may never have been configured,
the battery may be low, or the controller correction constant
may be invalid (never configured, difference between the
corrected clock value and the saved value, or value out of
range).
State 1 transitioning to state 0 forces a Write of the
correction constant to the RTC.
%S52 RTC write error detected This bit, managed by the system, is set to 1 to indicate that 0 S, SIM
an RTC write (requested by %S50) has not been performed
because of invalid values in %SW49 to %SW53
(see page 253). This bit is set to 0 if the requested RTC
change has been correctly applied.
%S59 Updating the date and Normally set to 0, this bit can be set to 1 or 0 by the program. 0 U
time using word %SW59  Set to 0, the system word %SW59 is not managed,
 Set to 1, the date and time are incremented or
decremented according to the rising edges on the control
bits set in %SW59.
%S66 Battery LED If the battery is missing or in error, the battery LED is ON. 0 U→S
Set this bit to 1 to deactivate the battery LED. This system
bit is set to 0 at the start.
%S75 Battery status This system bit is set by the system and can be read by the 0 S
user. It indicates the battery status:
 Set to 0, the external battery is operating normally.
 Set to 1, external battery power is low, or no external
battery is detected.
%S90 Backup/Restore/Erase This system bit selects the destination of the memory words 0 U
destination backup/restore/erase operation:
 Set to 0: non-volatile memory (default).
 Set to 1: SD card.
%S91 Erase backed up variables Set this bit to 1 to erase the backed up variables stored in – U→S
non-volatile memory or the SD card, depending on %90.
248 EIO0000003297 02/2020

System Objects

Bit State
%S92 %MW variables backed up This system bit is set to 1 by the system if memory word – S
in non-volatile memory (%MW) variables are available in non-volatile memory.
%S93 Back up %MW Set this bit to 1 to back up the %MW variables in the non- – U→S
volatile memory or SD card, depending on %S90.
%S94 Restore %MW Set this bit to 1 to restore the data backed up in non-volatile – U→S
memory or SD card, depending on %S90.
%S96 Backup program OK This bit can be read at any time (either by the program or 0 S, SIM
while adjusting), in particular after a cold start or a warm
restart.
 Set to 0, the backup program is invalid.
 Set to 1, the backup program is valid.
%S101 Changing a port address Used to change a serial line port address using system 0 U
(Modbus protocol) words %SW101 (SL1) and %SW102 (SL2). To do this, %S101
must be set to 1.
 Set to 0, the address cannot be changed. The value of
%SW101 and %SW102 matches the current port address,
 Set to 1, the address can be changed by changing the
values of %SW101 (SL1) and %SW102 (SL2).
NOTE: %S101 cannot be set to 1 if a post configuration file
is defined on SL1 or SL2.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 249

System Objects

Bit State
%S103 Using the ASCII protocol Enables the use of the ASCII protocol on SL1 (%S103) or 0 U
%S104 SL2 (%S104). The ASCII protocol is configured using system
words %SW103 and %SW105 for SL1, and system words
%SW104 and %SW106 for SL2.
 Set to 0, the protocol used is the one configured in
EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic, or specified in the
post configuration (see page 70).
 Set to 1, the ASCII protocol is used on SL1 (%S103) or
SL2 (%S104). In this case, the system words %SW103,
%SW105, and %SW121 must be previously configured for
SL1, and %SW104, %SW106, and %SW122 for SL2. Each
change of those %SW will be taken into account after a
rising edge to %S103 or %S104.
NOTE: A rising or falling edge on %S103 or %S104
cancels an exchange in progress (EXCH instruction).
NOTE: Setting %S103 or %S104 to 0 reconfigures the
serial line with the EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic
parameters.
NOTE: %S103 and %S104 are ignored if a Modbus Serial
Line IOScanner is configured on the corresponding serial
line.
%S105 Modem initialization Set to 1 to send the initialization command to the modem. 0 U/S
command Reset to 0 by the system. See also %SW167
(see page 252).
%S106 I/O bus behavior The default value is 0, meaning that a bus communication 0 U/S
error on an expansion module (see page 122) stops the I/O
expansion bus exchanges.
Set this bit to 1 to specify that the controller continues to
make I/O expansion bus exchanges.
NOTE: When a bus communication error occurs, bit n of
%SW120 is set to 1, where n is the expansion module
number, and %SW118 bit 14 is set to 0.
For more information on bus error handling, refer to I/O
Configuration General Description (see page 122).
250 EIO0000003297 02/2020

System Objects

Bit State
%S107 I/O bus restart The default value is 0. Reset to 0 by the system. 0 U/S
Set this bit to 1 to force a restart of the I/O expansion bus
(see page 124). On detection of a rising edge of this bit, the
logic controller reconfigures and restarts the I/O expansion
bus if:
 %S106 is set to 0 (that is, I/O exchanges are stopped)
 %SW118 bit 14 is set to 0 (I/O bus is in error)
 At least one bit of %SW120 is set to 1 (identifying the
module that is in bus communication error)
For more information on bus error handling, refer to I/O
Configuration General Description (see page 122).
%S110 IOScanner reset SL1 Set to 1 to reset the Modbus Serial IOScanner on Serial 0 U/S
Line 1.
%S111 IOScanner reset SL2 Set to 1 to reset the Modbus Serial IOScanner on Serial 0 U/S
Line 2.
%S112 IOScanner reset ETH1 Set to 1 to reset the Modbus TCP IOScanner on Ethernet. 0 U/S
%S113 IOScanner suspend SL1 Set to 1 to suspend the Modbus Serial IOScanner on Serial 0 U/S
Line 1.
%S114 IOScanner suspend SL2 Set to 1 to suspend the Modbus Serial IOScanner on Serial 0 U/S
Line 2.
%S115 IOScanner suspend ETH1 Set to 1 to suspend the Modbus TCP IOScanner on 0 U/S
Ethernet.
%S119 Local I/O error detected Normally set to 1. This bit can be set to 0 when an I/O 1 S
communication interruption is detected on the logic
controller. %SW118 determines the nature of the
communication interruption. Resets to 1 when the
communication interruption disappears.
%S122 Automatically switch to Set to 1, the Remote Graphic Display automatically switches 0 U
Alarm page to the Alarm page when a rising edge is detected on an
alarm bit.
%S123 Display red backlight on Set to 1, the backlight on the Remote Graphic Display is red 0 U
alarm when an alarm is active.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 251

System Objects
System Words (%SW)
Introduction
This section provides information about the function of system words.
Displaying System Words Properties

Follow these steps to display properties of the system words:
Step Action
2 Click System objects → System Words.
Result: System word properties appear on the screen.
System Words Properties

This table describes each property of the system word:

Used No TRUE/FALSE FALSE Indicates whether the system word is being
Address No %SWi – Displays the system word address, where i
is the word number that represents the
sequential position of the system word in the
memory.
If the controller has maximum n system
words, the value of i is given as 0...n-1.
For example, %SW50 is system word 50.
Symbol Yes – – The symbol associated with the system
word.
system word.
occurrences of the symbol throughout the
Comment Yes – – A comment associated with the system
word.
the system word.
252 EIO0000003297 02/2020

System Objects
System Words Description

This table presents the description of the system words and how they are controlled:
System Function Description Control

Words
%SW0 Controller scan Modifies the controller scan period (1...150 ms) defined in the Master task U, SIM
period (master properties (see EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic, Operating Guide) or
task set to an animation table.
periodic scan
mode)
%SW1 Periodic task Modifies the cycle time [1...255 ms] of the periodic task, without losing the U, SIM
period Period value specified in the periodic task properties window.
Allows you to recover the Period value saved in the periodic task properties
window:
 in case of a cold start, or
 if the value you write in %SW1 is outside [1...255] range.
The %SW1 value can be modified in the program at each end of a cycle, in
the program or in an animation table without having to stop the program.
Cycle times can be correctly observed while the program is running.
%SW6 Controller state Controller state: S, SIM
%MW60012 0 = EMPTY
2 = STOPPED
3 = RUNNING
4 = HALTED
5 = POWERLESS
SIM Applied in the simulator
EIO0000003297 02/2020 253

System Objects

Words
%SW7 Controller status  Bit [0]: Backup/restore in progress: S, SIM
 Set to 1 if backup/restore of the program is in progress,
 Set to 0 if backup/restore of the program is complete or disabled.
 Bit [1]: Configuration of the controller is OK:

 Set to 1 if configuration ok.
 Bit [2]: SD card status bits:

 Set to 1 if SD card is present.

 Set to 1 if SD card is being accessed.
 Bit [4]: Application memory status:

 Set to 1 if application in RAM memory is different from that in non-
volatile memory.
 Set to 1 if SD card is in error.
 Bit [6]: Not used (status 0)

 Bit [7]: Controller reserved:
 Set to 1 when the controller is connected to EcoStruxure Machine
Expert - Basic.
 Bit [8]: Application in Write mode:
 Set to 1 if application is protected. In this case, the clone operation
does not replicate the application (refer to Clone Management
(see page 200)).
 Bit [9]: Not used (status 0)
 Bit [10]: Second serial port installed as cartridge (compact only):
 0 = No serial cartridge
 1 = Serial cartridge installed
 Bit [11]: Second serial port type:

 Set to 1 = EIA RS-485
 Bit [12]: Validity of the application in internal memory:

 Set to 1 if the application is valid.
 Bit [14]: Validity of the application in RAM memory:

 Set to 1 if the application is valid.
 Bit [15]: Ready for execution:

 Set to 1 if ready for execution.
%SW11 Software Contains the maximum value of the watchdog. The value (10...500 ms) is U, SIM
watchdog value defined by the configuration.
254 EIO0000003297 02/2020

System Objects

Words
%SW13 Boot loader For example, if %SW13=000E hex: S, SIM
version  8 MSB=00 in hexadecimal, then xx=0 in decimal
xx.yy  8 LSB=0E in hexadecimal, then yy=14 in decimal
As a result, boot loader version is 0.14, displayed as 14 decimal.

%SW14 Commercial For example, if %SW14=0232 hex: S, SIM
version, xx.yy  8 MSB=02 in hexadecimal, then xx=2 in decimal
 8 LSB=32 in hexadecimal, then yy=50 in decimal
As a result, commercial version is 2.50, displayed as 250 decimal.

%SW15- Firmware version For example, if: S, SIM
%SW16 aa.bb.cc.dd %SW15=0003 hex:
 8 MSB=00 in hexadecimal, then aa=00 in decimal
 8 LSB=03 in hexadecimal, then bb=03 in decimal
%SW16=0B16 hex:
 8 MSB=0B in hexadecimal, then cc=11 in decimal
 8 LSB=16 in hexadecimal, then dd=22 in decimal
As a result, firmware version is 0.3.11.22 displayed as 00031122 decimal.

%SW17 Default status for When an error is detected in a floating arithmetic operation, bit %S18 is set S and U,
floating operation to 1 and the default status of %SW17 is updated according to the following SIM
coding:
 Bit[0]: Invalid operation, result is not a number (NaN)
 Bit[1]: Reserved
 Bit[2]: Division by 0, result is invalid (-Infinity or +Infinity)
 Bit[3]: Result greater in absolute value than +3.402824e+38, result is
invalid (-Infinity or +Infinity).
It must be tested by the program after each operation where there is a
possible overflow; then reset to 0 by the program if an overflow occurs.
%SW18- 100 ms absolute This counter works using 2 words: S and U,
%SW19 timer counter  %SW18 represents the least significant word, SIM
 %SW19 represents the most significant word.
The %SW18 increases from 0 to 32767 each 100 ms. When 32767 is
reached, %SW19) is incremented and %SW18 is reset to 0.These double word
are also reset during the initialization phase and on a reset of %S0.
%SW30 Last scan time Indicates the execution time of the last controller scan cycle (in ms). S
(master task)
NOTE: This time corresponds to the time elapsed between the start
(acquisition of inputs) and the end (update of outputs) of a master task scan
cycle. If the scan time is 2.250 ms, the %SW30 is 2 and the %SW70 is 250.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 255

System Objects

Words
%SW31 Max. scan time Indicates the execution time of the longest controller scan cycle since the S
(master task) last cold start (in ms).
This time corresponds to the time elapsed between the start (acquisition of
inputs) and the end (update of outputs) of a scan cycle. If the maximum scan
time is 2.250 ms, the %SW31 will be 2 and the %SW71 will be 250.
NOTE: To detect a pulse signal when the latching input option is selected,
the pulse width (TON) and the period (P) must meet the following 2
requirements:
 TON ≥ 1 ms
 The input signal period (P) follows the Nyquist-Shannon sampling rule
stating that the input signal period (P) is at least twice the maximum
program scan time (%SW31):
P ≥ 2 x %SW31.
%SW32 Min. scan time Indicates the execution time of shortest controller scan cycle since the last S
(master task) cold start (in ms).
(acquisition of inputs) and the end (update of outputs) of a scan cycle. If the
minimum scan time is 2.250 ms, the %SW32 is 2 and the %SW72 is 250.
%SW33 IP address for The IP settings can be modified. The read or write selection is done using U
%SW34 Ethernet server the system bit %S33.
%SW35 configuration The system words %SW33...%SW38 contains the Ethernet parameters:
%SW36 read/write  IP address: %SW33 and %SW34
%SW37
For IP address AA.BB.CC.DD: %SW33 = CC.DD and %SW34 = AA.BB
%SW38
 Subnetwork mask: %SW35 and %SW36
For subnetwork mask AA.BB.CC.DD: %SW35 = CC.DD and %SW36 =
AA.BB
 Gateway address: %SW37 and %SW38
For gateway address AA.BB.CC.DD: %SW37 = CC.DD and %SW38 =
AA.BB
%SW39 Periodic average Indicates the average execution time in µs of the periodic task (last 5 times). –
time
%SW40 Event 0 average Indicates the average execution time in µs of the event task associated with –
time the input %I0.2 (last 5 times).
256 EIO0000003297 02/2020

System Objects

Words
time the Threshold 0 of HSC0 or HSC2 (last 5 times).
%SW48 Number of events Indicates how many events have been executed since the last cold start. S, SIM
(Counts all events except cyclic events.)
NOTE: Set to 0 (after application loading and cold start), increments on
each event execution.
%SW49 Real-Time Clock RTC functions: words containing current date and time values (in BCD): S and U,
%SW50 (RTC) %SW49 xN Day of the week (N=1 for SIM
%SW51
Monday)
%SW52
%SW53 NOTE: %SW49 is read only (S).
%SW50 00SS Seconds
%SW51 HHMM: hour and minute
%SW52 MMDD: month and day
%SW53 CCYY: century and year
Set system bit %S50 to 1 to enable updating the RTC value using system
words %SW49 to %SW53. On a falling edge of %S50 the internal RTC
controller is updated using the values written in these words. For more
details, see system bit %S50 (see page 241).
%SW54 Date and time of System words containing the date and time of the last power outage or S, SIM
%SW55 the last stop controller stop (in BCD):
%SW56 %SW54 SS Seconds
%SW57
%SW55 HHMM: hour and minute
%SW56 MMDD: month and day
%SW57 CCYY: century and year
EIO0000003297 02/2020 257

System Objects

Words
%SW58 Code of last stop Displays code giving cause of last transition from the RUNNING state to S, SIM
another state:
0 Initial value (after a download or an initialization
command)
1 Run/Stop input or Run/Stop switch is set to 0. A falling
edge on the Run/Stop input or Run/Stop switch at 0 has
been detected while the controller was in the RUNNING
state, or the controller was powered on with the
Run/Stop input or Run/Stop switch at 0.
2 Program error detected. A program error has been
detected while the controller was in the RUNNING state
(in which case the controller goes to the HALTED state),
or the controller was in the HALTED state when the
power was cycled, preventing it starting in run.
3 Stop command using EcoStruxure Machine Expert -
Basic online button or Remote Graphic Display.
4 Power outage. The controller starting in run after a
power cycle, or the controller is in the STOPPED state
because the starting mode is Start in Previous State
and the controller was in the STOPPED state when the
power outage occurred.
5 Hardware error detected.
6 Not used.
7 Power on with starting mode configured as Start in stop.
8 The controller could not recover previous data that it
had at last power outage (for example because the
battery is low), preventing it starting in run.
9 Controller is not able to run due to internal memory
errors.
The reasons for the last stop are prioritized in the following order (that is,
when the controller is in the STOPPED state after a power cycle):
1, 7, 4, 8, 2
258 EIO0000003297 02/2020

System Objects

Words
%SW59 Adjust current Adjusts the current date. U
date Contains 2 sets of 8 bits to adjust current date.
The operation is always performed on rising edge of the bit. This word is
enabled by bit %S59.
Increment Decrement Parameter
bit 0 bit 8 Day of week
bit 1 bit 9 Seconds
bit 2 bit 10 Minutes
bit 3 bit 11 Hours
bit 4 bit 12 Days
bit 5 bit 13 Month
bit 6 bit 14 Years
bit 7 bit 15 Centuries
%SW62 Ethernet error Indicates the error code: S
detection 0 - No error detected
1 - Duplicate IP: the M221 Logic Controller is configured with its default IP
address (generated from the MAC address)
2 - DHCP in progress
3 - BOOTP in progress
4 - Invalid parameters: port is disabled
5 - Fixed IP address initialization in progress
6 - Ethernet link down
EIO0000003297 02/2020 259

System Objects

Words
%SW63 EXCH1 block EXCH1 error code: S
error code 0 - operation was successful
1 - number of bytes to be transmitted exceeds the limit (> 255)
2 - insufficient transmission table
3 - insufficient word table
4 - receive table overflowed
5 - time-out elapsed
6 - transmission
7 - incorrect command within table
8 - selected port not configured/available
9 - reception error: This error code reflects an incorrect or corrupted
reception frame. It can be caused due to an incorrect configuration in the
physical parameters (for example, parity, data bits, baudrate, and so on) or
an unreliable physical connection causing signal degradation.
10 - cannot use %KW if receiving
11 - transmission offset larger than transmission table
12 - reception offset larger than reception table
13 - controller stopped EXCH processing
%SW64 EXCH2 block EXCH2 error code: See %SW63. S
error code
%SW65 EXCH3 block 1-4, 6-13: See %SW63. (Note that error code 5 is invalid and replaced by the S
error code Ethernet-specific error codes 109 and 122 described below.)
The following are Ethernet-specific error codes:
101 - incorrect IP address
102 - no TCP connection
103 - no socket available (all connection channels are busy)
104 - network is down
105 - network cannot be reached
106 - network dropped connection on reset
107 - connection aborted by peer device
108 - connection reset by peer device
109 - connection time-out elapsed
110 - rejection on connection attempt
111 - host is down
120 - incorrect index (remote device is not indexed in configuration table)
121 - system error (MAC, chip)
122 - receiving process timed-out after data was sent
123 - Ethernet initialization in progress
%SW67 Function and Contains the logic controller code ID. For more information, refer to the S, SIM
type of controller M221 Logic Controller Code ID table (see page 276).
260 EIO0000003297 02/2020

System Objects

Words
%SW70 Scan time Indicates the execution time of the last controller scan cycle (in µs). –
microseconds
resolution
(acquisition of inputs) and the end (update of outputs) of a master task scan
cycle. If the scan time is 2.250 ms, the %SW30 will be 2 and the %SW70 will
be 250.
%SW71 Max. scan time Indicates the execution time of the longest controller scan cycle since the –
microseconds last cold start (in ms).
resolution
scan time is 2.250 ms, the %SW31 will be 2 and the %SW71 will be 250.
%SW72 Min. scan time Indicates the execution time of the shortest controller scan cycle since the –
microseconds last cold start (in ms).
resolution
scan time is 2.250 ms, the %SW32 will be 2 and the %SW72 will be 250.
%SW75 Load of Indicates the percentage of processing load. S
processor Processing load is defined as the percentage of the total available
processing time that is used to process your program tasks (this value is an
average and it is calculated every second). In case of processing load higher
than 80% for two consecutive periods of time, the controller goes to HALTED
state.
%SW76 to Down counters 1- These 4 words serve as 1 ms timers. They are decremented individually by S and U,
%SW79 4 the system every ms if they have a positive value. This gives 4 down SIM
counters down counting in ms which is equal to an operating range of 1 ms
to 32767 ms. Setting bit 15 to 1 can stop decrementation.
%SW80 Status of  Bit [0]: Set to 1 if the embedded analog inputs are operational S and U,
embedded  Bit [6]: Set to 1 if an error is detected on analog input 0 SIM
analog inputs  Bit [7]: Set to 1 if an error is detected on analog input 1
 All other bits are reserved and set to 1
%SW94 Application If the application changes, in terms of configuration or programming data, S, SIM
%SW95 signature the signature (sum of all checksums) also changes.
%MW60028- If %SW94 = 91F3 in hexadecimal, the application signature is 91F3 in
%MW60034 hexadecimal.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 261

System Objects

Words
%SW96 Diagnostics for  Bit [1]: This bit is set by the firmware to indicate when the save is S, SIM
save/restore complete:
function of  Set to 1 if the backup is complete.
program and  Set to 0 if a new backup is requested.
%MW
 Bit [2]: Back up error detected, refer to bits 8, 9, 10, 12 and 14 for further
information:
 Set to 1 if an error is detected.
 Set to 0 if a new backup is requested.
 Bit [6]: Set to 1 if the controller contains a valid application in RAM

memory.
 Bit [10]: Difference detected between RAM memory and non-volatile
memory.
 Set to 1 if there is a difference.
 Bit [12]: Indicates if a restore error has occurred:

 Bit [14]: Indicates if a non-volatile memory write error has occurred:

%SW98 Post The bits are set to 1 when the post configuration was applied for the S
configuration parameter:
status (Serial  Bit[0]: Hardware option (RS485 or RS232)
Line 1)  Bit[1]: Baudrate
 Bit[2]: Parity
 Bit[3]: Data size
 Bit[4]: Number of stop bits
 Bit[5]: Modbus address
 Bit[6]: Polarization (if available in the port)
status (Serial  Bit[0]: Hardware option (RS485)
Line 2)  Bit[1]: Baudrate
 Bit[2]: Parity
 Bit[3]: Data size
 Bit[4]: Number of stop bits
 Bit[5]: Modbus address
 Bit[6]: Polarization (if available in the port)

262 EIO0000003297 02/2020

System Objects

Words
status (Ethernet)  Bit[0]: IP mode (fixed, DHCP, or BOOTP)
 Bit[1]: IP address
 Bit[2]: Network submask
 Bit[3]: Default gateway
 Bit[4]: Device name
NOTE: The post configuration has priority over the configuration provided
by your application. The configuration of your application is not taken into
account if the M221 Logic Controller has a post configuration.
%SW101 Value of the When bit %S101 is set to 1, you can change the Modbus address of SL1 or U
%SW102 Modbus address SL2. The address of SL1 is %SW101. The address of SL2 is %SW102.
port
NOTE: The update is applied immediately after writing a new address to
%SW101 or %SW102.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 263

System Objects

Words
%SW103 Configuration for When bit %S103 (SL1) or %S104 (SL2) is set to 1, the ASCII protocol is used. S, U
%SW104 use of the ASCII System word %SW103 (SL1) or %SW104 (SL2) must be set according to the
protocol elements below:
 Baud rate:
 000: 1200 baud,
 001: 2400 baud,
 010: 4800 baud,
 011: 9600 baud,
 100: 19200 baud,
 101: 38400 baud,
 110: 57600 baud,
 111: 115200 baud.
 RTS/CTS:
 0: disabled,
 1: enabled.
 Parity:
 00: none,
 10: odd,
 11: even.
 Stop bit:
 0: 1 stop bit,
 1: 2 stop bits.
 Data bits:
 0: 7 data bits,
 1: 8 data bits.
%SW105 Configuration for When bit %S103 (SL1) or %S104 (SL2) is set to 1, the ASCII protocol is used. S, U
%SW106 use of the ASCII System word %SW105 (SL1) or %SW106 (SL2) must be set according to the
protocol elements below:

264 EIO0000003297 02/2020

System Objects

Words
%SW107 MAC address Indicates the controller MAC address (only references with Ethernet S
%SW108 channel).
%SW109 For MAC address AA:BB:CC:DD:EE:FF:
 %SW107 = AA:BB
 %SW108 = CC:DD
 %SW109 = EE:FF
%SW114 Enable schedule Enables or disables operation of schedule blocks by the program: S and U,
blocks  Bit [0]: Enable/disable schedule block number 0 SIM
 Set to 0: disabled
 Set to 1: enabled
 ...
 Bit [15]: Enable/disable schedule block number 15
 Set to 0: disabled
 Set to 1: enabled
Initially all schedule blocks are enabled.

The default value is FFFF hex.
%SW115 Controller serial Allows to obtain the serial number of the controller. S
%SW116 numbers part 1, Example with the serial number 8A160400008:
%SW117 2, and 3  %SW115 : 16#0008
respectively (in  %SW116 : 16#6040
BCD)  %SW117 : 16#0001

EIO0000003297 02/2020 265

System Objects

Words
%SW118 Logic controller Indicates conditions on logic controller. S, SIM
status word For a controller operating normally, the value of this word is FFFF hex.
 Bit [9]:
 Set to 0: External error detected or communication interruption, for
example duplicate IP address
 Set to 1: No error detected.
 Bit [10]:
 Set to 0: Invalid internal configuration; contact Schneider Electric
customer service.
 Bit [13]:
 Set to 0: Configuration error detected (mandatory modules, as
defined by the I/O expansion bus configuration, are absent or
otherwise inoperative when the logic controller attempts to start the
I/O expansion bus). In this case, the I/O bus does not start.
 Bit [14]:
 Set to 0: One or more modules have ceased communication with the
logic controller after the I/O expansion bus is started. This is the case
whether an I/O expansion module is defined as mandatory or optional
but present at start-up.
For more information on bus error handling, refer to I/O Configuration

General Description (see page 122).
 Bit [15]:
 Set to 0: Cartridge error detected (configuration or runtime operation).
NOTE: The other bits of this word are set to 1 and are reserved.
%SW119 Optional module One bit for each expansion module in the configuration: S, SIM
feature  Bit [0]: Reserved for the logic controller
configuration  Bit n: Module n
 Set to 1: Module is marked as optional in the configuration.
 Set to 0: Module is not marked as optional in the configuration.

266 EIO0000003297 02/2020

System Objects

Words
%SW120 Expansion I/O 1 bit for each expansion module in the configuration. S, SIM
module status Bit 0: Reserved for the logic controller
When the logic controller attempts to start the I/O bus, bit n:
 0 = no error detected
 1 = error detected or module not present. The I/O expansion bus does
not start unless the corresponding bit in %SW119 is set to TRUE
(indicating the module is marked as optional).
After the bus started and is running with data exchanges with the controller,
bit n:
 0 = no error detected
 1 = error detected on the I/O expansion module (regardless if it is a
module marked as optional).
For more information on bus error handling, refer to I/O Configuration
General Description (see page 122).
%SW121 Configuration for When bit %S103 (SL1) or %S104 (SL2) is set to 1, the ASCII protocol is used. U
%SW122 use of ASCII You can change the ASCII frame size of SL1 or SL2. The ASCII frame size
protocol of SL1 is %SW121, and that of SL2 is %SW122.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 267

System Objects

Words
%SW128 Cartridge 1 status Indicates the status code for the cartridge: S, SIM
 LSB: presents the status of the I/O channel 1
%SW129 Cartridge 2 status
 MSB: presents the status of the I/O channel 2
General status:
 0x80: Cartridge is not present and it is not configured in EcoStruxure
 0x81: Module is present, but it is not configured.
 0x82: Internal communication error with the cartridge.
 0x83: Internal communication error with the cartridge.
 0x84: Detected cartridge different from the configuration.
 0x85: Configured cartridge is not detected.
Input channel operation status:

 0x00: Normal.
 0x01: Conversion in progress.
 0x02: Initialization.
 0x03: Input operation setting error detected or module without input.
 0x04: Reserved.
 0x05: Wiring error detected (High limit range out).
 0x06: Wiring error detected (Low limit range out).
 0x07: Non-volatile memory error detected.
 Others: Reserved.
Output channel operation status:

 0x00: Normal.
 0x01: Reserved.
 0x02: Initialization.
 0x03: Output operation setting error detected or module without output.
 0x04: Reserved.
 0x05: Reserved.
 0x06: Reserved.
 0x07: Non-volatile memory error detected.
 Others: Reserved.
%SW130 Event execution Indicates the last execution time in µs of the event task associated with the S
time input %I0.2.
time input %I0.3.
time input %I0.4.
268 EIO0000003297 02/2020

System Objects

Words
time input %I0.5.
time Threshold 0 of HSC0 or HSC2.
%SW138 Periodic task Indicates the last execution time in µs of the periodic task. S
execution time
%SW139 Embedded digital Indicates the protection error status of output blocks: S
output protection Bit0 = 1 - Q0 - Q3 protect error - Block0
Bit1 = 1 - Q4 - Q7 protect error - Block1
NOTE: %SW139 is not used for sink outputs.
%SW140 Controller last Most recent error code written to PlcLog.csv: AABBCCCCDD: S
error code 1 %SW142 = AABB hex
%SW141 Controller last %SW141 = CCCC hex
error code 2 %SW140 = 00DD hex
%SW142 Controller last Where:
 AA = error level
error code 3
 BB = error context
 CCCC = error code
 DD = error priority (internal use only)
%SW143 Number of Number of error codes contained in PlcLog.csv. S
entries in
PlcLog.csv
EIO0000003297 02/2020 269

System Objects

Words
%SW147 SD card If %S90 set to 1, indicates the SD card operation result after saving memory S
operation words. The diagnostic codes are:
diagnostic code  0: No error
 1: Operation in progress
 10: Eject the SD card
 11: No SD card detected
 12: SD card write protected
 13: The SD card is full
 21: Number of memory words invalid
 22: No memory words to be saved
 30: A line in the CSV file is invalid
 31: A line in the CSV file is too long
 32: Format of the CSV file invalid
 40: Error when creating the CSV file
 50: Internal system error
 51: Error when opening the CSV file
%SW148 Number of  If %S90 is set to 0, you can save up to 2000 memory words (%MW50 up to U
persistent %MW2049).
variables  If %S90 is set to 1, you can save all memory words from %MW0.
For more information, refer to Persistent Variables Saved by User Request

(see page 63).
%SW149 Event execution Indicates the last execution time in ms of the event task associated with the S
time input %I0.2.
time input %I0.3.
time input %I0.4.
time input %I0.5.
270 EIO0000003297 02/2020

System Objects

Words
%SW157 Periodic Indicates the last execution time of the periodic task in ms. S
execution time
%SW158 Periodic average Indicates the average execution time in ms of the periodic task (last 5 times). S
time
%SW159 Event 0 average Indicates the average execution time in ms of the event task associated with S
%SW167 Status of Modem %SW167 indicates the status of the initialization command sent to the S
initialization modem:
command  If the modem does not respond to the initialization command within 10
attempts, its value is FFFF; modem does not respond.
 If the modem responds “OK” within the 10 attempts, its value is 0; modem
is present and has accepted the initialization command.
 If the modem sends something else within the 10 attempts, its value is 4;
incorrect response from the modem, or the modem rejects the
initialization command.
NOTE: %S105 can be used to re-send the modem initialization command.
%SW168 Modbus TCP – Indicates the number of Ethernet Modbus TCP server connections in use. S
Connections in
NOTE: If you disconnect the cable, the connection is not closed
use
immediately. Each time the cable is re-connected to the network, it requests
a new connection and the number of connections in use indicated by
%SW168 increases.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 271

System Objects

Words
%SW170 Frames Indicates the count of frames transmitted by the serial line 1. S
transmitted –
Serial line 1
%SW171 Frames Indicates the count of frames transmitted by the serial line 2. S
transmitted –
Serial line 2
%SW172 Frames Indicates the count of frames transmitted by the USB channel. S
transmitted –
USB
%SW173 Frames Indicates the count of frames transmitted by Modbus TCP on Ethernet. S
transmitted –
Modbus TCP
%SW174 Frames received Indicates the count of frames correctly received by the serial line 1. S
successfully –
Serial line 1
%SW175 Frames received Indicates the count of frames correctly received by the serial line 2. S
successfully –
Serial line 2
%SW176 Frames received Indicates the count of frames correctly received by the USB channel. S
successfully –
USB
%SW177 Frames received Indicates the count of frames correctly received by the Modbus TCP on S
successfully – Ethernet.
Modbus TCP
%SW178 Frames received Indicates the count of frames received with an error detected for the serial S
with an error – line 1.
Serial line 1
%SW179 Frames received Indicates the count of frames received with an error detected for the serial S
with an error – line 2.
Serial line 2
%SW180 Frames received Indicates the count of frames received with an error detected for the USB S
with an error – channel.
USB
%SW181 Frames received Indicates the count of frames received with an error detected for Modbus S
with an error – TCP on Ethernet.
Modbus TCP
272 EIO0000003297 02/2020

System Objects

Words
%SW182 Remote Graphic Indicates the connection state of the Remote Graphic Display: S
Display  0: Display not connected
connection state  1: Display application not ready
 2: Display application transfer
 3: Display application running
 4: Display firmware update required
 5: Display firmware transfer in progress
%SW183 Remote Graphic Indicates the last error detected on the Remote Graphic Display: S
Display last error  0: No error detected
detected  1: Display application transfer unsuccessful
 2: Incompatible version of the display
%SW184 Remote Graphic Indicates the page index of the displayed page on the Remote Graphic S, U
Display Page Display.
Index When written, specifies the page index of the page to display on the Remote
Graphic Display, if it exists. Otherwise, the value is ignored.
A page index is generated by EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic when the
user creates a new Operator Interface page.
The following pages have fixed page index values:
 112: Setup Menu
 113: Controller Information
 114: Controller Setup
 117: Display Setup
 120: Controller State
 121: Controller Status
 128: Alarm View
%SW185 TMH2GDB Firmware version of the TMH2GDB Remote Graphic Display. S
firmware version For example, %SW185 = 0104 hex means that the firmware version is V1.4.
xx.yy
%SW188 Frames Total number of frames transmitted via the Modbus mapping table. S
transmitted -
Modbus Mapping
table
%SW189 Frames received Total number of frames received without error via the Modbus mapping S
- Modbus table.
Mapping table
%SW190, Class 1 outgoing Total number of outgoing packets sent for implicit (Class 1) connections. S
%SW191 packets sent
%SW192, Class 1 incoming Total number of incoming packets received for implicit (Class 1) S
%SW193 packets received connections.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 273

System Objects

Words
%SW194, Unconnected Total number of incoming unconnected packets, including packets that S
%SW195 incoming packets would be returned if an error was detected.
received
%SW196, Unconnected Total number of incoming unconnected packets that had an invalid format, S
%SW197 incoming packets or targeted an unsupported service, class, instance, attribute, or member.
invalid
%SW198, Incoming packets Total number of incoming packets for explicit (Class 3) connections, S
%SW199 received for including packets that would be returned if an error was detected.
explicit (Class 3)
connections
%SW200, Incoming Class 3 Total number of explicit (Class 3) packets that had an invalid format, or S
%SW201 packets invalid targeted an unsupported service, class, instance, attribute, or member.
%SW202 Instance input Instance input configured in EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic. Default S
value: 0
%SW203 Input size Input size configured in EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic. Default value: S
0
%SW204 Instance output Instance output configured in EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic. Default S
value: 0
%SW205 Output size Output size configured in EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic. Default S
value: 0
%SW206 Timeout Total number of connection timeouts that have occurred in connections. S, U
Default value: 0
%SW207 Status of the Indicates the status of the EtherNet/IP class 1 connection: S
Ethernet/IP  0: At least one connection is idle.
class 1  1: The open connections are in run.
connection  2: At least one connection has no indication or no communication.
NOTE: Status 2 overrides status 0.

NOTE: The application must be configured with a functional level
(see EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic, Operating Guide) of at least
Level 3.2 for this word to be supported.
%SW210 Status of the Contains the status of the Modbus Serial IOScanner on Serial Line 1: S
IOScanner SL1  0: IOScanner is stopped
 1: Initialization request to device being sent by IOScanner
 2: IOScanner is operational
 3: IOScanner is partially operational (some devices are not being
scanned)
 4: IOScanner is suspended

274 EIO0000003297 02/2020

System Objects

Words
%SW211 Status of the Contains the status of the Modbus Serial IOScanner on Serial Line 2: S
IOScanner SL2  0: IOScanner is stopped
 1: Initialization request being sent by IOScanner
scanned)
%SW212 Status of the Contains the status of the Modbus TCP IOScanner on Ethernet: S
Modbus TCP IO  0: IOScanner is stopped
Scanner  1: Initialization request being sent by IOScanner to device
scanned)
NOTE: The application must be configured with a functional level

(see EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic, Operating Guide) of at least
Level 6.0 for this system word to be supported.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 275

System Objects
M221 Logic Controller Code ID

This table presents the code IDs of the M221 Logic Controller references:
Reference Code ID
TM221M16R• 0x0780
TM221ME16R• 0x0781
TM221M16T• 0x0782
TM221ME16T• 0x0783
TM221M32TK 0x0784
TM221ME32TK 0x0785
TM221C16R 0x0786
TM221CE16R 0x0787
TM221C16U 0x0796
TM221CE16U 0x0797
TM221C16T 0x0788
TM221CE16T 0x0789
TM221C24R 0x078A
TM221CE24R 0x078B
TM221C24T 0x078C
TM221CE24T 0x078D
TM221C24U 0x0798
TM221CE24U 0x0799
TM221C40R 0x078E
TM221CE40R 0x078F
TM221C40T 0x0790
TM221CE40T 0x0791
TM221C40U 0x079A
TM221CE40U 0x079B
276 EIO0000003297 02/2020

System Objects
Input Channel Status (%IWS)
Introduction
The following provides information about the properties of input channel status words. A dedicated
input channel status word exists for each analog input channel added using an I/O expansion
module or TMC2 cartridge.
Displaying Input Channel Status Word Properties

Follow these steps to display the properties of the input channel status words:
Step Action
2 Click System objects → Input Status Words.
Result: Input channel status word properties is displayed.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 277

System Objects
Input Channel Status Word Properties

This table describes each property of the input channel status word:

Used No TRUE/FALSE FALSE Indicates whether the input channel status
word is being referenced in a program.
Address No %IWSx.y or – The address of the input channel status
%IWS0.x0y word.
For I/O expansion modules:
 x is the module number
 y is the channel number
For analog cartridges:

 x is the cartridge number
For example, %IWS0.101 is the address of

the second channel of the cartridge in the
first slot of the logic controller.
Symbol Yes – – The symbol associated with the input
channel status word.
input channel status word.
If a symbol already exists, right-click in the
Symbol column and choose Search and
Replace to find and replace occurrences of
the symbol throughout the program and/or
program comments.
Comment Yes – – A comment associated with the input
the input channel status word.
For More Information

To view the possible values of the input channel status word:
For information on: refer to...

TM3 expansion modules TM3 Analog I/O Modules Diagnostics (see Modicon TM3 (EcoStruxure
Machine Expert - Basic), Expansion Modules Configuration,
Programming Guide)
TM2 expansion modules TM2 Analog I/O Modules Diagnostics (see Modicon TM2 (SoMachine
Basic), Expansion Modules Configuration, Programming Guide)
TMC2 cartridges TMC2 Analog Cartridge Diagnostics (see Modicon TMC2, Cartridges,
Programming Guide)
278 EIO0000003297 02/2020

System Objects
Output Channel Status (%QWS)
Introduction
The following provides information about the properties of output status words. A dedicated output
channel status word exists for each analog output channel added using an I/O expansion module
or TMC2 cartridge.
Displaying Output Channel Status Words Properties

Follow these steps to display the properties of the output channel status words:
Step Action
2 Click System objects → Output Status Words.
Result: Output channel status word properties are displayed in the properties window.
Output Channel Status Word Properties

This table describes each property of the output channel status word:

Used No TRUE/FALSE FALSE Indicates whether the output channel status
word is being referenced in a program.
Address No %QWSx.yor – The address of the output channel status
%QWS0.x0y word.
For I/O expansion modules:
 x is the module number
For cartridges:
 x is the cartridge number
For example, %QWS3.0 is the address of the

first output channel in the third I/O expansion
module connected to the logic controller.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 279

System Objects

Symbol Yes – – The symbol associated with the output
output channel status word.
If a symbol already exists, right-click in the
Symbol column and choose Search and
Replace to find and replace occurrences of
the symbol throughout the program and/or
program comments.
Comment Yes – – A comment associated with the output
the output channel status word.
For More Information

To view the possible values of the output channel status word:
For information on: refer to...

TM3 expansion modules TM3 Analog I/O Modules Diagnostics (see Modicon TM3 (EcoStruxure
Machine Expert - Basic), Expansion Modules Configuration,
Programming Guide)
TM2 expansion modules TM2 Analog I/O Modules Diagnostics (see Modicon TM2 (SoMachine
Basic), Expansion Modules Configuration, Programming Guide)
TMC2 cartridges TMC2 Analog Cartridge Diagnostics (see Modicon TMC2, Cartridges,
Programming Guide)
280 EIO0000003297 02/2020

Modicon M221
Glossary
EIO0000003297 02/2020
Glossary
A
analog input
Converts received voltage or current levels into numerical values. You can store and process these
values within the logic controller.
analog output
Converts numerical values within the logic controller and sends out proportional voltage or current
levels.
B
BOOTP
(bootstrap protocol) A UDP network protocol that can be used by a network client to automatically
obtain an IP address (and possibly other data) from a server. The client identifies itself to the server
using the client MAC address. The server, which maintains a pre-configured table of client device
MAC addresses and associated IP addresses, sends the client its pre-configured IP address.
BOOTP was originally used as a method that enabled diskless hosts to be remotely booted over a
network. The BOOTP process assigns an infinite lease of an IP address. The BOOTP service
utilizes UDP ports 67 and 68.
C
configuration
The arrangement and interconnection of hardware components within a system and the hardware
and software parameters that determine the operating characteristics of the system.
D
DHCP
(dynamic host configuration protocol) An advanced extension of BOOTP. DHCP is more
advanced, but both DHCP and BOOTP are common. (DHCP can handle BOOTP client requests.)
digital I/O
(digital input/output) An individual circuit connection at the electronic module that corresponds
directly to a data table bit. The data table bit holds the value of the signal at the I/O circuit. It gives
the control logic digital access to I/O values.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 281

Glossary
E
EDS
(electronic data sheet) A file for fieldbus device description that contains, for example, the
properties of a device such as parameters and settings.
EtherNet/IP
(Ethernet industrial protocol) An open communications protocol for manufacturing automation
solutions in industrial systems. EtherNet/IP is in a family of networks that implement the common
industrial protocol at its upper layers. The supporting organization (ODVA) specifies EtherNet/IP
to accomplish global adaptability and media independence.
EtherNet/IP Adapter
An EtherNet/IP Adapter, sometimes also called a server, is an end-device in an EtherNet/IP
network. I/O blocks and drives can be EtherNet/IP Adapter devices.
F
FreqGen
(frequency generator) A function that generates a square wave signal with programmable
frequency.
G
GRAFCET
The functioning of a sequential operation in a structured and graphic form.
This is an analytical method that divides any sequential control system into a series of steps, with
which actions, transitions, and conditions are associated.
H
HMI
(human machine interface) An operator interface (usually graphical) for human control over
industrial equipment.
HSC
(high-speed counter) A function that counts pulses on the controller or on expansion module
inputs.
282 EIO0000003297 02/2020

Glossary
I
IEC 61131-3
Part 3 of a 3-part IEC standard for industrial automation equipment. IEC 61131-3 is concerned with
controller programming languages and defines 2 graphical and 2 textual programming language
standards. The graphical programming languages are ladder diagram and function block diagram.
The textual programming languages include structured text and instruction list.
IL
(instruction list) A program written in the language that is composed of a series of text-based
instructions executed sequentially by the controller. Each instruction includes a line number, an
instruction code, and an operand (refer to IEC 61131-3).
Input Assembly
Assemblies are blocks of data exchanged between network devices and the logic controller. An
Input Assembly generally contains status information from a network device read by the controller.
instruction list language
A program written in the instruction list language that is composed of a series of text-based
instruction code, and an operand (see IEC 61131-3).
L
ladder diagram language
A graphical representation of the instructions of a controller program with symbols for contacts,
coils, and blocks in a series of rungs executed sequentially by a controller (see IEC 61131-3).
LAN
(local area network) A short-distance communications network that is implemented in a home,
office, or institutional environment.
LD
(ladder diagram) A graphical representation of the instructions of a controller program with symbols
for contacts, coils, and blocks in a series of rungs executed sequentially by a controller (refer to
IEC 61131-3).
LSB
(least significant bit/byte) The part of a number, address, or field that is written as the right-most
single value in conventional hexadecimal or binary notation.
M
master task
A processor task that is run through its programming software. The master task has 2 sections:
 IN: Inputs are copied to the IN section before execution of the master task.
 OUT: Outputs are copied to the OUT section after execution of the master task.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 283

Glossary
Modbus
The protocol that allows communications between many devices connected to the same network.
MSB
(most significant bit/byte The part of a number, address, or field that is written as the left-most
single value in conventional hexadecimal or binary notation.
O
Output Assembly
Assemblies are blocks of data exchanged between network devices and the logic controller. An
Output Assembly generally contains command sent by the controller to network devices.
P
periodic execution
The task is executed either cyclically or periodically. In periodic mode, you determine a specific
time (period) in which the task is executed. If it is executed under this time, a waiting time is
generated before the next cycle. If it is executed over this time, a control system indicates the
overrun. If the overrun is too high, the controller is stopped.
periodic task
The periodic task is a periodic, high-priority task of short duration that runs on a logic controller
through its programming software. The short duration of the periodic task prevents it from
interfering with the execution of slower, lower priority tasks. A periodic task is useful when fast
periodic changes in digital inputs need to be monitored.
PID
(proportional, integral, derivative) A generic control loop feedback mechanism (controller) widely
used in industrial control systems.
post configuration
(post configuration) An option that allows to modify some parameters of the application without
changing the application. Post configuration parameters are defined in a file that is stored in the
controller. They are overloading the configuration parameters of the application.
protocol
A convention or standard definition that controls or enables the connection, communication, and
data transfer between 2 computing system and devices.
PTO
(pulse train outputs) A fast output that oscillates between off and on in a fixed 50-50 duty cycle,
producing a square wave form. PTO is especially well suited for applications such as stepper
motors, frequency converters, and servo motor control, among others.
284 EIO0000003297 02/2020

Glossary
PWM
(pulse width modulation) A fast output that oscillates between off and on in an adjustable duty
cycle, producing a rectangular wave form (though you can adjust it to produce a square wave).
R
RTC
(real-time clock) A battery-backed time-of-day and calender clock that operates continuously, even
when the controller is not powered for the life of the battery.
S
security parameters
A set of configuration parameters used to enable or disable specific protocols and features relating
to the cybersecurity of an application.
SFC
(sequential function chart) A language that is composed of steps with associated actions,
transitions with associated logic condition, and directed links between steps and transitions. (The
SFC standard is defined in IEC 848. It is IEC 61131-3 compliant.)
SMS
(short message service) A standard communication service for telephones (or other devices) that
send short text messages over the mobile communications system.
EIO0000003297 02/2020 285

Glossary
286 EIO0000003297 02/2020

Modicon M221
Index
EIO0000003297 02/2020
Index
Symbols %SW, 40
%SW (system words), 252
%C, 40
%SW118, 84
%DR, 40
%SW119, 84
%FC, 40
%SW120, 84
%FREQGEN, 40
%SW148, 63, 64, 64
%HSC, 40
%SW6, 56, 59
%I, 40, 218
%TM, 40
%IN, 230
%VAR, 40
%IW, 40, 220
%IWE, 40, 226
%IWM, 40, 229
%IWM/%QWM, 141
A
active I/O bus error handling, 122
%IWN, 234
adapter
%IWNS (IOScanner network diagnostic
EtherNet/IP, 153
codes), 238
Altivar devices
%IWS (input channel status), 277
adding to Modbus Serial IOScanner, 181
%KD, 40
analog inputs, 96
%KF, 40
configuration, 96
%KW, 40
introduction, 96
%M, 40
properties, 220
%MD, 40
analog outputs
%MF, 40
properties, 222
%MSG, 40
application download, 60
%MW, 40
%PARAM, 40
%PLS, 40
%PWM, 40
B
%Q, 40, 219 backup controller memory, 213
%QN, 232 boot controller, 60
%QW, 40, 222
%QWE, 40, 224
%QWM, 40, 227
C
%QWN, 236 cartridges
%QWS (Output channel status), 279 configuration, 130
%R, 40 TMC2, 130
%S, 40 channel assistant
%S (system bits), 240 Modbus Serial IOScanner, 185
%S93, 63 Modbus TCP IOScanner, 148
%S94, 64, 64 channels
%SBR, 40 Modbus Serial IOScanner, 187
%SC, 40 Modbus TCP IOScanner, 150
EIO0000003297 02/2020 287

Index
Cold Start, 62 Ethernet

configuration configuration, 135
building a configuration, 78 cyber security, 135
configuration introduction, 78 device and channel diagnostic bits, 238
Frequency Meter, 107 introduction, 133
HSC, 103 Ethernet services, 134
Modbus Serial IOScanner, 180 EtherNet/IP
controller adapter, 153
configuration, 77, 87 configuration, 153
configuration features, 31 executive loader, 88
controller state, 55, 56 expansion modules
BOOTING, 58 configuration, 130
EMPTY, 58 TM2, 130
HALTED, 59 TM3, 130
POWERLESS, 59
RUNNING, 58
STOPPED, 58 F
cyber security, 135 fallback
values, configuring, 94
fallback behavior configuration, 66
D fallback execution, 66
devices fallback management, 66
adding to Modbus Serial IOScanner, 181 fallback values, 66, 224, 227
digital inputs, 90 features
configuration, 90 key features, 20, 26
introduction, 90 firmware, 88
of IOScanner, properties, 230 updating with executive loader, 88
properties, 218 updating with SD card, 202
digital outputs, 94 firmware updates, 59
configuration, 94 frequency generator
configuration parameters, 94 configuration, 119
configuring fallback values for, 94 Frequency Meter
introduction, 94 configuration, 107
of IOScanner, properties, 232
properties, 219
downloading applications, 59 G
generic slave device, 181
E
EDS file, Modbus TCP, 155 H
embedded communication HALTED state, 62
configuration, 131 hardware initialization values, 65
embedded input/output high speed counters, 99
configuration, 89 configuration, 101
introduction, 99
288 EIO0000003297 02/2020

Index
HSC Modbus Serial IOScanner

configuration, 103 adding devices on, 181
channel assistant, 185
configuring, 180
I configuring channels, 187
I/O assignment, 99 device and channel diagnostic bits, 238
I/O bus initialization request assistant, 183
configuration, 121 Modbus TCP
I/O bus error handling configuring client mode, 142
active, 122, 123 configuring Modbus mapping, 140
I/O configuration general information EDS file, 155
general practices, 122 mapping table, 191, 227
I/O expansion bus remote devices, 143
restarting, 124 Modbus TCP IOScanner
I/O objects channel assistant, 148
analog inputs, 220 configuring channels, 150
Analog Outputs, 222 Modbus TCP IOScanner
digital inputs, 218 configuring client mode, 142
digital outputs, 219 configuring Modbus mapping, 140
Init command, 172 device and channel diagnostic bits, 238
initialization request assistant Modbus TCP IOScanner
Modbus Serial IOScanner, 183 initialization request assistant, 146
Modbus TCP IOScanner, 146
initialization values, 65
Initialize controller, 60 N
Input assembly network diagnostic codes (%IWNS), 238
properties, 224 network objects, 141, 223
input channel status (%IWS)), 277 %IN, 230
input registers %QN, 232
properties, 227 Input assembly (EtherNet/IP), 224
Input registers (IOScanner) Input registers (IOScanner), 234
properties, 234 Input registers (Modbus TCP), 227
IOScanner, Modbus Serial, 180 Output assembly (EtherNet/IP), 226
Output registers (IOScanner), 236
Output registers (Modbus TCP), 229
M
Machine.cfg (post configuration file), 72
maintain values fallback mode, 224, 227
mapping table, Modbus TCP, 141, 191, 227,
229
memory objects
backing up and restoring, 213
Modbus mapping table, 140, 141
EIO0000003297 02/2020 289

Index
O remote devices
adding to Modbus TCP, 143
objects
restarting I/O expansion bus, 124
addressing, 40
restore controller memory, 213
addressing examples, 40
RUN Controller, 61
definition of, 33
Run/Stop, 92
introduction, 34
configuring digital input as, 92
maximum number allowed, 44
network, 223
object types, 34 S
Output assembly (EtherNet/IP)
SD card, 202
properties, 226
application management, 206
output behavior, 65, 67
cloning, 200
output channel status (%QWS), 279
post configuration management, 208
output forcing, 67
updating firmware, 202
output rearming, 68
serial line, 171, 179
output registers
configuration, 172
properties, 229
configuring Modbus Serial IOScanner,
Output registers (IOScanner)
180
properties, 236
configuring to use %SEND_RECV_SMS,
172
P introduction, 171
software initialization values, 65
passive I/O bus error handling, 123
STOP Controller, 61
persistent variables, 63
supported devices, 130
Post Conf
system bits
Presentation, 70
%S106, 123
post configuration
%S107, 124
file management, 72
%S93, 63
Post Configuration
%S94, 64, 64
Presentation, 70
system words
programming languages
%SW118, 84
IL, LD, 26
%SW119, 84
IL, LD, Grafcet, 20
%SW120, 84
pulse generators, 110
%SW148, 63, 64, 64
configuration, 110
FREQGEN configuration, 119
introduction, 110 T
PLS configuration, 112
TM3 expansion modules
PTO configuration, 116
updating firmware, 202
PWM configuration, 114
R U
unit ID, 141
rearming outputs, 68
updating firmware, 88, 202
290 EIO0000003297 02/2020

Index
uploading applications, 59
W
Warm start, 62
EIO0000003297 02/2020 291

Index
292 EIO0000003297 02/2020

Modicon M221 Logic Controller
EIO0000003305 09/2020
Modicon M221
Logic Controller
Advanced Functions Library Guide
09/2020
EIO0000003305.01
please notify us.
2 EIO0000003305 09/2020
Table of Contents
About the Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Part I Introduction to Advanced Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Chapter 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Expert I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Embedded Expert I/O Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
General Information on Function Block Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Part II Advanced Expert Input Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Chapter 2 Fast Counter (%FC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Programming Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Chapter 3 High Speed Counter (%HSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
High Speed Counter in Counting Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
High Speed Counter in Frequency Meter Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Part III Advanced Expert Output Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Chapter 4 Pulse (%PLS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Function Block Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Chapter 5 Pulse Width Modulation (%PWM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Chapter 6 Drive (%DRV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Drive and Logic Controller States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Adding a Drive Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
MC_Power_ATV: Enable/Disable Power Stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
MC_Jog_ATV: Start Jog Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
MC_MoveVel_ATV: Move at Specified Velocity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
MC_Stop_ATV: Stop Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
EIO0000003305 09/2020 3
MC_ReadStatus_ATV: Read Device Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
MC_ReadMotionState_ATV: Read Motion State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
MC_Reset_ATV: Acknowledge and Reset Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Chapter 7 Pulse Train Output (%PTO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
7.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Pulse Train Output (PTO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Pulse Output Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Acceleration / Deceleration Ramp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Probe Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Backlash Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Positioning Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
7.2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
PTO Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Motion Task Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
7.3 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Adding / Removing a Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
PTO Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
7.4 Home Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Homing Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Position Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Long Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Short Reference No Reversal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Short Reference Reversal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Home Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
7.5 Data Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Function Block Object Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
7.6 Operation Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Motion State Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Buffer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
7.7 Motion Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
MC_MotionTask_PTO Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
MC_Power_PTO Function Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
MC_MoveVel_PTO Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
MC_MoveRel_PTO Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
MC_MoveAbs_PTO Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
4 EIO0000003305 09/2020
MC_Home_PTO Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
MC_SetPos_PTO Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
MC_Stop_PTO Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
MC_Halt_PTO Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
7.8 Administrative Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
MC_ReadActVel_PTO Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
MC_ReadActPos_PTO Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
MC_ReadSts_PTO Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
MC_ReadMotionState_PTO Function Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
MC_ReadAxisError_PTO Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
MC_Reset_PTO Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
MC_TouchProbe_PTO Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
MC_AbortTrigger_PTO Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
MC_ReadPar_PTO Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
MC_WritePar_PTO Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Chapter 8 Frequency Generator (%FREQGEN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Part IV Advanced Software Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Chapter 9 PID Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
9.1 PID Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
PID Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
9.2 PID Auto-Tuning Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
PID Auto-Tuning Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
9.3 PID Standard Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
PID Word Address Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
PID Tuning with Auto-Tuning (AT). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Manual Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Determining the Sampling Period (Ts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
9.4 PID Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Access the PID Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
General Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Input Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
PID Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
AT Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Output Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
EIO0000003305 09/2020 5
9.5 PID Programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Programming and Configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
PID States and Detected Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Appendices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Appendix A PID Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Role and Influence of PID Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
PID Parameter Adjustment Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
6 EIO0000003305 09/2020
Safety Information
NOTICE
EIO0000003305 09/2020 7
PLEASE NOTE
BEFORE YOU BEGIN

Do not use this product on machinery lacking effective point-of-operation guarding. Lack of
effective point-of-operation guarding on a machine can result in serious injury to the operator of
that machine.
WARNING
UNGUARDED EQUIPMENT
 Do not use this software and related automation equipment on equipment which does not have
point-of-operation protection.
 Do not reach into machinery during operation.
This automation equipment and related software is used to control a variety of industrial processes.
The type or model of automation equipment suitable for each application will vary depending on
factors such as the control function required, degree of protection required, production methods,
unusual conditions, government regulations, etc. In some applications, more than one processor
may be required, as when backup redundancy is needed.
Only you, the user, machine builder or system integrator can be aware of all the conditions and
factors present during setup, operation, and maintenance of the machine and, therefore, can
determine the automation equipment and the related safeties and interlocks which can be properly
used. When selecting automation and control equipment and related software for a particular
application, you should refer to the applicable local and national standards and regulations. The
National Safety Council's Accident Prevention Manual (nationally recognized in the United States
of America) also provides much useful information.
In some applications, such as packaging machinery, additional operator protection such as point-
of-operation guarding must be provided. This is necessary if the operator's hands and other parts
of the body are free to enter the pinch points or other hazardous areas and serious injury can occur.
Software products alone cannot protect an operator from injury. For this reason the software
cannot be substituted for or take the place of point-of-operation protection.
8 EIO0000003305 09/2020
Ensure that appropriate safeties and mechanical/electrical interlocks related to point-of-operation
protection have been installed and are operational before placing the equipment into service. All
interlocks and safeties related to point-of-operation protection must be coordinated with the related
automation equipment and software programming.
NOTE: Coordination of safeties and mechanical/electrical interlocks for point-of-operation
protection is outside the scope of the Function Block Library, System User Guide, or other
implementation referenced in this documentation.
START-UP AND TEST

Before using electrical control and automation equipment for regular operation after installation,
the system should be given a start-up test by qualified personnel to verify correct operation of the
equipment. It is important that arrangements for such a check be made and that enough time is
allowed to perform complete and satisfactory testing.
WARNING
EQUIPMENT OPERATION HAZARD
 Verify that all installation and set up procedures have been completed.
 Before operational tests are performed, remove all blocks or other temporary holding means
used for shipment from all component devices.
 Remove tools, meters, and debris from equipment.
Follow all start-up tests recommended in the equipment documentation. Store all equipment
documentation for future references.
Software testing must be done in both simulated and real environments.
Verify that the completed system is free from all short circuits and temporary grounds that are not
installed according to local regulations (according to the National Electrical Code in the U.S.A, for
instance). If high-potential voltage testing is necessary, follow recommendations in equipment
documentation to prevent accidental equipment damage.
Before energizing equipment:
 Remove tools, meters, and debris from equipment.
 Close the equipment enclosure door.
 Remove all temporary grounds from incoming power lines.
 Perform all start-up tests recommended by the manufacturer.
EIO0000003305 09/2020 9
OPERATION AND ADJUSTMENTS
The following precautions are from the NEMA Standards Publication ICS 7.1-1995 (English
version prevails):
 Regardless of the care exercised in the design and manufacture of equipment or in the selection
and ratings of components, there are hazards that can be encountered if such equipment is
improperly operated.
 It is sometimes possible to misadjust the equipment and thus produce unsatisfactory or unsafe
operation. Always use the manufacturer’s instructions as a guide for functional adjustments.
Personnel who have access to these adjustments should be familiar with the equipment
manufacturer’s instructions and the machinery used with the electrical equipment.
 Only those operational adjustments actually required by the operator should be accessible to
the operator. Access to other controls should be restricted to prevent unauthorized changes in
operating characteristics.
10 EIO0000003305 09/2020
About the Book
At a Glance
Document Scope
This document provides descriptions of the EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic advanced
functions and their relation to the M221 Logic Controller expert I/O and PID support. Here you can
find descriptions of the functionalities, characteristics and performances of the M221 Logic
Controller advanced functions.
Validity Note
The information in this manual is applicable only for EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic products.
The technical characteristics of the devices described in the present document also appear online.
To access the information online:
Step Action
1 Go to the Schneider Electric home page www.schneider-electric.com.
2 In the Search box type the reference of a product or the name of a product range.
 Do not include blank spaces in the reference or product range.
 To get information on grouping similar modules, use asterisks (*).
3 If you entered a reference, go to the Product Datasheets search results and click on the
reference that interests you.
If you entered the name of a product range, go to the Product Ranges search results and click
on the product range that interests you.
4 If more than one reference appears in the Products search results, click on the reference that
interests you.
5 Depending on the size of your screen, you may need to scroll down to see the data sheet.
6 To save or print a data sheet as a .pdf file, click Download XXX product datasheet.
The characteristics that are presented in the present document should be the same as those
characteristics that appear online. In line with our policy of constant improvement, we may revise
content over time to improve clarity and accuracy. If you see a difference between the document
and online information, use the online information as your reference.
EIO0000003305 09/2020 11
Related Documents

EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic Operating Guide EIO0000003281 (ENG)
EIO0000003282 (FRA)
EIO0000003283 (GER)
EIO0000003284 (SPA)
EIO0000003285 (ITA)
EIO0000003286 (CHS)
EIO0000003287 (POR)
EIO0000003288 (TUR)
EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic Generic Functions - Library EIO0000003289 (ENG)
Guide EIO0000003290 (FRA)
EIO0000003291 (GER)
EIO0000003292 (SPA)
EIO0000003293 (ITA)
EIO0000003294 (CHS)
EIO0000003295 (POR)
EIO0000003296 (TUR)
Modicon M221 Logic Controller - Programming Guide EIO0000003297 (ENG)
EIO0000003298 (FRE)
EIO0000003299 (GER)
EIO0000003300 (SPA)
EIO0000003301 (ITA)
EIO0000003302 (CHS)
EIO0000003304 (TUR)
EIO0000003303 (POR)
EIO0000003314 (FRA)
EIO0000003315 (GER)
EIO0000003316 (SPA)
EIO0000003317 (ITA)
EIO0000003318 (CHS)
EIO0000003319 (POR)
EIO0000003320 (TUR)
at https://www.se.com/ww/en/download/ .
12 EIO0000003305 09/2020
WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
1For additional information, refer to NEMA ICS 1.1 (latest edition), "Safety Guidelines for the
WARNING
EIO0000003305 09/2020 13
EN 61131-2:2007 Programmable controllers, part 2: Equipment requirements and tests.
reduction
requirements
EN 1088:2008 Safety of machinery - Interlocking devices associated with guards - Principles
ISO 14119:2013 for design and selection
EN/IEC 62061:2005 Safety of machinery - Functional safety of safety-related electrical, electronic,
IEC 61784-3:2008 Digital data communication for measurement and control: Functional safety
field buses.
14 EIO0000003305 09/2020
(2006/42/EC) and ISO 12100:2010.
EIO0000003305 09/2020 15
16 EIO0000003305 09/2020
Introduction
EIO0000003305 09/2020
Part I
Introduction to Advanced Functions
Introduction to Advanced Functions
EIO0000003305 09/2020 17
Introduction
18 EIO0000003305 09/2020
Introduction
EIO0000003305 09/2020
Chapter 1
Introduction
Introduction
Overview
This document provides descriptions of the EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic advanced
functions and their relation to the M221 expert I/O and PID support. Here you can find descriptions
of the functionalities, characteristics and performances of the Fast Counter (%FC), High Speed
Counter (%HSC), Pulse (%PLS), Pulse Width Modulation (%PWM), and Pulse Train Output
(%PTO) inputs and outputs. In addition, you can find a complete description of the PID advanced
software functionality. For information about the user-defined functions and the user-defined
function blocks, refer to User-Defined Functions (see EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic,
Operating Guide) and User-Defined Function Blocks (see EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic,
Operating Guide).
The functions provide simple yet powerful solutions for your application. However, the use and
application of the information contained herein require expertise in the design and programming of
automated control systems.
Only you, the user, machine builder or integrator, can be aware of all the conditions and factors
present during installation and setup, operation, and maintenance of the machine or related
processes, and can therefore determine the automation and associated equipment and the related
safeties and interlocks which can be effectively and properly used. When selecting automation and
control equipment, and any other related equipment or software, for a particular application, you
must also consider any applicable local, regional or national standards and/or regulations.
WARNING
REGULATORY INCOMPATIBILITY
Ensure that all equipment applied and systems designed comply with all applicable local,
regional, and national regulations and standards.
EIO0000003305 09/2020 19
Introduction
The functionality provided by the EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic advanced functions for the
M221 controllers was conceived and designed assuming that you incorporate the necessary safety
hardware into your application architecture, such as, but not limited to, appropriate limit switches
and emergency stop hardware and controlling circuitry. It is implicitly assumed that functional
safety measures are present in your machine design to prevent undesirable machine behavior
such as over-travel or other forms of uncontrolled movement. Further, it is assumed that you have
performed a functional safety analysis and risk assessment appropriate to your machine or
process.
WARNING
Ensure that a risk assessment is conducted and respected according to EN/ISO 12100 during
the design of your machine.

Topic Page
Expert I/O 21
Embedded Expert I/O Mapping 23
General Information on Function Block Management 26
20 EIO0000003305 09/2020
Introduction
Expert I/O
Introduction
The M221 logic controller provides:
 Four fast inputs (%I0.0, %I0.1, %I0.6 and %I0.7)
 Two fast outputs on controller references that contain transistor outputs (%Q0.0 and %Q0.1)
 Four fast outputs on controller references TM221C40U and TM221CE40U (%Q0.0, %Q0.1,
%Q0.2, and %Q0.3)
NOTE: No fast output functions are supported on controller references that contain relay outputs.
The M221 logic controller supports the following expert I/O functions (depending on the reference):
Functions Description
Counters Fast Counter The FC function can execute fast counts of pulses from sensors,
(see page 29) switches, and so on.
High Speed Counter The HSC function can execute fast counts of pulses from
(see page 35) sensors, switches, and so on, that are connected to the fast
inputs.
Pulse Pulse (see page 53) The PLS function generates a square wave pulse signal on
Generators dedicated output channels.
Pulse Width Modulation The PWM function generates a modulated wave signal on
(see page 61) dedicated output channels with a variable duty cycle.
Pulse Train Output The PTO function generates a pulse train output to control a
(see page 99) linear single-axis stepper or servo drive in open loop mode.
Frequency Generator The FREQGEN function generates a square wave signal on a
(see page 207) dedicated output channel with programmable frequency and
duty cycle of 50%.
NOTE:
 When an input is used as Run/Stop, it cannot be used by an expert function.
 When an output is used as Alarm, it cannot be used by an expert function.
For more details, refer to Embedded Input/Output Configuration (see Modicon M221, Logic
Controller, Programming Guide).
EIO0000003305 09/2020 21
Introduction
Configuring an Expert Input Function

To configure an expert input function, proceed as follows:
Step Description
1 Click the High Speed Counters node in the hardware tree.
Result: The High Speed Counters list is displayed:
2 Click ... in the Configuration column to select the type of high speed counter and to display the High
Speed Counter Assistant window.
Configuring an Expert Output Function

To configure an expert output function, proceed as follows:
Step Description
1 Click the Pulse Generators node in the hardware tree.
Result: The Pulse Generators list is displayed:
2 Click [...] in the Configuration column to select the type of pulse generator and to display the Pulse
Train Output Assistant window.
Expert I/O Function Configuration Characteristics

 Inputs can be read through standard memory variables even if configured in association with
expert I/O functions.
 Short-circuit management still applies on all expert outputs.
 All I/O that are not used by expert I/O functions can be used as regular I/O.
 Outputs used by the Pulse, Pulse Train Output, Pulse Width Modulation, and High
Speed Counters can only be accessed through the expert I/O function block. They cannot be
read or written directly within the application.
22 EIO0000003305 09/2020
Introduction
Embedded Expert I/O Mapping
Input Mapping for Expert Functions on M221 Logic Controller

Embedded digital inputs can be assigned to functions (Run/Stop, Latch, Event, Fast Counter,
HSC, PTO). Inputs not assigned to functions are used as regular inputs. The following table
presents the possible assignments of the embedded M221 Logic Controller digital inputs:
Simple Input Function Advanced Input Function

Function Run/Stop Latch Event Fast HSC PTO(3)
Counter
Fast Input %I0.0 X – – – %HSC0 –
%I0.1 X – – – %HSC0 or %HSC2(1) –
Regular %I0.2 X X X %FC0 Preset for %HSC0 Ref or probe for

Input %PTO0 to %PTO3
%I0.3 X X X %FC1 Catch for %HSC0
%I0.4 X X X %FC2 Catch for %HSC1
%I0.5 X X X %FC3 Preset for %HSC1
%I0.7 X – – – %HSC1 or %HSC3(2) –
X Yes
– No
(1)
%HSC2 is available when %HSC0 is configured as Single Phase or Not Configured.
(2) %HSC3 is available when %HSC1 is configured as Single Phase or Not Configured.
(3)
PTO function is available on controller references that contain transistor outputs.
EIO0000003305 09/2020 23
Introduction

Counter
Regular %I0.8 X – – – – Ref or probe for
Input %PTO0 to %PTO3 on
%I0.9 X – – – –
(depending TM221C40U and
on the TM221CE40U
controller controllers
reference) %I0.10 X – – – – –
%I0.11 X – – – – –
%I0.12 X – – – – –
%I0.13 X – – – – –
%I0.14 X – – – – –
%I0.15 X – – – – –
%I0.16 X – – – – –
%I0.17 X – – – – –
%I0.18 X – – – – –
%I0.19 X – – – – –
%I0.20 X – – – – –
%I0.21 X – – – – –
%I0.22 X – – – – –
%I0.23 X – – – – –
X Yes
– No
(1)
(2)
(3) PTO function is available on controller references that contain transistor outputs.
24 EIO0000003305 09/2020
Introduction
Output Mapping for Expert Functions on M221 Logic Controller

The information below refers to regular and fast transistor outputs on M221 Logic Controller:
Function Alarm HSC PLS / PWM / PTO / FREQGEN

Output
%Q0.0 X – • %PLS0
• %PWM0
• %PTO0
Fast • %FREQGEN0
Output(1) %Q0.1 X – • %PLS1
• %PWM1
• %PTO(2)
• %FREQGEN1
%Q0.2 X Reflex output 0 for %HSC0 or %HSC2 • %PTO(4)
• %FREQGEN2
• %FREQGEN3
%Q0.4 X Reflex output 0 for %HSC1 or %HSC3 %PTOx direction
Regular %Q0.6 X – %PTOx direction
Output(3) %Q0.7 X – %PTOx direction
(depending
on the %Q0.8 – – %PTOx direction
controller %Q0.9 – – %PTOx direction
reference)
%Q0.10 – – %PTOx direction
(1) Fast output functions are only available on controller references that contain transistor outputs.
(2) %PTO0 direction in CW/CCW output mode, or %PTO1 (not available when %PTO0 is configured in CW/CCW output
mode), or %PTOx direction in other cases.
(3) %Q0.2 and %Q0.3 are fast outputs on TM221C40U and TM221CE40U controllers
(4) %PTO2 on TM221C40U and TM221CE40U controllers, or %PTOx direction in other cases.
(5) %PTO2 direction in CW/CCW output mode on TM221C40U and TM221CE40U controllers, or %PTO3 (not available
when %PTO2 is configured in CW/CCW output mode) on TM221C40U and TM221CE40U controllers, or %PTOx
direction in other cases.
EIO0000003305 09/2020 25
Introduction
General Information on Function Block Management
Management of Function Block Inputs and Input Objects

The variables (function block inputs and input objects) are used with the rising edge of the
Execute input. To modify any variable, it is necessary to change the input variables and to trigger
the function block again. However, there are some function blocks that do provide a continuous
update option.
Management of Function Block Outputs and Output Objects

The Done, Error, Busy, and CmdAborted outputs are mutually exclusive: only one of them can
be TRUE on one function block. When the Execute input is TRUE, one of these outputs is TRUE.
At the rising edge of the Execute input, the Busy output is set to TRUE. It remains TRUE during
the execution of the function block and is reset at the rising edge of one of the other outputs (Done,
Error and CmdAborted).
The Done output is TRUE when the execution of the function block has completed successfully.
If an error is detected, the function block terminates by setting the Error output to TRUE, and the
error code is contained within the ErrId output.
The Done, Error, and CmdAborted outputs are set to TRUE or FALSE with the falling edge of
the Execute input, according to the following conditions:
 set for one task cycle if the function block execution is finished and the Execute input is FALSE
and then reset to their default values.
 retain their value if the function block execution is finished and the Execute input is TRUE.
When an instance of a function block receives a new Execute before it is finished (as a series of
commands on the same instance), the function block does not return any feedback, like Done, for
the previous action. However, the new command is started on the function block (status is Busy).
Error Handling
All blocks have two outputs that can report errors detected during the execution of the function
block:
 Error= The rising edge of this output indicates that an error was detected.
 ErrID= The error code of the error detected.
26 EIO0000003305 09/2020
Advanced Expert Input Functions
EIO0000003305 09/2020
Part II
Overview
This part describes the advanced expert input functions.

2 Fast Counter (%FC) 29
3 High Speed Counter (%HSC) 35
EIO0000003305 09/2020 27
28 EIO0000003305 09/2020
Fast Counter (%FC)
EIO0000003305 09/2020
Chapter 2
Fast Counter (%FC)
Fast Counter (%FC)
Using Fast Counter Function Blocks

This chapter provides descriptions and programming guidelines for using Fast Counter function
blocks.

Topic Page
Description 30
Configuration 32
Programming Example 34
EIO0000003305 09/2020 29
Fast Counter (%FC)
Description
Introduction
The Fast Counter function block serves as either an up-counter or a down-counter. It

can count the rising edge of digital inputs up to frequencies of 5 kHz in single word or double word
computational mode. Because Fast Counter function blocks are managed by specific hardware
interrupts, maintaining maximum frequency sampling rates may vary depending on your specific
application and hardware configuration.
The Fast Counter function blocks %FC0, %FC1, %FC2, and %FC3 use dedicated inputs %I0.2,
%I0.3, %I0.4 and %I0.5 respectively. These bits are not reserved for their exclusive use. Their
allocation must be considered with the use of other function blocks for these dedicated resources.
Illustration
This illustration is a Fast Counter function block in single-word mode:
Inputs
The Fast Counter function block has the following inputs:
Label Description Value

IN Enable At state 1, the value is updated according to the pulses applied to the physical
input.
At state 0, the value is held at its last value.
R Reset Used to initialize the block.
(optional) At state 1:
 %FC.P or %FC.PD values are taken into account.
 The value is reset to 0 if configured as an up-counter, or set to %FC.P or
%FC.PD if configured as a down-counter.
 The Done bit %FC.D is set back to its default value.
30 EIO0000003305 09/2020
Fast Counter (%FC)
Outputs
The Fast Counter function block has the following output:

D Done This bit is set to 1 when:
(%FCi.D)  %FCi.V or %FCi.VD reaches the preset value %FCi.P or %FCi.PD
configured as an up-counter.
 or when %FCi.V or %FCi.VD reaches 0 when configured as a down-
counter.
This read-only bit is reset only by setting %FCi.R to 1.
EIO0000003305 09/2020 31
Fast Counter (%FC)
Configuration
Parameters
To configure parameters, follow the Configuring a Function Block procedure (see EcoStruxure
Machine Expert - Basic, Generic Functions Library Guide) and read the description of Memory
Allocation Modes in the EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic Operating Guide (see EcoStruxure
The Fast Counter function block has the following parameters:
Parameter Description Value

Used Address used If selected, this address is currently in use in a program.
Address %FCi Fast Counter The instance identifier, where it is from 0 to the number of objects
address available on this logic controller. Refer to Maximum Number of
Objects table (see Modicon M221, Logic Controller,
Programming Guide) for the maximum number of Fast
Counters.
Input %IO.i The dedicated input associated with this function block instance.
%IO.2...%IO.5
Symbol Symbol The symbol associated with this object. Refer to the EcoStruxure
Machine Expert - Basic Operating Guide (Defining and Using
Symbols) for details.
Configured Whether to count up or Set to one of:
down  Not used
 Up Counter
 Down Counter
Preset Preset value (%FCi.P Initial value may be set:

or %FCi.PD)  Using associated object %FCi.P from 1 to 65535 in single
word mode,
 Using associated object %FCi.PD from 1 to 4294967295 in
double word mode.
Double Word Double word mode If selected, use double word mode. Otherwise, use single-word
mode.
Comment Comment An optional comment can be associated with this object.
Double-click in the Comment column and type a comment.
32 EIO0000003305 09/2020
Fast Counter (%FC)
Objects
The Fast Counter function block is associated with the following objects:
Object Description Value

%FCi.V Current value The current value increments or decrements according the up or
%FCi.VD down counting function selected. For up-counting, the current
counting value is updated and can reach 65535 in single word
mode (%FCi.V) and 4294967295 in double word mode
(%FCi.VD). For down-counting, the current value is the preset
value %FC.P or %FC.PD and can count down to 0.
%FCi.P Preset value A new preset value is taken into account only if the R input is
%FCi.PD active. See description in Parameters table above.
%FCi.D Done See description in Outputs table above.
Operation
This table describes the main stages of Fast Counter function block operations:
Operation Action Result

Count up A rising edge appears at the Count The current value %FCi.V is incremented by 1
up input. unit.
When the preset value %FCi.P or The Done output bit %FCi.D is set to 1.
%FCi.PD is reached.
Count down A rising edge appears at the down- The current value %FCi.V is decremented by 1
counting input. unit.
When the value is 0. The Done output bit %FCi.D is set to 1.
Special Cases
This table contains a list of special operating cases for the Fast Counter function block:
Special Case Description

Effect of cold restart (%S0=1) Resets the Fast Counter attributes with the values configured
or user application (see Modicon M221, Logic Controller,
Programming Guide).
Effect of warm restart (%S1=1) No effect (see Modicon M221, Logic Controller, Programming
Guide).
Effect of controller stops The Fast Counter stops counting when the controller is set to
STOPPED state and resumes counting when it returns to
RUNNING state. The counter resumes counting from the last
value before entering the STOPPED state.
EIO0000003305 09/2020 33
Fast Counter (%FC)
Programming Example
Introduction
In this example, the application counts a number of items up to 5000 while %I0.1 is set to 1. The
input for %FC1 is the dedicated input %I0.3. When the preset value is reached, %FC1.D is set to
1 and retains the same value until %FC1.R is commanded by the result of AND on %I0.2 and %M0.
Programming
This example is a Fast Counter function block:
Rung Instruction
0 BLK %FC1
LD %I0.1
IN
LD %I0.2
AND %M0
R
OUT_BLK
LD D
ST %Q0.0
END_BLK
NOTE: Refer to the reversibility procedure (see EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic, Generic
Functions Library Guide) to obtain the equivalent Ladder Diagram.
34 EIO0000003305 09/2020
High Speed Counter (%HSC)
EIO0000003305 09/2020
Chapter 3
Using High Speed Counter Function Blocks

This chapter provides descriptions and programming guidelines for using High Speed Counter
function blocks.

Topic Page
Description 36
High Speed Counter in Counting Modes 40
High Speed Counter in Frequency Meter Mode 47
EIO0000003305 09/2020 35
Description
Introduction
The High Speed Counter function block can be configured by EcoStruxure Machine
Expert - Basic to perform any one of the following functions:
 Dual Phase [Pulse / Direction]
 Single Phase
 Frequency Meter
The High Speed Counter function block works at a maximum frequency of 100 kHz for all
counting modes with a range of 0 to 65535 in single word and 0 to 4294967295 in double word.
The High Speed Counter function block uses dedicated inputs and auxiliary inputs and outputs.
Refer to the M221 Logic Controller - Hardware Guide for more information on inputs and outputs.
You must initialize the High Speed Counter function in the Configuration tab using the High
Speed Counter Assistant before using an instance of the function block. Refer to Configuring High
Speed Counters (see Modicon M221, Logic Controller, Programming Guide).
Graphical Representation
36 EIO0000003305 09/2020
Inputs
The High Speed Counter function block has the following inputs:

IN Enable (required) 0 or 1
At state 1, the counting function or frequency measurement is enabled.
At state 0, the present value is held at its last value.
S Preset input. 0 or 1
At state 1:
 initializes the value with the preset value for:
 Dual Phase [Quadrature X1],
 Dual Phase [Quadrature X2],
 Dual Phase [Quadrature X4], or
 Dual Phase [Pulse / Direction] with down function in progress
 resets the value to 0 for:

 Single Phase, or
 Dual Phase [Pulse / Direction] with up function in progress
In addition, this also initializes the operation of the threshold outputs and takes
into account any user modifications to the threshold values set in the properties
window or the program.
The High Speed Counter function block is associated with the following input objects:
Object Type Description Value

%HSCi.P WORD Preset value Refer to Auxiliary Inputs (see page 41).
%HSCi.PD DOUBLE WORD
%HSCi.S0 WORD Threshold 0 Refer to Output Threshold in Counting Modes
%HSCi.S0D DOUBLE WORD (see page 40).
%HSCi.S1 WORD Threshold 1 Refer to Output Threshold in Counting Modes
%HSCi.S1D DOUBLE WORD (see page 40).
%HSCi.T WORD Time base Refer to High Speed Counter in Frequency
Meter Mode (see page 47).
%HSCi.R BOOL Enable reflex output 0 At state 1 enables the reflex output 0.
%HSCi.S BOOL Enable reflex output 1 At state 1 enables the reflex output 1.
NOTE: The %HSCi.R and %HSCi.S bits respectively enable or disable the reflex outputs only if
the HSC function block is enabled, that is, if %HSCi.IN is set to 1.
EIO0000003305 09/2020 37
Outputs
The High Speed Counter function block has the following outputs:

F Overflow 0 or 1
Set to 1 if an arithmetic overflow occurs.
U Counting direction 0: Down counting
Set by the system, this bit is used by the Dual Phase counting 1: Up counting
functions to indicate the direction of counting.
TH0 Threshold bit 0 0 or 1
Set to 1 when the present value is greater than or equal to the
threshold value S0 (%HSCi.S0).
Test this bit only once in the program because it is updated in real
time. The user application is responsible for the validity of the value
at its time of use.
TH1 Threshold bit 1 0 or 1
Set to 1 when the present value is greater than or equal to the
threshold value S1 (%HSCi.S1).
Test this bit only once in the program because it is updated in real
time.
The High Speed Counter function block is associated with the following output objects:
Object Type Description Value

%HSCi.V WORD Present value Refer to High Speed Counter in Counting
%HSCi.VD DOUBLE WORD Modes (see page 40) and to High Speed
Counter in Frequency Meter Mode
(see page 47).
NOTE: The present value can be updated
independently of the %HSC function block
call. %HSCi.V/%HSCi.VD can be read
twice and have different results in the
same task cycle.
%HSCi.C WORD Capture value Refer to Auxiliary Inputs (see page 41).
%HSCi.CD DOUBLE WORD
%HSCi.U BOOL Counting direction 0: Down counting
1: Up counting
%HSCi.F BOOL Overflow 0: No overflow
1: Counter overflow
38 EIO0000003305 09/2020
Properties
The High Speed Counter function block has the following properties:
Property Value Description

Used Activated / deactivated checkbox Indicates whether the address is in use.
Address %HSCi, where i is from 0 to 3, depending i is the instance identifier.
on the type(s) of counters configured For the maximum number of %HSC objects, refer to
the table Maximum Number of Objects
(see Modicon M221, Logic Controller,
Programming Guide).
Symbol User-defined text The symbol that uniquely identifies this object. For
details, refer to Defining and Using Symbols
(see EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic,
Operating Guide).
Preset  from 0 to 65535 for %HSCi.P Preset value to initialize the HSC present value
 from 0 to 4294967295 for %HSCi.PD (%HSCi.P, %HSCi.PD).
Not valid for the Frequency Meter.
S0  from 1 to 65535 for %HSCi.S0 Threshold 0 value is used as a comparator with the
 from 1 to 4294967295 for %HSCi.S0D present value.
The value of S0 must be less than S1 (%HSCi.S1).
S1  from 2 to 65535 for %HSCi.S1 Threshold 1 value is used as a comparator with the
 from 2 to 4294967295 for %HSCi.S1D present value.
The value of S1 must be greater than S0
(%HSCi.S0).
Time Base 100 ms or 1 s for %HSCi.T Frequency measurement time base.
Comment User-defined text A comment to associate with this object.
Special Cases
This table shows a list of special operating of the High Speed Counter function block:

Effect of cold restart (%S0=1) Resets the High Speed Counter attributes with the values
configured by the program.
Effect of warm restart (%S1=1) Has no effect.
Effect of controller stop The High Speed Counter stops its function and the outputs stay in
their present state.
NOTE: When the controller stops, the reflex outputs are set to 0 if
Maintain values is selected for the outputs. Otherwise, if Maintain
values is not selected, the reflex outputs take the fallback values. For
more information on configuring fallback behavior, refer to Fallback
Behavior (see EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic, Operating Guide).
EIO0000003305 09/2020 39
High Speed Counter in Counting Modes
Introduction
The High Speed Counter function block works at a maximum frequency of 100 kHz for all
counting modes with a range of 0 to 65535 in single word and 0 to 4294967295 in double word.
The pulses to be counted are applied in the following way:
Function Description Input type %HSC0 %HSC1 %HSC2 %HSC3

Dual Phase The pulses are applied to the Pulse Input %I0.0 %I0.6 – –
[Pulse / physical input associated to
Direction] Pulse Input.
The present operation Direction Input %I0.1 %I0.7 – –
(upcount/downcount) is given by
the state of the Direction Input:
 0 = up counting
 1 = down counting
Dual Phase The 2 phases of the encoder are Pulse Input %I0.0 %I0.6 – –
[Quadrature applied to physical inputs Phase A
X1], Dual Phase associated to Pulse Input Phase
Pulse Input %I0.1 %I0.7 – –
[Quadrature A and Pulse Input Phase B.
Phase B
X2], or Dual
Phase
[Quadrature
X4]
Single Phase The pulses are applied to the Pulse Input %I0.0 %I0.6 %I0.1 %I0.7
physical input associated to
Pulse Input.
NOTE: I/O assignment is different between the Twido platform and M221 Logic Controller range.
On the M221 Logic Controller, the main pulse input is %I0.0 for %HSC0 and %I0.6 for %HSC1. On
the Twido platform, the main pulse input is %I0.1 for %HSC0 and %I0.7 for %HSC1.
Output Thresholds
During counting, the current value is compared to two thresholds: %HSCi.S0 or %HSCi.S0D and
%HSCi.S1 or %HSCi.S1D.
In single word mode, modifications to these threshold values are taken into account regardless of
the value of the Preset input.
In double word mode, modifications to the threshold values made in an animation table are not
taken into account. Modifications made in the application are, however, taken into account
regardless of the value of the Preset input.
40 EIO0000003305 09/2020
Threshold value modifications are saved in the logic controller (%HSCi.S0, %HSCi.S1,
%HSCi.S0D and %HSCi.S1D objects), but not in the Configuration window of EcoStruxure
According to the result of the comparisons, the bit objects, %HSCi.TH0 and %HSCi.TH1, are:
 set to 1 if the current value is greater than or equal to the corresponding threshold
 reset to 0 if the current value is less than the corresponding threshold.
Physical reflex outputs can be configured to respond differentially within the context of the compare
results of the threshold values and the current value of the counters.
NOTE: None, 1 or 2 reflex outputs can be configured.
For more information on the configuration of reflex outputs, refer to Configuring Dual Phase and
Single Phase Counters (see Modicon M221, Logic Controller, Programming Guide).
%HSCi.U is an output of the function block; it gives the direction of the associated counter variation
(1 for UP, 0 for DOWN).
Auxiliary Inputs
Counting operations are made on the rising edge of pulses, and only if the counting function block
is enabled (IN input at state 1).
There are two optional inputs used in counting mode: Catch Input and Preset Input:
 A rising edge of the Catch Input is used to capture the current value (%HSCi.V or %HSCi.VD)
and store it in %HSCi.C or %HSCi.CD. The catch inputs are specified as %I0.3 for %HSC0 and
%I0.4 for %HSC1 if available.
 A rising edge of the Preset Input initializes %HSCi.V or %HSCi.VD value with the preset value
for:
 Dual Phase [Quadrature X1]
 Dual Phase [Pulse / Direction] with down function in progress
The Preset Input resets the value to 0 for:

 Single Phase
 Dual Phase [Pulse / Direction] with up function in progress
If the auxiliary Preset Input is set to 1 with the input IN at 0 (the function is inhibited), the outputs
are not monitored and maintain their values.
NOTE: %HSCi.F is also set to 0. The Preset Input is specified as %I0.2 for %HSC0 and/or %I0.5
for %HSC1.
EIO0000003305 09/2020 41
Operation
This illustration is the operation diagram of the counting mode in single word mode (in double word
mode, use the double word function variables):
NOTE: Reflex outputs are managed independently from the controller cycle time.
Dual Phase [Pulse / Direction] Timing Diagram

Reflex output configuration example:
Reflex Output Value < %HSC0.S0 %HSC0.S0 <= Value < %HSC0.S1 Value >= %HSC0.S1
%Q0.2 0 0 1
%Q0.3 1 1 0
42 EIO0000003305 09/2020
Timing diagram:
(1) Input IN is set to 1 so down-counting mode starts (%HSC0.U = 0 that is, IB = 1)

(2) The current value reaches 0 so F output flag is set to 1 and %HSC0.V is set to 65535 at the next count
(3) Change at the IB input, the counter is now in up counting mode and %HSC0.U = 1
(4) IB input is set to 1 so the counter is in down counting mode and %HSC0.U is set to 0
(5) Input S is set to 1 while down counting is in progress, so %HSC0.V is initialized to the Preset value
%HSC0.P = 17
(6) S is reset to 0 and the preset value %HSC0.P is changed to 20
(7) The input IN is set to 0 so the function is inhibited, %HSC0.V is held
EIO0000003305 09/2020 43
(8) S is set to 1 so the new preset value (%HSC0.P = 20) is taken into account and the reflex outputs are
updated. Note: If an auxiliary preset input is used instead of S, the reflex outputs are not updated in
accordance with the Twido family of controllers.
(9) IN input is set to 1 and the function restarts in down counting mode
(10) The threshold value %HSC0.S1 is set to 17
(11) S input active makes threshold S1 new value to be granted at the next count and resets %HSC0.V to 0
(12) A catch of the current value %HSC0.V is made so %HSC0.C = 14
NOTE: %HSC0.R and %HSC0.S must be set to TRUE to have the configured reflex outputs active.
Dual Phase [Quadrature X1], Dual Phase [Quadrature X2], Dual Phase [Quadrature
X4] Timing Diagram
A physical encoder provides two 90° shifted signals that allow the counter to count pulses and
detect direction:
X1 1 count for each encoder cycle
X2 2 counts for each encoder cycle
X4 4 counts for each encoder cycle
Timing diagram:
Quadrature X1 When channel A leads channel B, the counter increments on the rising edge of channel A.
When channel B leads channel A, the counter decrements on the falling edge of channel A.
Quadrature X2 Counter increments or decrements on each edge of channel A, depending on which channel
leads the other. Each cycle results in two increments or decrements.
Quadrature X4 The counter increments or decrements on each edge of channels A and B. Whether the counter
increments or decrements depends on which channel leads the other. Each cycle results in 4 increments
or decrements.
44 EIO0000003305 09/2020
Single Phase Timing Diagram

Reflex output configuration example:
Reflex Output Value < %HSC0.S0 %HSC0.S0 <= Value < %HSC0.S1 Value >= %HSC0.S1
%Q0.2 0 1 0
%Q0.3 1 0 1
Timing diagram:
(1) IN is set to 1: the counting function is activated (%HSC0.U = 1 because %HSC0 is an up-counter)
(2) %Q0.2 (Reflex Output) and TH0 are set to 1
EIO0000003305 09/2020 45
(3) TH1 is set to 1

(4) The maximum value is reached so on the next count %HSC0.V is reset to 0 and F is set to 1
(5) S is set to 1, the current value, %HSC0.V, is set to 0
(6) The current function is inhibited while IN is set to 0
(7) While the function is inhibited, S is set to 1 so the current value is reset to 0
(8) Change of threshold value S1 to 17
(9) S is set to 1 so the new value of S1 will be granted at the next count
(10) Catch input is set to 1 so %HSC0.C = 17
46 EIO0000003305 09/2020
High Speed Counter in Frequency Meter Mode
Introduction
The frequency meter mode of an High Speed Counter is used to measure the frequency of a
periodic signal in Hz on input IA (pulse input phase A).
The frequency range which can be measured is 1 Hz to 100 kHz with a range of 0 to 4294967295
in double word mode.
It is possible to choose between 2 time bases, the choice being made by the object %HSC.T (Time
base):
Time Base Accuracy Update

100 ms 0.01% for 100 kHz 10 times per second
10% for 100 Hz
1s 0.001% for 100 kHz Once per second
10% for 10 Hz
Accuracy Measurement
EIO0000003305 09/2020 47
Operation
This illustration is the operation diagram of the frequency meter mode:
48 EIO0000003305 09/2020
Timing Diagram
This timing diagram is an example of using a High Speed Counter in frequency meter mode:
(1) The first frequency measurement starts at a rising edge of the TB signal
(2) %HSC0.V (or %HSC0.VD) is updated after one period of the TB
(3) Input IN and input S are set to 1 so %HSC0.V (or %HSC0.VD) is set to 0
(4) %HSC0.T is set to 100 ms, so the measurement is canceled and a new one starts
(5) Input IN is set to 0, so the frequency measurement function is inhibited and %HSC0.V (or %HSC0.VD) is
held
(6) S is set to 1, so the value %HSC0.V (or %HSC0.VD) is set to 0
(7) S is set to 0 and IN is set to 1, so the measurement will start at the next rising edge of the TB signal
EIO0000003305 09/2020 49
50 EIO0000003305 09/2020
Advanced Expert Output Functions
EIO0000003305 09/2020
Part III
Overview
This part describes the advanced expert output functions.

4 Pulse (%PLS) 53
5 Pulse Width Modulation (%PWM) 61
6 Drive (%DRV) 69
7 Pulse Train Output (%PTO) 99
8 Frequency Generator (%FREQGEN) 207
EIO0000003305 09/2020 51
52 EIO0000003305 09/2020
Pulse (%PLS)
EIO0000003305 09/2020
Chapter 4
Pulse (%PLS)
Pulse (%PLS)
Using Pulse Function Blocks

This chapter provides descriptions and programming guidelines for using Pulse function blocks.

Topic Page
Description 54
Function Block Configuration 56
EIO0000003305 09/2020 53
Pulse (%PLS)
Description
Introduction
The Pulse function block is used to generate square wave signals.

Two Pulse function blocks are available on the dedicated output channel %Q0.0 or %Q0.1. Logic
controllers with relay outputs for these two channels do not support the Pulse function block.
Refer to the M221 Logic Controller - Hardware Guide for more information on inputs and outputs.
The Pulse function block allows only a single signal width, or duty cycle, of 50%.
You can choose to limit either the number of pulses or the period when the pulse train is executed.
These factors can be determined at the time of configuration and/or updated by the program.
You must configure the Pulse function block in the Configuration → Pulse Generators before
using an instance of the function block, refer to Configuring Pulse Generators (see Modicon M221,
Logic Controller, Programming Guide).
The PLS function has the following characteristics:
Characteristic Value
Number of channels 2
Minimum frequency 1 Hz
Maximum frequency 10000 Hz
Accuracy on frequency 1%
Illustration
This illustration is a Pulse function block:
54 EIO0000003305 09/2020
Pulse (%PLS)
Inputs
The Pulse function block has the following inputs:

IN Enable At state 1, the pulse is produced at the dedicated output
channel.
At state 0, the output channel is set to 0.
R Reset to 0 (optional) At state 1, outputs %PLSi.Q and %PLSi.D are set to 0.
The number of pulses generated in period T is set to 0.
Outputs
The Pulse function block has the following outputs:
Label Object Description Value

Q %PLSi.Q Generation in At state 1, indicates that the Pulse signal is generated
progress at the dedicated output channel configured.
D %PLSi.D Generation complete At state 1, signal generation is complete. The number of
(optional) desired pulses has been reached.
EIO0000003305 09/2020 55
Pulse (%PLS)
Function Block Configuration
Overview
To configure the Pulse Generator resource, refer to Configuring Pulse Generators
(see Modicon M221, Logic Controller, Programming Guide).
To configure the Pulse Generator resource as a PLS, refer to Configuring Pulse (see Modicon
M221, Logic Controller, Programming Guide).
Parameters
The Pulse function block has the following parameters:

Address %PLSi The instance identifier, where i is from 0 to the number of objects
Pulse address available on this logic controller. For the maximum number of Pulse
objects, refer to the table Maximum Number of Objects (see Modicon
Symbol Symbol The symbol associated with this object. For details, refer to Defining
and Using Symbols (see EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic,
Operating Guide).
Preset Preselection of  Time Base = 1 s, %PLSi.P=1 or 2
the period  Time Base = 10 ms, 1<=%PLSi.P<=200
(%PLSi.P)  Time Base = 1 ms, 1<=%PLSi.P<=2000
 Time Base = 0.1 ms, 1<=%PLSi.P<=20000
Num. Pulse Number of To produce an unlimited number of pulses, set %PLS.N or %PLS.ND
pulses to 0.
(%PLSi.N,
%PLSi.ND)
Current Current output 0 or 1.
(%PLSi.Q)
Done Done pulse At state 1, signal generation is complete. The number of desired
(%PLSi.D) pulses has been reached. It is reset by either setting the IN or the R
inputs to 1.
56 EIO0000003305 09/2020
Pulse (%PLS)
Objects
The Pulse function block is associated with the following objects:
Object Description Size (bit) Defaut Value Range

%PLSi.P Preset value 16 Preset (set on Preset %PLSi.P Time Base
Configuration →
1...20000 0.1 ms
Pulse
Generators) 1...2000 1 ms
1...200 10 ms
1 or 2 1 s (default)
%PLSi.N Number of 16 0 0...32767
pulses
%PLSi.ND 32 0 0...2147483647
Rules of Use
The output signal period T is set with Preset and the Time Base parameters such as
T = %PLSi.P x .Time Base.
This table shows the range of available periods:
Time Base Frequency

0.1 ms 0.5 Hz...10000 Hz
1 ms 0.5 Hz...1000 Hz
10 ms 0.5 Hz...100 Hz
1s 0.5 Hz...1 Hz
The Time Base is set on the Configuration → Pulse Generators and cannot be modified. For more
details, refer to Configuring Pulse Generators (see Modicon M221, Logic Controller, Programming
Guide).
If %PLSi.P is:
 changed, the output signal period is changed at the end of the current period.
 set to 0, the pulse generation function is stopped.
 out of range, the parameter is forced to 0 and the pulse generation function is stopped.
If %PLSi.N (or %PLSi.ND in Double Word mode) is:

 changed, the number of pulse to be generated is used at the next execution of the pulse
generation function (%PLSi.D = 1 or after %PLSi.R = 1).
 set to 0, unlimited number of pulse are generated.
 out of range, the parameter is forced to 0.
EIO0000003305 09/2020 57
Pulse (%PLS)
Timing Diagram
This diagram displays the timing for Pulse function block:
(1) IN input is set to 1, the pulse signal is generated at the dedicated output (%Q0.0) so %PLSi.Q is set to 1
(2) The number of pulses reaches %PLS0.N (=4) so the Done flag output (%PLS0.D) is set to 1 and the pulse
generation is stopped (%PLS0.Q = 0)
(3) IN input is set to 1 so %PLS0.D is reset to 0
(4) IN input is set to 0 so the output channel is set to 0 and %PLS0.Q = 0 indicates that the signal generation
is not active
(5) %PLS0.D is set to 0 by setting R input to 1
58 EIO0000003305 09/2020
Pulse (%PLS)
Special Cases

Effect of cold restart (%S0=TRUE)  Pulse generation is stopped.
 During the controller initialization, output is reset to 0.
 If after the controller initialization:
 the controller enters the STOPPED state, the configured fallback
strategy is applied to the output.
 the controller enters the RUNNING state, the configuration
parameters are restored.
Effect of warm restart (%S1=TRUE)  Pulse generation is stopped.
 During the controller initialization, output is reset to 0.
 the controller enters the STOPPED state, the configured fallback
 the controller enters the RUNNING state, the configuration
parameters are restored; however, the number of pulses that may
have already been sent is reset to 0.(1)
Effect at controller stop  Pulse generation is stopped.
 The fallback behavior depends on the configured fallback strategy:
 Maintain value: the outputs are reset to 0.
 Fallback value: the outputs are set to the fallback configured
values (see EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic, Operating
Guide).
Effect of online modification None
Effect of a short-circuit or over-  Pulse generation is stopped.
current on an output addressed by  Once the short-circuit or over-current has been corrected, pulse
the Pulse function block while generation resumes the sequence from where it was stopped.
generating a limited number of
pulses
(1) If there is an ongoing pulse output instruction affective at the time of the warm restart, the pulse
generation, upon controller restart, will not take into account the number of pulses sent prior to the warm
restart.
WARNING
 Avoid issuing a warm restart command (%S1=TRUE) while an ongoing PLS command is active.
 If a warm restart is unavoidable, you must take into account any pulses that were sent prior to
the warm restart.
EIO0000003305 09/2020 59
Pulse (%PLS)
Programming Example
Introduction
The Pulse function block can be configurated as in this programming example.
Programming
This example is a Pulse function block:
Rung Instruction
0 BLK %PLS0
LD %M1
IN
LD %M0
R
OUT_BLK
LD Q
ST %Q0.5
LD D
ST %M10
END_BLK
60 EIO0000003305 09/2020
Pulse Width Modulation (%PWM)
EIO0000003305 09/2020
Chapter 5
Using Pulse Width Modulation Function Blocks

This chapter provides descriptions and programming guidelines for using Pulse Width
Modulation function blocks.

Topic Page
Description 62
EIO0000003305 09/2020 61
Description
Introduction
The Pulse Width Modulation function block generates a variable wave signal on a
dedicated output channel, %Q0.0 or %Q0.1, with variable width and, therefore, duty cycle.
Controllers with relay outputs for these two channels do not support this function.
%PWM0 uses dedicated output %Q0.0 and %PMW1 uses dedicated output %Q0.1. The Pulse function
blocks %PLS can also be configured to use these same dedicated outputs. You can configure one
or the other of these two functions, but not both, for any given dedicated output.
You must configure the Pulse Width Modulation function block in the Configuration → Pulse
Generators before using an instance of the function block. Refer to Configuring Pulse Generators
The PWM function has the following characteristics:
Illustration
This illustration presents the Pulse Width Modulation function block:
Inputs
The Pulse Width Modulation function block has the following input:
Label Object Description Value

IN %PWMi.IN Enable At state 1, the Pulse Width Modulation signal is generated at the output
channel.
At state 0, the output channel is set to 0.
62 EIO0000003305 09/2020
Overview
To configure the Pulse Generator resource as a PWM, refer to Configuring Pulse Width
Modulation (see Modicon M221, Logic Controller, Programming Guide).
Properties
The Pulse Width Modulation function block has the following properties:
Property Value Description

Used Activated / deactivated checkbox Indicates whether the address is in use.
Address %PWMi where i is 0 or 1 i is the instance identifier. For the
maximum number of PWM objects, refer
to the table Maximum Number of Objects
(see Modicon M221, Logic Controller,
Programming Guide).
Symbol User-defined text The symbol associated with this object.
For details, refer to Defining and Using
Symbols (see EcoStruxure Machine
Preset  %PWMi.P=1 if Time Base=1 s Preselection of the period
 1<=%PWMi.P<=100 if Time Base=10 ms
 1<=%PWMi.P<=1000 if Time Base=1 ms
 1<=%PWMi.P<=10000 if Time Base=0.1 ms
Duty cycle From 0 to 100 The Duty cycle is controlled by the object
%PWMi.R, and is the percentage of the
NOTE: Values greater than 100 are
considered to be equal to 100. signal in state 1 within the period. The
width of state 1 (Tp) is thus equal to:
TP = T x (%PWMi.R/100). The user
application writes the value for %PWMi.R.
Comment User-defined text A comment to associate with this object.
NOTE: The Num.Pulse, Current and Done properties that appear in the Pulse Generators
properties table under the Programming tab do not apply to the PWM function.
EIO0000003305 09/2020 63
Objects
The Pulse Width Modulation function block is associated with the following objects:
Object Description Size (bit) Defaut Value Range

%PWMi.P Preset value 16 Preset (set on Preset %PWMi.P Time Base
Configuration →
1...10000 0.1 ms
Pulse
Generators) 1...1000 1 ms
1...100 10 ms
1 1 s (default)
%PWMi.R Duty cycle 16 0 0...100
(Ratio)
If %PWMi.P is:
 modified, the output signal period is affected at the end of the ongoing period.
 set to 0, the pulse generation function is stopped.
 out of range, the parameter is forced to 0 and the pulse generation function is stopped.
If %PWMi.R is:
 set to 0, the pulse generation function is stopped (output set to 0).
 set to 100, the output signal is set to 1
 changed, the output signal ratio is changed at the end of the current period.
 out of range, the parameter is forced to 0.
Time Base
The Time Base is set in the menu Configuration → Pulse Generators and can only be modified
under the Configuration tab. For more details, refer to Configuring Pulse Generators (see Modicon
The output signal period T is set with Preset and the Time Base parameters such that
T = %PWMi.P x Time Base.
This table presents the range of available periods:
Time Base Frequency Range

0.1 ms 1 Hz...10000 Hz
1 ms 1 Hz...1000 Hz
10 ms 1 Hz...100 Hz
1s 1 Hz...1 Hz
64 EIO0000003305 09/2020
Timing Diagram
This diagram presents the timing for the Pulse Width Modulation function block:
(1) The PWM ratio (%PWMi.R) is set to 20%, IN = 0 so the pulse generation is not active
(2) IN is set to 1 so PWM output is activated
(3) The programmable width (Tp) changes with %PWM.R
(4) IN is set to 0 so the PWM function is inhibited
EIO0000003305 09/2020 65
Special Cases

Effect of cold  Pulse generation is stopped.
restart (%S0=TRUE)  During the controller initialization, output is reset to 0.
 the controller enters the STOPPED state, the configured fallback strategy is
applied to the output.
 the controller enters the RUNNING state, the configuration parameters are
restored.
Effect of warm  Pulse generation is stopped.
restart (%S1=TRUE)  During the controller initialization, output is reset to 0.
 If after controller initialization, it enters the STOPPED state, the configured fallback
Effect at controller  Pulse generation is stopped.
stop  The fallback behavior depends on the configured fallback strategy:
 Maintain value: the outputs are reset to 0.
 Fallback value: the outputs are set to the fallback configured values
Effect of online None
modification
66 EIO0000003305 09/2020
Programming Example
Introduction
The Pulse Width Modulation function block can be configured as in this programming
example.
Programming Example
In this example:
 The signal width is modified by the program according to the state of controller input %I0.0 and
%I0.1.
 The time base is set to 10 ms.
 The preset value %PWM0.P is set to 50 so the ratio step is equal to 2%.
 The configurable period T is equal to 500 ms.
The result is:

 If %I0.0 and %I0.1 are set to 0, the %PWM0.R ratio is set at 20%, the duration of the signal at
state 1 is then: 20% x 500 ms = 100 ms.
 If %I0.0 is set to 1 and %I0.1 is set to 0, the %PWM0.R ratio is set at 50% (duration 250 ms).
 If %I0.0 and %I0.1 are set to 1, the %PWM0.R ratio is set at 80% (duration 400 ms).
Examples of Pulse Width Modulation instructions:
Rung Instruction
0 LDN %I0.0
ANDN %I0.1
[%PWM0.R:=20]
1 LD %I0.0
ANDN %I0.1
[%PWM0.R:=50]
2 LD %I0.0
AND %I0.1
[%PWM0.R:=80]
3 BLK %PWM0
LD %I0.2
IN
END_BLK
EIO0000003305 09/2020 67
68 EIO0000003305 09/2020
ATV Function Blocks
EIO0000003305 09/2020
Chapter 6
Drive (%DRV)
Drive (%DRV)

Topic Page
Description 70
Drive and Logic Controller States 72
Adding a Drive Function Block 74
MC_Power_ATV: Enable/Disable Power Stage 77
MC_Jog_ATV: Start Jog Mode 79
MC_MoveVel_ATV: Move at Specified Velocity 82
MC_Stop_ATV: Stop Movement 85
MC_ReadStatus_ATV: Read Device Status 87
MC_ReadMotionState_ATV: Read Motion State 90
MC_Reset_ATV: Acknowledge and Reset Error 93
Error Codes 95
EIO0000003305 09/2020 69
ATV Function Blocks
Description
Presentation
Drive function blocks allow drive devices such as Altivar Speed Drives to be controlled by
an M221 Logic Controller. For example:
 Control the speed of a motor managed by an ATV drive and update it continuously
 Monitor the status of the ATV drive and motor
 Manage errors detected in the ATV drive.
Communications take place over one of the following methods:

 Configuring one of the serial lines of the logic controller as a Modbus Serial IOScanner
(see Modicon M221, Logic Controller, Programming Guide) using the Modbus RTU protocol.
 Configuring the Ethernet port as a Modbus TCP IOScanner.
In EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic, first add targeted ATV drive types to the Modbus Serial
IOScanner or Modbus TCP IOScanner. This sets up predefined channels and initialization
requests allowing data to be read from and written to specific registers on the ATV drive, including
for example:
 ETA Status Word
 ETI Extended Status Word
 RFRD Output Velocity (RPM)
 DP0 Error Code on Last Error
 CMD Control Word
Data transfer is carried out using Modbus request type FC23 - Read/Write Multiple Registers. This
allows the program, for example, to read from the ETA, ETI, and DP0 registers and write to the
CMD register with a single Modbus request.
The following single-axis Drive function blocks are available in the Programming tab of
EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic:
Function Block Description

MC_Power_ATV (see page 77) Enables or disables the power stage of a device.
MC_Jog_ATV (see page 79) Starts the Jog operating mode on a device.
MC_MoveVel_ATV (see page 82) Specifies a target velocity for a device.
MC_Stop_ATV (see page 85) Stops the current movement on a device.
MC_ReadStatus_ATV (see page 87) Returns status information about a device.
MC_ReadMotionState_ATV Returns status information on the current movement of a device.
(see page 90)
MC_Reset_ATV (see page 93) Reset device error regarding the drive state (see page 72) and
acknowledge MC_Power_ATV (see page 77) errors.
A maximum of 16 instances of each Drive function block can be used in a program at any one time.
70 EIO0000003305 09/2020
ATV Function Blocks
When a device is added to the Modbus Serial IOScanner or Modbus TCP IOScanner, EcoStruxure
Machine Expert - Basic allocates an axis for the device using a %DRVn object, where n is the
number of the ATV drive. Each time you add a Drive function block to your program, you must
associate it with an axis, creating a link between the function block, the axis, and the target device
defined in the Modbus Serial IOScanner or Modbus TCP IOScanner.
EIO0000003305 09/2020 71
ATV Function Blocks
Drive and Logic Controller States
Drive State Diagram

The drive is always in one of the states defined in the diagram below. When a Drive function block
is executed or an error occurs, this may cause a state transition:
Note 1 From any state if an error occurs.

Note 2 From any state (if no ErrorAxis) when %MC_Power_ATV.status is 0.
Note 3 Transition from ErrorStop to Disabled state only if %MC_Reset_ATV.Done = 1 and
%MC_Power_ATV.status = 0.
Note 4 Transition from ErrorStop to Standstill state only if %MC_Reset_ATV.Done = 1 and
%MC_Power_ATV.Enable = 1 and %MC_Power_ATV.Status = 1.
Note 5 Transition from DISABLED to Standstill state only if %MC_Power_ATV.Enable = 1 and
%MC_Power_ATV.Status = 1.
Note 6 Transition from Stopping to Standstill state only if %MC_Stop_ATV.Done = 1 and
%MC_Stop._ATV.Execute = 0.
This table describes the drive states:
State Description
Disabled Initial state. The drive is not in an operational status or in an error status.
Standstill The drive is in an operational status (ETA = 16#xx37) and Velocity = 0 (RFRD = 0).
ErrorStop The drive is in an error status (ETA = 16#xxx8)
Continuous motion The drive is in an operational status (ETA = 16#xx37) and Velocity ≠ 0 (RFRD ≠ 0).
Stopping MC_Stop_ATV function block is executing.
The function block MC_ReadStatus_ATV (see page 87) can be used to read the status of the ATV
drive.
72 EIO0000003305 09/2020
ATV Function Blocks
Logic Controller State Transitions

The following table describes how the Drive function blocks are affected by changes in the logic
controller state:
Logic Controller State Impact on Drive Function Blocks

RUNNING Drive function blocks are executed normally according to the user logic.
STOPPED The configured drive axes are stopped when the controller goes into the
STOPPED state, unless the Fallback Behavior option is set to Maintain
values.
If the Fallback Behavior option is set to Fallback values, the command
0x00 is sent to the ATV drive, which leads to a Switch on Disabled (NST)
status. Otherwise, if Fallback Behavior is set to Maintain values, no action
is taken (the command is not changed).
HALTED The configured drive axes are stopped when the controller goes into the
HALTED state, unless the Fallback Behavior option is set to Maintain
values.
If the Fallback Behavior option is set to Fallback values, the command
0x00 is sent to the ATV drive, which leads to a Switch on Disabled (NST)
status. Otherwise, if Fallback Behavior is set to Maintain values, no action
is taken (the command is not changed).
POWERLESS, EMPTY Drive function blocks are not executed (the Modbus Serial IOScanner or
Modbus TCP IOScanner is stopped).
This is also the case when the application in the controller is updated.
NOTE: In the case of the controller state of HALTED or STOPPED, and you have selected to
Maintain values, the drive is not given any further commands by the controller. Therefore, the drive
must determine the appropriate state to assume. If you chose to Maintain values for the drive, you
must include this in your hazard and risk analysis for any consequential and possibly hazardous
events.
WARNING
EIO0000003305 09/2020 73
ATV Function Blocks
Adding a Drive Function Block
Prerequisites
Prerequisites to add a Drive function block:
 A Modbus Serial IOScanner or Modbus TCP IOScanner must be configured on a serial line or
on Ethernet.
 The ATV drives to be controlled must be added and configured (see Modicon M221, Logic
Controller, Programming Guide) on the Modbus Serial IOScanner or Modbus TCP IOScanner .
Adding a Drive Function Block

Follow these steps to add an instance of a Drive function block:
Step Action
1 Select the Programming tab.
2 Select Function Blocks → Drive as shown in the following graphic:
3 Click into the rung to place the selected function block.

4 Associate the inputs/outputs of the function block.
74 EIO0000003305 09/2020
ATV Function Blocks
Removing a Function Block

Follow these steps to remove an instance of a Drive function block:
Step Action
1 In the Programming tab, click the instance of the function block.
2 Press Delete to remove the selected function block.
EIO0000003305 09/2020 75
ATV Function Blocks
Configuring Drive Objects

Each Drive function block is associated with a Drive (%DRV) object. To display a list of configured
Drive objects:
Step Action
1 Select the Programming → Tools tab and click Drive objects → Drive to display Drive object
properties.
2 Update the properties as required and click Apply
Drive function blocks have the following properties:

Used No True/False False Indicates whether the Drive object is in use
in the program.
Address No %DRVn %DRVn The address of the Drive object, where n is
the object number.
Symbol Yes – – Allows you to specify a symbol to associate
with the Drive object.
Double-click the cell to define or edit a
symbol.
associate with the Drive object.
Double-click the cell to define or edit a
comment.
76 EIO0000003305 09/2020
ATV Function Blocks
MC_Power_ATV: Enable/Disable Power Stage
Description
This function block enables or disables the drive power stage.
A rising edge of the input Enable enables the power stage. When the power stage is enabled, the
output Status is set to 1.
A falling edge of the input Enable disables the power stage (Shutdown command without
Error). When the power stage is disabled, the output Status is reset to 0.
If the internal status register ETA of the ATV drive has not reached an operational status before
the expiration of the timeout value, a Timeout Error is generated. The timeout is calculated as
the channel cycle time multiplied by 4, or 10 seconds, whichever is greater. A minimum of
10 seconds is required to allow for drive reaction time.
If errors are detected during execution of the function block, the output Error is set to 1. This leads
to a Shutdown command (CMD = 16#0006) to disable the ATV drive (Ready to switch on status,
ETA = 16#xx21).
If an error occurs, only a successful execution of MC_Reset_ATV (see page 93) function block can
restore the power stage.
Inputs
This table describes the inputs of the function block:
Label Object Initial value Description

Enable - 0 Set to 1 to start execution of the function block
and enable the power stage.
Set to 0 to stop execution of the function block
and disable the power stage.
Axis %MC_POWER_ATVi.AXIS - Identifier of the axis (%DRV0...%DRV15) for which
where i is 0...15 the function block is to be executed.
EIO0000003305 09/2020 77
ATV Function Blocks
Outputs
This table describes the outputs of the function block:
Label Object Initial value Value

Status %MC_POWER_ATVi.STATUS 0 Default value: 0
where i is 0...15  0: Power stage is disabled.
 1: Power stage is enabled.
Set to 1 when the ATV drive reaches an

operational status (ETA = 16#xx37)
Error %MC_POWER_ATVi.ERROR 0 Set to 0 when no error is detected. Set to 1 if an
where i is 0...15 error occurs during execution. Function block
execution is finished. The ErrorId output object
indicates the cause of the error.
ErrorId %MC_POWER_ATVi.ERRORID 0 (No error) Error code returned by the function block when
where i is 0...15 the Error output is set to 1.
For details on the errors, refer to Error Codes
(see page 95).
Range: 0...65535
Parameters
Double-click the function block to display the function block parameters.
The MC_Power_ATV function block has the following parameters:
Parameter Value Description

Address %MC_Power_ATVi The instance identifier, where i is from 0 to the number of objects
available on this logic controller. For the maximum number of
Drive objects, refer to the table Maximum Number of Objects
Symbol Symbol The symbol associated with this object. For details, refer to
Defining and Using Symbols (see EcoStruxure Machine Expert -
Axis %DRVn, where n is Select the axis (Drive object instance) for which the function block
0...15 is to be executed.
None The Drive object must have been previously configured on the
Modbus TCP IOScanner or Modbus Serial IOScanner
Update the parameters as required and click Apply.
78 EIO0000003305 09/2020
ATV Function Blocks
MC_Jog_ATV: Start Jog Mode
Description
This function block starts the Jog operating mode. A Jog operation commands a device to move
forwards or backwards at a specified velocity.
If either of the function blocks MC_MoveVel_ATV (see page 82) or MC_Stop_ATV (see page 85)
is enabled while this function block is executing (Busy output set to 1), the MC_Jog_ATV function
block commands the movement. The Busy output is reset to 0 and the CmdAborted output is set
to 1.
When a Jog operation is in progress, a change of velocity value (Vel) is only applied on detection
of a falling/rising edge of the Forward or Backward inputs.
If either of the Error or CmdAborted outputs is set to 1, the Forward and Backward inputs must
first be reset to 0 and then a new rising edge applied to the Forward and/or Backward inputs to
restart the movement.
Starting a Jog operation while the MC_Stop_ATV (see page 85) function block is executing causes
a Stop Active Error. Starting a Jog operation when the drive is not in an operational status (ETA ≠
16#xx37) causes a Not Run Error.
EIO0000003305 09/2020 79
ATV Function Blocks
Inputs
Input Object Initial Description

Value
Forward - 0 Setting either the Forward input or the Backward input to 1 starts the
Backward - 0 jog movement.
If the Forward and Backward inputs are both set to 1, the operating
mode remains active, the jog movement is stopped, and the Busy
output remains set to 1.
If the Forward and Backward inputs are both set to 0, the operating
mode is terminated and the Done output is set to 1 for one cycle.
Vel %MC_JOG_ATVi.VEL 0 Target velocity for the Jog operating mode, in revolutions per minute
where i is 0...15 (rpm).
During jog movement, a change in the velocity value Vel is only
applied upon detection of a falling/rising edge of the Forward or
Backward input.
Range: -32768...32767
Axis %MC_JOG_ATVi.AXIS - Identifier of the axis (%DRV0...%DRV15) for which the function block is
where i is 0...15 to be executed.
The axis must first be declared in the Configuration tab.
Outputs
Output Output Object Initial Description

Value
Done %MC_JOG_ATVi.DONE 0 Set to 1 for one cycle when both the Forward and
Backward inputs are set to 0.
Set to 1 to indicate that the Jog operating mode is
terminated.
Busy %MC_JOG_ATVi.BUSY 0 Set to 1 when:
 Jog is in progress (Forward = 1 or Backward = 1
 Both the Forward and Backward inputs are set to
1, indicating that the Jog operating mode remains
active and the jog movement is stopped.
CmdAborted %MC_JOG_ATVi.CMDABORTED 0 Set to 1 if function block execution terminates due to
another command being executed.
Error %MC_JOG_ATVi.ERROR 0 Set to 0 when no error is detected. Set to 1 if an error
occurs during execution. Function block execution is
finished. The ErrorId output object indicates the
cause of the error.
80 EIO0000003305 09/2020
ATV Function Blocks

Value
ErrorId %MC_JOG_ATVi.ERRORID 0 (No Error code returned by the function block when the
error) Error output is set to 1.
(see page 95).
Range: 0...65535
Parameters
The MC_Jog_ATV function block has the following parameters:

Address %MC_Jog_ATVi The instance identifier, where i is from 0 to the number of
objects available on this logic controller. For the maximum
number of Drive objects, refer to the table Maximum Number
of Objects (see Modicon M221, Logic Controller,
Programming Guide).
Defining and Using Symbols (see EcoStruxure Machine
Axis %DRVn, where n is Select the axis (Drive object instance) for which the function
0...15 block is to be executed.
None The Drive object must have been previously configured on
the Modbus TCP IOScanner or Modbus Serial IOScanner
Vel Target velocity Enter the target velocity for the Jog operating mode and
press Enter.
Default value: 0
Range: -32768...32767
EIO0000003305 09/2020 81
ATV Function Blocks
MC_MoveVel_ATV: Move at Specified Velocity
Description
This function block starts the Profile Velocity operating mode with a specified velocity. When the
target velocity is reached, the InVel output is set to 1.
If the MC_Jog_ATV (see page 79) or MC_Stop_ATV (see page 85) function blocks are enabled
while this function block is executing (Busy output set to 1), MC_MoveVel_ATV commands the
movement. In this case, the Busy output is reset to 0 and the CmdAborted output is set to 1.
The ContUpdate and Vel input values are applied on a rising edge of the Execute input.
If either of the Error or CmdAborted outputs of MC_MoveVel_ATV is set to 1, a new rising edge
of Execute is necessary to resume the movement.
Starting this function block while the MC_Stop_ATV (see page 85) function block is executing
leads to a Stop Active Error.
Starting this function block when the drive is not in an operational status (ETA ≠ 16#xx37), leads
to a Not Run Error.
82 EIO0000003305 09/2020
ATV Function Blocks
Inputs
Input Object Initial Value Description

Execute - 0 Set to 1 to start execution of the function block.
ContUpdate - 0 Set to 1 before executing the function block to enable
continuous updating of the Vel parameter value.
Vel %MC_MOVEVEL_ATVi.VEL 0 Target velocity for the operating mode, in units of
where i is 0...15 revolutions per minute (rpm).
Range: -32 768...32 767. A negative value forces
movement in the opposite direction.
Axis %MC_MOVEVEL_ATVi.AXIS - Identifier of the axis (%DRV0...%DRV15) for which the
where i is 0...15 function block is to be executed.
The axis must first be declared in the Configuration tab.
Outputs
Output Object Initial Description

Value
InVel %MC_MOVEVEL_ATVi.INVEL 0 0 indicates that the target velocity (Vel) has not
been reached.
Set to 1 when the target velocity (Vel) is
reached.
Busy %MC_MOVEVEL_ATVi.BUSY 0 Set to 1 when the function block is executed.
Remains at 1 even after the target velocity is
reached. Reset to 0 when the function block is
stopped or aborted.
CmdAborted %MC_MOVEVEL_ATVi.CMDABORTED 0 Set to 1 if function block execution is terminated
due to another command being executed.
Error %MC_MOVEVEL_ATVi.ERROR 0 Set to 0 when no error is detected. Set to 1 if an
error occurs during execution. Function block
execution is finished. The ErrorId output
object indicates the cause of the error.
ErrorId %MC_MOVEVEL_ATVi.ERRORID 0 (No Error code returned by the function block when
error) the Error output is set to 1.
(see page 95).
Range: 0...65535
NOTE: When the speed command of the ATV drive is low (< 10), the InVel and ConstantVel
parameters may be invalid because the speed range of the ATV drive itself may be inaccurate.
EIO0000003305 09/2020 83
ATV Function Blocks
Parameters
The MC_MovelVel_ATV function block has the following parameters:

Address %MC_MovelVel_ATVi The instance identifier, where i is from 0 to the number of objects
Axis %DRVn, where n is 0...15 Select the axis (Drive object instance) for which the function block
None is to be executed.
The Drive object must have been previously configured on the
Vel Target velocity Enter the target velocity for the operating mode and press Enter.
Default value: 0
Range: -32768...32767. A negative value forces movement in the
opposite direction.
84 EIO0000003305 09/2020
ATV Function Blocks
MC_Stop_ATV: Stop Movement
Description
This function block stops the ongoing movement of the specified drive.
Drive-specific stop parameters, for example deceleration, are provided by the configuration of the
drive.
Once started by a rising edge on the Execute input, any further activity on the Execute input is
ignored until Done is set to TRUE. Executing another Drive function block while MC_Stop_ATV is
busy does not abort the stop procedure—the function block MC_Stop_ATV remains busy and the
other function block ends in an error.
The stop procedure can only be interrupted by disabling the power stage or if an error occurs (for
example, ATV Not Run error or Modbus TCP IOScanner or Modbus Serial IOScanner error).
Inputs
Input Object Initial Value Description

The execution of other motion function block is not
possible when the Busy output is set to 1. In this
case, the other function block returns an error.
Axis %MC_STOP_ATVi.AXIS - Identifier of the axis (%DRV0...%DRV15) for which the
EIO0000003305 09/2020 85
ATV Function Blocks
Outputs

Value
Done %MC_STOP_ATVi.DONE 0 Set to 1 to indicate the function block execution
is complete.
Busy %MC_STOP_ATVi.BUSY 0 Set to 1 when function block execution begins.
Error %MC_STOP_ATVi.ERROR 0 Set to 0 when no error is detected. Set to 1 if an
error occurs during execution. Function block
execution is finished. The ErrorId output
object indicates the cause of the error.
ErrorId %MC_STOP_ATVi.ERRORID 0 (No Error code returned by the function block when
error the Error output is set to 1.
(see page 95).
Range: 0...65535
Parameters
The MC_Stop_ATV function block has the following parameters:

Address %MC_Stop_ATVi The instance identifier, where i is from 0 to the number of
number of Drive objects, refer to the table Maximum Number of
Objects (see Modicon M221, Logic Controller, Programming
Guide).
Defining and Using Symbols (see EcoStruxure Machine Expert
- Basic, Operating Guide).
Axis %DRVn, where n is 0...15 Select the axis (Drive object instance) for which the function
None block is to be executed.
86 EIO0000003305 09/2020
ATV Function Blocks
MC_ReadStatus_ATV: Read Device Status
Description
The function block reads the status of the ATV drive.
Refer to Drive State Diagram (see page 72) for details on the states.
Inputs
Label Object Initial Description

value
Enable - 0 Set to 1 to enable the function block.
Axis %MC_READSTATUS_ATVi.AXIS - Identifier of the axis (%DRV0...%DRV15) for which the function
where i is 0...15 block is to be executed.
EIO0000003305 09/2020 87
ATV Function Blocks
Outputs
Label Object Initial Description

value
Valid %MC_ READSATUS _ATVi.VALID 0 Set to 1 while the function block is running
without errors.
ErrorStop %MC_ READSTATUS _ATVi.ERRORSTOP 0 Set to 1 if the ATV drive is in an error status
(ETA = 16#xxx8).
Disabled %MC_ READSTATUS _ATVi.DISABLED 0 Set to 1 if the ATV drive is not in an
operational status and not in an error status.
Stopping %MC_ READSTATUS _ATVi.STOPPING 0 Set to 1 if the MC_Stop_ATV function block
is being executed, or the movement is being
stopped.
Standstill %MC_ READSTATUS _ATVi.STANDSTILL 0 Set to 1 if the ATV drive is in an operational
status and the velocity is 0 (ETA = 16#xx37
and RFRD = 0).
ContMotion %MC_ READSTATUS _ATVi.CONTMOTION 0 Set to 1 if the ATV drive is in an operational
status and the velocity is not equal to 0 (ETA
= 16#xx37 and RFRD ≠ 0).
Error %MC_ READSTATUS _ATVi.ERROR 0 Set to 0 when no error is detected. Set to 1
if an error occurs during execution. Function
block execution is finished. The ErrorId
output object indicates the cause of the
error.
ErrorId %MC_READSTATUS_ATVi.ERRORID 0 (No Error code returned by the function block
error) when the Error output is set to 1.
For details on the errors, refer to Error
Codes (see page 95).
Range: 0...65535
88 EIO0000003305 09/2020
ATV Function Blocks
Parameters
The MC_ReadStatus_ATV function block has the following parameters:

Address %MC_ReadStatus_ATVi The instance identifier, where i is from 0 to the number of objects
EIO0000003305 09/2020 89
ATV Function Blocks
MC_ReadMotionState_ATV: Read Motion State
Description
This function block outputs status information on the movement read from the ATV drive.
Inputs
Input Object Initial Description

Value
Enable - 0 Set to 1 to start execution of the function block.
Axis %MC_READMOTIONSTATE_ATVi.AXIS - Identifier of the axis (%DRV0...%DRV15) for which
where i is 0...15 the function block is to be executed.
90 EIO0000003305 09/2020
ATV Function Blocks
Outputs
Output Object Initial Description

Value
Valid %MC_ READMOTIONSTATE 0 Set to 1 while the function block is
_ATVi.VALID running without errors.
ConstantVel %MC_ READMOTIONSTATE 0 Set to 1 when a movement at constant
_ATVi.CONSTANTVEL velocity is being performed (ETA
register).
Accelerating %MC_ READMOTIONSTATE 0 Set to 1 when the motor is accelerating
_ATVi.ACCELERATING (ETI register).
Decelerating %MC_ READMOTIONSTATE 0 Set to 1 when the motor is decelerating
_ATVi.DECELERATING (ETI register).
Error %MC_ READMOTIONSTATE 0 Set to 0 when no error is detected. Set to
_ATVi.ERROR 1 if an error occurs during execution.
Function block execution is finished. The
ErrorId output object indicates the
cause of the error.
ActualVel %MC_READMOTIONSTATE_ 0 Velocity returned by the ATV drive
ATVi.ACTUALVEL (RFRD register).
Range: -32768...32767
AxisErrorId %MC_READMOTIONSTATE_ 0 Axis error identifier returned by the ATV
ATVi.AXISERRORID drive (DP0 register). There is an axis
error when the drive is in an error status.
Set to 0 if the drive is not in an error status
(ETA register ≠ 16#xxx8)
For details on axis errors, refer to
AxisErrorId Error Codes (see page 95).
Range: -32768...32767
ErrorId %MC_READMOTIONSTATE_ No error Error code returned by the function block
ATVi.ERRORID (nOF) when the Error output is set to 1.
For details on the errors, refer to Error
Codes (see page 95).
Range: 0...65535
NOTE: When the speed command of the ATV drive is low (< 10), the InVel and ConstantVel
parameters may be invalid because the speed range of the ATV drive itself may be inaccurate.
EIO0000003305 09/2020 91
ATV Function Blocks
Parameters
The MC_ReadMotionState_ATV function block has the following parameters:

Used Address used If selected, this address is currently in use in a
program.
Address %MC_ReadMotionState_ATVi The instance identifier, where i is from 0 to the number
of objects available on this logic controller. For the
maximum number of Drive objects, refer to the table
Maximum Number of Objects (see Modicon M221,
Symbol Symbol The symbol associated with this object. For details,
refer to Defining and Using Symbols (see EcoStruxure
Axis %DRVn, where n is 0...15 Select the axis (Drive object instance) for which the
None function block is to be executed.
The Drive object must have been previously
configured on the Modbus TCP IOScanner or Modbus
Serial IOScanner (see Modicon M221, Logic
Comment Comment An optional comment can be associated with this
object.
Double-click in the Comment column and type a
comment.
92 EIO0000003305 09/2020
ATV Function Blocks
MC_Reset_ATV: Acknowledge and Reset Error
Description
This function block is used to acknowledge an error and re-initialize the error condition on the drive.
For more information, refer to Drive State Diagram (see page 72).
Inputs
Label Object Initial value Description

Axis %MC_RESET_ATVi.AXIS - Identifier of the axis (%DRV0...%DRV15) for which the
EIO0000003305 09/2020 93
ATV Function Blocks
Outputs

Value
Done %MC_RESET_ATVi.DONE 0 Set to 1 when Reset has ended without error.
Busy %MC_RESET_ATVi.BUSY 0 Set to 1 when the function block begins execution.
Error %MC_RESET_ATVi.ERROR 0 Set to 1 if the device remains in an error status after timeout
expiration. The timeout is calculated as the channel cycle
time multiplied by 4, or 200 ms, whichever is greater. A
minimum of 200 ms is required to allow for drive reaction
time.
Refer to Configuring Channels (see Modicon M221, Logic
Controller, Programming Guide) for information on the
configuring the channel cycle time.
ErrorId %MC_RESET_ATVi.ERRORID 0 (No Error code returned by the function block when the Error
error) output is set to 1.
For details on the errors, refer to Error Codes (see page 95).
Range: 0...65535
Parameters
The MC_Reset_ATV function block has the following parameters:

Address %MC_Reset_ATVi The instance identifier, where i is from 0 to the number of
number of Drive objects, refer to the table Maximum Number
of Objects (see Modicon M221, Logic Controller, Programming
Guide).
Defining and Using Symbols (see EcoStruxure Machine Expert
- Basic, Operating Guide).
94 EIO0000003305 09/2020
ATV Function Blocks
Error Codes
ErrorId Error Codes

This table lists the possible function block error codes:
Value Name Description

0 No error No error detected.
1 IOScanner error Error detected on IOScanner (1).
2 ATV is in an error status The ATV drive is in an error status (ETA = 16#xxx8).
3 Timeout error Timeout expired before the MC_Power_ATV function
block has received the correct status from the drive.
4 Invalid ATV status The ATV drive has an invalid ETA value.
5 Reset error The MC_Reset_ATV function block is requested while
the ATV drive is in an error status.
6 Stop Active error The MC_Jog_ATV or MV_MoveVelocity_ATV
function block is requested while MC_Stop is active.
7 ATV Not Run error The MC_Jog_ATV or MV_MoveVelocity_ATV
function block is requested while the ATV drive is not
operational.
8 Invalid AxisRef error AxisRef input %DRV of the function block is invalid (not
present in the Modbus TCP IOScanner or Modbus
Serial IOScanner configuration (see Modicon M221,
Logic Controller, Programming Guide)).
9 Internal error A firmware error occurred.
(1) Only for Modbus TCP IOScanner.
If the %MC_Power_ATV function block raises an IOScanner error while the device is being scanned, it may
be due to an overload on the Ethernet network. To identify the cause of the error, you can:
 Verify the IOScanner state: %SW212.
 Verify the drive state: %IWNS (300+x).
 Verify the channel state: %IWNS (300+x).y.
 Increase the Response timeout of the drive.
EIO0000003305 09/2020 95
ATV Function Blocks
AxisErrorId Error Codes

This table lists the possible function block axis error codes returned by the MC_ReadMotion-
Status function block:
Value Name
0 No error (nOF)
2 EEPROM control (EEF1)
3 Incorrect configuration (CFF)
4 Invalid Configuration (CFI)
5 Modbus Comm Interruption (SLF1)
6 Internal Link Error (ILF)
7 Fieldbus Com Interrupt (CnF)
8 External Error (EPF1)
9 Overcurrent (OCF)
10 Precharge Capacitor (CrF)
13 AI2 4-20 mA loss (LFF2)
15 Input Overheating (IHF)
16 Drive Overheating (OHF)
17 Motor Overload (OLF)
18 DC Bus Overvoltage (ObF)
19 Supply Mains Overervoltage (OSF)
20 Single Output Phase Loss (OPF1)
21 Input phase loss (PHF)
22 Supply Mains Undervoltage (USF)
23 Motor Short Circuit (SCF1)
24 Motor Overspeed (SOF)
25 Autotuning Error
26 Internal Error 1 (InF1)
30 EEPROM ROM Power (EEF2)
32 Ground Short Circuit (SCF3)
33 Output Phase Loss (OPF2)
37 Internal Error (InF7)
38 Fieldbus Error (EPF2)
96 EIO0000003305 09/2020
ATV Function Blocks
Value Name
42 PC Com Interruption (SLF2)
45 HMI Com Interruption (SLF3)
52 Internal Error 10 (InFA)
53 Internal Error 11 (InFb)
54 IGBT Overheating (tJF)
55 IGBT Short Circuit (SCF4)
56 Motor Short Circuit (SCF5)
60 Internal Error 12 (InFC)
64 Input Contactor (LCF)
69 Internal Error 14 (InFE)
71 AI3 4-20mA Loss (LFF3)
73 Boards Compatibility (HCF)
77 Conf Transfer Error (CFI2)
99 Channel Switch Error (CSF)
100 Process Underload (ULF)
101 Process Overload (OLC)
105 Angle Error (ASF)
107 Safety Function Error (SAFF)
110 AI2 Th Detected Error (tH2F)
111 AI2 Thermal Sensor Error (t2CF)
114 Pump Cycle Start Error (PCPF)
119 Pump Low Flow Error (PLFF)
EIO0000003305 09/2020 97
ATV Function Blocks
Value Name
126 Dry Run Error (drYF)
127 PID Feedback Error (PFMF)
128 Program Loading Error (PGLF)
129 Program Running Error (PGrF)
130 Lead Pump Error (MPLF)
131 Low Level Error (LCLF)
132 High Level Error (LCHF)
142 Internal Error 16 (InFG)
143 Internal Error 17 (InFH)
146 Internal Error 13 (InFd)
149 Internal Error 21 (InFL)
151 Internal Error 15 (InFF)
152 Firmware Update Error (FEr)
153 Internal Error 22 (InFM)
154 Internal Error 25 (InFP)
155 Internal Error 20 (InF)
157 Internal Error 27 (InFr)
98 EIO0000003305 09/2020
Pulse Train Output (%PTO)
EIO0000003305 09/2020
Chapter 7
Using Pulse Train Output Function Blocks

This chapter provides descriptions and programming guidelines for using Pulse Train Output
function blocks.

Section Topic Page
7.1 Description 100
7.2 Configuration 117
7.3 Programming 127
7.4 Home Modes 132
7.5 Data Parameters 143
7.6 Operation Modes 148
7.7 Motion Function Blocks 153
7.8 Administrative Function Blocks 185
EIO0000003305 09/2020 99
Section 7.1
Description
Description
Overview
This section describes the Pulse Train Output function.

Topic Page
Pulse Train Output (PTO) 101
Pulse Output Modes 104
Acceleration / Deceleration Ramp 106
Probe Event 109
Backlash Compensation 112
Positioning Limits 114
100 EIO0000003305 09/2020

Pulse Train Output (PTO)
Introduction
The M221 PTO function provides pulse train output channels for a specified number of pulses and
a specified velocity (frequency). The PTO function is used to control the positioning or speed of
independent linear single-axis stepper or servo drives in open loop mode. The PTO function does
not have any position feedback information from the process. Therefore, position information must
be integrated in the drive.
The PLS (pulse), PWM (pulse width modulation), PTO (pulse train output), and FREQGEN
(frequency generator) functions use the same dedicated outputs. Only one of these four functions
can be used on the same channel.
A PTO channel can use optional interface signals for homing (Ref), event (Probe), limits (LimP,
LimN), or drive interface (DriveReady, DriveEnable).
Automatic origin offset and backlash compensation are also managed to improve positioning
accuracy. Diagnostics are available for status monitoring.
Supported Functions
The PTO channels support the following functions:
 two output modes (two channels for Pulse and Direction or one channel for CW/CCW)
 single axis moves (velocity and position)
 relative and absolute positioning, with automatic direction management
 trapezoidal and S-curve acceleration and deceleration
 homing (four modes with offset compensation)
 dynamic acceleration, deceleration, velocity, and position modification
 switch from speed to position mode
 move queuing (buffer of one move)
 position capture and move trigger on event (using probe input)
 backlash compensation
 limits (hardware and software)
 diagnostics
NOTE: Motion function blocks (see page 153) and administrative function blocks (see page 185)
help you to program these functions.
EIO0000003305 09/2020 101

PTO Characteristics
There are up to five physical inputs for a PTO channel:
 Two are assigned to the PTO function through configuration and are taken into account upon a
rising edge on the input:
 Ref input
 Probe input
 Three are assigned to the MC_Power_PTO (see page 158) function block. They have no fixed
assignment (they are not configured in the configuration screen), and are read with all other
inputs:
 DriveReady input
 Limit positive input
 Limit negative input
NOTE: These inputs are managed like any other regular input, but are used by the PTO function
when assigned to MC_Power_PTO (see page 158) function block.
NOTE: The positive and negative limit inputs are required to help prevent over-travel.
WARNING
 Ensure that controller hardware limit switches are integrated in the design and logic of your
application.
 Mount the controller hardware limit switches in a position that allows for an adequate braking
distance.
There are up to three physical outputs for a PTO channel:

 Two outputs are mandatory to manage the output mode of the PTO function. They have a fixed
assignment and must be enabled by configuration:
 CW / CCW
 Pulse / Direction
 The other output, DriveEnable, is associated with the MC_Power_PTO (see page 158)
function block. It has no fixed assignment and is written at the end of the MAST cycle as regular
outputs.
The PTO function has the following characteristics:
Number of channels 2 or 4 depending on the module
Number of axis 1 per channel
Position range -2,147,483,648...2,147,483,647 (32 bits)
Minimum velocity 0 Hz
102 EIO0000003305 09/2020

Maximum velocity 100 kHz (for a 40/60 duty cycle and max. 200 mA)
Minimum step 1 Hz
Accuracy on velocity 1%
Acceleration / deceleration (min) 1 Hz/ms
Acceleration / deceleration (max) 100 kHz/ms
Origin offset -2,147,483,648...2,147,483,647 (32 bits)
Software limits range -2,147,483,648...2,147,483,647 (32 bits)
EIO0000003305 09/2020 103

Pulse Output Modes
Overview
There are two possible output modes:
 ClockWise / CounterClockwise
 Pulse / Direction
ClockWise (CW) / CounterClockwise (CCW) Mode

This mode generates a signal that defines the motor operating speed and direction. This signal is
implemented on the first PTO channel (PTO0 only).
NOTE: PTO1 is not available when choosing this mode.
Pulse / Direction Mode

This mode generates two signals on the PTO channels:
 The pulse output provides the motor operating speed (Pulses).
 The direction output provides the motor rotation direction (Direction).
NOTE: The direction output can be disabled if not needed for the application.
104 EIO0000003305 09/2020

Special Cases

Effect of a cold restart (%S0=TRUE)  The axis is set to Disabled state.
 The PTO function blocks are initialized.
Effect of a warm restart  The axis is set to Disabled state.

(%S1=TRUE)  The PTO function blocks are initialized.
Effect at controller stop  The axis is set to ErrorStop state.

 The outputs are reset to 0.
Effect of online modification None
EIO0000003305 09/2020 105

Acceleration / Deceleration Ramp
Start Velocity
The Start Velocity is the minimum frequency at which a stepper motor can produce movement, with
a load applied, without the loss of steps.
Start Velocity parameter is used when starting a motion from velocity 0.
Start Velocity must be in the range 0...MaxVelocityAppl.
Value 0 means that the Start Velocity parameter is not used. In this case, the motion starts at a
velocity = acceleration rate x 1 ms.
Stop Velocity
The Stop Velocity is the maximum frequency at which a stepper motor stops producing movement,
with a load applied, without loss of steps.
Stop Velocity is only used when moving from a higher velocity than Stop Velocity, down to velocity
0.
Stop Velocity must be in the range 0...MaxVelocityAppl.
Value 0 means that the Stop Velocity parameter is not used. In this case, the motion stops at a
velocity = deceleration rate x 1 ms.
Acceleration / Deceleration
Acceleration is the rate of velocity change, starting from Start Velocity to target velocity.
Deceleration is the rate of velocity change, starting from target velocity to Stop Velocity. These
velocity changes are implicitly managed by the PTO function in accordance with Acceleration,
Deceleration and JerkRatio parameters following a trapezoidal or an S-curve profile.
106 EIO0000003305 09/2020

Acceleration / Deceleration Ramp with a Trapezoidal Profile

When the jerk ratio parameter is set to 0, the acceleration / deceleration ramp has a trapezoidal
profile.
Expressed in Hz/ms, the acceleration and deceleration parameters represent the rate of
velocity change.
JerkRatio 0%: Constant acceleration / deceleration.
Acceleration / Deceleration Ramp with an S-curve Profile

When the jerk ratio parameter is greater than 0, the acceleration / deceleration ramp has an S-
curve profile.
The S-curve ramp is used in applications controlling high inertia, or in those that manipulate fragile
objects or liquids. The S-curve ramp enables a smoother and progressive acceleration /
deceleration, as demonstrated in the following graphics:
JerkRatio 66%: 2/3 of the acceleration and deceleration time is spent in increasing and
decreasing the acceleration and deceleration value.
EIO0000003305 09/2020 107

JerkRatio 100%: The entire time is spent in increasing and decreasing the acceleration and
deceleration value.
NOTE: The JerkRatio parameter value is common for acceleration and deceleration so that
concave time and convex time are equal.
Affect of the S-Curve Ramp on Acceleration / Deceleration

The duration for the acceleration / deceleration is maintained, whatever the JerkRatio parameter
may be. To maintain this duration, the acceleration or deceleration is other than that configured in
the function block (Acceleration or Deceleration parameters).
When the JerkRatio is applied, the acceleration / deceleration is affected.
When the JerkRatio is applied at 100%, the acceleration / deceleration is two times that of the
configured Acceleration/Deceleration parameters.
NOTE: If the JerkRatio parameter value is invalid, the value is re-calculated to respect the
MaxAccelerationAppl and MaxDecelerationAppl parameters.
JerkRatio is invalid when:
 its value is greater than 100. In this case, a Jerkratio of 100 is applied.
 its value is less than 0. In this case, a Jerkratio of 0 is applied.
108 EIO0000003305 09/2020

Probe Event
Description
The Probe input is enabled by configuration, and activated using the MC_TouchProbe_PTO
function block.
The Probe input is used as an event to:
 capture the position,
 start a move independently of the task.
Both functions can be active at the same time, that is, the same event captures the position and
start a motion function block (see page 101).
NOTE: Only the first event after the rising edge at the MC_TouchProbe_PTO function block Busy
output is valid. Once the Done output is set to TRUE, subsequent events are ignored. The function
block needs to be reactivated to respond to other events.
Position Capture
The position captured is available in %MC_TouchProbe_PTO.RecordedPos.
Motion Trigger
The BufferMode input of a motion function block must be set to seTrigger.
This example illustrates a change target velocity with enable window:
1 Capture the position counter value

2 Trigger Move Velocity function block
EIO0000003305 09/2020 109

This example illustrates a move of pre-programmed distance, with simple profile and no enable
window:

2 Trigger Move Relative function block
This example illustrates a move of pre-programmed distance, with complex profile and enable
window:

2 Trigger Move Relative function block
110 EIO0000003305 09/2020

This example illustrates a trigger event out of enable window:
EIO0000003305 09/2020 111

Backlash Compensation
Description
The Backlash Compensation parameter is defined as the amount of motion needed to compensate
for the mechanical clearance in gears (backlash) when a movement is reversed:
NOTE: The function does not take into account external sources of movement, such as inertia
movement or other forms of induced movement.
Backlash compensation is set in number of pulses (0...65535, default value is 0). When set, at each
direction reversal, the specified number of pulses is first emitted at start velocity, and then the
programmed movement is executed. The backlash compensation pulses are not added to the
position counter.
This figure illustrates the backlash compensation:
112 EIO0000003305 09/2020

NOTE:
 Before the initial movement is started, the function cannot determine the amount of backlash to
compensate for. Therefore, the backlash compensation is only active after a first move is
performed and the compensation is applied at the first direction reversal.
 If an aborting command is received or an error detected before the backlash completion, the
absolute position remains unchanged.
 After an abort command, the backlash resumes from current backlash position when a new
move is started.
For more details, refer to the Configuring Pulse Train Output (see Modicon M221, Logic Controller,
Programming Guide).
EIO0000003305 09/2020 113

Positioning Limits
Introduction
Positive and negative limits can be set to control the movement boundaries in both directions. Both
hardware and software limits are managed by the controller.
Hardware and software limit switches are used to manage boundaries in the controller application
only. They are not intended to replace any functional safety limit switches wired to the drive. The
controller application limit switches must necessarily be activated before the functional safety limit
switches wired to the drive. In any case, the type of functional safety architecture, which is beyond
the scope of the present document, that you deploy depends on your safety analysis, including,
but not limited to:
 risk assessment according to EN/ISO 12100
 FMEA according to EN 60812
WARNING
The figure illustrates hardware and software limit switches:
Once either the controller hardware or software limits are crossed, an error is detected and a Fast
stop deceleration is performed:
 the axis switches to ErrorStop state, with AxisErrorId 1002 to 1005. Refer to MC_ReadAx-
isError_PTO (see page 194) and Axis Control Advisory Alerts (see page 145).
 the current direction becomes invalid and the associated PTO parameter EnableDirPos
(1004) or EnableDirNeg (1005) is reset to 0 by the system.
114 EIO0000003305 09/2020

 the function block under execution detects the error state,

 on other applicable function blocks, the CmdAborted outputs are set to TRUE.
To clear the axis error state, and return to a Standstill state, execution of MC_Reset_PTO is
required as any motion command will be rejected (refer to PTO parameters (see page 144)
EnableDirPos or EnableDirNeg) while the axis remains outside the limits (function block
terminates with ErrorId=InvalidDirectionValue). It is only possible to execute a motion
command in the opposite direction under these circumstances.
Once the axis is inside the limits, the EnableDirPos or EnableDirNeg parameter is restored to
1 (valid) by the system.
NOTE: In previous diagram, the axis move back in the limits is the result of the execution of
MC_Reset_PTO (it is not performed automatically).
Software Limits
Software limits can be set to control the movement boundaries in both directions.
Limit values are enabled and set in the configuration screen, such that:
 Positive limit > Negative limit
 Values in the range -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647
They can also be enabled, disabled, or modified in the application program (MC_WritePar_PTO
and PTO Parameter (see page 144)).
NOTE: When enabled, the software limits are valid after an initial homing is successfully performed
(that is, the axis is homed, MC_Home_PTO).
EIO0000003305 09/2020 115

Hardware Limits
Hardware limits are required for the homing procedure, and for helping to prevent damage to the
machine. The appropriate inputs must be used on the %MC_Power_PTO.LimP and
%MC_Power_PTO.LimN inputs. The hardware limit devices must be of a normally closed type such
that the input to the function block is FALSE when the respective limit is reached.
NOTE: The restrictions over movement are valid while the limit inputs are FALSE and regardless
of the sense of direction. When they return to TRUE, movement restrictions are removed and the
hardware limits are functionnally rearmed. Therefore, use falling edge contacts leading to RESET
output instructions prior to the function block. Then use those bits to control these function block
inputs. When operations are complete, SET the bits to restore normal operation.
WARNING
application.
distance.
NOTE: Adequate braking distance is dependent on the maximum velocity, maximum load (mass)
of the equipment being moved, and the value of the Fast stop deceleration parameter.
116 EIO0000003305 09/2020

Section 7.2
Configuration
Configuration
Overview
This section describes how to configure a PTO channel and the associated parameters.

Topic Page
PTO Configuration 118
Motion Task Table 119
EIO0000003305 09/2020 117

PTO Configuration
Overview
To configure the Pulse Generator resource, refer to the Modicon M221 Logic Controller
Programming Guide, Configuring Pulse Generators (see Modicon M221, Logic Controller,
Programming Guide).
To configure the Pulse Generator resource as a PTO, refer to the Modicon M221 Logic
Controller Programming Guide, PTO Configuration (see Modicon M221, Logic Controller,
Programming Guide).
118 EIO0000003305 09/2020

Motion Task Table
Overview
The Motion Task Table is a programming possibility for motion function blocks, dedicated to
repetitive motion sequences. A sequence of movements is defined for an axis at configuration time
(a sequence can be compared as a recipe that mixes various movements).
The Motion Task Table can be dedicated to several axes and offers a graphical overview of the
configured motion sequence.
Use the MC_MotionTask_PTO function block to execute a Motion Task Table. When the table is
called by the MC_MotionTask_PTO function block, it needs to be associated to a specific axis.
The Motion Task Table is applied to the axis used by the MC_MotionTask_PTO function block.
Several MC_MotionTask_PTO function blocks can execute the same %MT Motion Task Table
instances simultaneously.
Features
The maximum number of Motion Task Table (%MT) instances is 4.
A Motion Task Table contains a sequence of single-axis movements:
 A sequence is a succession of steps.
 Each step defines the parameters of a movement.
 Each step uses a dedicated motion function block instance.
Movements that can be used in the Motion Task Table:

 Move absolute
 Move relative
 Halt
 Set position
 Move velocity
EIO0000003305 09/2020 119

Configuring a Motion Task Table

The Motion Task Table Assistant allows you to configure each movement in an ordered sequence
and visualize an estimated global movement profile.
To display the Motion Task Table Assistant, proceed as follows:
Step Action
1 Select the Programming → Tools module tab and click PTO objects → Motion Task Tables in the
hardware tree to display the Motion Task Table properties.
2 Click [...] to configure the Motion Task Table.
Motion Task Table properties window description:

Configured No True/False False Indicates whether the Motion Task Table
contains configured steps.
Address No %MTx %MTx Displays the address of the
Motion Task Table where x is the table
number.
Symbol Yes – – Allows you to specify a symbol to associate
with the Motion Task Table.
Double-click the cell to edit the field.
Configuration Yes [...] Enabled Allows you to configure the sequence of
(Button) movements using the Motion Task Table
Assistant.
associate with the Motion Task Table.
120 EIO0000003305 09/2020

Motion Task Table Assistant:
EIO0000003305 09/2020 121

Motion Task Table Assistant main areas:

• Steps : lists the sequence of single axis movements and input parameters for each movement.
• Motion overview : click the refresh button, or F5, to generate a graphical view of the movement
implemented by the steps sequence.
The curve provides a general overview of the movement. The curve is based on the following
assumptions:
 Initial position is 0.
 Position limits are not enabled.
 Axis default motion configuration parameters are used.
 An event (probe input, POU) occurs after the step completion and a 100 ms delay.
 A %MWx delay is graphically represented by a 100 ms delay.
Steps window description:

Value
Step 1...16 – Single axis movement number in the sequence.
Type None None Motion command.
Move absolute The motion command uses one motion function block
Move relative instance indicated in the Software Objects parameter.
Halt
Set position
Move velocity
Pos See each software empty The move parameters are the parameters of the software
object function block object assigned to the step.
Distance
parameter value. Parameter description:
Vel  Pos: Position
Acc  Distance: Distance
 Vel: Velocity
Dec
 Acc: Acceleration
Jerk ratio  Dec: Deceleration
 Jerk ratio: Jerk ratio
NOTE: Vel parameter for the move velocity motion

command is a combination of velocity and direction. In the
table, the velocity range for the MC_MoveVel_PTO motion
command is: - Max Velocity...+ Max Velocity. A negative
velocity indicates a negative direction, a positive velocity
indicates a positive direction.
122 EIO0000003305 09/2020


Value
Next step Done / empty The condition that needs to be fulfilled to proceed to the
In velocity, next step in the table sequence.
Blending Condition description:
previous,  Done / In velocity:
Probe input  Done: Proceed to the next step when the present
event, step is completed.
%M event, This parameter is available for the different motion
Delay commands except move velocity.
 In velocity: Proceed to the next step when the
requested velocity is reached.
This parameter is only available for the move
velocity motion command.
 Blending previous: The velocity of next step is
blended with the velocity at the end-position of this
step.
 Probe input event: Proceed to the next step when
a defined event is detected on the Probe input.
The edge is defined in the Event parameter.
An input field opens in the bottom of the Steps window,
Use probe event range, described in next table.
NOTE: One occurrence of Probe input event can be
used per Motion Task Table.
 %M event: Proceed to the next step when the
memory bit address (%Mx) set in the Event parameter
is set to 1.
 Delay: Proceed to the next step when the delay
(starting at the beginning of the step) elapses. The
delay is defined in the Delay parameter.
NOTE: When the Probe input event, or %M event,
or Delay event occurs, the next step is started even if the
present step is not completed.
Event – empty Event value complements the conditions described in
0/1 Next step parameter.
%Mx Next step choice and corresponding Event choice:
 Probe input event:
 0: Falling edge
 1: Rising edge
NOTE: The probe input event is independent of the

application task cycle and the motion task cycle.
 %M event: Memory bit %Mx.
NOTE: %Mx is evaluated every 4 ms.
EIO0000003305 09/2020 123


Value
Delay 0...65535 empty Delay value represents the amount of time before
%MWx proceeding to the next step. Depending on the .
Next step parameter value, the Delay is evaluated from
the beginning or the end of the step:
 Done / In velocity: The delay starts when the
present step is Done or In Velocity.
 Blending previous: Not available.
 Probe input event and %M event: The delay
starts at the beginning of the step.
 An elapsed delay generates a timeout if the event
did not occur, and next step is proceeded.
 If the event occurs before the end of the delay, the
next step is proceeded and the delay timeout is
aborted.
NOTE: If Delay remains to its default value (0), the
motion command waits for the probe input or software
event to occur, without timeout.
 Delay: The delay starts at the beginning of the step.
The next step is proceeded when the delay is elapsed.
NOTE: An immediate value cannot be modified in an
application POU, whereas, a %MWx value must be set by
an application POU. The Motion Task Table Delay
parameter is not modified if MC_ReadPar_PTO or
MC_WritePar_PTO are set using ParNumber = 1000
(delay).
Software %MC_MOVEABS_PTOx empty Shows the software object allocated to the step. It is
Objects %MC_MOVEREL_PTOx allocated by the system and is a read-only parameter.
%MC_HALT_PTOx Those software objects are function block instances.
%MC_SETPOS_PTOx
%MC_MOVEVEL_PTOx
Symbol – empty Allows to specify a symbol to associate with the step
software object.
124 EIO0000003305 09/2020

Use probe event range parameter in the Steps window:

Use probe event True/False False When TRUE, a trigger event is only recognized
range within the position range defined between
First position and Last position.
The parameter can be modified if Next step is
set to Probe input event in the
Motion Task Table.
First - 2147483648... - 2147483648 NOTE: First position must be less than Last
position 2147483647 position.
%MDx
Last - 2147483648... 2147483647
position 2147483647
%MDx
Illustration of the position range influence on triggering is provided in the section on Probe Event
(see page 109).
NOTE: The position where the trigger event was detected is not recorded.
Managing Step Parameters and Event

The parameters and event defined in a step are only valid at the start of the step execution,
therefore:
 A step parameter value modified by the application is only valid if it is modified before the step
is active. The parameter can be modified using system allocated software object parameter in
a POU.
 A memory object value (%MW or %MWx) is only valid if updated before the step is active.
 An event is only evaluated once the step is active. In the case of a Probe input event, an
event occurring before the step is active cannot be detected.
EIO0000003305 09/2020 125

Managing Function Block Instances Used in a Motion Task Table

System allocated software object instances:
 cannot be used in an application POU to control an axis motion.
 Output parameters are not updated by the system during the execution of the
Motion Task Table. In other words, the output bits and output parameters are not valid.
 Input parameters:
 cannot be modified in the software object instance editor, or in the Programming tab.
 can be used to dynamically modify the Motion Task Table in an application POU. To
dynamically modify a system allocated software object instance input parameter, use the
parameter address or its associated symbol.
NOTE: The executing step can be modified but the modifications will not be taken into account
until the next execution of the step.
Example of movement described in a Motion Task Table:
 Step: 2
 Movement type: Move relative
 Software object: %MC_MOVEREL_PTO1
 Symbol: Move_Relative_Label2
In previous example, the velocity input parameter can be modified by program using one of the
following syntaxes:
 %MC_MOVEREL_PTO1.Vel
 Move_Relative_Label2.Vel
Management of the function block instances used in a Motion Task Table:

 When a Motion Task Table is configured, the reserved function block instances are set as Used.
 If all the instances of a specific function block are reserved, the associated move type cannot
be used anymore.
126 EIO0000003305 09/2020

Section 7.3
Programming
Programming
Overview
This section lists the function blocks used to program the PTO function and describes how to add
or remove those function blocks.

Topic Page
Adding / Removing a Function Block 128
PTO Function Blocks 130
EIO0000003305 09/2020 127

Adding / Removing a Function Block
Adding a Function Block

Follow these steps to add an instance of a PTO function block:
Step Action
2 Select Function Blocks → PTO → Administrative or Function Blocks → PTO → Motion as shown in
the following graphic:
3 Click into the rung to place the selected function block.

4 Associate the input/output variables of the function block.
NOTE: Set the parameters in the Configuration tab.

For more details, refer to the Modicon M221 Logic Controller Programming Guide, PTO
Configuration.
128 EIO0000003305 09/2020

Removing a Function Block

Follow these steps to remove an instance of a PTO function block:
Step Action
1 In the Programming tab, click the instance of the function block.
2 Press Delete to remove the selected function block.
EIO0000003305 09/2020 129

PTO Function Blocks
Function Blocks
The PTO function is programmed in EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic using the following
function blocks:
Category Function Block Description

Motion (single MC_MotionTask_PTO Calls a Motion Task Table.
axis) (see page 154)
(see page 153)
MC_Power_PTO Enables power to the axis, switching the axis state from
(see page 158) Disabled to Standstill. While the
%MC_Power_PTO.Status bit is FALSE, no motion function
block can be executed for that axis.
MC_MoveVel_PTO Causes the specified axis to move at the specified speed,
(see page 161) and transfer the axis to the state Continuous. This
continuous movement is maintained until a software limit is
reached, an aborting move is triggered, or a transition to
ErrorStop state is detected.
MC_MoveRel_PTO Moves the specified axis an incremental distance at the
(see page 165) specified speed, and transfer the axis to the state Discrete.
The target position is referenced from the current position at
execution time, incremented by a distance.
MC_MoveAbs_PTO Causes the specified axis to move towards a given position
(see page 170) at the specified speed, and transfer the axis to the state
Discrete.
The function block terminates with Error set to TRUE if the
axis is not Homed (no absolute reference position is defined).
In this case, ErrorId is set to InvalidAbsolute.
MC_Home_PTO Commands the axis to perform the sequence defining the
(see page 174) absolute reference position, and transfers the axis to the
state Homing (see page 132). The details of this sequence
depend on Homing configuration parameters setting.
MC_SetPos_PTO Modifies the coordinates of the axis without any physical
(see page 177) movement.
MC_Stop_PTO Commands a controlled motion stop and transfers the axis to
(see page 179) the state Stopping. It aborts any ongoing move execution.
MC_Halt_PTO Commands a controlled motion stop until the velocity is zero,
(see page 182) and transfers the axis to the state Discrete. With the Done
output set to TRUE, the state is transferred to Standstill.
130 EIO0000003305 09/2020

Category Function Block Description

Administrative MC_ReadActVel_PTO Returns the value of the velocity of the axis.
(see page 185) (see page 186)
MC_ReadActPos_PTO Returns the value of the position of the axis.
(see page 188)
MC_ReadSts_PTO Returns the state diagram (see page 149) status of the axis.
(see page 190)
MC_ReadMotionState_ Returns the motion status of the axis.
PTO (see page 192)
MC_ReadAxisError_PTO Returns an axis control error, if any.
(see page 194)
MC_Reset_PTO Resets all axis-related errors, conditions permitting to allow a
(see page 196) transition from the states ErrorStop to Standstill. It
does not affect the output of the function blocks instances.
MC_TouchProbe_PTO Activates a trigger event on the probe input. This trigger
(see page 198) event allows to record the axis position, and/or to start a
buffered move.
MC_AbortTrigger_PTO Aborts function blocks which are connected to trigger events
(see page 201) (for example, MC_TouchProbe_PTO).
MC_ReadPar_PTO Gets parameters from the PTO.
(see page 203)
MC_WritePar_PTO Writes parameters to the PTO.
(see page 205)
NOTE: The motion function blocks act on the position of the axis according to the motion state
diagram. The administrative function blocks do not influence the motion state.
NOTE: The MC_Power_PTO (see page 158) function block is mandatory before a move command
can be issued.
WARNING
 Do not use the same function block instance in different program tasks.
 Do not change the function block reference (AXIS) while the function block is executing.
EIO0000003305 09/2020 131

Section 7.4
Home Modes
Home Modes
Overview
This section describes the PTO home modes.

Topic Page
Homing Modes 133
Position Setting 135
Long Reference 136
Short Reference No Reversal 138
Short Reference Reversal 140
Home Offset 142
132 EIO0000003305 09/2020

Homing Modes
Description
Homing is the method used to establish the reference point or origin for absolute movement.
A homing movement can be made using different methods. The M221 PTO channels provide
several standard homing movement types:
 position setting (see page 135),
 long reference (see page 136),
 short reference reversal (see page 140),
 short reference no reversal (see page 138),
A homing movement must be terminated without interruption for the new reference point to be
valid.
 %MC_ReadSts_PTO.IsHomed is set to TRUE when a homing movement is finished
successfully. If the homing movement is interrupted, it needs to be started again.
 %MC_ReadSts_PTO.IsHomed is set to FALSE when the axis state is DISABLED, or when no
homing movement was finished successfully.
Refer to MC_Home_PTO (see page 174) and home modes function block object codes
(see page 144).
Home Position
Homing is done with an external switch and the homing position is defined on the switch edge.
Then the motion is decelerated until stop.
The actual position of the axis at the end of the motion sequence may therefore differ from the
position parameter set on the function block:
REF (NO) Reference point (Normally Open)

1 Position at the end of motion = %MC_HOME_PTO.Position + “deceleration to stop” distance.
EIO0000003305 09/2020 133

To simplify the representation of a stop in the homing mode diagrams, the following presentation
is made to represent the actual position of the axis:
Limits
Hardware limits are necessary for the correct functioning of the MC_Home_PTO function block
(Positioning Limits (see page 114) and MC_Power_PTO). Depending on the movement type you
request with the homing mode, the hardware limits help assure that the end of travel is respected
by the function block.
When a homing action is initiated in a direction away from the reference switch, the hardware limits
serve to either:
 indicate a reversal of direction is required to move the axis toward the reference switch or,
 indicate that an error has been detected as the reference switch was not found before reaching
the end of travel.
For homing movement types that allow for reversal of direction, when the movement reaches the
hardware limit the axis stops using the configured deceleration, and resumes motion in a reversed
direction.
In homing movement types that do not allow for the reversal of direction, when the movement
reaches the hardware limit, the homing procedure is aborted and the axis stops with the Fast stop
deceleration.
WARNING
application.
distance.
NOTE: Adequate braking distance is dependent on the maximum velocity, maximum load (mass)
of the equipment being moved, and the value of the Fast stop deceleration parameter.
134 EIO0000003305 09/2020

Position Setting
Description
In the case of position setting, the current position is set to the specified position value. No move
is performed.
EIO0000003305 09/2020 135

Long Reference
Long Reference: Positive Direction

Homes to the reference switch falling edge in reverse direction.
The initial direction of motion is dependent on the state of the reference switch:
136 EIO0000003305 09/2020

Long Reference: Negative Direction

Homes to the reference switch falling edge in forward direction.
EIO0000003305 09/2020 137

Short Reference No Reversal
Short Reference No Reversal: Positive Direction

Homes at low speed to the reference switch rising edge in forward direction, with no reversal:
138 EIO0000003305 09/2020

Short Reference No Reversal: Negative Direction

Homes at low speed to the reference switch falling edge in reverse direction, with no reversal:
EIO0000003305 09/2020 139

Short Reference Reversal
Short Reference Reversal: Positive Direction

Homes to the reference switch rising edge in forward direction.
140 EIO0000003305 09/2020

Short Reference Reversal: Negative Direction

Homes to the reference switch rising edge in forward direction.
EIO0000003305 09/2020 141

Home Offset
Description
If the origin cannot be defined by switches with enough accuracy, it is possible to make the axis
move to a specific position away from the origin switch. Home offset allows making a difference
between mechanical origin and electrical origin.
Home offset is set in number of pulses (-2,147,483,648...2,147,483,647, default value 0). When
set by configuration, the MC_Home_PTO command is executed first, and then the specified number
of pulses is output at the home low velocity in the specified direction.
NOTE: The wait time between MC_Home_PTO command stop on origin switch and start of offset
movement is fixed, set to 500 ms. The MC_Home_PTO command busy flag is only released after
origin offset has been completed.
142 EIO0000003305 09/2020

Section 7.5
Data Parameters
Data Parameters
Function Block Object Codes
Direction
This table lists the values for the direction function block object codes:
Name Value Description

mcPositiveDirection 1 CW, forward, positive (according to Output Mode
configuration setting).
mcNegativeDirection -1 CCW, backward, reverse, negative (according to Output
Mode configuration setting).
Buffer Modes
This table lists the values for the buffer modes function block object codes:

mcAborting 0 Start FB immediately (default mode).
Any ongoing motion is aborted. The move queue is cleared.
mcBuffered 1 Start FB after current motion has finished (Done or InVel bit
is set to TRUE). There is no blending.
mcBlendingPrevious 3 The velocity is blended with the velocity of the first FB
(blending with the velocity of FB1 at end-position of FB1).
seTrigger 10 Start FB immediately when an event on the Probe input is
detected.
Any ongoing motion is aborted. The move queue is cleared.
seBufferedDelay 11 Start FB after current motion has finished (Done or InVel
output is set to TRUE) and the time delay has elapsed. There
is no blending.
The Delay parameter is set using MC_WritePar_PTO, with
ParameterNumber 1000.
EIO0000003305 09/2020 143

Homing Modes
This table lists the values for the homing modes function block object codes:

PositionSetting 0 Position.
LongReference 1 Long reference.
ShortReference_Reversal 20 Short reference.
ShortReference_NoReversal 21 Short reference no reversal.
PTO Parameter
This table lists the values for the PTO parameters function block object codes:
Name Parameter R/W Description

Number
CommandedPosition 1 R Commanded position.
SWLimitPos (High Limit) 2 R/W Positive software position limit.
SWLimitNeg (Low Limit) 3 R/W Negative software position limit.
EnableLimitPos (Enable the 4 R/W Enable positive software limit switch (0...1).
Software Position Limits)
EnableLimitNeg (Enable the 5 R/W Enable negative software limit switch (0...1).
Software Position Limits)
MaxVelocityAppl (Max. 9 R/W Maximal allowed velocity of the axis in the
Velocity) application (0...100,000).
ActualVelocity 10 R Velocity of the axis.
CommandedVelocity 11 R Commanded velocity.
MaxAccelerationAppl (Max. 13 R/W Maximal allowed acceleration of the axis in the
acc.) application (0...100,000).
MaxDecelerationAppl (Max. 15 R/W Maximal allowed deceleration of the axis in the
dec.) application (0...100,000).
Reserved 16 to 999 - Reserved for the PLCopen standard.
Delay 1000 R/W Time in ms (0...65,535)
Default value: 0
144 EIO0000003305 09/2020

Name Parameter R/W Description

Number
EnableDirPos 1004 R/W Enable positive direction.
When value = 0, the positive direction is not
allowed on the axis. A move function block that
would generate a move in a positive direction
ends with InvalidDirectionValue error
detected (3006). If there is an ongoing movement
in the negative direction, and it is interrupted by a
new move command in the positive direction, the
error will be detected only at the end of the
deceleration of the ongoing negative movement.
Default value: 1
NOTE: A value change is only taken into account
at the next move command or the next
occurrence of velocity = 0.
EnableDirNeg 1005 R/W Enable negative direction.
When value = 0, the negative direction is not
allowed on the axis. A move function block that
would generate a move in a negative direction
ends with InvalidDirectionValue error
detected (3006). If there is an ongoing movement
in the positive direction, and it is interrupted by a
new move command in the negative direction, the
error will be detected only at the end of the
deceleration of the ongoing positive movement.
Default value: 1
NOTE: A value change is only taken into account
at the next move command or the next
occurrence of velocity = 0.
PTO Axis Error Codes

This table lists the values for the PTO axis error codes:

NoError 0 No error detected.
Axis Control Alerts
InternalError 1000 Motion controller internal error detected.
DisabledAxis 1001 The move could not be started or has been aborted
because the axis is not ready.
HwPositionLimitP 1002 Hardware positive position limit limP exceeded.
HwPositionLimitN 1003 Hardware negative position limit limN exceeded.
SwPositionLimitP 1004 Software positive position limit exceeded.
EIO0000003305 09/2020 145


SwPositionLimitN 1005 Software negative position limit exceeded.
ApplicationStopped 1006 Application execution has been stopped (controller in
STOPPED or HALT state).
OutputProtection 1007 Short-circuit output protection is active on the PTO
channels. Refer to the description of %S10 and %SW139 in
the Modicon M221 Logic Controller - Programming Guide,
system bits and system words (see Modicon M221, Logic
OutputReset 1008 %S9 forced all outputs to be set to 0. Refer to System Bits.
Axis Control Advisories
WarningVelocityValue 1100 Commanded Velocity parameter is out of range, therefore
velocity is limited to the configured maximum velocity.
WarningAccelerationValue 1101 Commanded Acceleration parameter is out of range,
therefore acceleration is limited to the configured maximum
acceleration.
WarningDecelerationValue 1102 Commanded Deceleration parameter is out of range,
therefore deceleration is limited to the configured maximum
deceleration.
WarningJerkRatioValue 1103 Commanded jerk ratio parameter is limited by the
configured maximum acceleration or deceleration. In this
case, the jerk ratio is recalculated to respect these
maximums.
An Axis Control Alert switches the axis in ErrorStop state (MC_Reset_PTO is mandatory to get out
of ErrorStop state). The resulting axis status is reflected by MC_ReadSts_PTO and
MC_ReadAxisError_PTO.
PTO Motion Command Error Codes

This table lists the values for the PTO motion command error codes:

NoError 0 No error detected.
Motion State Advisory Alerts
ErrorStopActive 2000 The move could not be started or has been aborted
because motion is prohibited by an ErrorStop condition.
StoppingActive 2001 The move could not be started because motion is prohibited
by MC_Stop_PTO having control of the axis (either the axis
is stopping, or MC_Stop_PTO.Execute input is held
TRUE).
InvalidTransition 2002 Transition not allowed, refer to the Motion State Diagram.
146 EIO0000003305 09/2020


InvalidSetPosition 2003 MC_SetPos_PTO cannot be executed while the axis is
moving.
HomingError 2004 Homing sequence cannot start on reference cam in this
mode.
InvalidProbeConf 2005 The Probe input must be configured.
InvalidHomingConf 2006 The Ref input must be configured for this homing mode.
InvalidAbsolute 2007 An absolute move cannot be executed while the axis is not
successfully homed to an origin position. A homing
sequence must be executed first (MC_Home_PTO).
MotionQueueFull 2008 The move could not be buffered because the motion queue
is full.
InvalidTransitionMotionTask 2009 The motion task and the other motion function blocks linked
to the same axis cannot be executed concurrently.
Range Advisory Alerts
InvalidAxis 3000 The function block is not applicable for the specified axis.
InvalidPositionValue 3001 Position parameter is out of limits, or distance parameter
gives an out of limits position.
InvalidVelocityValue 3002 Velocity parameter is out of range.
InvalidAccelerationValue 3003 Acceleration parameter is out of range.
InvalidDecelerationValue 3004 Deceleration parameter is out of range.
InvalidBufferModeValue 3005 Buffer mode does not correspond to a valid value.
InvalidDirectionValue 3006 Direction does not correspond to a valid value, or direction
is invalid due to software or hardware position limit
exceeded.
InvalidHomeMode 3007 Homing mode is not applicable.
InvalidParameter 3008 The parameter number does not exist for the specified axis.
InvalidParameterValue 3009 Parameter value is out of range.
ReadOnlyParameter 3010 Parameter is read-only.
InvalidStepMotionTask 3011 Motion task step type is not defined.
A Motion State Alert or a Range Alert does not affect the axis state, nor any move currently
executing, nor the move queue. In this case, the error is only local to the applicable function block:
the Error output is set to TRUE, and the ErrorId object output is set to the appropriate PTO
motion command error code.
EIO0000003305 09/2020 147

Section 7.6
Operation Modes
Operation Modes
Overview
This section describes the operation modes.

Topic Page
Motion State Diagram 149
Buffer Mode 151
148 EIO0000003305 09/2020

Motion State Diagram
State Diagram
The axis is always in one of the defined states in this diagram:
Note 1 From any state, when an error is detected.

Note 2 From any state except ErrorStop, when %MC_Power_PTO.Status = FALSE.
Note 3 %MC_Reset_PTO.Done = TRUE and %MC_Power_PTO.Status = FALSE.
Note 4 %MC_Reset_PTO.Done = TRUE and %MC_Power_PTO.Status = TRUE.
Note 5 %MC_Power_PTO.Status = TRUE.
Note 6 %MC_Stop_PTO.Done = TRUE and %MC_Stop_PTO.Execute = FALSE.
The table describes the axis states:
State Description
Disabled Initial state of the axis, no motion command is allowed. The axis is not homed.
Standstill Power is on, no error is detected, and no motion commands are active on the axis. Motion
command is allowed.
ErrorStop Highest priority, applicable when an error is detected on the axis or in the controller. Any
ongoing move is aborted by a Fast Stop Deceleration. Error output is set to TRUE on
applicable function blocks, and an ErrorId sets the error code. As long as an error is
pending, the state remains ErrorStop. No further motion command is accepted until a
reset has been done using MC_Reset_PTO.
Homing Applicable when MC_Home_PTO controls the axis.
Discrete Applicable when MC_MoveRel_PTO, MC_MoveAbs_PTO, or MC_Halt_PTO controls the
axis.
Continuous Applicable when MC_MoveVel_PTO controls the axis.
Stopping Applicable when MC_Stop_PTO controls the axis.
EIO0000003305 09/2020 149

NOTE: Function blocks which are not listed in the state diagram do not affect a change of state of
the axis.
The entire motion command including acceleration and deceleration ramps cannot exceed
4,294,967,295 pulses. At the maximum frequency of 100 kHz, the acceleration and deceleration
ramps are limited to 80 seconds.
Motion Transition Table

The PTO channel can respond to a new command while executing (and before completing) the
current command according to the following table:
Command Next
Home MoveVel MoveRel MoveAbs Halt Stop
Current Standstill Allowed Allowed (1)
Allowed (1)
Allowed (1) Allowed Allowed
Home Rejected Rejected Rejected Rejected Rejected Allowed
MoveVel Rejected Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed
MoveRel Rejected Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed
MoveAbs Rejected Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed
Halt Rejected Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed
Stop Rejected Rejected Rejected Rejected Rejected Rejected
(1)
When the axis is at standstill, for the buffer modes mcAborting/mcBuffered/mcBlendingPrevious, the
move starts immediately.
Allowed the new command begins execution even if the previous command has not completed execution.
Rejected the new command is ignored and results in the declaration of an error.
NOTE: When an error is detected in the motion transition, the axis goes into ErrorStop state. The
ErrorId is set to InvalidTransition.
150 EIO0000003305 09/2020

Buffer Mode
Description
Some of the motion function blocks have an input object called BufferMode. With this input
object, the function block can either start immediately, start on probe event, or be buffered.
The available options are defined in the buffer modes function block object codes (see page 143):
 An aborting motion (mcAborting) starts immediately, aborting any ongoing move, and clearing
the motion queue.
 An event motion (seTrigger) is an aborting move, starting on probe event (see page 109).
 A buffered motion (mcBuffered, mcBlendingPrevious, seBufferedDelay) is queued,
that is, appended to any moves currently executing or waiting to execute, and starts when the
previous motion is done.
Motion Queue Diagram

The figure illustrates the motion queue diagram:
The buffer can contain only one motion function block.

The execution condition of the motion function block present in the buffer is:
 mcBuffered: when the current continuous motion is InVel, or when the current discrete
motion stops.
 seBufferedDelay: when the specified delay has elapsed, from the current continuous motion
is InVel, or from the current discrete motion stops.
 mcBlendingPrevious: when the position and velocity targets of current function block are
reached.
EIO0000003305 09/2020 151

The motion queue is cleared (all buffered motions are deleted):

 When an aborting move is triggered (mcAborting or seTrigger): CmdAborted output is set
to TRUE on buffered function blocks.
 When a MC_Stop_PTO function is executed: Error output is set to TRUE on cleared buffered
function blocks, with ErrorId=StoppingActive.
 When a transition to ErrorStop state is detected: Error output is set to TRUE on buffered
function blocks, with ErrorId=ErrorStopActive.
NOTE:
 Only a valid motion can be queued. If the function block execution terminates with the Error
output set to TRUE, the move is not queued, any move currently executing is not affected, and
the queue is not cleared.
 When the queue is already full, the Error output is set to TRUE on the applicable function
block, and ErrorId output returns the error MotionQueueFull.
152 EIO0000003305 09/2020

Section 7.7
Motion Function Blocks
Motion Function Blocks
Overview
This section describes the Motion function blocks.

Topic Page
MC_MotionTask_PTO Function Block 154
MC_Power_PTO Function Block 158
MC_MoveVel_PTO Function Block 161
MC_MoveRel_PTO Function Block 165
MC_MoveAbs_PTO Function Block 170
MC_Home_PTO Function Block 174
MC_SetPos_PTO Function Block 177
MC_Stop_PTO Function Block 179
MC_Halt_PTO Function Block 182
EIO0000003305 09/2020 153

MC_MotionTask_PTO Function Block
Function Description
Both single movement motion function blocks and the Motion Task Table function block
(MC_MotionTask_PTO) can be used for an axis.
However, the MC_MotionTask_PTO function block cannot be executed concurrently with another
motion function block. If so, an error is detected and the ErrorId is set to InvalidTransition-
MotionTask (2009) (see page 146).
NOTE: When you first enter the function block, you must configure it to use the intended axis and motion task
table. Double-click the function block to display the function block properties, choose the axis and table,
then click Apply.
154 EIO0000003305 09/2020

Inputs
Input Initial Description

Value
Start FALSE On rising edge, starts the function block execution.
The Loop and Pause inputs can be changed during the function block
execution and they affect the ongoing execution.
The Axis, Table, StartStep, and EndStep input objects values define the
motion sequence when the rising edge occurs. A subsequent change in these
input objects does not affect the ongoing execution.
The outputs are set when the function block execution terminates.
When FALSE:
 When the execution is ongoing (move is Busy and Active), outputs are
refreshed.
 When the execution is terminated, the outputs are reset one cycle later.
Loop FALSE When TRUE, once the function block execution terminates with no detected
error, the motion task sequence starts again on StartStep. The Ended
output is set for one cycle.
The input is tested when the function block execution terminates with no
detected error (Ended output is true).
Pause FALSE When TRUE:
 Active = 1 and Busy = 1
 Forces the axis to the Halt state.
To reach the Halt state, the axis is decelerating in Discrete motion state,
then the axis goes to the Standstill state when velocity = 0.
 The Halt state is kept as long as the Pause input is TRUE.
 Keeps the Active output set even if velocity is equal to 0.
When reset to FALSE after being set to TRUE, the motion task execution
resumes in the following conditions:
 The motion task resumes with the value of the ongoing velocity.
 The active step parameters are used.
 The absolute target position is not changed. If the motion task is a move
relative type, there is no distance added.
 In the step, the Next step condition is reset (for example: the delay is
restarted from 0, Probe input event is enabled and waiting for the
configured edge).
EIO0000003305 09/2020 155

This table describes the input objects of the function block:
Input Object Type Initial Description

Value
Axis %PTOx – PTO axis instance for which the function block is to be executed. The
parameter is set in the function block instance reached in the
Programming → Tools module tab. Select the Axis parameter in PTO
objects → Motion → MC_MotionTask_PTO →
MC_MotionTask_PTO_properties dialog box.
Table %MT – Table instance for which the function block is to be executed. The
parameter is set in the function block instance reached in the
Programming → Tools module tab. Select the Table parameter in PTO
objects → Motion → MC_MotionTask_PTO →
MC_MotionTask_PTO_properties dialog box.
StartStep Byte 1 Step number that defines the first step executed in the Motion Task Table.
The sequence is executed from StartStep to EndStep.
Restriction: StartStep ≤ EndStep.
EndStep Byte 16 Step number that defines the last step executed in the Motion Task Table.
The sequence is executed from StartStep to EndStep.
Restriction: StartStep ≤ EndStep.
NOTE: If EndStep is greater than the maximum number of steps defined
in the Motion Task Table, the last step of the table is used.
Outputs
Output Initial Value Description

Ended 0 When TRUE, function block execution is finished with no error detected.
Ended output behavior:
 If the last step of the motion sequence is a discrete movement, the output
behaves like a Done output, the other outputs (Busy, Active,
CmdAborted, Error) are reset to 0.
 If the last step of the motion sequence is a continuous movement (move
velocity), the output behaves like an InVel output.
Other outputs behavior:
 Busy and Active are TRUE (1).
 CmdAborted and Error are FALSE (0).
If a loop is requested (Loop input), the Ended output is TRUE for one task
cycle.
Busy - When TRUE, function block execution is in progress.
When FALSE, execution of the function block has been terminated.
Active - When TRUE, the function block instance has control of the axis. Only one
function block at a time can set Active TRUE for the same axis.
156 EIO0000003305 09/2020


CmdAborted - When TRUE, function block execution is terminated due to another motion
command (MC_Stop_PTO) or an axis error detected.
Error FALSE If TRUE, indicates that an error was detected. Function block execution is
finished.
This table describes the output objects of the function block:
Output Object Type Initial Value Description

ActiveStep Byte 0 Number of the step that is being executed in the
Motion Task Table.
ErrorId Word NoError Motion command error codes, valid when Error
output is TRUE. Refer to PTO motion command
error code table (see page 146).
Operating Modes
The execution of a Motion Task Table called by MC MotionTask PTO function block complies
with the motion state diagram (see page 149).
MC_MotionTask_PTO start: The function block can only be started from Standstill state.
MC_MotionTask_PTO stop: The function block can be stopped by one of the following actions:
 Setting Pause input to TRUE.
 Executing a MC_Stop_PTO
Function block behavior on detected errors:

 If a motion state or range error is detected during the function block execution:
 A motion stop command is applied to the motion task using the present step deceleration
parameter value. If the step deceleration parameter is not valid, a fast stop deceleration is
applied.
 During the controlled motion stop, the function block outputs Active and Busy remain
TRUE, with the output object ActiveStep = 0.
 Once the motion is stopped, the function block execution is finished with Error = 1, and the
ErrorId output object set to the value corresponding to the detected error type.
 If an axis control error is detected, the axis switches to the ErrorStop state. The function block
execution is finished with Error = 1, and ErrorId = 2000.
EIO0000003305 09/2020 157

MC_Power_PTO Function Block
Behavior
The axis is disabled, when:
 %MC_Power_PTO.Enable = FALSE, or
 %MC_Power_PTO.DriveReady = FALSE, or
 an Hardware limit error is detected (HwPositionLimitP / HwPositionLimitN)
When the axis is disabled, then:

 the Axis switches from Standstill to Disabled state, or
from any ongoing move, to ErrorStop, and then Disabled state (when the error is reset).
 %MC_ReadSts_PTO.IsHomed is reset to 0 (a new homing procedure is required).
NOTE: When you first enter the function block, you must configure it to use the intended axis. Double-click on
the function block to display the function block properties, choose the axis and click Apply.
158 EIO0000003305 09/2020

Inputs

Value
Enable FALSE When TRUE, the function block is executed. The values of the other function
block inputs can be modified continuously, and the function block outputs are
updated continuously.
When FALSE, terminates the function block execution and resets its outputs.
DriveReady FALSE Signal from the drive indicating its readiness.
Is set to TRUE when the drive is ready to start executing motion.
If the drive signal is connected to the controller, use the appropriate controller
input. If the drive does not provide this signal, you can force the value TRUE
for this input with any TRUE boolean value.
LimP TRUE Hardware limit switch information, in positive direction.
Is set to FALSE when the hardware limit switch is reached.
If the hardware limit switch signal is connected to the controller, use the
appropriate controller input. If this signal is not available, you can force the
value TRUE for this input with any TRUE boolean value.
LimN TRUE Hardware limit switch information, in negative direction.
Is set to FALSE when the hardware limit switch is reached.
If the hardware limit switch signal is connected to the controller, use the
appropriate controller input. If this signal is not available, you can force the
value TRUE for this input with any TRUE boolean value.
This table describes the input object of the function block:

Value
Axis PTOx - Instance for which the function block is to be executed. The
name is declared in the controller configuration.
Outputs

Status FALSE When TRUE, the drive is reported as ready to accept motion commands.
DriveEnable FALSE When TRUE, indicates to the drive that it can accept motion commands
and that it should, therefore, enable power.
If the drive input is connected to the controller, use the appropriate
controller output. If the drive does not have an input for this signal, you
can leave this function block output unused.
Error FALSE If TRUE, indicates that an error was detected. Function block execution
is finished.
EIO0000003305 09/2020 159

This table describes the output object of the function block:

Timing Diagram Example

The diagram illustrates the operation of the MC_Power_PTO function block:
160 EIO0000003305 09/2020

MC_MoveVel_PTO Function Block
Inputs

Value
Execute FALSE On rising edge, starts the function block execution. The values of the other function
block inputs control the execution of the function block on the rising edge of
Execute. A subsequent change in these input parameters does not affect the
ongoing execution unless the ContUpdate input is TRUE.
The outputs are set when the function block terminates.
If a second rising edge is detected during the execution of the function block, the
current execution is aborted and the function block is executed again.
ContUpdate FALSE When TRUE, makes the function block use any modified values of the input objects
(Vel, Acc, Dec, and Direction), and apply it to the ongoing command.
This input must be TRUE prior to the rising edge on the Execute input to be taken
into account.
NOTE: A modification to the value of the Axis parameter is not taken into account.
You must set Execute to 0 and then to 1 to change the Axis.
EIO0000003305 09/2020 161

Input Object Type Initial Value Description

Axis PTOx - Instance for which the function block is to be
executed. The name is declared in the controller
configuration.
Vel DINT 0 Target velocity.
Range Hz: 0...MaxVelocityAppl (see page 144)
Acc DINT 0 Acceleration in Hz/ms
Range (Hz/ms): 1...MaxAccelerationAppl
(see page 144)
Dec DINT 0 Deceleration in Hz/ms
Range (Hz/ms): 1...MaxDecelerationAppl
(see page 144)
JerkRatio INT 0 Percentage of acceleration / deceleration
adjustment used to create the S-curve profile
(see page 107).
Range: 0…100
Direction INT mcPositiveDirection Direction of the movement for PTO type CW/CCW
forward (CW) = 1 (mcPositiveDirection)
reverse (CCW) = -1 (mcNegativeDirection)
BufferMode INT mcAborting Transition mode from ongoing move. Refer to Buffer
Modes table (see page 143).
Outputs

InVel FALSE When TRUE, the target velocity has been reached.
The function block must be kept in an active task of the application
program for at least as long as Busy is TRUE.
Active - When TRUE, the function block instance has control of the axis. Only
one function block at a time can set Active TRUE for the same axis.
CmdAborted - When TRUE, function block execution is terminated due to another
motion command.
is finished.
162 EIO0000003305 09/2020


NOTE:
 To stop the motion, the function block has to be interrupted by another function block issuing a
new command.
 If a motion is ongoing, and the direction is reversed, first the motion is halted with the
deceleration of the MC_MoveVel_PTO function block, and then the motion resumes backward.
 The acceleration/deceleration duration of the segment block must not exceed 80 seconds.

The diagram illustrates a simple profile from Standstill state:
The diagram illustrates a complex profile from Continuous state:
EIO0000003305 09/2020 163

The diagram illustrates a complex profile from Continuous state with change of direction:
The diagram illustrates a complex profile from Discrete state:
164 EIO0000003305 09/2020

MC_MoveRel_PTO Function Block
Inputs
This table describes the input of the function block:

Value
Execute FALSE On rising edge, starts the function block execution. The values of the other
function block inputs control the execution of the function block on the rising
edge of Execute. A subsequent change in these input parameters does not
affect the ongoing execution.
EIO0000003305 09/2020 165


Distance DINT 0 Relative distance for the motion, in pulses. The sign specifies
the direction.
Range (Hz/ms): 1...MaxAccelerationAppl (see page 144)
Range (Hz/ms): 1...MaxDecelerationAppl (see page 144)
JerkRatio INT 0 Percentage of acceleration / deceleration adjustment used to
create the S-curve profile (see page 107).
Range: 0…100
BufferMode INT mcAborting Transition mode from ongoing move. Refer to Buffer Modes
table (see page 143).
Outputs

Done FALSE When TRUE, function block execution is finished with no error detected.
When one movement on an axis is interrupted with another movement
on the same axis before the commanded action has been completed,
CmdAborted is set to TRUE and Done is set to FALSE.
motion command.
is finished.
166 EIO0000003305 09/2020


NOTE:
 The function block completes with velocity zero if no further blocks are pending.
 If the distance is too short for the target velocity to be reached, the movement profile is
triangular, rather than trapezoidal.
 If a motion is ongoing, and the commanded distance is exceeded due to the current motion
parameters, the direction reversal is automatically managed: the motion is first halted with the
deceleration of the MC_MoveRel_PTO function block, and then the motion resumes backward.

EIO0000003305 09/2020 167

The diagram illustrates a complex profile from Continuous state with change of direction:
168 EIO0000003305 09/2020

The diagram illustrates a complex profile from Discrete state with change of direction:
EIO0000003305 09/2020 169

MC_MoveAbs_PTO Function Block
Inputs

Value
170 EIO0000003305 09/2020


Pos DINT 0 Position of the axis.
Range (Hz/ms): 1...MaxAccelerationAppl (see page 144)
Range: 0…100
Outputs

motion command.
is finished.
EIO0000003305 09/2020 171


NOTE:
 The function block completes with velocity zero if no further blocks are pending.
 The motion direction is automatically set, according to the current and target positions.
 If the distance is too short for the target velocity to be reached, the movement profile is
triangular, rather than trapezoidal.
 If the position cannot be reached with the current direction, the direction reversal is
automatically managed. If a motion is ongoing, it is first halted with the deceleration of the
MC_MoveAbsolute_PTO function block, and then the motion resumes backward.

172 EIO0000003305 09/2020

The diagram illustrates a complex profile from Discrete state with change of direction:
EIO0000003305 09/2020 173

MC_Home_PTO Function Block
Inputs

Value
174 EIO0000003305 09/2020


Axis PTOx - Instance for which the function block is to be
executed. The name is declared in the controller
configuration.
Mode BYTE 0 Predefined homing sequence type (see page 144).
HighVel DINT 0 Target homing velocity for searching the limit or
reference switch.
LowVel DINT 0 Target homing velocity for searching the reference
switch signal. The movement stops when the limit or
reference switch is detected.
Range Hz: 1...HighVelocity
Range (Hz/ms): 1...MaxAccelerationAppl
(see page 144)
Range (Hz/ms): 1...MaxDecelerationAppl
(see page 144)
JerkRatio INT 0 Percentage of acceleration / deceleration adjustment
used to create the S-curve profile (see page 107).
Range: 0…100
Direction INT mcPositiveDirection Direction of the movement for PTO type CW/CCW
forward (CW) = 1 (mcPositiveDirection)
reverse (CCW) = -1 (mcNegativeDirection)
Offset DINT 0 Distance from origin point. When the origin point is
reached, the motion resumes until the distance is
covered. Direction depends on the sign (Home offset
(see page 142)).
Range: -2,147,483,648...2,147,483,647
EIO0000003305 09/2020 175

Outputs

motion command.
is finished.

NOTE: The acceleration/deceleration duration of the segment block must not exceed 80 seconds.

Home modes (see page 133)
176 EIO0000003305 09/2020

MC_SetPos_PTO Function Block
Behavior
This function block modifies the coordinates of the actual position of the axis without any physical
movement. It can only be used when the axis is in a Standstill state.
Inputs

Value

Value
EIO0000003305 09/2020 177

Outputs

is finished.

178 EIO0000003305 09/2020

MC_Stop_PTO Function Block
Inputs

Value

Value
Range: 0…100
EIO0000003305 09/2020 179

Outputs

motion command.
is finished.

NOTE:
 Calling this function block in state Standstill changes the state to Stopping, and back to
Standstill when Execute is FALSE.
 The state Stopping is kept as long as the input Execute is TRUE.
 The Done output is set when the stop ramp is finished.
 If Deceleration = 0, the fast stop deceleration is used.
 The function block completes with velocity zero.
 The deceleration duration of the segment block must not exceed 80 seconds.
180 EIO0000003305 09/2020


The diagram illustrates a simple profile from Continuous state:
The diagram illustrates a simple profile from Discrete state:
EIO0000003305 09/2020 181

MC_Halt_PTO Function Block
Inputs

Value
182 EIO0000003305 09/2020


Range: 0…100
Outputs

motion command.
is finished.

NOTE: The function block completes with velocity zero.
EIO0000003305 09/2020 183


The diagram illustrates a simple profile from Continuous state:
The diagram illustrates a simple profile from Discrete state:
184 EIO0000003305 09/2020

Section 7.8
Administrative Function Blocks
Administrative Function Blocks
Overview
This section describes the Administrative function blocks.

Topic Page
MC_ReadActVel_PTO Function Block 186
MC_ReadActPos_PTO Function Block 188
MC_ReadSts_PTO Function Block 190
MC_ReadMotionState_PTO Function Block 192
MC_ReadAxisError_PTO Function Block 194
MC_Reset_PTO Function Block 196
MC_TouchProbe_PTO Function Block 198
MC_AbortTrigger_PTO Function Block 201
MC_ReadPar_PTO Function Block 203
MC_WritePar_PTO Function Block 205
EIO0000003305 09/2020 185

MC_ReadActVel_PTO Function Block
This function block returns the value of the actual velocity of the axis.
Inputs

Value
Enable FALSE When TRUE, the function block is executed. The values of the other function block inputs
can be modified continuously, and the function block outputs are updated continuously.

Value
Outputs

Valid - If TRUE, the function block object data is valid.
is finished.
186 EIO0000003305 09/2020


Vel DINT - Velocity of the axis.
EIO0000003305 09/2020 187

MC_ReadActPos_PTO Function Block
This function block returns the value of the actual position of the axis.
Inputs

Value

Value
Outputs

is finished.
188 EIO0000003305 09/2020


Pos DINT - Position of the axis.
EIO0000003305 09/2020 189

MC_ReadSts_PTO Function Block
This function block returns the state diagram status of the axis.
Inputs

Value
190 EIO0000003305 09/2020


Value
Outputs

is finished.
IsHomed FALSE When TRUE, it indicates that the axis has been homed such that the
absolute reference point is valid, and absolute motion commands are
allowed.
AxisWarning FALSE When TRUE, an alert or an advisory has been provoked by a motion
command. Use MC_ReadAxisError_PTO function block to obtain
detailed information. (see page 194)
QueueFull FALSE When TRUE, the motion queue is full and no additional buffered motion
commands are allowed.

AxisState - - Code for the state of the axis:
0 = axis not configured
1 = ErrorStop
2 = Disabled
4 = Stopping
8 = Homing
16 = Standstill
32 = Discrete motion
64 = Continuous motion
For more information, refer to the States description
EIO0000003305 09/2020 191

MC_ReadMotionState_PTO Function Block
This function block returns the actual motion status of the axis.
Inputs

Value
192 EIO0000003305 09/2020


Value
Outputs

is finished.
ConstantVel - When TRUE, the velocity of the axis is constant.
Accelerating - When TRUE, the velocity of the axis is increasing.
Decelerating - When TRUE, the velocity of the axis is decreasing.

EIO0000003305 09/2020 193

MC_ReadAxisError_PTO Function Block
This function block retrieves the axis control error. If no axis control error is pending, the function
block returns AxisErrorId = 0.
Inputs

Value

Value
Outputs

is finished.
194 EIO0000003305 09/2020


AxisErrorId - - Axis error codes, valid when AxisWarning output
is TRUE. Refer to PTO axis error code table
(see page 145).
EIO0000003305 09/2020 195

MC_Reset_PTO Function Block
Behavior
This function block resets all axis-related errors, conditions permitting, to allow a transition from the
states ErrorStop to Standstill. It does not affect the output of the function blocks instances.
Inputs

Value

Value
196 EIO0000003305 09/2020

Outputs

is finished.

EIO0000003305 09/2020 197

MC_TouchProbe_PTO Function Block
This function block is used to activate a trigger event on the probe input. This trigger event allows
to record the axis position, and/or to start a buffered move.
198 EIO0000003305 09/2020

Inputs

Value
If a second rising edge is detected during the execution of the function block,
the current execution is aborted and the function block is executed again.
If the Execute input is subsequently set to 0, the axis position is recorded and
the Done output set to 1 for one MAST cycle. The axis position is then reset and
the Done output is set to 0.
WindowOnly FALSE When TRUE, a trigger event is only recognized within the position range
(window) defined by FirstPosition and LastPosition.
TriggerLevel FALSE When TRUE, position captured or event triggered at rising edge.
When FALSE, position captured or event triggered at falling edge.

Value
FirstPos DINT 0 Start of the absolute position from where trigger events are
accepted (value included in enable window).
LastPos DINT 0 End of the absolute position from which trigger events are
accepted (value included in enable window).
EIO0000003305 09/2020 199

Outputs

motion command.
is finished.

RecordedPos - - Position where trigger event was detected.
NOTE:
 Only one instance of this function block is allowed on the same axis.
 Only the first event after the rising edge at the MC_TouchProbe_PTO function block Busy
output is valid. Once the Done output is set to TRUE, subsequent events are ignored. The
function block needs to be reactivated to respond to other events.
200 EIO0000003305 09/2020

MC_AbortTrigger_PTO Function Block
This function block is used to abort function blocks which are connected to trigger events (for
example, MC_TouchProbe_PTO).
Inputs

Value

Value
EIO0000003305 09/2020 201

Outputs

is finished.

202 EIO0000003305 09/2020

MC_ReadPar_PTO Function Block
This function block is used to get parameters from the PTO.
Inputs

Value

Value
ParNumber DINT 0 Code for the parameter you wish to read or write. For more
information, refer to PTO Parameter table (see page 144).
EIO0000003305 09/2020 203

Outputs

is finished.

Value DINT 0 Value of the requested parameter.
204 EIO0000003305 09/2020

MC_WritePar_PTO Function Block
This function block is used to write parameters to the PTO.
Inputs

Value

Value
ParNumber DINT 0 Code for the parameter you wish to read or write. For more
information, refer to PTO Parameter table (see page 144).
Value DINT 0 Value to be written to the parameter chosen with the
ParNumber input object.
EIO0000003305 09/2020 205

Outputs

is finished.

206 EIO0000003305 09/2020

Frequency Generator
EIO0000003305 09/2020
Chapter 8

Topic Page
Description 208
Configuration 210
EIO0000003305 09/2020 207

Frequency Generator
Description
Introduction
The frequency generator FREQGEN function block commands a square wave signal output
at a specified frequency.
The frequency is configurable from 0 Hz to 100 kHz with a 1 Hz step.
The FREQGEN function has the following characteristics:
Number of channels 2 or 4, depending on the reference
Illustration
This illustration is a FREQGEN function block:
Inputs

Value
ENABLE FALSE When TRUE, the function block is executed. The values of the other function
SYNC FALSE When a rising edge is detected, the target frequency is emitted without waiting
for the end of the ongoing period output.
208 EIO0000003305 09/2020

Frequency Generator

Value
Freq DWORD - Frequency of the Frequency Generator output signal in Hz.
Specify the frequency in the Pulse Generators properties
(see page 210) table
(Range: minimum 0 (0 Hz)...maximum 100000 (100 kHz)
Outputs

INFREQ - If TRUE, the frequency generator signal is being output at the frequency
specified in the Freq input object.
BUSY - When TRUE, function block execution is in progress.
program for at least as long as BUSY is TRUE.
ERROR FALSE If TRUE, indicates that an error was detected. Function block execution
is finished.

ErrorId Word NoError Error codes, valid when ERROR output is TRUE.
Refer to the ErrorId Error Codes table below.
ErrorId Error Codes

This table lists the values for the function block error codes

NoError 0 No errors detected.
OutputProtection 1007 The pulse output has a digital output protection active. Refer to
system objects %S10 and %SW139 (see Modicon M221, Logic
Controller, Programming Guide) for more details.
OutputReset 1008 %S9 forced all outputs to be set to 0. Refer to System Bits
InvalidFrequencyValue 3002 The frequency Freq input object is outside the allowed range.
EIO0000003305 09/2020 209

Frequency Generator
Configuration
Overview
To configure the Pulse Generator resource as a FREQGEN, refer to Configuring Frequency
Generator (see Modicon M221, Logic Controller, Programming Guide)
Properties
The FREQGEN function block has the following properties:
Property Description Value

Used Address used If selected, this address is in use in a program.
Address %FREQGENi The instance identifier, where i is from 0 to the number of objects
Frequency available on this logic controller. For the maximum number of
generator FREQGEN objects, refer to the table Maximum Number of Objects
address (see Modicon M221, Logic Controller, Programming Guide).
Symbol Symbol The symbol associated with this object. For details, refer to Defining
and Using Symbols (see EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic,
Operating Guide).
Freq Frequency The frequency of the frequency generator output signal in Hz.
Minimum value: 0 (0 Hz). Maximum value:100000 (100 kHz)
The default value is 0.
210 EIO0000003305 09/2020

Frequency Generator
Timing Diagram
This diagram displays the timing for the FREQGEN function block:
(1) The ENABLE input is set to 1. The frequency generator signal is generated at the dedicated output. The
INFREQ output is set to 1. The BUSY output is set to 1.
(2) The frequency value is changed. The INFREQ output is set to 0 until the new frequency is being generated
at the dedicated output. The BUSY output remains set to 1.
(3) The SYNC input is set to 1. The current frequency generator cycle stops and a new cycle starts. The
INFREQ output is set to 1. The BUSY output remains set to 1.
(4) The ENABLE input is set to 0. Frequency generation stops. The INFREQ output is set to 0. The BUSY output
is set to 0.
When the application is stopped, frequency generation stops without waiting for the end of the
pulse generation cycle. The Error output remains at FALSE.
If an error is detected, it is automatically acknowledged when leaving the error condition.
EIO0000003305 09/2020 211

Frequency Generator
212 EIO0000003305 09/2020

Advanced Software Functions
EIO0000003305 09/2020
Part IV
EIO0000003305 09/2020 213

214 EIO0000003305 09/2020

PID Function
EIO0000003305 09/2020
Chapter 9
PID Function
PID Function

Section Topic Page
9.1 PID Operating Modes 216
9.2 PID Auto-Tuning Configuration 218
9.3 PID Standard Configuration 222
9.4 PID Assistant 236
9.5 PID Programming 248
EIO0000003305 09/2020 215

PID Function
Section 9.1
PID Operating Modes
PID Operating Modes
PID Operating Modes
Introduction
The EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic PID controller offers 4 distinct operating modes,
configurable in the General tab (see page 239) of the PID Assistant in EcoStruxure Machine
Expert - Basic.
The PID operating modes are:
 PID mode
 AT + PID mode
 AT mode
 Word address
PID Mode
The simple PID controller mode is active by default when the PID controller starts up. The gain
values Kp, Ti, and Td to be specified in the PID tab (see page 243) must be known in advance to
successfully control the process. You can choose the corrector type of the controller (PID or PI) in
the PID tab of the PID Assistant screen (see page 236). If the PI corrector type is selected, the
derivative time Td field is disabled.
Using PID mode, the Auto-Tuning function is disabled and the AT tab (see page 244) of the
Assistant Configuration screen is therefore unavailable.
AT + PID Mode
In this mode, the Auto-Tuning function is active when the PID controller starts up. The Auto-Tuning
function then calculates the gain values Kp, Ti, and Td (see page 243) and the type of PID action
(see page 246). At the end of the Auto-Tuning sequence, the controller switches to PID mode for
the adjusted setpoint, using the parameters calculated by Auto-Tuning.
If the Auto-Tuning algorithm detects an error (see page 252):
 No PID parameter is calculated.
 The Auto-Tuning output is set to the output that was applied to the process before starting Auto-
Tuning.
 An error message appears in the List of PID States drop-down list.
 The PID control is cancelled.
While in AT + PID mode, the transition from Auto-Tuning to PID mode is automatic and seamless.
216 EIO0000003305 09/2020

PID Function
AT Mode
In this mode, the Auto-Tuning function is active when the PID controller starts up and automatically
calculates both the gain values Kp, Ti, and Td (see page 243) and the type of PID action
(see page 246). After convergence of the Auto-Tuning process and successful completion with the
determination of the Kp, Ti, and Td parameters and the type of PID action (see page 246) (or after
detection of an error in the Auto-Tuning algorithm), the Auto-Tuning numerical output is set to 0
and the Auto-Tuning Complete message appears in the List of PID States (see page 252) drop-
down. The PID controller then stops and waits. The calculated Kp, Ti, and Td PID coefficients are
available in their respective memory words (%MWx).
Word Address
This PID mode is selected by assigning the desired value to the word address associated with this
selection:
 %MWxx = 0: The controller is disabled.
 %MWxx = 1: The controller operates in simple PID mode.
 %MWxx = 2: The controller operates in AT+ PID mode.
 %MWxx = 3: The controller operates in AT mode only.
 %MWxx = 4: The controller operates in simple PID mode, with PI corrector type.
This mode word address enables you to manage the PID controller operating mode with the
application, thus making it possible to adapt to your requirements.
EIO0000003305 09/2020 217

PID Function
Section 9.2
PID Auto-Tuning Configuration
Introduction
This section guides you through all the steps necessary to configure the EcoStruxure Machine
Expert - Basic PID controller using Auto-tuning (AT).
This section contains the following steps:
Step Topic
1 Configuring analog channel (see page 218)
2 Pre-requisites for PID configuration (see page 218)
3 Configuring the PID (see page 219)
4 Control set-up (see page 220)
Step 1: Configuring the Analog Channel

A PID controller uses an analog feedback signal (known as the process value) to calculate the
algorithm used to control the process. The logic controller has an embedded analog input that can
be used to acquire this process value. Refer to the M221 Logic Controller - Programming Guide
for more details about analog input configuration.
If an analog output is being used to drive the system to be controlled, make sure that this analog
output is correctly configured. Refer to the analog output expansion module of your logic controller.
Step 2: Pre-requisites for PID Configuration

Before configuring the PID controller, ensure that the following phases have been performed:
Phase Description
1 PID is enabled in the program (see page 249).
2 Scan Mode is set to periodic (see page 251).
218 EIO0000003305 09/2020

PID Function
Step 3: Configuring the PID

Use a solid state output in conjunction with the PID function. Using a relay output may result in
quickly exceeding its life cycle limits resulting in an inoperative relay with contacts either frozen
open or soldered closed.
WARNING
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION OR INOPERABLE EQUIPMENT
 Do not use relay outputs in conjunction with the PID function.
 Only use solid state outputs if a digital output is required to drive the system to be controlled.
To implement a PID controller with Auto-Tuning, perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 In the General tab (see page 239) of the PID Assistant screen (in offline mode), select AT+PID (or
AT) or select Word Address setting the associated word to 2 or 3, from the Operating Modes
(see page 216).
2 Activate the PID States checkbox and enter the address of the memory word in the field.
3 In the Input tab (see page 242), enter the address of the analog input used as a measurement.
4 If Conversion or Alarms are required, refer to Input tab (see page 242) of PID Assistant screen.
5 In the PID tab (see page 243), enter the value of the setpoint. In general, this value is a memory
address or an analog input.
6 Corrector type in the PID tab must be set to PID or PI.
7 Set the Parameters in the PID tab: Kp (x0,01), Ti (x0,1s), and Td (x0,1s). When AT+PID or AT are
the Operating modes (see page 216), the parameters should be memory words addresses
(%MWxx) so the Auto-Tuning algorithm fills in the computed value of the parameters.
8 Enter the PID Sampling period (Ts (see page 226)) in the PID tab. The Sampling period is a key
parameter and must be carefully determined.
9 In the AT tab, the AT Mode must be set to Authorize by default. Enter the Min. and Max. values if the
Measurement Range is activated (Authorize checkbox). Select the Dynamic AT corrector from the
list that contains Fast, Medium, Slow, or Word address corrector type. For further details, refer to the
AT tab in PID Assistant (see page 236).
10 In the AT tab, enter the AT Trigger memory bit to store the value of the step change during Auto-
Tuning. For further details, refer to the AT tab in PID Assistant (see page 236).
EIO0000003305 09/2020 219

PID Function
Step Action
11 In the Output tab (see page 246), set the Action by selecting in the list.
If Bit Address is selected, enter the memory bit address in the Bit field.
If necessary, you can configure Limits.
If Manual mode is enabled, choose a memory word or an analog output. If Bit address is selected,
enter a Bit. For more details about manual mode operation, refer to the Output tab (see page 246).
In the Analog output field, set Output PWM (see page 246) to Authorize.
Set an analog output or a memory word as the address of the word.
Enter the value in the Period (x0.1 s) field and the memory bit or digital output.
12 Click OK to confirm the PID controller configuration.
Step 4: Control Setup

WARNING
To start operation in AT+PID operating mode (see page 216) perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 Connect the PC to the controller and transfer the application.
2 Switch the controller to RUNNING state.
220 EIO0000003305 09/2020

PID Function
NOTE: Before switching the controller to RUNNING state, verify that the operating conditions of
the machine allow the RUNNING state for the rest of the application.
Step Action
1 Create an animation table containing the objects defined during configuration. Refer to the
Ecostruxure Machine Expert - Basic Operating Guide for further details about animation table
creation.
2 Verify the consistency of the process value and application's values. This test is important as
successful operation of the PID controller depends on the accuracy of the measurement. If
you have any doubt about the accuracy of the measurement, set the logic controller to the
STOP state and verify the wiring of analog channels.
If the actuator is not controlled:
 For analog output verify the output voltage or current from analog channel.
 For PWM output, verify that the:
 LED of the dedicated output is lit
 wiring of the supplies and 0V circuit
 actuator power supply is being applied
3 In the animation table, verify that:

 Output mode is set to automatic.
 All parameters your application requires are set to the appropriate values.
4 Set the logic controller scan period so that the Sampling period (Ts) value of the PID controller
is an exact multiple of the scan period. For further details on how to determine the Sampling
period, refer to Tuning PID (see page 226).
5 When the Auto-Tuning sequence is complete, the parameters Kp, Ti, and Td are written in to
the RAM memory of the logic controller. The values are saved for as long as the application
is valid (power-down less than 30 days) and no cold-start is performed.
The Auto-Tuning process is repeated each time a rising edge is detected on the AT trigger memory
bit.
NOTE: When the PID autotuning is in the process of calibration to find the new parameters for Kp,
Ti, Td and the manual output control is activated, launch PID autotuning again after finishing
manual output control so that the parameters are updated.
EIO0000003305 09/2020 221

PID Function
Section 9.3
PID Standard Configuration
PID Standard Configuration

Topic Page
PID Word Address Configuration 223
PID Tuning with Auto-Tuning (AT) 226
Manual Mode 231
Determining the Sampling Period (Ts) 233
222 EIO0000003305 09/2020

PID Function
PID Word Address Configuration
Introduction
This section guides you through all the steps required to configure the EcoStruxure Machine Expert
- Basic PID controller using word address operating mode (see page 216). This mode provides
greater flexibility of use than the other PID modes.
This section contains the following steps:
Step Topic
1 Prerequisites for PID configuration (see page 223)
2 Configuring the PID (see page 223)
3 Control set-up (see page 224)
Step 1: Prerequisites for PID Configuration

Before configuring the PID, ensure that the following phases have been performed:
Phase Description
1 An analog input is configured as well as an analog output if required. Refer to the M221 Logic
Controller - Programming Guide.
2 PID is enabled in the program (see page 249).
3 Scan mode is set to periodic (see page 251).
Step 2: Configuring the PID

WARNING
The following steps explain how to implement a PID controller in word address mode. For more
details on how to configure the PID, refer to the PID Assistant section (see page 236).
EIO0000003305 09/2020 223

PID Function
For the dynamic modification of the PID parameters (in offline and in online mode), enter the
memory addresses in the associated fields, thus avoiding the need to switch to offline mode to
make on-the-fly changes to values.
Step Action
1 In the General tab of the PID Assistant screen (in offline mode), in the Operating Modes ; drop-
down list select Word address. Check the box associated to PID States and enter the address
of the memory word in the field.
2 In the Input tab (see page 242), enter the address of the analog input used as a measurement.
If Conversion or Alarms are required, refer to Input tab (see page 242) of PID Assistant
(see page 236).
3 In the PID tab, enter the value of the Setpoint. In general, this value is a memory address or
an analog input. The Parameters (Kp, Ti, and Td) should be memory words addresses
(%MWxx).
Enter the PID Sampling period (Ts (see page 243)) in the PID tab (see page 243). This
parameter can also be a memory word (the value can then be set using the animation table).
In Word Address operating mode, the Corrector type is set to Auto and greyed out (it cannot
be modified manually).
4 In the AT tab, the AT mode should be checked to Authorize. Enter the Dynamic corrector and
the AT Trigger. For further details, refer to AT tab (see page 244) in PID Assistant screen.
5 In the Output tab, Action should be set to Bit Address. Enter a memory bit address. Limits can
be configured if necessary from the Output tab (see page 246). In Analog output field set the
address of the word: an analog output or a memory word. If required, set the Output PWM,
refer to Output tab (see page 246) in PID Assistant (see page 236).
6 Click OK to confirm the PID controller configuration.
Step 3: Verifying the Setup
Step Action
1 Connect the PC to the logic controller and transfer the application.
2 Switch the logic controller to RUNNING state.
NOTE: Before switching the logic controller to RUNNING state, verify that the operating conditions
of the machine allow RUNNING state for the rest of the application. The procedure remains the
same as the one used in AT and AT+PID operating modes. The word address configuration allows
you to modify the PID operating modes by software. In the case of the PID mode, the procedure is
significantly simplified, assuming the parameters (Kp, Ti, Td, and Ts) are known and there is no
need to perform Auto-Tuning.
224 EIO0000003305 09/2020

PID Function
This table gives the generic procedure to set up the PID controller
Step Action
1 Create an animation table containing the objects defined during configuration. Refer to the
EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic Operating Guide for details.
2 Verify the consistency of the process value and other values defined in the animation table. If
you have any doubt about the accuracy of the measurement, set the logic controller to STOP
and verify the wiring of analog channels.
If you see that the actuator is not being controlled:
 For analog output, verify the output voltage or current from analog channel.
 For PWM output, verify that the:
 LED of dedicated output is lit
 wiring of the supplies and 0 V circuit is correct
 actuator power supply is being applied
3 Set the logic controller scan period so that the Sampling period (Ts) of the PID controller is an
exact multiple of the scan period. For further details on Sampling period, please refer to
Determining Sampling Period (see page 233)
4 If you plan to use the Auto-Tuning (see page 226) function, you may need to run Manual Mode
(see page 231) to know the Dynamic corrector and the AT Trigger defined in the AT tab
(see page 244) of the PID Assistant.
5 Power up the loop controller using the animation table:
 Set the operating mode (see page 216).
 Enable the PID controller (see page 251).
 Set the values defined during configuration (see page 223) to appropriate values
depending on the selected operating mode.
EIO0000003305 09/2020 225

PID Function
PID Tuning with Auto-Tuning (AT)
Introduction
The Auto-Tuning mode allows automatic tuning of the Kp, Ti, Td, and action parameters to achieve
refined convergence of the PID function.The Auto-Tuning function provided by EcoStruxure
Machine Expert - Basic is particularly suited for automatic tuning of thermal processes.
 Auto-Tuning requirements
 Description of Auto-Tuning process
 Storage of Calculated Coefficients
 Adjusting PID parameters
 Launching the Auto-Tuning
 Limitations on using the Auto-Tuning and the PID control
Auto-Tuning Requirements
When using the Auto-Tuning function, make sure that the control process and the logic controller
meet the following requirements:
 Process requirements:
 The process must be a stable open-loop system.
 The process must be mostly linear over the entire operating range.
 The process response to a change in level of the analog output follows a transient asymptotic
pattern.
 The process is in a steady state with a null input at the start of the Auto-Tuning sequence.
 The process must be free of disturbances throughout the entire process. Otherwise, either
calculated parameters will be incorrect or the Auto-Tuning process will not operate correctly.
 Configuration requirements:
 Configure the logic controller to periodic scan mode to ensure a correct run of the Auto-
Tuning function.
 Only use the Auto-Tuning function when no other PID controllers are running.
 Configure the Kp, Ti, and Td coefficients as memory word addresses (%MWxx).
 Set the Action type in the Output tab to a memory bit address (%Mxx).
226 EIO0000003305 09/2020

PID Function
Description of Auto-Tuning Process

The following illustration describes the auto-tuning in the controller and in the application:
EIO0000003305 09/2020 227

PID Function
Description of Auto-Tuning Calibration Process

The Auto-Tuning calibration process is divided into four consecutive phases. All phases of the
process must be fulfilled in order to bring the Auto-Tuning to a successful conclusion. The following
process response curves and table describe the four phases of the EcoStruxure Machine Expert -
Basic PID Auto-Tuning function:
PV Process value
PID output
h = 1% (Max value - Min value) of Measurement Range field in the AT tab
---- PID active
1...4 Auto-Tuning phases (see table below)
228 EIO0000003305 09/2020

PID Function
The following table describes the Auto-Tuning phases:
Auto-Tuning Description
Phase
1 The PID output is forced to the Max value of Limits field in Output tab (see page 246) until the
process value reaches Setpoint + h.
2 There are two steps in Auto-Tuning phase 2:
1. The PID output is forced to the Min value of the Limits field in the Output tab (see page 246)
until the process value reaches Setpoint - h.
2. The PID output is forced to the Max value of the Limits field in the Output tab
(see page 246) until the process value reaches Setpoint + h.
3 The PID output is forced to the Min value of the Limits field in the Output tab (see page 246)
until the process value reaches Setpoint - h.
4 There are two steps in Auto-Tuning phase 4:
1. The PID output is forced to the Max value of the Limits field in the Output tab
(see page 246) until the process value reaches Setpoint + h.
2. The PID output is forced to the Min value of the Limits field in the Output tab
(see page 246), the PID parameters are calculated and the PID becomes active.
(1) The output last applied to the process before start of the Auto-Tuning is used as both the starting point
and the relaxation point for the Auto-Tuning process.
NOTE: The Kp, Ti and Td parameters cannot be calculated if the manual output control is activated
during the Auto-Tuning calibration process. Launch the Auto-Tuning calibration process again
once the output manual control is finished.
Storage of Calculated Coefficients

After the Auto-Tuning sequence is complete, the memory words assigned to the Kp, Ti, and Td
coefficients and the action type are set using the calculated values. These values are written in to
the RAM memory and saved in the logic controller as long as the application is valid and no cold
start is performed (%S0).
If the system is not influenced by outside disturbances, the calculated values may be written in to
the settings of the PID controller (refer to the PID tab of the PID Assistant (see page 246)). In this
way, the PID controller operating mode can be set to PID mode.
Adjusting PID Parameters

The Auto-Tuning method may provide a very dynamic command, leading to unwanted overshoots
during step change of setpoints. To refine the process regulation provided by the PID parameters
(Kp, Ti, Td) obtained from Auto-Tuning, you also have the ability to adjust these parameter values
manually, directly from the PID tab of the PID Assistant screen or through the corresponding
memory words (%MW). For more details on manual parameters adjustments, refer to the
appendices (see page 257).
EIO0000003305 09/2020 229

PID Function
Launching the Auto-Tuning

In the AT tab, the AT Trigger enables the repetition of Auto-Tuning sequence. The auto-tuning
process is launched at each rising edge of the signal linked to AT Trigger.
To configure the auto-tuning, refer to AT Tab (see page 244).
Limitations on Using Auto-Tuning

Thermal processes can often be assimilated to the first order with pure delay model. There are two
key parameters that describe this type of model:
 the time constant, τ
 the delay time, θ
Auto-Tuning is best suited for processes in which the time constant (τ) and delay time (θ) meet the
following criteria:
 10 s < (τ + θ) < 2700 s (i.e.: 45 min)
 2 < τ / θ < 20
230 EIO0000003305 09/2020

PID Function
Manual Mode
Introduction
The manual mode is accessible through the PID Assistant screen (Output tab (see page 246)).
This mode allows you to bypass orders from the PID. There are 2 main objectives using Manual
mode:
 Initialize the set-up
 Determine the sampling period.
Description
The manual mode lets you specify the Output value (see page 246). This operation can be
particularly well suited for testing the system response.
Setting the bit address from the Output tab (see page 246) to 1 activates the manual mode. If Allow
is set, then the manual mode is the only accessible mode.
Application
When the manual mode is active the output is assigned a fixed value that you set. This output value
is from 0 to 10,000 (0 to 100% for PWM output).
You can also use manual mode to make trials to determine the minimum/maximum output
limitation.
Manual mode is also required to use the process curve response method (see page 233) that
helps to find the correct sampling time (Ts).
Start the Manual Mode

Before starting manual mode, you should make sure that the logic controller RUN/STOP switch is
in the RUN position.
To start manual mode using an animation table:
Step Description
1 Enable manual mode by setting the dedicated memory bit to 1. For more details refer to the
Output tab (see page 246).
2 If using PWM, set the PWM period to the desired value.
3 Set the memory word associated with the Operating mode in the General tab (see page 239)
of the PID Assistant to 1 (PID mode). For more details on operating modes using word
address refer to the operating mode description (see page 216).
4 Set the memory word associated with the manual output in the Output tab (see page 246) to
the desired value. This manual setpoint value can be selected several times on condition that
the system is left in its initial state.
5 Enable the loop controller (see page 223).
EIO0000003305 09/2020 231

PID Function
Stop the Manual Mode

To stop manual mode using an animation table:
Step Description
1 Disable the loop controller (see page 223).
2 Inhibit the manual mode by setting the dedicated memory bit to 0. For more details refer to the
3 Set the memory word associated with the Operating mode in the General tab (see page 239)
for the PID controller to 0. For more details on operating modes using word address, refer to
the operating mode description (see page 216).
4 Set the memory word associated to the manual output in the Output tab (see page 246) to 0.
232 EIO0000003305 09/2020

PID Function
Determining the Sampling Period (Ts)
Introduction
The Sampling Period (Ts) is the key parameter for PID regulation. The Sampling Period (Ts)
should be carefully set in the PID tab (see page 243) of the PID Assistant screen. This parameter
is highly correlated with the time constant (τ) of the process to control.
This section describes the use of online mode and two methods to determine the sampling period
(Ts) are described in this section:
 Process response curve method,
 Trial-and-error method.
Process Response Curve Method

This method is an open loop process that aims to determine the time constant of the process to be
controlled. First, it is necessary to ensure that the process can be described by a first order with
time delay model. The principle is quite simple: apply a step change at the input of the process
while recording the process output curve. Then use a graphical method to determine the time delay
of the process.
To determine the sampling period (Ts) using the process response curve method:
Step Action
1 It is assumed that you have already configured the various settings in the General, Input,
PID, AT and Output tabs of the PID.
2 Select the Output tab (see page 246) from the PID Assistant screen.
3 Select Allow or Address bit from the Manual Mode drop-down list to authorize manual output.
4 Set the Output field to a high level (in the [5,000...10,000] range).
5 Download your application to the logic controller. For further details on how to download an
application refer to the EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic Operating Guide.
6 Run the PID and check the response curve rise.
7 When the response curve has reached a steady state, stop the PID measurement.
8 Use the following graphical method to determine the time constant (τ) of the control process:
1. Calculate the process value output at 63% rise (S[63%]) by using the following formula:
S[63%] = S[initial] + (S[final]-S[initial])x63%
2. Calculate graphically the time abscissa (t[63%]) that corresponds to S(63%).
3. Calculate graphically the initial time (t[initial]) that corresponds the start of the process
response rise.
4. Compute the time constant (τ) of the control process by using the following relationship:
τ = t[63%]-t[initial]
(1) The base unit for the sampling period is 10ms. Therefore, you should round up/down the value of Ts to
the nearest 10ms.
(2) You must choose "n" so that the resulting Scan Period is a positive integer in the range [1...150] ms.
EIO0000003305 09/2020 233

PID Function
Step Action
9 Calculate the sampling period (Ts)(1) based on the value of (τ) that you determined in the
previous step, using the following rule: Ts = τ/75
10 Set the Scan period of the Periodic scan mode so that the Sampling Period (Ts) is an exact
multiple of the scan period:Scan Period = Ts / n , where n is a positive integer(2)
(1) The base unit for the sampling period is 10ms. Therefore, you should round up/down the value of Ts to
the nearest 10ms.
(2) You must choose "n" so that the resulting Scan Period is a positive integer in the range [1...150] ms.
Trial-and-Error Method
The trial-and-error method involves providing successive guesses of the sampling period to the
Auto-Tuning function until the algorithm converges successfully towards satisfactory values of Kp,
Ti, and Td.
NOTE: Unlike the process response curve method, the trial-and-error method is not based on any
approximation law of the process response. However, it has the advantage of converging towards
a value of the sampling period that is in the same order of magnitude as the actual value.
To perform a trial-and-error estimation of the Auto-Tuning:
Step Action
1 Select the AT tab from the PID configuration window.
2 Set the Output limitation of Auto-Tuning to 10,000.
3 Download your application to the logic controller. For further details on how to download an
application, refer to EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic operating guide (see EcoStruxure
4 Select the PID tab from the PID Assistant screen.
5 Provide the first or nth guess in the Sampling Period(1) field.
6 Launch Auto-Tuning (see page 218).
7 Wait until the Auto-Tuning process ends.
8 Two cases can occur:
 Auto-Tuning completes successfully: Continue to Step 10.
 Auto-Tuning unsuccessful: Refer to Auto-Tuning detected error codes (see page 253).
This means that the current guess for the sampling period (Ts) is not correct. Try a new Ts
guess and repeat steps 3 through 8, as many times as required until the Auto-Tuning
process eventually converges.
(1) If you do not have any first indication of the possible range for the sampling period, set this value to the
minimum possible: 1 (1 unit of 10 ms).
(2) If the PID regulation provided by this set of control parameters does not provide results that are totally
satisfactory, you may still refine the trial-and-error evaluation of the sampling period until you obtain the
correct set of Kp, Ti, and Td control parameters.
234 EIO0000003305 09/2020

PID Function
Step Action
9 Follow these guidelines to provide a new Ts guess:
 Auto-Tuning ends with the detected error code 800C hex. This means the sampling period
Ts is too large. Decrease the value of Ts to provide a new guess.
 Auto-Tuning ends with the detected error code 800A hex. This means the sampling period
Ts is too small. Increase the value of Ts to provide a new guess.
10 Adjust the PID control parameters(2) (Kp, Ti, and Td) in the PID tab (see page 243) of the PID
Assistant screen, as needed.
(1) If you do not have any first indication of the possible range for the sampling period, set this value to the
minimum possible: 1 (1 unit of 10 ms).
(2) If the PID regulation provided by this set of control parameters does not provide results that are totally
satisfactory, you may still refine the trial-and-error evaluation of the sampling period until you obtain the
correct set of Kp, Ti, and Td control parameters.
Online Mode
In online mode, when the logic controller is in the periodic task, the value displayed in the Ts field
(in the PID Assistant screen (see page 236)) can be different from the parameter entered (%MW).
The Ts value is a multiple of the periodic task, whereas the %MW value is the value read by the
logic controller.
EIO0000003305 09/2020 235

PID Function
Section 9.4
PID Assistant
PID Assistant

Topic Page
Access the PID Assistant 237
General Tab 239
Input Tab 242
PID Tab 243
AT Tab 244
Output Tab 246
236 EIO0000003305 09/2020

PID Function
Access the PID Assistant
Introduction
Use the PID Assistant window of EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic to enable you to configure
the PID controller.
Configuration Assistant
In the PID properties table, click the Configuration [...] button. The PID Assistant screen will
appear.
This graphic displays the PID Assistant screen:
EIO0000003305 09/2020 237

PID Function
The PID Assistant screen displays several tabs, depending whether, you are in offline or online
mode:
Tab Access mode Link

General Offline General tab (see page 239)
Input Offline Input tab (see page 242)
PID Offline PID tab (see page 243)
AT Offline AT tab (see page 244)
Output Offline Output tab (see page 246)
Once an operating mode is selected, tabs containing empty fields that require values are shown
as display and the border of the field is filled in red.
238 EIO0000003305 09/2020

PID Function
General Tab
Introduction
This section describes the General tab of the PID. General tab is displayed by default when you
access the PID Assistant in offline mode.
Description
The table below describes the settings on the General tab.
Parameter Description
Operating Mode Represents the PID mode to use:
 Not configured
 PID
 AT + PID
 AT
 Word address
For further details about operating modes, refer to PID Operating Mode
(see page 216).
Word address You can provide a memory word in this text box (%MWxx) that is used to
programmatically set the operating mode. The memory word can take 4 possible
values depending on the operating mode you want to set:
 %MWx = 0 (PID disabled)
 %MWx = 1 (to set PID only)
 %MWx = 2 (to set AT + PID)
 %MWx = 3 (to set AT only)
 %MWx = 4 (to set PI only)
PID States If you check the box to enable this option, you can provide a memory word in the
associated field (%MWxx) that is used by the PID controller to store the current PID
state while running the PID controller and/or the Auto-Tuning function. For more
details, refer to PID States and Detected Error Codes (see page 252).
EIO0000003305 09/2020 239

PID Function
Graphical Assistant
The graphical assistant helps you to visualize how the PID function is built. This is a dynamic
graphic that is updated according to the configuration.
The icons shown below describe when it is accessible or what happens if you click on it:
Display Description
Click this button to display the SetPoint field of the PID tab (see page 243).
Click this button to display the PID tab (see page 243).
Click this button to display the Output tab (see page 246).
Click this button to display the Input tab (see page 242).
240 EIO0000003305 09/2020

PID Function
Display Description
Click this button to display the AT tab (see page 244).
Click this button to display the AT tab (see page 244).
This button appears when the Authorize option is checked in the Conversion zone of the
Input tab (see page 242).
This button appears when the Authorize option is checked in the Alarms zone of the Input
tab (see page 242).
This button appears if Limits is not equal to inhibit in the limits zone of the Output tab
(see page 246).
This button appears if manual mode is not equal to Inhibit in the manual mode zone of the
Click this button to display the Output tab (see page 246).
This button appears when the Authorize option is checked in the Output PWM zone of the
EIO0000003305 09/2020 241

PID Function
Input Tab
Introduction
This section describes the Input tab of PID. The input tab is used to enter the PID input
parameters.
This tab is only accessible in offline mode and when an operating mode is selected from the
General tab.
Description
The table below describes the settings that you may define.
Measure Specify the variable that contains the process value to be controlled.
The default scale is from 0 to 10000. You can enter either a memory word (%MWxx) or an
analog input.
Conversion Authorize Activate this box to convert the process value [0...10000] into a linear range
[Min...Max].
The conversion also applies to the setpoint value.
Min value Specify the minimum and maximum values of the conversion scale. The process
Max value value is then automatically rescaled within the [Min value...Max value] interval.
Min value or Max value can be memory words (%MWxx), constant words
(%KWxx), or a value from -32768 to +32767.
Note: The Min value must be less than the Max value.
Filter Authorize Activate this box to apply a filter to the measured input.
(100 ms) Specify the filter value from 0 to 10000 or a memory word address (%MWxx). The
filter time base unit is 100 ms.
Alarms Authorize Activate this box to activate alarms in input variables.
The alarm values should be determined relative to the process value obtained
after the conversion phase. The alarm values must be from Min value to Max
value when conversion is active. Otherwise, the alarm values will be from 0 to
10000.
Low Specify the low alarm value in the Low field.
Output This value can be a memory word (%MWxx), a constant (%KWxx), or a direct
value.
Output must contain the address of the bit, which will be set to 1 when the lower
limit is reached. Output can be either a memory bit (%Mxx) or an output.
High Specify the high alarm value in the High field.
Output This value can be a memory word (%MWxx), a constant (%KWxx), or a direct
value.
Output must contain the address of the bit, which will be set to 1 when the upper
limit is reached. Output can be either a memory bit (%Mxx), or an output.
242 EIO0000003305 09/2020

PID Function
PID Tab
Introduction
Use PID tab to enter the internal PID parameters.
This tab is only accessible in offline mode and if an operating mode has been selected from the
General tab.
Description
This table describes the settings that you may define:
Setpoint Specify the PID setpoint value. This value can be a memory word (%MWxx), a constant word
(%KWxx), or a direct value.
This value must therefore be between 0 and 10000 when conversion is inhibited. Otherwise it must
be between the Min value and the Max value for the conversion.
Corrector type If the PID or AT + PID operating mode has been previously chosen in the PID properties table, you
can select the desired corrector type (PID or PI) from the drop-down list. If other operating modes (AT
or Word Address) have been chosen, the Corrector type is set to Auto and greyed out (it cannot be
modified manually).
If PI is selected from the drop-down list, the Td parameter is forced to 0 and this field is disabled.
Parameters (1) Kp Specify the PID proportional gain, multiplied by 100.
(x0,01s) This value can be a memory word (%MWxx), a constant word (%KWxx), or a direct
value.
The valid range for the Kp parameter is: 0 < Kp < 10000.
Note: If Kp is mistakenly set to 0 (Kp ≤ 0 is invalid), the default value Kp=100 is
automatically assigned by the PID function.
Ti (x0,1s) Specify the integral time for a timebase of 0.1 seconds.
This value can be a memory word (%MWxx), a constant word (%KWxx), or a direct
value.
It must be from 0 to 36000.
Note: To disable the integral action of the PID, set this coefficient to 0.
Td (x0,1s) Specify the derivative time for a timebase of 0.1 seconds.
This value can be a memory word (%MWxx), a constant word (%KWxx), or a direct
value.
It must be from 0 to 10000.
Note: To disable the derivative action of the PID, set this coefficient to 0.
Sampling Specify the PID sampling period here for a timebase of 10-2 seconds (10 ms).
period This value can be a memory word (%MWxx), a constant word (%KWxx), or a direct value.
It must be from 1 (0.01 s) to 10000 (100 s).
(1) When Auto-Tuning is enabled, you no longer need to set the Kp, Ti, and Td parameters as they are automatically
and programmatically set by the Auto-Tuning algorithm. In this case, you must enter in these fields an internal word
address only (%MWxx). Do not enter a constant or a direct value when Auto-Tuning is enabled.
EIO0000003305 09/2020 243

PID Function
AT Tab
Introduction
The AT tab is related to the Auto-Tuning function. For more details, refer to PID tuning with Auto-
Tuning (see page 226).
General tab.
Description
PID Auto-Tuning is an open-loop process that acts directly on the control process without
regulation or any limitation other than provided by the Process Value (PV) limit and the output
setpoint. Therefore, both values must be carefully selected within the allowable range as specified
by the process to prevent potential process overload.
When the PID is implemented with Auto-Tuning, the Dynamic AT Corrector parameter affects the
proportional gain (Kp) value. The computation of the proportional gain in Auto-Tuning process
depends on the selected dynamic corrector speed. You can select one of the following options:
 Fast
 Medium
 Slow
 Word address
See the descriptions of the options in the table below.
WARNING
UNSTABLE PID OPERATION
 The Process Value (PV) limit and the output setpoint values must be set with complete
understanding of their effect on the machine or process.
 Do not exceed the allowable range for Process Value and Output Setpoint values.
WARNING
Do not use a relay output with the PID function.
244 EIO0000003305 09/2020

PID Function
Field Description
AT Mode Authorize Activate this box to enable Auto-Tuning operation.
There are 2 ways to use this checkbox, depending on whether you set the
operating mode manually or via a word address in the General tab of the PID
function:
 If you set the Operating mode to PID + AT or AT from the General tab
(see page 239), then the Authorize option is activated and not editable.
 If you set the operating mode via a word address %MWx (%MWx = 2: PID + AT;
%MWx = 3: AT), then you have to activate the Authorize option manually to allow
configuring of the Auto-Tuning parameters.
Measurement Authorize Activate this box to enable the range measurement.
Range
NOTE: If the range measurement is deactivated the Min. value is set to 0 and the
Max. value is set to 10000.
Min. Set the Min. and Max values based on the measurement range of 1% above or
Max below the setpoint.
The values can be immediate values from 1 to 10000 or a memory word %MWx.
NOTE: The Min. value must be less than the Max value.
Example: If the process value must be around 35°C ± 3°C:
 The setpoint is 350.
 ± 3°C is h (see page 228) and should be 30.
 Therefore 1% x (Max - Min) = 30
 Therefore 1% x 3000 = 30
 Therefore Max = 3100 and Min = 100
Dynamic AT Fast This parameter affects the proportional gain (Kp) value computed by the AT
corrector Medium process.
Slow  Fast provides a fast response time with more overshoot than medium.
Word address  Medium provides medium response time with medium overshoot.
 Slow provides slower a response time with less overshoot than medium.
 Word address provides the response time configured in the specified word
object (%MW).
AT Trigger AT Trigger This parameter allows you to launch the AT process each time a rising edge is
detected on the dedicated bit (memory bit or digital input bit).
Calculated Kp, Ti, Td Coefficients

Once the Auto-Tuning process is complete, the calculated Kp, Ti, and Td PID coefficients are
stored in their respective memory words (%MWx).
EIO0000003305 09/2020 245

PID Function
Output Tab
Introduction
This tab is used to enter the PID output parameters.
General tab.
Description
Field Description
Action Specify the type of PID action on the process here. Three options are available:
Reverse, Direct, and Bit Address. If an increase in the output causes an increase in
the process value measurement, define inverted action (Reverse); on the other hand,
if this causes a process value reduction, make the PID direct (Direct).
If you select Bit Address(1), you can modify the action type by modifying the
associated bit, which is either a memory bit (%Mxx) or an input address (%Ix.y).
The memory bit is set to 1 if the action is Direct and the memory bit is set to 0 if the
action is Reverse.
Limits Specify whether to place limits on the PID output. 3 options are available: Enable,
Disable, and Bit Address.
Select Enable to set the Bit to 1 or select Disable to set the Bit to 0.
Select Bit Address for limit management of the bit by modifying the associated bit,
which is either a memory bit (%Mxx) or an input address (%Ix.y).
Set the high and low limits for the PID output.
Min. or Max can be memory word (%MWxx), constant word (%KWxx), or a value from
1 to 10000 (0.01% to 100% of the PWM period).
Note: The Min. value must be less than the Max value.
Manual mode Specify whether to change the PID to manual mode. 3 options are available: Enable,
Disable, and Bit Address.
If you select Bit Address, you can switch to manual mode (bit to 1) or automatic mode
(bit to 0) using the program, by modifying the associated bit which is either a memory
bit (%Mxx) or an input.
The Output of manual mode must contain the value that you wish to assign to the
analog output when the PID is in manual mode (see page 231). This Output can be
either a word (%MWxx) or a direct value in the [0...10,000] format.
Analog output Specify the PID output to use when in auto-tuning mode.
This Analog output(2) can be a memory word address or an analog output address.
When using the PWM function of PID, only memory word addresses are allowed.
(1) When Auto-Tuning is enabled, the Auto-Tuning algorithm automatically determines the correct type of
action direct or reverse for the control process. You must then enter in the associated Bit Address textbox
a memory bit (%Mxx) only.
(2) Enter a memory address (%MWxx) or an analog output address (%QWx.y).
246 EIO0000003305 09/2020

PID Function
Field Description
Output PWM Check this box to use the PWM function of PID.
Specify the modulation period in the Period (0.1 s) text box. This period must be from
1 to 500 and can be a memory word (%MWxx) or a constant word (%KWxx). PWM
precision depends on both the PWM period and the scan period. The precision is
improved when the PWM ratio (%PWM.R) has the greatest number of values. For
instance, with scan period = 20 ms and PWM period = 200 ms, PWM.R can take
values 0%, 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 100%. With scan
period = 50 ms and PWM period = 200 ms, PWM.R can take values 0%, 25%, 50%,
75%, and 100% of the period PWM.P.
Specify the PWM output bit as the value in Output. This can be either a memory bit
(%Mxx) or an output address. For further details about PWM function, refer to the
chapter Pulse Width Modulation (%PWM) (see page 61).
(1) When Auto-Tuning is enabled, the Auto-Tuning algorithm automatically determines the correct type of
action direct or reverse for the control process. You must then enter in the associated Bit Address textbox
a memory bit (%Mxx) only.
(2) Enter a memory address (%MWxx) or an analog output address (%QWx.y).
EIO0000003305 09/2020 247

PID Function
Section 9.5
PID Programming
PID Programming
Using PID Function

This section provides descriptions and programming guidelines for using PID function.

Topic Page
Description 249
Programming and Configuring 251
PID States and Detected Error Codes 252
248 EIO0000003305 09/2020

PID Function
Description
Introduction
A proportional–integral–derivative (PID) is a generic control loop feedback mechanism (controller)
widely used in industrial control systems. The PID controller uses an algorithm that involves 3
separate constant parameters: the proportional, the integral, and derivative values, denoted by P,
I, and D respectively.
Key Features
The key features of the EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic PID function are as follows:
 Analog input
 Linear conversion of the configurable measurement
 High or low configurable input alarm
 Analog or PWM output
 Cutoff for the configurable output
 Configurable direct or inverse action
 Auto-tuning function
Illustration
This is the PID function in the Ladder editor of EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic:
NOTE: There must be a space between PID and the PID number (for example, PID<space>0).
Parameters
Unlike the Timer or the Counter function blocks, there is no PID function block in EcoStruxure
Machine Expert - Basic. The instruction [PID x] only enables the PID control loop function,
where x is the PID number.
To configure the PID function, goto the Programming window, click Tools → PID, and then edit the
PID properties (refer to the table below for the configuration parameters).
EIO0000003305 09/2020 249

PID Function
The PID function has the following parameters:

Used Checked if the I/O is used somewhere True/False
in the project False (Default)
PID Name of the current PID object A program can contain only a limited number of
PID functions. For the maximum number of PID
objects, refer to the table Maximum Number of
Objects (see Modicon M221, Logic Controller,
Programming Guide).
Symbol Symbol of the current PID object The symbol associated with this PID object. For
details, refer to Defining and Using Symbols
(see EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic,
Operating Guide).
[...] A button to launch the assistant Click to display the PID Assistant screen. For
further details, refer to PID Assistant
(see page 236).
Comment Comment A comment can be associated with this object.
250 EIO0000003305 09/2020

PID Function
Programming and Configuring
Introduction
This section describes how to program and configure the EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic PID
controller.
Enabling the PID Controller

The following example enables the PID 0 controller loop if the bit %M0 is set to 1:
Rung Instruction
0 LD %M0
[PID 0]
PID Analog Measurement

The PID function completes a PID correction using an analog measurement and setpoint and
produces either an analog command in the same format or a PWM on a digital output.
To use PID at full scale (the highest resolution), configure the analog input dedicated to the PID
controller measurement in [0...10,000] format. However, if you use the default configuration
[0...4095], the PID controller will still function correctly.
Configuring the Scan Period

When using EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic PID controllers, you must configure the scan
mode of the logic controller to Periodic scan mode (Program tab, Tasks → Master Task). In
periodic scan mode, each scan of the logic controller starts at a regular time interval so the
sampling rate is constant throughout the measurement period. For further details on configuring
the scan mode, refer to the EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic Operating Guide.
In periodic scan mode, the system bit %S19 is set to 1 by the system if the logic controller scan
time is greater than the period defined by the user program.
EIO0000003305 09/2020 251

PID Function
PID States and Detected Error Codes
Introduction
The EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic PID controller has the ability to write the present state of
both the PID controller and the Auto-Tuning process to a user-defined memory word. For further
information on how to enable and configure the PID States memory word, refer to the General tab
(see page 239) of the PID Assistant (see page 236).
The PID States memory word can record the following types of PID information:
 Present state of the PID controller
 Present state of the Auto-Tuning process
 PID detected error codes
 Auto-Tuning detected error codes
NOTE: The PID States memory word is read-only.
PID States Memory Word
PID States Description

0000 hex PID control is not active
2000 hex PID control is in progress
4000 hex PID setpoint has been reached
Auto-Tuning State Memory Word
Auto-Tuning State Description

0100 hex Auto-Tuning phase 1 (see page 228) in progress
1000 hex Auto-Tuning phase complete
252 EIO0000003305 09/2020

PID Function
PID Detected Error Codes

This table describes the potential detected errors that may be encountered during PID control:
Detected Error Code Description

8001 hex Operating mode value out of range
8002 hex Linear conversion min and max equal
8003 hex Upper limit for discrete output lower than lower limit
8004 hex Setpoint limit out of linear conversion range
8005 hex Setpoint limit less than 0 or greater than 10000
8006 hex Setpoint out of linear conversion range
8007 hex Setpoint less than 0 or greater than 10000
8008 hex Control action different from action determined at Auto-Tuning start
Auto-Tuning Detected Error Codes

This table records the Auto-Tuning detected error messages and describes possible causes as
well as troubleshooting actions:

8009 hex The Process Value (PV) limit has been reached. As Auto-Tuning is an open-loop
process, the Process Value (PV) limit works as maximum allowed value.
800A hex Either the sampling period is too small or the output setpoint is too low. Increase either
the sampling period or the Auto-Tuning output setpoint value.
800B hex Kp is zero.
800C hex The time constant is negative so the sampling period may be too large. For more
details, refer to Limitations on Using the Auto-Tuning (see page 259).
800D hex Delay is negative.
800E hex Detected error when calculating Kp. The Auto-Tuning algorithm is unstable (no
convergence). This may be due to:
 Disturbances on the process during Auto-Tuning has caused a distortion of the
process static gain evaluation.
 The process value transient response is not large enough for Auto-Tuning to
determine the static gain.
 A combination of the above.
Check the PID and Auto-Tuning parameters and make adjustments to improve
convergence. Check also if there is no disturbance that could affect the process value.
Try modifying:
 the output setpoint
 the sampling period
Make sure that there is no process disturbance while Auto-Tuning is in progress.
EIO0000003305 09/2020 253

PID Function

800F hex Time constant exceeds delay ratio, τ/θ > 20. PID regulation may no longer be stable.
For more details, refer to Limitations on Using the Auto-Tuning (see page 259).
8010 hex Time constant exceeds delay ratio, τ/θ < 2. PID regulation may no longer be stable.
For more details, refer to Limitations on Using the Auto-Tuning (see page 259).
8011 hex The limit for static gain Kp has been exceeded, Kp>10000. Measurement sensitivity
of some application variables may be too low. The range must be rescaled within the
[0...10000] interval.
8012 hex The computed value of integral time constant Ti has been exceeded, Ti > 20000.
8013 hex The computed value of derivative time constant Td has been exceeded, Td > 10000.
8014 hex Invalid input variables value (out of the range defined by low output and high output
alarms (see page 242)).
8015 hex Filter processing error:
 Cycle time out of range.
 Filter time < 10 x cycle time
254 EIO0000003305 09/2020

EIO0000003305 09/2020
Appendices
EIO0000003305 09/2020 255

256 EIO0000003305 09/2020
PID Parameters
EIO0000003305 09/2020
Appendix A
PID Parameters
PID Parameters

Topic Page
Role and Influence of PID Parameters 258
PID Parameter Adjustment Method 260
EIO0000003305 09/2020 257

PID Parameters
Role and Influence of PID Parameters
Introduction
This section describes the role and influence of PID parameters.
PID Controller Model

The EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic PID Controller implements a mixed (serial-parallel) PID
correction. The integral and derivative actions act both independently and in parallel. The
proportional action acts on the combined output of the integral and derivative actions.
Computational Algorithms
Two different computational algorithms are used depending on the value of the integral time
constant (Ti):
 If Ti ≠ 0, an incremental algorithm is used,
 If Ti = 0, a positional algorithm is used, along with a +5000 offset that is applied to the PID
output.
Influence of Actions
Proportional action is used to influence the process response speed. An increase of the
proportional action implies:
 a faster response
 a lower static error
 decrease in stability
Integral action is used to cancel out the static error. An increase of integration action (that is, a
decrease of the integral time Ti) induces:
 A faster response
 A decrease in stability
Derivative action is anticipatory. In practice, it adds a term which takes account of the speed of
variation in the deviation (which makes it possible to anticipate changes by accelerating process
response times when the deviation increases and by slowing them down when the deviation
decreases). An increase of derivative action (that is, an increase of the derivative time) implies:
 A slower response
 A reduced overshoot
NOTE: Given the derivative time, Td is the time used to anticipate the variation of the deviation.
Values of Td that are too low or too high can lead to unwanted oscillations.
For each action, a suitable compromize must be found between speed and stability.
258 EIO0000003305 09/2020

PID Parameters
Limits of the PID Control Loop

The process is assimilated to a pure delay first order with a transfer function:
where:
τ: model time constant
θ: model delay
The process control performance depends on the ratio
The suitable PID process control is attained in the following domain: 2< <20
PID process control is best suited for the regulation of processes that satisfy the following
condition:
 For <2, in other words for fast control loops (low ) or for processes with a large delay
(high t) the PID process control is no longer suitable. In such cases more complex algorithms
should be used.
 For >20, a process control using a threshold plus hysterisis is sufficient.
EIO0000003305 09/2020 259

PID Parameters
PID Parameter Adjustment Method
Introduction
Numerous methods to adjust the PID parameters exist. The preferred method is the Ziegler and
Nichols, which has 2 variants:
 closed loop adjustment
 open loop adjustment
Before implementing one of these methods, you must set the PID action (see page 246).
Closed Loop Adjustment

This principle uses a proportional command (Ti = 0, Td = 0 ) to start the process by increasing a
proportional coefficient until it starts to oscillate again after having applied a level to the PID
corrector setpoint. All that is required is to raise the critical proportional gain (Kpc) which has
caused the non-damped oscillation and the oscillation period (Tc) to reduce the values giving an
optimal regulation.
Depending on the corrector type used (PID or PI), the adjustment of the coefficients is executed
with the following values:
Corrector Kp: Proportional Gain Ti: Integration Time Td: Derivative

PID Kpc/1.7 Tc/2 Tc/8
PI Kpc/2.22 0.83 x Tc –
260 EIO0000003305 09/2020

PID Parameters
Open Loop Adjustment

As the regulator is in manual mode (see page 231), you apply a level to the output and make the
procedure response start the same as an integrator with pure delay time.
The intersection point on the right hand side, which is representative of the integrator with the time
axes, determines the time Tu. Next, the Tg time is defined as the time necessary for the controlled
variable (measurement) to have the same variation size (% of the scale) as the regulator output.
Depending on the corrector type used (PID or PI), the adjustment of the coefficients is executed
with the following values:
Corrector Kp: Proportional Gain Ti: Integration Time Td: Derivative

PID -1.2 Tg/Tu 2 x Tu 0.5 x Tu
PI -0.9 Tg/Tu 3.3 x Tu –
NOTE: For further details about parameter units, refer to PID tab (see page 243).
This adjustment method also provides a very dynamic command, which can express itself through
unwanted overshoots during the change of pulses of the setpoints. In this case, lower the
proportional gain until you get the required behavior. The method does not require any
assumptions about the nature and the order of the procedure. You can apply it just as well to the
stable procedures as to real integrating procedures. In the case of slow procedures (for example,
the glass industry), the user only requires the beginning of the response to regulate the coefficients
Kp, Ti, and Td.
EIO0000003305 09/2020 261

PID Parameters
262 EIO0000003305 09/2020

Glossary
EIO0000003305 09/2020
Glossary
A
absolute movement
A movement to a position defined from a reference point.
acceleration / deceleration
Acceleration is the rate of velocity change, starting from Start Velocity to target velocity.
Deceleration is the rate of velocity change, starting from target velocity to Stop Velocity. These
velocity changes are implicitly managed by the PTO function in accordance with acceleration,
deceleration, and jerk ratio parameters following a trapezoidal or an S-curve profile.
C
CW/CCW
ClockWise / Counter ClockWise
D
DWORD
(double word) Encoded in 32-bit format.
F
function
A programming unit that has 1 input and returns 1 immediate result. However, unlike FBs, it is
directly called with its name (as opposed to through an instance), has no persistent state from one
call to the next and can be used as an operand in other programming expressions.
Examples: boolean (AND) operators, calculations, conversions (BYTE_TO_INT)
H
homing
The method used to establish the reference point for absolute movement.
J
jerk ratio
The proportion of change of the acceleration and deceleration as a function of time.
EIO0000003305 09/2020 263

Glossary
P
POU
(program organization unit) A variable declaration in source code and a corresponding instruction
set. POUs facilitate the modular re-use of software programs, functions, and function blocks. Once
declared, POUs are available to one another.
S
S-curve ramp
An acceleration / deceleration ramp with a JerkRatio parameter greater than 0%.
start velocity
The minimum frequency at which a stepper motor can produce movement, with a load applied,
without the loss of steps.
stop velocity
The maximum frequency at which a stepper motor stops producing movement, with a load applied,
without the loss of steps.
T
trapezoidal ramp
An acceleration / deceleration ramp with a JerkRatio parameter set to 0%.
264 EIO0000003305 09/2020

Index
EIO0000003305 09/2020
Index
Symbols error handling

ErrID, 26
%DRV, 69
Error, 26
%FC, 30
%HSC
high speed counter, 36 F
%PLS, 54
fast counter
%PWM, 62
configuration, 32
description, 30
A programming example, 34
FREQGEN
acceleration ramp, 106
function block, 208
acknowldeging and resetting error
function block configuration, 210
MC_Reset_ATV, 93
frequency generator
function block, 208
B Function Block Object Codes
BUFFER_MODE, 143
backlash, 112 DIRECTION, 143
BUFFER_MODE, 143 HOMING_MODE, 144
PTO_PARAMETER, 144
C
configuring
Drive function blocks, 76
D
deceleration ramp, 106
DIRECTION, 143
Drive function blocks
configuring, 76
Drive function blocks: error codes, 95
E
enabling/disabling power stage
MC_Power_ATV, 77
error codes
Drive function blocks, 95
EIO0000003305 09/2020 265

Index
function blocks J
FC (Fast Counter, 30
JerkRatio, 106
frequency generator (%FREQGEN), 208
HSC (high speed counter), 36
MC_Halt_PTO, 182
MC_Home_PTO, 174
M
MC_Jog_ATV, 79 management of Function Block Inputs and In-
MC_Motion_PTO, 154 put Objects
MC_MoveAbs_PTO, 170 Execute, 26
MC_MoveRel_PTO, 165 management of Function Block Outputs and
MC_MoveVel_ATV, 82 Output Objects
MC_MoveVel_PTO, 161 Busy, 26
MC_Power_ATV, 77 CmdAborted, 26
MC_Power_PTO, 158 Done, 26
MC_ReadMotionState_ATV, 90 ErrID, 26
MC_ReadStatus_ATV, 87 Error, 26
MC_Reset_ATV, 93 MC_Halt_PTO
MC_SetPost_PTO, 177 controlled motion stop until velocity is 0,
MC_Stop_ATV, 85 182
MC_Stop_PTO, 179 MC_Home_PTO
MV_AbortTrigger_PTO, 201 command axis to perform homing se-
MV_ReadActPos_PTO, 188 quence, 174
MV_ReadActVel_PTO, 186 MC_Jog_ATV
MV_ReadAxis_PTO, 194 starting jog mode, 79
MV_ReadMotionState_PTO, 192 MC_Motion_PTO
MV_ReadPar_PTO, 203 calling a Motion Task Table, 154
MV_ReadSts_PTO, 190 MC_MoveAbs_PTO
MV_Reset_PTO, 196 moving axis to a given position at speci-
MV_TouchProbe_PTO, 198 fied speed, 170
MV_WritePar_PTO, 205 MC_MoveRel_PTO
pulse, 54 moving axis an incremental distance at
pulse width modulation, 62 specified speed, 165
functionalities MC_MoveVel_ATV
PTO, 101 moving at specified velocity, 82
MC_MoveVel_PTO
moving an axis at specified speed, 161
H MC_Power_ATV
enabling/disabling power stage, 77
high speed counter
MC_Power_PTO
counting mode, 40
enabling power to an axis, 158
description, 36
MC_ReadMotionState_ATV
frequency meter mode, 47
reading motion state, 90
HOMING_MODE, 144
MC_ReadStatus_ATV
reading device status, 87
MC_Reset_ATV
acknowledging and resetting error, 93
266 EIO0000003305 09/2020

Index
MC_SetPost_PTO P
moving axis to specified position, 177
PID
MC_Stop_ATV
AT tab, 244
stopping movement, 85
auto-tuning, 218
MC_Stop_PTO
closed loop adjustment, 260
commanding a controlled motion stop,
configuration assistant, 237
179 description, 249
motion task table
general tab, 239
PTO, 119
Input tab, 242
moving at specified velocity
open loop adjustment, 261
MC_MoveVel_ATV, 82
operating modes, 216
MV_AbortTrigger_PTO
output tab, 246
aborting function blocks connected to trig-
parameter, 258
ger events, 201
PID tab, 243
MV_ReadActPos_PTO
programming and configuring, 251
getting the position of the axis, 188
standard configuration, 222
MV_ReadActVel_PTO
states and detected error codes, 252
getting the velocity of the axis, 186
PTO
MV_ReadAxisError_PTO
configuration, 118
getting an axis control error, 194
functionalities, 101
MV_ReadMotionState_PTO
motion task table, 119
getting the motion status of the axis, 192
PTO_ERROR, 145, 146
MV_ReadPar_PTO
PTO_PARAMETER, 144
getting parameters from the PTO, 203
pulse
MV_ReadSts_PTO
description, 54
getting the status of the axis, 190
MV_Reset_PTO
programming example, 60
resetting axis-related errors, 196
pulse width modulation
MV_TouchProbe_PTO
description, 62
activating a trigger event on probe input,
198 programming example, 67
MV_WritePar_PTO
writing parameters to the PTO, 205
R
reading device status
%MC_ReadStatus_ATV, 87
reading motion state
MC_ReadMotionState_ATV, 90
S
starting jog mode, MC_Jog_ATV, 79
stopping movement
MC_Stop_ATV, 85
EIO0000003305 09/2020 267

Index
268 EIO0000003305 09/2020

EIO0000003313 02/2020
Modicon M221
Logic Controller
Hardware Guide
02/2020
EIO0000003313.01
please notify us.
2 EIO0000003313 02/2020
Table of Contents
About the Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Part I Modicon M221 Logic Controller Introduction . . . . . . 17
Chapter 1 M221 General Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
TM221C Logic Controller Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
TM221M Logic Controller Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Maximum Hardware Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
TMC2 Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
TM3 Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
TM2 Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Chapter 2 M221 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Real Time Clock (RTC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Input Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Output Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Run/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
SD Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Chapter 3 M221 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
3.1 M221 Logic Controller General Rules for Implementing . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Environmental Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Certifications and Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
3.2 M221 Logic Controller Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Installation and Maintenance Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
TM221C Logic Controller Mounting Positions and Clearances . . . . . . 90
TM221M Logic Controller Mounting Positions and Clearances. . . . . . 93
Top Hat Section Rail (DIN rail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Installing and Removing the Controller with Expansions. . . . . . . . . . . 100
Direct Mounting on a Panel Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
3.3 M221 Electrical Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Wiring Best Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
DC Power Supply Characteristics and Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
AC Power Supply Characteristics and Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Grounding the M221 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
EIO0000003313 02/2020 3
Part II Modicon TM221C Logic Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Chapter 4 TM221C16R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
TM221C16R Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Chapter 5 TM221CE16R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
TM221CE16R Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Chapter 6 TM221C16T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
TM221C16T Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Chapter 7 TM221CE16T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
TM221CE16T Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Chapter 8 TM221C16U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
TM221C16U Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Chapter 9 TM221CE16U. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
TM221CE16U Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Chapter 10 TM221C24R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Chapter 11 TM221CE24R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Chapter 12 TM221C24T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Chapter 13 TM221CE24T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Chapter 14 TM221C24U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Chapter 15 TM221CE24U. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Chapter 16 TM221C40R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Chapter 17 TM221CE40R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Chapter 18 TM221C40T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Chapter 19 TM221CE40T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Chapter 20 TM221C40U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Chapter 21 TM221CE40U. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
4 EIO0000003313 02/2020
Chapter 22 Embedded I/O Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Digital Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Relay Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Regular and Fast Transistor Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Analog Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Part III Modicon TM221M Logic Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Chapter 23 TM221M16R / TM221M16RG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
TM221M16R / TM221M16RG Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
TM221M16R / TM221M16RG Digital Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
TM221M16R / TM221M16RG Digital Outputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
TM221M16R / TM221M16RG Analog Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Chapter 24 TM221ME16R / TM221ME16RG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
TM221ME16R / TM221ME16RG Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
TM221ME16R / TM221ME16RG Digital Inputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
TM221ME16R / TM221ME16RG Digital Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
TM221ME16R / TM221ME16RG Analog Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Chapter 25 TM221M16T / TM221M16TG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
TM221M16T / TM221M16TG Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
TM221M16T / TM221M16TG Digital Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
TM221M16T / TM221M16TG Digital Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
TM221M16T / TM221M16TG Analog Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Chapter 26 TM221ME16T / TM221ME16TG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
TM221ME16T / TM221ME16TG Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
TM221ME16T / TM221ME16TG Digital Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
TM221ME16T / TM221ME16TG Digital Outputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
TM221ME16T / TM221ME16TG Analog Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Chapter 27 TM221M32TK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
TM221M32TK Presentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
TM221M32TK Digital Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
TM221M32TK Digital Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
TM221M32TK Analog Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Chapter 28 TM221ME32TK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
TM221ME32TK Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
TM221ME32TK Digital Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
TM221ME32TK Digital Outputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
TM221ME32TK Analog Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
EIO0000003313 02/2020 5
Part IV Modicon M221 Logic Controller Communication . . . 381
Chapter 29 Integrated Communication Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
USB Mini-B Programming Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Ethernet Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Serial Line 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Serial Line 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Chapter 30 Connecting the M221 Logic Controller to a PC . . . . . . . . 397
Connecting the Controller to a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
6 EIO0000003313 02/2020
Safety Information
NOTICE
EIO0000003313 02/2020 7
PLEASE NOTE
QUALIFICATION OF PERSONNEL
Only appropriately trained persons who are familiar with and understand the contents of this
manual and all other pertinent product documentation are authorized to work on and with this
product.
The qualified person must be able to detect possible hazards that may arise from parameterization,
modifying parameter values and generally from mechanical, electrical, or electronic equipment.
The qualified person must be familiar with the standards, provisions, and regulations for the
prevention of industrial accidents, which they must observe when designing and implementing the
system.
INTENDED USE
The products described or affected by this document, together with software, accessories, and
options, are programmable logic controllers (referred to herein as “logic controllers”), intended for
industrial use according to the instructions, directions, examples, and safety information contained
in the present document and other supporting documentation.
The product may only be used in compliance with all applicable safety regulations and directives,
the specified requirements, and the technical data.
Prior to using the product, you must perform a risk assessment in view of the planned application.
Based on the results, the appropriate safety-related measures must be implemented.
Since the product is used as a component in an overall machine or process, you must ensure the
safety of persons by means of the design of this overall system.
Operate the product only with the specified cables and accessories. Use only genuine accessories
and spare parts.
Any use other than the use explicitly permitted is prohibited and can result in unanticipated
hazards.
8 EIO0000003313 02/2020
About the Book
At a Glance
Document Scope
Use this document to:
 Install and operate your M221 Logic Controller.
 Connect the M221 Logic Controller to a programming device equipped with EcoStruxure
Machine Expert - Basic software.
 Interface the M221 Logic Controller with I/O expansion modules, HMI and other devices.
 Familiarize yourself with the M221 Logic Controller features.
NOTE: Read and understand this document and all related documents (see page 10) before
installing, operating, or maintaining your controller.
Validity Note
The technical characteristics of the devices described in this manual also appear online.
For product compliance and environmental information (RoHS, REACH, PEP, EOLI, etc.), go to
www.schneider-electric.com/green-premium.
EIO0000003313 02/2020 9
Related Documents

EIO0000003298 (FRE)
EIO0000003299 (GER)
EIO0000003300 (SPA)
EIO0000003301 (ITA)
EIO0000003302 (CHS)
EIO0000003304 (TUR)
EIO0000003303 (POR)
Modicon TMH2GDB Remote Graphic Display - User Guide EIO0000003321 (ENG)
EIO0000003322 (FRE)
EIO0000003323 (GER)
EIO0000003324 (SPA)
EIO0000003325 (ITA)
EIO0000003326 (CHS)
EIO0000003328 (TUR)
EIO0000003327 (POR)
Modicon TMC2 Cartridges - Hardware Guide EIO0000003337 (ENG)
EIO0000003338 (FRE)
EIO0000003339 (GER)
EIO0000003340 (SPA)
EIO0000003341 (ITA)
EIO0000003342 (CHS)
EIO0000003344 (TUR)
EIO0000003343 (POR)
EIO0000003126 (FRE)
EIO0000003127 (GER)
EIO0000003128 (SPA)
EIO0000003129 (ITA)
EIO0000003130 (CHS)
EIO0000003425 (TUR)
EIO0000003424 (POR)
EIO0000003132 (FRE)
EIO0000003133 (GER)
EIO0000003134 (SPA)
EIO0000003135 (ITA)
EIO0000003136 (CHS)
EIO0000003427 (TUR)
EIO0000003426 (POR)
10 EIO0000003313 02/2020
Modicon TM3 Expert I/O Modules - Hardware Guide EIO0000003137 (ENG)
EIO0000003138 (FRE)
EIO0000003139 (GER)
EIO0000003140 (SPA)
EIO0000003141 (ITA)
EIO0000003142 (CHS)
EIO0000003429 (TUR)
EIO0000003428 (POR)
Modicon TM3 Safety Modules - Hardware Guide EIO0000003353 (ENG)
EIO0000003354 (FRE)
EIO0000003355 (GER)
EIO0000003356 (SPA)
EIO0000003357 (ITA)
EIO0000003358 (CHS)
EIO0000003360 (TUR)
EIO0000003359 (POR)
Modicon TM3 Transmitter and Receiver Modules - Hardware Guide EIO0000003143 (ENG)
EIO0000003144 (FRE)
EIO0000003145 (GER)
EIO0000003146 (SPA)
EIO0000003147 (ITA)
EIO0000003148 (CHS)
EIO0000003431 (TUR)
EIO0000003430 (POR)
TM221C DC Logic Controller - Instruction Sheet EAV48550
TM221C AC Logic Controller - Instruction Sheet EAV58623
TM221M Logic Controller - Instruction Sheet HRB59602
EIO0000003313 02/2020 11
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
 Disconnect all power from all equipment including connected devices prior to removing any
covers or doors, or installing or removing any accessories, hardware, cables, or wires except
under the specific conditions specified in the appropriate hardware guide for this equipment.
 Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm the power is off where and when
indicated.
 Replace and secure all covers, accessories, hardware, cables, and wires and confirm that a
proper ground connection exists before applying power to the unit.
 Use only the specified voltage when operating this equipment and any associated products.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
DANGER
POTENTIAL FOR EXPLOSION
 Only use this equipment in non-hazardous locations, or in locations that comply with Class I,
Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D.
 Do not substitute components which would impair compliance to Class I, Division 2.
 Do not connect or disconnect equipment unless power has been removed or the location is
known to be non-hazardous.
 Do not use the USB port(s), if so equipped, unless the location is known to be non-hazardous.
12 EIO0000003313 02/2020
WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
WARNING
EIO0000003313 02/2020 13
IEC 61131-2:2007 Programmable controllers, part 2: Equipment requirements and tests.
reduction
requirements
ISO 14119:2013 Safety of machinery - Interlocking devices associated with guards - Principles
for design and selection
IEC 62061:2015 Safety of machinery - Functional safety of safety-related electrical, electronic,
IEC 61784-3:2016 Industrial communication networks - Profiles - Part 3: Functional safety
fieldbuses - General rules and profile definitions.
14 EIO0000003313 02/2020
(2006/42/EC) and ISO 12100:2010.
EIO0000003313 02/2020 15
16 EIO0000003313 02/2020
Modicon M221 Logic Controller Introduction
EIO0000003313 02/2020
Part I

1 M221 General Overview 19
2 M221 Features 53
3 M221 Installation 79
EIO0000003313 02/2020 17
18 EIO0000003313 02/2020
M221 General Overview
EIO0000003313 02/2020
Chapter 1
Overview
This chapter provides general information about the M221 Logic Controller system architecture
and its components.

Topic Page
TM221C Logic Controller Description 20
TM221M Logic Controller Description 25
Maximum Hardware Configuration 30
TMC2 Cartridges 34
TM3 Expansion Modules 36
TM2 Expansion Modules 45
Accessories 49
EIO0000003313 02/2020 19
TM221C Logic Controller Description
Overview
The TM221C Logic Controller has various powerful features and can service a wide range of
applications.
- Programming Guide (see Modicon M221, Logic Controller, Programming Guide).
 Grafcet (List)
 Grafcet (SFC)
Power Supply
The power supply of the TM221C Logic Controller is 24 Vdc (see page 114) or 100...240 Vac
(see page 119).
Real Time Clock

The M221 Logic Controller includes a Real Time Clock (RTC) system (see page 54).
Run/Stop
 a hardware Run/Stop switch (see page 69)
 a Run/Stop (see page 69) operation by a dedicated digital input, defined in the software
configuration (for more information, refer to Configuring Digital Inputs (see Modicon M221,
Logic Controller, Programming Guide).)
20 EIO0000003313 02/2020
Memory

RAM 512 Kbytes of RAM memory: 256 Kbytes for execute the application and contain data
internal variables and 256 Kbytes for
Non-volatile 1.5 Mbytes, of which 256 Kbytes is used to save the application
back up the application and data in case of
power outage.
 Regular inputs
 Fast inputs associated with counters
 Regular sink/source transistor outputs
 Fast sink/source transistor outputs associated with pulse generators
 Relay outputs
 Analog inputs
Removable Storage
The M221 Logic Controllers include an embedded SD card slot (see page 72).
 Clone management (see Modicon M221, Logic Controller, Programming Guide): back up the
application, firmware, and post configuration (if it exists) of the logic controller
 Firmware management (see Modicon M221, Logic Controller, Programming Guide): download
firmware to the logic controller, to a TMH2GDB Remote Graphic Display , or to TM3 expansion
modules
 Application management (see Modicon M221, Logic Controller, Programming Guide): back up
and restore the logic controller application, or copy it to another logic controller of the same
reference
 Post configuration management (see Modicon M221, Logic Controller, Programming Guide):
add, change, or delete the post configuration file of the logic controller
 Error log management (see Modicon M221, Logic Controller, Programming Guide): back up or
delete the error log file of the logic controller
 Memory management: back up and restore memory bits and words from a controller

The following types of communication ports are available depending on the controller reference:
 Ethernet (see page 386)
 USB Mini-B (see page 384)
 Serial Line 1 (see page 389)
EIO0000003313 02/2020 21

TM221C Logic Controller
Reference Digital Inputs Digital Outputs Analog Communication Power Supply

Inputs Ports
TM221C16R 5 regular inputs(1) 7 relay outputs Yes 1 serial line port 100...240 Vac
(see page 129) 4 fast inputs 1 USB programming
(HSC)(2) port
(see page 135) 1 USB programming
port
1 Ethernet port
TM221C16T 5 regular inputs(1) Source outputs Yes 1 serial line port 24 Vdc
(see page 139) 4 fast inputs 5 regular transistor outputs 1 USB programming
(HSC)(2) 2 fast outputs port
TM221CE16T (PLS/PWM/PTO/FREQGEN)(3) Yes 1 serial line port
port
1 Ethernet port
TM221C16U 5 regular inputs(1) Sink outputs Yes 1 serial line port 24 Vdc
(see page 147) 4 fast inputs 5 regular transistor outputs 1 USB programming
(HSC)(2) 2 fast outputs port
TM221CE16U (PLS/PWM/PTO/FREQGEN)(3) 1 serial line port
port
1 Ethernet port
22 EIO0000003313 02/2020

Inputs Ports
(see page 157) inputs(1) 1 USB programming
4 fast inputs port
TM221CE24R (HSC)(2) Yes 1 serial line port
port
1 Ethernet port
(see page 165) 8 regular transistor outputs 1 USB programming
2 fast outputs port
port
1 Ethernet port
(see page 173) inputs(1) 8 regular transistor outputs 1 USB programming
port
1 Ethernet port
(see page 185) inputs(1) 1 USB programming
4 fast inputs port
TM221CE40R (HSC)(2) Yes 1 serial line port
port
1 Ethernet port
(see page 197) 14 regular transistor outputs 1 USB programming
2 fast outputs port
port
1 Ethernet port
EIO0000003313 02/2020 23

Inputs Ports
(see page 209) inputs(1) 12 regular transistor outputs 1 USB programming
port
1 Ethernet port
Delivery Content
The following figure presents the content of the delivery for a TM221C Logic Controller:
1 TM221C Logic Controller Instruction Sheet

2 TM221C Logic Controller
4 Analog cable
24 EIO0000003313 02/2020
TM221M Logic Controller Description
Overview
The TM221M Logic Controller has various powerful features and can service a wide range of
applications.
- Programming Guide (see Modicon M221, Logic Controller, Programming Guide).
 Grafcet (List)
 Grafcet (SFC)
Power Supply
The power supply of the TM221M Logic Controller is 24 Vdc (see page 114).
Real Time Clock

The M221 Logic Controller includes a Real Time Clock (RTC) system (see page 54).
Run/Stop
 a hardware Run/Stop switch (see page 69)
configuration (for more information, refer to Configuring Digital Inputs (see Modicon M221,
Logic Controller, Programming Guide))
EIO0000003313 02/2020 25
Memory

RAM 512 Kbytes of RAM memory: 256 Kbytes for internal execute the application and
variables and 256 Kbytes for application and data. contains data
Non-volatile 1.5 Mbytes, of which 256 Kbytes is used to back up the save the application
application and data in case of power outage.
 Regular inputs
 Fast inputs (HSC)
 Regular transistor outputs
 Fast transistor outputs (PLS/PWM/PTO/FREQGEN)
 Relay outputs
 Analog inputs
Removable Storage
The M221 Logic Controllers include an embedded SD card slot (see page 72).
 Clone management (see Modicon M221, Logic Controller, Programming Guide): back up the
application, firmware, and post configuration (if it exists) of the logic controller
 Firmware management (see Modicon M221, Logic Controller, Programming Guide): download
firmware updates directly to the logic controller, and download firmware to a TMH2GDB Remote
Graphic Display
 Application management (see Modicon M221, Logic Controller, Programming Guide): back up
and restore the logic controller application, or copy it to another logic controller of the same
reference
 Post configuration management (see Modicon M221, Logic Controller, Programming Guide):
add, change, or delete the post configuration file of the logic controller
 Error log management (see Modicon M221, Logic Controller, Programming Guide): back up or
delete the error log file of the logic controller
 Memory management: backup/restore of memory bits and words from a controller
26 EIO0000003313 02/2020

The following communication ports are available on the front panel of the controller, depending on
the controller reference:
 Ethernet (see page 386)
 USB Mini-B (see page 384)
 SD Card (see page 72)

TM221M Logic Controller
Reference Digital Input Digital Output Analog Communication Ports Terminal Type
Input
TM221M16R 4 regular 8 relay outputs Yes 2 serial line ports Removable screw
(see page 263) inputs(1) 1 USB programming port terminal blocks
4 fast inputs
(HSC)(2)
TM221M16RG 4 regular 8 relay outputs Yes 2 serial line ports Removable spring
4 fast inputs
(HSC)(2)
TM221ME16R 4 regular 8 relay outputs Yes 1 serial line port Removable screw
4 fast inputs 1 Ethernet port
(HSC)(2)
TM221ME16RG 4 regular 8 relay outputs Yes 1 serial line port Removable spring
4 fast inputs 1 Ethernet port
(HSC)(2)
NOTE: The TM221M Logic Controller uses a 24 Vdc power supply (see page 114).
(3) The fast transistor outputs can be used as regular transistor outputs, for PLS, PWM, PTO or FREQGEN
EIO0000003313 02/2020 27
Input
TM221M16T 4 regular 6 regular Yes 2 serial line ports Removable screw
(see page 299) inputs(1) transistor 1 USB programming port terminal blocks
4 fast inputs outputs
(HSC)(2) 2 fast transistor
outputs
(PLS/PWM/PTO
/FREQGEN)(3)
TM221M16TG 4 regular 6 regular Yes 2 serial line ports Removable spring
outputs
(PLS/PWM/PTO
/FREQGEN)(3)
TM221ME16T 4 regular 6 regular Yes 1 serial line port Removable screw
4 fast inputs outputs 1 Ethernet port
outputs
(PLS/PWM/PTO
/FREQGEN)(3)
TM221ME16TG 4 regular 6 regular Yes 1 serial line port Removable spring
(see page 319) inputs(1) transistor USB programming port terminal blocks
4 fast inputs outputs 1 Ethernet port
outputs
(PLS/PWM/PTO
/FREQGEN)(3)
TM221M32TK 12 regular 14 regular Yes 2 serial line ports HE10 (MIL 20)
(see page 341) inputs(1) transistor 1 USB programming port connectors
(HSC)(2) 2 fast outputs
(PLS/PWM/PTO
/FREQGEN)(3)
28 EIO0000003313 02/2020
Input
TM221ME32TK 12 regular 14 regular Yes 1 serial line port HE10 (MIL 20)
(see page 341) inputs(1) outputs 1 USB programming port connectors
4 fast inputs 2 fast outputs 1 Ethernet port
(HSC)(2) (PLS/PWM/PTO
/FREQGEN)(3)
Delivery Content
The following figure presents the content of the delivery for a TM221M Logic Controller:
1 TM221M Logic Controller Instruction Sheet

2 TM221M Logic Controller
4 Analog cable
EIO0000003313 02/2020 29
Maximum Hardware Configuration
Introduction
The M221 Logic Controller is a control system that offers an all-in-one solution with optimized
configurations and an expandable architecture.
Local and Remote Configuration Principle

The following figure defines the local and remote configurations:
(1) Local configuration

(2) Remote configuration
M221 Logic Controller Local Configuration Architecture

Optimized local configuration and flexibility are provided by the association of:
The following figure represents the components of a local configuration:
(B) Expansion modules (see maximum number of modules)
30 EIO0000003313 02/2020
NOTE: You cannot mount a TM2 module before any TM3 module as indicated in the following
figure:
M221 Logic Controller Remote Configuration Architecture

Optimized remote configuration and flexibility are provided by the association of:
 TM3 transmitter and receiver modules
NOTE: You cannot use TM2 modules in configurations that include the TM3 transmitter and
receiver modules.
The following figure represents the components of a remote configuration:
(1) Logic controller and modules

(C) Expansion modules (7 maximum)
EIO0000003313 02/2020 31
Maximum Number of Modules

The following table shows the maximum configuration supported:
References Maximum Type of Configuration

TM221C16• 7 TM3 / TM2 expansion modules Local
TM221CE16•
TM221C24•
TM221CE24•
TM221C40•
TM221CE40•
TM221M16R•
TM221ME16R•
TM221M16T•
TM221ME16T•
TM221M32TK
TM221ME32TK
TM3XREC1 7 TM3 expansion modules Remote
NOTE: TM3 transmitter and receiver modules are not included in a count of the maximum number of
expansion modules.
NOTE: The configuration with its TM3 and TM2 expansion modules is validated by EcoStruxure
Machine Expert - Basic software in the Configuration window taking into account the total power
consumption of the installed modules.
NOTE: In some environments, the maximum configuration populated by high consumption
modules, coupled with the maximum distance allowable between the TM3 transmitter and receiver
modules, may present bus communication issues although the EcoStruxure Machine Expert -
Basic software allows for the configuration. In such a case you will need to analyze the
consumption of the modules chosen for your configuration, as well as the minimum cable distance
required by your application, and possibly seek to optimize your choices.
32 EIO0000003313 02/2020
Current Supplied to the I/O Bus

The following table shows the maximum current supplied by the controllers to the I/O Bus:
Reference IO Bus 5 Vdc IO Bus 24 Vdc

TM221C16R 325 mA 120 mA
TM221CE16R
TM221C16T 325 mA 148 mA
TM221CE16T
TM221C16U 325 mA 148 mA
TM221CE16U
TM221C24R 520 mA 160 mA
TM221CE24R
TM221C24T 520 mA 200 mA
TM221CE24T
TM221C24U 520 mA 200 mA
TM221CE24U
TM221C40R 520 mA 240 mA
TM221CE40R
TM221C40T 520 mA 304 mA
TM221CE40T
TM221C40U 520 mA 304 mA
TM221CE40U
TM221M16R• 520 mA 460 mA
TM221ME16R•
TM221M16T• 520 mA 492 mA
TM221ME16T•
TM221M32TK 520 mA 484 mA
TM221ME32TK
NOTE: Expansion modules consume current from the 5 Vdc and 24 Vdc supplied to the I/O Bus.
Therefore, the current delivered by the logic controller to the I/O Bus defines the maximum number
of expansion modules that can be connected to the I/O Bus (validated by EcoStruxure Machine
Expert - Basic software in the Configuration window).
EIO0000003313 02/2020 33
TMC2 Cartridges
Overview
You can expand the number of I/Os or communication options of your Modicon TM221C Logic
Controller by adding TMC2 cartridges.
For more information, refer to the TMC2 Cartridges Hardware Guide.
TMC2 Standard Cartridges

The following table presents the general-purpose TMC2 cartridges with the corresponding channel
type, voltage/current range, and terminal type:
Reference Channels Channel Type Voltage Terminal Type

Current
TMC2AI2 2 Analog inputs 0...10 Vdc 3.81 mm (0.15 in.)
(voltage or current) 0...20 mA or 4...20 mA pitch, non-removable
screw terminal block
TMC2TI2 2 Analog temperature Thermocouple type K, J, 3.81 mm (0.15 in.)
inputs R, S, B, E, T, N,C pitch, non-removable
3 wires RTD type Pt100, screw terminal block
Pt1000, Ni100, Ni1000
TMC2AQ2V 2 Analog voltage 0...10 Vdc 3.81 mm (0.15 in.)
outputs pitch, non-removable
TMC2AQ2C 2 Analog current 4...20 mA 3.81 mm (0.15 in.)
outputs pitch, non-removable
TMC2SL1 (1) 1 Serial line RS232 or RS485 3.81 mm (0.15 in.)
pitch, non-removable
(1) Only one serial line cartridge (TMC2SL1, TMC2CONV01) may be added to a logic controller.
34 EIO0000003313 02/2020
TMC2 Application Cartridges

The following table presents the applicative TMC2 cartridges with the corresponding channel type,
voltage/current range, and terminal type:

Current
TMC2HOIS01 2 Analog inputs 0...10 Vdc 3.81 mm (0.15 in.)
TMC2PACK01 2 Analog inputs 0...10 Vdc 3.81 mm (0.15 in.)
TMC2CONV01 (1) 1 Serial line RS232 or RS485 3.81 mm (0.15 in.)
pitch, non-removable
EIO0000003313 02/2020 35
Introduction
The range of TM3 expansion modules includes:
 Digital modules, classified as follows:
 Input modules (see page 37)
 Output modules (see page 37)
 Mixed input/output modules (see page 39)
 Analog modules, classified as follows:

 Input modules (see page 40)
 Output modules (see page 41)
 Mixed input/output modules (see page 42)
 Expert modules (see page 42)

 Safety modules (see page 43)
 Transmitter and Receiver modules (see page 44)
For more information, refer to the following documents:
 TM3 Digital I/O Modules Hardware Guide
 TM3 Analog I/O Modules Hardware Guide
 TM3 Expert I/O Modules Hardware Guide
 TM3 Safety Modules Hardware Guide
 TM3 Transmitter and Receiver Modules Hardware Guide
36 EIO0000003313 02/2020
TM3 Digital Input Modules

The following table shows the TM3 digital input expansion modules, with corresponding channel
type, nominal voltage/current, and terminal type:
Reference Channels Channel Type Voltage Terminal Type / Pitch

Current
TM3DI8A 8 Regular inputs 120 Vac Removable screw terminal block / 5.08 mm
7.5 mA
TM3DI8 8 Regular inputs 24 Vdc Removable screw terminal block / 5.08 mm
7 mA
TM3DI8G 8 Regular inputs 24 Vdc Removable spring terminal block / 5.08 mm
7 mA
TM3DI16 16 Regular inputs 24 Vdc Removable screw terminal blocks / 3.81 mm
7 mA
TM3DI16G 16 Regular inputs 24 Vdc Removable spring terminal blocks / 3.81 mm
7 mA
TM3DI16K 16 Regular inputs 24 Vdc HE10 (MIL 20) connector
5 mA
TM3DI32K 32 Regular inputs 24 Vdc HE10 (MIL 20) connector
5 mA
TM3 Digital Output Modules

The following table shows the TM3 digital output expansion modules, with corresponding channel

Current
TM3DQ8R 8 Relay outputs 24 Vdc / 240 Vac Removable screw
7 A maximum per common line / terminal block /
2 A maximum per output 5.08 mm
TM3DQ8RG 8 Relay outputs 24 Vdc / 240 Vac Removable spring
7 A maximum per common line / terminal block /
TM3DQ8T 8 Regular transistor 24 Vdc Removable screw
outputs (source) 4 A maximum per common terminal block /
line/0.5 A maximum per output 5.08 mm
TM3DQ8TG 8 Regular transistor 24 Vdc Removable spring
outputs (source) 4 A maximum per common terminal block /
TM3DQ8U 8 Regular transistor 24 Vdc Removable screw
outputs (sink) 4 A maximum per common terminal block /
EIO0000003313 02/2020 37

Current
TM3DQ8UG 8 Regular transistor 24 Vdc Removable spring
outputs (sink) 4 A maximum per common terminal block /
TM3DQ16R 16 Relay outputs 24 Vdc / 240 Vac Removable screw
8 A maximum per common line / terminal blocks /
TM3DQ16RG 16 Relay outputs 24 Vdc / 240 Vac Removable spring
8 A maximum per common line / terminal blocks /
TM3DQ16T 16 Regular transistor 24 Vdc Removable screw
outputs (source) 8 A maximum per common line / terminal blocks /
0.5 A maximum per output 3.81 mm
TM3DQ16TG 16 Regular transistor 24 Vdc Removable spring
outputs (source) 8 A maximum per common line / terminal blocks /
TM3DQ16U 16 Regular transistor 24 Vdc Removable screw
outputs (sink) 8 A maximum per common line / terminal blocks /
TM3DQ16UG 16 Regular transistor 24 Vdc Removable spring
outputs (sink) 8 A maximum per common line / terminal blocks /
TM3DQ16TK 16 Regular transistor 24 Vdc HE10 (MIL 20)
outputs (source) 2 A maximum per common line / connector
0.1 A maximum per output
TM3DQ16UK 16 Regular transistor 24 Vdc HE10 (MIL 20)
outputs (sink) 2 A maximum per common line / connector
TM3DQ32TK 32 Regular transistor 24 Vdc HE10 (MIL 20)
outputs (source) 2 A maximum per common line / connectors
TM3DQ32UK 32 Regular transistor 24 Vdc HE10 (MIL 20)
outputs (sink) 2 A maximum per common line / connectors
38 EIO0000003313 02/2020
TM3 Digital Mixed Input/Output Modules

This following table shows the TM3 mixed I/O modules, with corresponding channel type, nominal
voltage/current, and terminal type:

Current
TM3DM8R 4 Regular inputs 24 Vdc Removable screw
7 mA terminal block /
5.08 mm
4 Relay outputs 24 Vdc / 240 Vac
7 A maximum per common line / 2 A
maximum per output
TM3DM8RG 4 Regular inputs 24 Vdc Removable spring
7 mA terminal block /5.08 mm
maximum per output
TM3DM24R 16 Regular inputs 24 Vdc Removable screw
7 mA terminal
blocks / 3.81 mm
maximum per output
TM3DM24RG 16 Regular inputs 24 Vdc Removable spring
7 mA terminal
blocks / 3.81 mm
maximum per output
EIO0000003313 02/2020 39
TM3 Analog Input Modules

The following table shows the TM3 analog input expansion modules, with corresponding
resolution, channel type, nominal voltage/current, and terminal type:
Reference Resolution Channels Channel Mode Terminal Type / Pitch

Type
TM3AI2H 16 bit, or 2 inputs 0...10 Vdc Removable screw terminal block /
15 bit + sign -10…+10 Vdc 5.08 mm
0...20 mA
4...20 mA
TM3AI2HG 16 bit, or 2 inputs 0...10 Vdc Removable spring terminal block /
15 bit + sign -10…+10 Vdc 5.08 mm
0...20 mA
4...20 mA
TM3AI4 12 bit, or 4 inputs 0...10 Vdc Removable screw terminal block /
11 bit + sign -10…+10 Vdc 3.81 mm
0...20 mA
4...20 mA
TM3AI4G 12 bit, or 4 inputs 0...10 Vdc Removable spring terminal blocks
11 bit + sign -10…+10 Vdc / 3.81 mm
0...20 mA
4...20 mA
TM3AI8 12 bit, or 8 inputs 0...10 Vdc Removable screw terminal block /
11 bit + sign -10…+10 Vdc 3.81 mm
0...20 mA
4...20 mA
0...20 mA
extended
4...20 mA
extended
TM3AI8G 12 bit, or 8 inputs 0...10 Vdc Removable spring terminal blocks
11 bit + sign -10…+10 Vdc / 3.81 mm
0...20 mA
4...20 mA
0...20 mA
extended
4...20 mA
extended
TM3TI4 16 bit, or 4 inputs 0...10 Vdc Removable screw terminal block /
15 bit + sign -10…+10 Vdc 3.81 mm
0...20 mA
4...20 mA
Thermocouple
PT100/1000
NI100/1000
40 EIO0000003313 02/2020

Type
TM3TI4G 16 bit, or 4 inputs 0...10 Vdc Removable spring terminal blocks
15 bit + sign -10…+10 Vdc / 3.81 mm
0...20 mA
4...20 mA
Thermocouple
PT100/1000
NI100/1000
TM3TI4D 16 bit, or 4 inputs Thermocouple Removable screw terminal block /
15 bit + sign 3.81 mm
TM3TI4DG 16 bit, or 4 inputs Thermocouple Removable spring terminal blocks
15 bit + sign / 3.81 mm
TM3TI8T 16 bit, or 8 inputs Thermocouple Removable screw terminal block /
15 bit + sign NTC/PTC 3.81 mm
Ohmmeter
TM3TI8TG 16 bit, or 8 inputs Thermocouple Removable spring terminal blocks
15 bit + sign NTC/PTC / 3.81 mm
Ohmmeter
TM3 Analog Output Modules

The following table shows the TM3 analog output modules, with corresponding resolution, channel

Type
TM3AQ2 12 bit, or 2 outputs 0...10 Vdc Removable screw
11 bit + sign -10…+10 Vdc terminal block /
0...20 mA 5.08 mm
4...20 mA
TM3AQ2G 12 bit, or 2 outputs 0...10 Vdc Removable spring
0...20 mA 5.08 mm
4...20 mA
TM3AQ4 12 bit, or 4 outputs 0...10 Vdc Removable screw
0...20 mA 5.08 mm
4...20 mA
TM3AQ4G 12 bit, or 4 outputs 0...10 Vdc Removable spring
0...20 mA 5.08 mm
4...20 mA
EIO0000003313 02/2020 41
TM3 Analog Mixed Input/Output Modules

This following table shows the TM3 analog mixed I/O modules, with corresponding resolution,
channel type, nominal voltage/current, and terminal type:

Type
TM3AM6 12 bit, or 4 inputs 0...10 Vdc Removable screw
11 bit + sign 2 outputs -10...+10 Vdc terminal block /
0...20 mA 3.81 mm
4...20 mA
TM3AM6G 12 bit, or 4 inputs 0...10 Vdc Removable spring
11 bit + sign -10...+10 Vdc terminal block /
2 outputs
0...20 mA 3.81 mm
4...20 mA
TM3TM3 16 bit, or 2 inputs 0...10 Vdc Removable screw
0...20 mA 5.08 mm
4...20 mA
Thermocouple
PT100/1000
NI100/1000
12 bit, or 1 outputs 0...10 Vdc
11 bit + sign -10...+10 Vdc
0...20 mA
4...20 mA
TM3TM3G 16 bit, or 2 inputs 0...10 Vdc Removable spring
0...20 mA 5.08 mm
4...20 mA
Thermocouple
PT100/1000
NI100/1000
12 bit, or 1 outputs 0...10 Vdc
11 bit + sign -10...+10 Vdc
0...20 mA
4...20 mA
TM3 Expert Module

The following table shows the TM3 expert expansion module, with corresponding terminal types:
Reference Description Terminal Type / Pitch

TM3XTYS4 TeSys module 4 front connectors RJ-45
1 removable power supply connector / 5.08 mm
42 EIO0000003313 02/2020
TM3 Safety Modules

This table contains the TM3 safety modules (see Modicon TM3, Safety Modules, Hardware
Guide), with the corresponding channel type, nominal voltage/current, and terminal type:
Reference Function Channels Channel type Voltage Terminal type

Category Current
TM3SAC5R 1 function, 1 or 2 (1) Safety input 24 Vdc 3.81 mm (0.15 in.) and
up to 100 mA maximum 5.08 mm (0.20 in.),
Start (2) Input
category 3 removable screw
3 in parallel Relay outputs 24 Vdc / 230 Vac terminal block
Normally open 6 A maximum per
output
TM3SAC5RG 1 function, 1 or 2 (1) Safety input 24 Vdc 3.81 mm (0.15 in.) and
Start (2) Input
category 3 removable spring
output
TM3SAF5R 1 function, 2 (1) Safety inputs 24 Vdc 3.81 mm (0.15 in.) and
Start Input
output
TM3SAF5RG 1 function, 2 (1) Safety inputs 24 Vdc 3.81 mm (0.15 in.) and
Start Input
output
TM3SAFL5R 2 functions, 2 (1) Safety inputs 24 Vdc 3.81 mm (0.15 in.) and
Start Input
output
TM3SAFL5RG 2 functions, 2 (1) Safety inputs 24 Vdc 3.81 mm (0.15 in.) and
Start Input
output
(1) Depending on external wiring
(2)
Non-monitored start
EIO0000003313 02/2020 43
Reference Function Channels Channel type Voltage Terminal type

Category Current
TM3SAK6R 3 functions, 1 or 2 (1) Safety inputs 24 Vdc 3.81 mm (0.15 in.) and
Start Input
output
TM3SAK6RG 3 functions, 1 or 2 (1) Safety inputs 24 Vdc 3.81 mm (0.15 in.) and
Start Input
output
(1) Depending on external wiring
(2) Non-monitored start
TM3 Transmitter and Receiver Modules

The following table shows the TM3 transmitter and receiver expansion modules:
Reference Description Terminal Type / Pitch

TM3XTRA1 Data transmitter module for remote I/O 1 front connector RJ-45
1 screw for functional ground connection
TM3XREC1 Data receiver module for remote I/O 1 front connector RJ-45
Power supply connector / 5.08 mm
44 EIO0000003313 02/2020
Overview
You can expand the number of I/Os of your M221 Logic Controller by adding TM2 I/O expansion
modules.
The following types of electronic modules are supported:
 TM2 digital I/O expansion modules
 TM2 analog I/O expansion modules
For more information, refer to the following documents:

 TM2 Digital I/O Expansion Modules Hardware Guide
 TM2 Analog I/O Expansion Modules Hardware Guide
NOTE: TM2 modules can only be used in the local configuration, and only if there is no TM3
transmitter and receiver modules present in the configuration.
NOTE: It is prohibited to mount a TM2 module before any TM3 module. The TM2 modules must
be mounted and configured at the end of the local configuration.
TM2 Digital Input Expansion Modules

The following table shows the compatible TM2 digital input expansion modules with the
corresponding channel type, nominal voltage/current, and terminal type:

Current
TM2DAI8DT 8 Regular inputs 120 Vac Removable screw terminal block
7.5 mA
TM2DDI8DT 8 Regular inputs 24 Vdc Removable screw terminal block
7 mA
TM2DDI16DT 16 Regular inputs 24 Vdc Removable screw terminal block
7 mA
TM2DDI16DK 16 Regular inputs 24 Vdc HE10 (MIL 20) connector
5 mA
TM2DDI32DK 32 Regular inputs 24 Vdc HE10 (MIL 20) connector
5 mA
EIO0000003313 02/2020 45
TM2 Digital Output Expansion Modules

The following table shows the compatible TM2 digital output expansion modules with the
Reference Channels Channel type Voltage Terminal type

Current
TM2DRA8RT 8 Relay outputs 30 Vdc / 240 Vac Removable screw terminal
2 A max block
TM2DRA16RT 16 Relay outputs 30 Vdc / 240 Vac Removable screw terminal
2 A max block
TM2DDO8UT 8 Regular transistor 24 Vdc Removable screw terminal
outputs (sink) 0.3 A max per output block
TM2DDO8TT 8 Regular transistor 24 Vdc Removable screw terminal
outputs (source) 0.5 A max per output block
TM2DDO16UK 16 Regular transistor 24 Vdc HE10 (MIL 20) connector
outputs (sink) 0.1 A max per output
TM2DDO16TK 16 Regular transistor 24 Vdc HE10 (MIL 20) connector
outputs (source) 0.4 A max per output
TM2DDO32UK 32 Regular transistor 24 Vdc HE10 (MIL 20) connector
outputs (sink) 0.1 A max per output
TM2DDO32TK 32 Regular transistor 24 Vdc HE10 (MIL 20) connector
outputs (source) 0.4 A max per output
TM2 Digital Mixed Input/Output Expansion Modules

The following table shows the compatible TM2 digital mixed I/O expansion modules with the
Reference Channels Channel type Voltage Terminal type

Current
TM2DMM8DRT 4 Regular inputs 24 Vdc Removable screw
7 mA terminal block
7 A maximum per common line /
2 A maximum per output
TM2DMM24DRF 16 Regular inputs 24 Vdc Non-removable
7 mA spring terminal
block
7 A maximum per common line /
2 A maximum per output
46 EIO0000003313 02/2020
TM2 Analog Input Expansion Modules

The following table shows the compatible TM2 analog input expansion modules with the
Reference Channels Channel type Voltage Terminal Type

Current
TM2AMI2HT 2 High-level inputs 0...10 Vdc Removable screw terminal block
4...20 mA
TM2AMI2LT 2 Low-level inputs Thermocouple type Removable screw terminal block
J,K,T
TM2AMI4LT 4 Analog inputs 0...10 Vdc Removable screw terminal block
0...20 mA
PT100/1000
Ni100/1000
TM2AMI8HT 8 Analog inputs 0...20 mA Removable screw terminal block
0...10 Vdc
TM2ARI8HT 8 Analog inputs NTC / PTC Removable screw terminal block
TM2ARI8LRJ 8 Analog inputs PT100/1000 RJ11 connector
TM2ARI8LT 8 Analog inputs PT100/1000 Removable screw terminal block
TM2 Analog Output Expansion Modules

The following table shows the compatible TM2 analog output expansion modules with the

Current
TM2AMO1HT 1 Analog outputs 0...10 Vdc Removable screw terminal block
4...20 mA
TM2AVO2HT 2 Analog outputs +/- 10 Vdc Removable screw terminal block
EIO0000003313 02/2020 47
TM2 Analog Mixed Input/Output Expansion Modules

The following table shows the compatible TM2 analog mixed I/O expansion modules with the

Current
TM2AMM3HT 2 Analog inputs 0...10 Vdc 4...20 mA Removable screw terminal block
1 Analog outputs 0...10 Vdc 4...20 mA
TM2AMM6HT 4 Analog inputs 0...10 Vdc 4...20 mA Removable screw terminal block
TM2ALM3LT 2 Low-level inputs Thermo J,K,T, PT100 Removable screw terminal block
48 EIO0000003313 02/2020
Accessories
Overview
This section describes the accessories, cables, and Telefast.
Accessories
Reference Description Use Quantity

TMASD1 SD Card (see page 72) Use to update the controller firmware, 1
store data (data logging), initialize a
controller with a new application or clone
a controller.
TMAT2MSET Set of 8 removable screw terminal Connects M221 Logic Controller 1
blocks: embedded I/Os.
 4 x Removable screw terminal
blocks (pitch 3.81 mm) with 11
terminals for inputs/outputs
 4 x Removable screw terminal
TMAT2MSETG Set of 8 removable spring terminal Connects M221 Logic Controller 1
blocks: embedded I/Os.
 4 x Removable spring terminal
 4 x Removable spring terminal
TMAT2PSET Set of 5 removable screw terminal Connects 24 Vdc power supply. 1
block
AB1AB8P35 End brackets Help secure the logic controller or 1
receiver module and their expansion
modules on a top hat section rail (DIN
rail).
TM2XMTGB Grounding Bar Connects the cable shield and the 1
module to the functional ground.
TM200RSRCEMC Shielding take-up clip Mounts and connects the ground to the 25 pack
cable shielding.
TMAM2 Mounting Kit Mounts the controller and I/O modules 1
directly to a flat, vertical panel.
EIO0000003313 02/2020 49
Cables
Reference Description Details Length

BMXXCAUSBH018 Terminal port/USB From the USB mini-B port on the TM221C Logic 1.8 m
port cordset Controller to USB port on the PC terminal. (5.9 ft)
NOTE: Grounded and shielded, this USB
cable is suitable for long duration connections.
BMXXCAUSBH045 Terminal port/USB From the USB mini-B port on the TM221M 4.5 m
port cordset Logic Controller to USB port on the PC terminal. (14.8 ft)
NOTE: Grounded and shielded, this USB
cable is suitable for long duration connections.
TMACBL1 Analog cables Cable equipped with a connector 1m
(3.28 ft)
TCSMCN3M4F3C2 RS-232 serial link For DTE terminal (printer) 3m
cordset (9.84 ft)
1 RJ45 connector and
1 SUB-D 9 connector
TCSMCN3M4M3S2 RS-232 serial link For DCE terminal (modem, converter) 3m
cordset (9.84 ft)
1 RJ45 connector and
1 SUB-D 9 connector
TWDFCW30K Digital I/O cables with Cable equipped at a one end with an HE10 3m
free wires for 20-pin connector. (AWG 22 / 0.34 mm2) (9.84 ft)
Modular controller
TWDFCW50K Cable equipped at a one end with an HE10 5m
connector. (AWG 22 / 0.34 mm2) (16.4 ft)
50 EIO0000003313 02/2020
TWDFCW••K Cable Description

The following table provides specifications for the TWDFCW30K/50K with free wires for 20-pin
connectors (HE10 or MIL20):
Cable illustration Pin Connector Wire Color

1 White
2 Brown
3 Green
4 Yellow
5 Grey
6 Pink
7 Blue
8 Red
9 Black
10 Violet
11 Grey and pink
12 Red and blue
13 White and green
14 Brown and green
15 White and yellow
16 Yellow and brown
17 White and grey
18 Grey and brown
19 White and pink
20 Pink and brown
EIO0000003313 02/2020 51
Telefast Pre-Wiring Sub-bases

The following illustration shows the Telefast system:
1 TM221M32TK / TM221ME32TK
2 Cable equipped with a 20-way HE 10 connector at each end.)
3 16 channel sub-base for input extension modules.
4 16 channel sub-base for output extension modules.
5 16 channel sub-base for output extension modules.
Refer to TM221M Logic Controller Instruction Sheet.
52 EIO0000003313 02/2020
M221 Features
EIO0000003313 02/2020
Chapter 2
M221 Features
M221 Features
Overview
This chapter describes the Modicon M221 Logic Controller features.

Topic Page
Real Time Clock (RTC) 54
Input Management 61
Output Management 65
Run/Stop 69
SD Card 72
EIO0000003313 02/2020 53
M221 Features
Real Time Clock (RTC)
Overview
The M221 Logic Controller includes an RTC to provide system date and time information, and to
support related functions requiring a real-time clock. To continue keeping time when power is off,
a non-rechargeable battery is required (see reference below). A battery LED on the front panel of
the controller indicates if the battery is depleted or absent.
This table shows how RTC drift is managed:
RTC Characteristics Description

RTC drift Less than 30 seconds per month at 25 °C (77 °F)
Battery
The controller has one backup battery.
In the event of a power interruption, the backup battery maintains user data and the RTC for the
controller.
This table shows the characteristics of the battery:
Characteristics Description
Use In the event of a transient power outage, the battery powers the RTC and user
data.
Backup life At least 1 year at 25 °C maximum (77 °F). At higher temperatures, the time is
reduced.
Battery monitoring Yes
Replaceable Yes
Battery life 4 years at 25 °C maximum (77 °F). At higher temperatures, the time is reduced.
Controller battery type Lithium carbon monofluoride, type Panasonic BR2032
54 EIO0000003313 02/2020
M221 Features
Installing and Replacing the Battery

While lithium batteries are preferred due to their slow discharge and long life, they can present
hazards to personnel, equipment and the environment and must be handled properly.
DANGER
EXPLOSION, FIRE, OR CHEMICAL BURNS
 Replace with identical battery type.
 Follow all the instructions of the battery manufacturer.
 Remove all replaceable batteries before discarding unit.
 Recycle or properly dispose of used batteries.
 Protect battery from any potential short-circuit.
 Do not recharge, disassemble, heat above 100 °C (212 °F), or incinerate.
 Use your hands or insulated tools to remove or replace the battery.
 Maintain proper polarity when inserting and connecting a new battery.
EIO0000003313 02/2020 55
M221 Features
To install or replace the battery, follow these steps:
Step Action
1 Remove power from your controller.
2 Use an insulated screw-driver to pull out the battery holder from the TM221C Logic Controller.
Use an insulated screw-driver to pull out the battery holder from the TM221M Logic Controller.
56 EIO0000003313 02/2020
M221 Features
Step Action
3 Slide out the battery holder of the TM221C Logic Controller.
Slide out the battery holder of the TM221M Logic Controller.
EIO0000003313 02/2020 57
M221 Features
Step Action
4 Remove the battery from the battery holder.
5 Insert the new battery into the battery holder in accordance with the polarity markings on the
battery.
6 Replace the battery holder on the controller and verify that the latch clicks into place.
58 EIO0000003313 02/2020
M221 Features
Step Action
7 Slide in the battery holder of the TM221C Logic Controller.
Slide in the battery holder of the TM221M Logic Controller.
8 Power up your M221 Logic Controller.

9 Set the internal clock. For further details on the internal clock, refer to EcoStruxure Machine Expert
- Basic Operating Guide (see EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic, Generic Functions Library
Guide).
EIO0000003313 02/2020 59
M221 Features
NOTE: Replacement of the battery in the controllers other than with the type specified in this
documentation may present a risk of fire or explosion.
WARNING
IMPROPER BATTERY CAN PROVOKE FIRE OR EXPLOSION
Replace battery only with identical type: Panasonic Type BR2032.
60 EIO0000003313 02/2020
M221 Features
Input Management
Overview
The M221 Logic Controller features digital inputs, including 4 fast inputs.
The following functions are configurable:
 Filters (depends on the function associated with the input).
 I0...I15 inputs can be used for the Run/Stop function.
 Four fast inputs can be either latched or used for events (rising edge, falling edge, or both) and
thus be linked to an external task.
NOTE: All inputs can be used as regular inputs.
Integrator Filter Principle

The filter is designed to reduce the bouncing effect at the inputs. Setting a filter value helps the
controller to ignore sudden changes of input levels caused by induction of electromagnetic
interference.
The following timing diagram illustrates the filter effects:
Bounce Filter Availability

The bounce filter can be used on a fast input when:
 Using a latch or event
 HSC is enabled
EIO0000003313 02/2020 61
M221 Features
Latching
Latching is a function that can be assigned to the M221 Logic Controller fast inputs. This function
is used to memorize (or latch) any pulse with a duration that is less than the M221 Logic Controller
scan time. When a pulse is shorter than one scan, the controller latches the pulse, which is then
updated in the next scan. This latching mechanism only recognizes rising edges. Falling edges
cannot be latched. Assigning inputs to be latched is done in the Configuration tab in EcoStruxure
The following timing diagram illustrates the latching effects:
Event
An input configured for Event can be associated with an External Task.
Run/Stop
The Run/Stop function is used to start or stop an application program using an input. In addition to
the embedded Run/Stop switch, you can configure one (and only one) input as an additional
Run/Stop command.
For more information, refer to the Run/Stop (see page 69).
WARNING
UNINTENDED MACHINE OR PROCESS START-UP
the Run/Stop input.
 Use the Run/Stop input to help prevent the unintentional start-up from a remote location.
62 EIO0000003313 02/2020
M221 Features
Input Management Functions Availability

Embedded digital inputs can be assigned to functions (Run/Stop, Latch, Event, Fast Counter,
HSC, PTO). Inputs not assigned to functions are used as regular inputs. The following table
presents the possible assignments of the embedded M221 Logic Controller digital inputs:

Counter
%I0.1 X – – – %HSC0 –
or
%HSC2(1)
Regular Input %I0.2 X X X %FC0 Preset Ref or probe for
for %PTO0 to %PTO3
%HSC0
%I0.3 X X X %FC1 Catch for
%HSC0
%I0.4 X X X %FC2 Catch for
%HSC1
%I0.5 X X X %FC3 Preset
for
%HSC1
%I0.7 X – – – %HSC1 –
or
%HSC3(2)
X Yes
– No
(1)
(3)
EIO0000003313 02/2020 63
M221 Features

Counter
Regular Input %I0.8 X – – – – Ref or probe for
(depending on the %PTO0 to %PTO3
%I0.9 X – – – –
controller reference) on TM221C40U
and
TM221CE40U
controllers
%I0.10 X – – – – –
%I0.11 X – – – – –
%I0.12 X – – – – –
%I0.13 X – – – – –
%I0.14 X – – – – –
%I0.15 X – – – – –
%I0.16 X – – – – –
%I0.17 X – – – – –
%I0.18 X – – – – –
%I0.19 X – – – – –
%I0.20 X – – – – –
%I0.21 X – – – – –
%I0.22 X – – – – –
%I0.23 X – – – – –
X Yes
– No
(1)
(3)
64 EIO0000003313 02/2020
M221 Features
Output Management
Introduction
The M221 Logic Controller features both regular and fast transistor outputs
(PLS/PWM/PTO/FREQGEN).
The following output functions are configurable on the transistor outputs:
 Alarm output
 HSC (reflex features on HSC threshold)
 PLS
 PTO
 PWM
 FREQGEN
NOTE: All outputs can be used as regular outputs.
EIO0000003313 02/2020 65
M221 Features
Output Management Availability

The information below refers to regular and fast transistor outputs on the M221 Logic Controller:
Function Alarm HSC PLS / PWM / PTO / FREQGEN

Output
%Q0.0 X – • %PLS0
• %PWM0
• %PTO0
Fast • %FREQGEN0
Output(1) %Q0.1 X – • %PLS1
• %PWM1
• %PTO(2)
• %FREQGEN1
• %FREQGEN2
• %FREQGEN3
Regular %Q0.6 X – %PTOx direction
Output(3) %Q0.7 X – %PTOx direction
(depending
on the %Q0.8 – – %PTOx direction
controller %Q0.9 – – %PTOx direction
reference)
(1) Fast output functions are only available on controller references that contain transistor outputs.
(2) %PTO0 direction in CW/CCW output mode, or %PTO1 (not available when %PTO0 is configured in
CW/CCW output mode), or %PTOx direction in other cases.
(3) %Q0.2 and %Q0.3 are fast outputs on TM221C40U and TM221CE40U controllers
(4) %PTO2 on TM221C40U and TM221CE40U controllers, or %PTOx direction in other cases.
(5) %PTO2 direction in CW/CCW output mode on TM221C40U and TM221CE40U controllers, or %PTO3 (not
available when %PTO2 is configured in CW/CCW output mode) on TM221C40U and TM221CE40U
controllers, or %PTOx direction in other cases.
66 EIO0000003313 02/2020
M221 Features
Fallback Modes (Behavior for Outputs in Stop)

When the controller enters the STOPPED or one of the exception states for any reason, the local
(embedded and expansion) outputs are set to Default Value defined in the application.
In case of PTO outputs, the fallback values are forced to 0 logic (0 Vdc) and these values cannot
be modified.
Short-circuit or Over-current on Source Transistor Outputs

Outputs are clustered in packs of 4 outputs maximum (less when the total number of outputs of the
controller is not a multiple of 4):
 Q0...Q3
 Q4...Q7
 Q8...Q11
 Q12...Q15
When a short-circuit or overload is detected and the system bit %S49 is set to 1, the cluster of 4
outputs is set to 0. An automatic rearming is done periodically (about 1 s). Only the short-circuit
between an output set to 1 and 0 V is detected. The short-circuit between an output set to 0 and
24 V is not detected.
NOTE: By default, %S49 is set to 0.
The following table describes the actions taken on short-circuits or overload of transistor outputs
from Q0 to Q3:
If... then...
If you have short-circuit at 0 V on Transistor outputs automatically go into over-current protection or
transistor outputs thermal protection mode.
For more information, refer to transistor output wiring diagrams.
In the case of a short-circuit or current overload, the common group of outputs automatically enters
into thermal protection mode (all outputs in the group are set to 0), and are then periodically
rearmed (each second) to test the connection state. However, you must be aware of the effect of
this rearming on the machine or process being controlled.
WARNING
Inhibit the automatic rearming of outputs if this feature is an undesirable behavior for your
machine or process.
NOTE: The automatic rearming feature can be disabled with the system bit %S49. Refer to the
Programming Guide of your controller for more information.
EIO0000003313 02/2020 67
M221 Features
Short-circuit or Over-Current on Sink Transistor Outputs

Sink transistor outputs are not internally protected against overloads or short-circuits.
The following table describes the actions taken on overloads or short-circuits on sink transistor
outputs:
If... then ...

If you have short-circuit or overload at 0 V, or 24 V on sink no action is taken and no error is detectable.
transistor outputs
For more information, refer to Sink Transistor Outputs Wiring Diagrams (see page 254).
Short-circuit or Over-Current on Relay Outputs

Relay outputs are not internally protected against overloads or short-circuits.
The following table describes the actions taken on overloads or short-circuits on relay outputs:
If... then...
If you have short-circuit or overload at 0 V or No action is taken and no error is detectable.
24 V on relay outputs For more information, refer to relay output wiring diagrams.
Relay outputs are electromechanical switches capable of carrying significant levels of current and
voltage. All electromechanical devices have a limited operational life and must be installed so as
to minimize the potential for unintended consequences.
WARNING
INOPERABLE OUTPUTS
Use appropriate, external safety interlocks on outputs where personnel and/or equipment
hazards exist.
68 EIO0000003313 02/2020
M221 Features
Run/Stop
Run/Stop
 a hardware Run/Stop switch
configuration. For more information, refer to Configuring Digital Inputs (see Modicon M221,
 an EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic software command.
 a Remote Graphic Display (see Modicon TMH2GDB, Remote Graphic Display, User Guide).
The M221 Logic Controller has a Run/Stop hardware switch, which puts the controller in a RUN or
STOP state.
The following figure shows the location of the Run/Stop switch on the TM221C Logic Controller:
EIO0000003313 02/2020 69
M221 Features
The following figure shows the location of the Run/Stop switch on the TM221M Logic Controller:
The interaction of the different operators on the controller state behavior is summarized in the table
below:
Embedded Run/Stop hardware switch

Switch on Stop Stop to Run transition Switch on Run
Software None STOP Commands a transition to Allows external Run/Stop
configurable Ignores external Run/Stop RUN state1. commands2.
Run/Stop commands2.
digital input
State 0 STOP STOP STOP
Ignores external Run/Stop Ignores external Run/Stop Ignores external Run/Stop
commands2. commands2. commands2.
Rising STOP Commands a transition to Commands a transition to
edge Ignores external Run/Stop RUN state1. RUN state1.
commands2.
State 1 STOP Commands a transition to Allows external Run/Stop
Ignores external Run/Stop RUN state1. commands2.
commands2.
1
For more information, refer to the Controller States and Behaviors (see Modicon M221, Logic Controller,
Programming Guide).
2
External Run/Stop commands sent by the EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic online button or a Remote Graphic
Display.
70 EIO0000003313 02/2020
M221 Features
WARNING
the Run/Stop input or engaging the Run/Stop switch.
 Use the Run/Stop input to help prevent the unintentional start-up from a remote location, or
from accidentally engaging the Run/Stop switch.
EIO0000003313 02/2020 71
M221 Features
SD Card
Overview
When handling the SD card, follow the instructions below to help prevent internal data on the SD
card from being corrupted or lost or an SD card malfunction from occurring:
NOTICE
LOSS OF APPLICATION DATA
 Do not store the SD card where there is static electricity or probable electromagnetic fields.
 Do not store the SD card in direct sunlight, near a heater, or other locations where high
temperatures can occur.
 Do not bend the SD card.
 Do not drop or strike the SD card against another object.
 Keep the SD card dry.
 Do not touch the SD card connectors.
 Do not disassemble or modify the SD card.
 Use only SD cards formatted using FAT or FAT32.
The M221 Logic Controller does not recognize NTFS formatted SD cards. Format the SD card on
your computer using FAT or FAT32.
When using the M221 Logic Controller and an SD card, observe the following to avoid losing
valuable data:
 Accidental data loss can occur at any time. Once data is lost it cannot be recovered.
 If you forcibly extract the SD card, data on the SD card may become corrupted.
 Removing an SD card that is being accessed could damage the SD card, or corrupt its data.
 If the SD card is not positioned correctly when inserted into the controller, the data on the card
and the controller could become damaged.
NOTICE
LOSS OF APPLICATION DATA
 Backup SD card data regularly.
 Do not remove power or reset the controller, and do not insert or remove the SD card while it
is being accessed.
72 EIO0000003313 02/2020
M221 Features
The following figure shows the SD card slot of the TM221C Logic Controller:
The following figure shows the SD card slot of the TM221M Logic Controller:
EIO0000003313 02/2020 73
M221 Features
It is possible to set the Write-Control Tab to prevent write operations to the SD card. Push the tab
up, as shown in the example on the right-hand side, to release the lock and enable writing to the
SD card. Before using an SD card, read the manufacturer's instructions.
Step Action
1 Insert the SD card into the SD card slot of the TM221C Logic Controller:
Insert the SD card into the SD card slot of the TM221M Logic Controller:
74 EIO0000003313 02/2020
M221 Features
Step Action
2 Push until you hear it “click” (TM221C Logic Controller):
Push until you hear it “click” (TM221M Logic Controller):
EIO0000003313 02/2020 75
M221 Features
SD Card Slot Characteristics
Topic Characteristics Description

Supported type Standard Capacity SD (SDSC)
High Capacity SDHC
Global memory Size 32 GB max.
Memory organization Application backup size 64 MB
Data storage size 1.93 GB
Robustness Write/erase cycles (typical) 100,000
Temperature operating range –40...+85 °C (–40...+185 °F)
File retention time 10 years
TMASD1 Characteristics
Characteristics Description
Card removal durability Minimum 1000 times
File retention time 10 years @ 25 °C (77 °F)
Flash type SLC NAND
Memory size 256 MB
Ambient operation temperature –10 … +85°C (14...185 °F)
Storage temperature –25 … +85°C (–13...185 °F)
Relative humidity 95% max. non-condensing
Write/Erase cycles 3,000,000 (approximately)
NOTE: The TMASD1 has been rigorously tested in association with the logic controller. For other
commercially available cards, consult your local sales representative.
NOTE: The SD card can be used directly on your PC.
76 EIO0000003313 02/2020
M221 Features
Status LED
The following figure shows the status LEDs of the TM221C Logic Controller:
The following figure shows the status LEDs of the TM221M Logic Controller:
The following table describes the SD card status LED:
Label Description LED

Color Status Description
SD SD card Green On Indicates that the SD card is being accessed.
Off Indicates no access.
Flashing Indicates that an error was detected during the SD card operation.
EIO0000003313 02/2020 77
M221 Features
78 EIO0000003313 02/2020
M221 Installation
EIO0000003313 02/2020
Chapter 3
M221 Installation
M221 Installation
Overview
This chapter provides installation safety guidelines, device dimensions, mounting instructions, and
environmental specifications.

Section Topic Page
3.1 M221 Logic Controller General Rules for Implementing 80
3.2 M221 Logic Controller Installation 86
3.3 M221 Electrical Requirements 106
EIO0000003313 02/2020 79
M221 Installation
Section 3.1
M221 Logic Controller General Rules for Implementing
M221 Logic Controller General Rules for Implementing

Topic Page
Environmental Characteristics 81
Certifications and Standards 85
80 EIO0000003313 02/2020
M221 Installation
Environmental Characteristics
Enclosure Requirements
M221 Logic Controller system components are designed as Zone B, Class A industrial equipment
according to IEC/CISPR Publication 11. If they are used in environments other than those
described in the standard, or in environments that do not meet the specifications in this manual,
the ability to meet electromagnetic compatibility requirements in the presence of conducted and/or
radiated interference may be reduced.
All M221 Logic Controller system components meet European Community (CE) requirements for
open equipment as defined by IEC/EN 61131-2. You must install them in an enclosure designed
for the specific environmental conditions and to minimize the possibility of unintended contact with
hazardous voltages. Use metal enclosures to improve the electromagnetic immunity of your M221
Logic Controller system. Use enclosures with a keyed locking mechanism to minimize
unauthorized access.
All the M221 Logic Controller module components are electrically isolated between the internal
electronic circuit and the input/output channels within the limits set forth and described by these
environmental characteristics. For more information on electrical isolation, see the technical
specifications of your particular controller found later in the current document. This equipment
meets CE requirements as indicated in the table below. This equipment is intended for use in a
Pollution Degree 2 industrial environment.
WARNING
Do not exceed any of the rated values specified in the environmental and electrical characteristics
tables.
EIO0000003313 02/2020 81
M221 Installation
The following table shows the general environmental characteristics:
Characteristic Minimum Tested Range

Specification
Standard compliance IEC/EN 61010-2- –
201
Ambient operating temperature – Horizontal –10...55 °C (14...131 °F)
installation
– Vertical installation –10...50 °C (14...122 °F)
–10...35 °C (14...95 °F)
Storage temperature – –25...70 °C (- 13...158 °F)
Relative humidity – Transport and 10...95 % (non-condensing)
storage
Operation 10...95 % (non-condensing)
Degree of pollution IEC/EN 60664-1 2
Degree of protection IEC/EN 61131-2 IP20 with protective covers in place
Corrosion immunity – Atmosphere free from corrosive gases
Operating altitude – 0...2000 m (0...6560 ft)
Storage altitude – 0...3000 m (0...9843 ft)
Vibration resistance IEC/EN 61131-2 Panel mounting or 3.5 mm (0.13 in) fixed amplitude
mounted on a top from 5...8.4 Hz
hat section rail (DIN 29.4 m/s2 (96.45 ft/s2) (3 gn) fixed
rail) acceleration from 8.4...150 Hz
Mechanical shock resistance – 147 m/s2 or 482.28 ft/s2 (15 gn) for a duration of 11 ms
98 m/s² or 32.15 ft/s2 (10 gn) for a duration of 11 ms (for
M221 Logic Controller with relay outputs)
NOTE: The tested ranges may indicate values beyond that of the IEC Standard. However, our internal standards
define what is necessary for industrial environments. In all cases, we uphold the minimum specification if indicated.
82 EIO0000003313 02/2020
M221 Installation
Electromagnetic Susceptibility
The M221 Logic Controller system meets electromagnetic susceptibility specifications as indicated
in the following table:
Characteristic Minimum Specification Tested Range

Electrostatic discharge IEC/EN 61000-4-2 8 kV (air discharge)
4 kV (contact discharge)
Radiated electromagnetic IEC/EN 61000-4-3 10 V/m (80...1000 MHz)
field 3 V/m (1.4...2 GHz)
1 V/m (2...3 GHz)
Magnetic field IEC/EN 61000-4-8 30 A/m 50 Hz, 60 Hz
Fast transients burst IEC/EN 61000-4-4 – CM1 and DM2
AC/DC Power 2 kV
lines
Relay outputs 2 kV
24 Vdc I/Os 1 kV
Analog I/Os 1 kV
Communication 1 kV
line
Surge immunity IEC/EN 61000-4-5 – CM1 DM2
IEC/EN 61131-2
DC Power lines 1 kV 0.5 kV
AC Power lines 2 kV 1 kV
Relay outputs 2 kV 1 kV
24 Vdc I/Os 1 kV –
Shielded cable 1 kV –
(between shield
and ground)
Induced electromagnetic field IEC/EN 61000-4-6 10 Vrms (0.15...80 MHz)
1 Common Mode
2 Differential Mode
EIO0000003313 02/2020 83
M221 Installation
Characteristic Minimum Specification Tested Range

Conducted emission IEC 61000-6-4 AC power line:
 0.15...0.5 MHz: 79 dBμV/m QP / 66 dBμV/m AV
 0.5...300 MHz: 73 dBμV/m QP / 60 dBµV/m AV
AC/DC power line:

 10...150 kHz: 120...69 dBμV/m QP
 150...1500 kHz: 79...63 dBμV/m QP
 1.5...30 MHz: 63 dBμV/m QP
Radiated emission IEC 61000-6-4 30...230 MHz: 40 dBμV/m QP

230...1000 MHz: 47 dBμV/m QP
1 Common Mode
2 Differential Mode
84 EIO0000003313 02/2020
M221 Installation
Certifications and Standards
Introduction
The M221 Logic Controllers are designed to conform to the main national and international
standards concerning electronic industrial control devices:
 IEC/EN 61131-2
 UL 508
The M221 Logic Controllers have obtained the following conformity marks:
 CE
 CSA (except for TM221C•••U)
 EAC
 RCM
 UL
 cCSAus Hazardous Location (except for TM221C•••U)
EIO0000003313 02/2020 85
M221 Installation
Section 3.2
M221 Logic Controller Installation
M221 Logic Controller Installation

Topic Page
Installation and Maintenance Requirements 87
TM221C Logic Controller Mounting Positions and Clearances 90
TM221M Logic Controller Mounting Positions and Clearances 93
Top Hat Section Rail (DIN rail) 96
Installing and Removing the Controller with Expansions 100
Direct Mounting on a Panel Surface 104
86 EIO0000003313 02/2020
M221 Installation
Installation and Maintenance Requirements
Before Starting
Read and understand this chapter before beginning the installation of your system.
The use and application of the information contained herein require expertise in the design and
programming of automated control systems. Only you, the user, machine builder or integrator, can
be aware of all the conditions and factors present during installation and setup, operation, and
maintenance of the machine or process, and can therefore determine the automation and
associated equipment and the related safeties and interlocks which can be effectively and properly
used. When selecting automation and control equipment, and any other related equipment or
software, for a particular application, you must also consider any applicable local, regional or
national standards and/or regulations.
Pay particular attention in conforming to any safety information, different electrical requirements,
and normative standards that would apply to your machine or process in the use of this equipment.
Disconnecting Power
All options and modules should be assembled and installed before installing the control system on
a mounting rail, onto a mounting plate or in a panel. Remove the control system from its mounting
rail, mounting plate or panel before disassembling the equipment.
DANGER
indicated.
EIO0000003313 02/2020 87
M221 Installation
Programming Considerations
WARNING
Operating Environment
In addition to the Environmental Characteristics, refer to Product Related Information in the
beginning of the present document for important information regarding installation in hazardous
locations for this specific equipment.
WARNING
Install and operate this equipment according to the conditions described in the Environmental
Characteristics.
88 EIO0000003313 02/2020
M221 Installation
Installation Considerations
WARNING
 Use appropriate safety interlocks where personnel and/or equipment hazards exist.
 Install and operate this equipment in an enclosure appropriately rated for its intended
environment and secured by a keyed or tooled locking mechanism.
 Use the sensor and actuator power supplies only for supplying power to the sensors or
actuators connected to the module.
 Power line and output circuits must be wired and fused in compliance with local and national
regulatory requirements for the rated current and voltage of the particular equipment.
 Do not use this equipment in safety-critical machine functions unless the equipment is
otherwise designated as functional safety equipment and conforming to applicable regulations
and standards.
 Do not disassemble, repair, or modify this equipment.
 Do not connect any wiring to reserved, unused connections, or to connections designated as
No Connection (N.C.).
NOTE: JDYX2 or JDYX8 fuse types are UL-recognized and CSA approved.
EIO0000003313 02/2020 89
M221 Installation
TM221C Logic Controller Mounting Positions and Clearances
Introduction
This section describes the mounting positions for the TM221C Logic Controller .
NOTE: Keep adequate spacing for proper ventilation and to maintain the operating temperature
specified in the Environmental Characteristics (see page 81).
Correct Mounting Position

Whenever possible, the TM221C Logic Controller should be mounted horizontally on a vertical
plane as shown in the figure below:
Acceptable Mounting Positions

The TM221C Logic Controller can also be mounted vertically with a temperature derating on a
vertical plane as shown below.
NOTE: Expansion modules must be mounted above the logic controller.
90 EIO0000003313 02/2020
M221 Installation
Incorrect Mounting Position

The TM221C Logic Controller should only be positioned as shown in Correct Mounting Position
(see page 90) figure. The figures below show the incorrect mounting positions.
Minimum Clearances
WARNING
 Place devices dissipating the most heat at the top of the cabinet and ensure adequate
ventilation.
 Avoid placing this equipment next to or above devices that might cause overheating.
 Install the equipment in a location providing the minimum clearances from all adjacent
structures and equipment as directed in this document.
 Install all equipment in accordance with the specifications in the related documentation.
The M221 Logic Controller has been designed as an IP20 product and must be installed in an
enclosure. Clearances must be respected when installing the product.
There are 3 types of clearances between:
 The M221 Logic Controller and all sides of the cabinet (including the panel door).
 The M221 Logic Controller terminal blocks and the wiring ducts. This distance reduces
electromagnetic interference between the controller and the wiring ducts.
 The M221 Logic Controller and other heat generating devices installed in the same cabinet.
EIO0000003313 02/2020 91
M221 Installation
The following figure shows the minimum clearances that apply to all TM221C Logic Controller
references:
92 EIO0000003313 02/2020
M221 Installation
TM221M Logic Controller Mounting Positions and Clearances
Introduction
This section describes the mounting positions for the M221 Logic Controller.
Correct Mounting Position

To obtain optimal operating characteristics, the M221 Logic Controller should be mounted
horizontally on a vertical plane as shown in the figure below:
Acceptable Mounting Positions

The M221 Logic Controller can also be mounted vertically on a vertical plane as shown below.
NOTE: Expansion modules must mounted above the controller.
EIO0000003313 02/2020 93
M221 Installation
Incorrect Mounting Position

The M221 Logic Controller should only be positioned as shown in the Correct Mounting Position
(see page 93) figure. The figures below show the incorrect mounting positions.
Minimum Clearances
WARNING
ventilation.
The M221 Logic Controller has been designed as an IP20 product and must be installed in an
enclosure. Clearances must be respected when installing the product.
There are 3 types of clearances to consider:
 The M221 Logic Controller and all sides of the cabinet (including the panel door).
 The M221 Logic Controller terminal blocks and the wiring ducts to help reduce potential
electromagnetic interference between the controller and the duct wiring.
 The M221 Logic Controller and other heat generating devices installed in the same cabinet.
94 EIO0000003313 02/2020
M221 Installation
The following figure shows the minimum clearances that apply to all M221 Logic Controller
references:
EIO0000003313 02/2020 95
M221 Installation
Top Hat Section Rail (DIN rail)
Dimensions of Top Hat Section Rail DIN Rail

You can mount the controller or receiver and its expansions on a 35 mm (1.38 in.) top hat section
rail (DIN rail). It can be attached to a smooth mounting surface or suspended from a EIA rack or
mounted in a NEMA cabinet.
Symmetric Top Hat Section Rails (DIN Rail)

The following illustration and table show the references of the top hat section rails (DIN rail) for the
wall-mounting range:
Reference Type Rail Length (B)

NSYSDR50A A 450 mm (17.71 in.)
NSYSDR100A A 950 mm (37.40 in.)
96 EIO0000003313 02/2020
M221 Installation
The following illustration and table show the references of the symmetric top hat section rails (DIN
rail) for the metal enclosure range:
Reference Type Rail Length (B-12 mm)

NSYSDR60 A 588 mm (23.15 in.)
NSYSDR80 A 788 mm (31.02 in.)
NSYSDR100 A 988 mm (38.89 in.)
NSYSDR120 A 1188 mm (46.77 in.)
The following illustration and table shows the references of the symmetric top hat section rails (DIN
rail) of 2000 mm (78.74 in.):
Reference Type Rail Length

NSYSDR2001 A 2000 mm (78.74 in.)
NSYSDR200D2 A
1 Unperforated galvanized steel
2 Perforated galvanized steel
EIO0000003313 02/2020 97
M221 Installation
Double-Profile Top Hat Section Rails (DIN rail)

The following illustration and table show the references of the double-profile top hat section rails
(DIN rails) for the wall-mounting range:

NSYDPR25 W 250 mm (9.84 in.)
NSYDPR35 W 350 mm (13.77 in.)
NSYDPR45 W 450 mm (17.71 in.)
NSYDPR55 W 550 mm (21.65 in.)
NSYDPR65 W 650 mm (25.60 in.)
NSYDPR75 W 750 mm (29.52 in.)
98 EIO0000003313 02/2020
M221 Installation
The following illustration and table show the references of the double-profile top hat section rails
(DIN rail) for the floor-standing range:

NSYDPR60 F 588 mm (23.15 in.)
NSYDPR80 F 788 mm (31.02 in.)
NSYDPR100 F 988 mm (38.89 in.)
NSYDPR120 F 1188 mm (46.77 in.)
EIO0000003313 02/2020 99
M221 Installation
Installing and Removing the Controller with Expansions
Overview
This section describes how to install and remove the controller with its expansion modules from a
top hat section rail (DIN rail).
To assemble expansion modules to a controller or receiver module, or to other modules, refer to
the respective expansion modules hardware guide(s).
100 EIO0000003313 02/2020

M221 Installation
Installing a Controller with its Expansions on a DIN Rail

The following procedure describes how to install a controller with its expansion modules on a top
hat section rail (DIN rail):
Step Action
1 Fasten the top hat section rail (DIN rail) to a panel surface using screws.
2 Position the top groove of the controller and its expansion modules on the top
edge of the DIN rail and press the assembly against the top hat section rail
(DIN rail) until you hear the top hat section rail (DIN rail) clip snap into place.
On TM221C Logic Controller:
On TM221M Logic Controller:
EIO0000003313 02/2020 101

M221 Installation
Step Action
3 Place 2 terminal block end clamps on both sides of the controller and
expansion module assembly.
AB1AB8P35
NOTE: Type ABB8P35 or equivalent terminal block end clamps help

minimize sideways movement and improve the shock and vibration
characteristics of the controller and expansion module assembly.
102 EIO0000003313 02/2020

M221 Installation
Removing a Controller with its Expansions from a Top Hat Section Rail (DIN Rail)
The following procedure describes how to remove a controller with its expansion modules from a
top hat section rail (DIN rail):
Step Action
1 Remove all power from your controller and expansion modules.
2 Insert a flat screwdriver into the slot of the top hat section rail (DIN rail) clip.
On TM221C Logic Controller:
On TM221M Logic Controller:
3 Pull down the DIN rail clip.

4 Pull the controller and its expansion modules from the top hat section rail (DIN rail)
from the bottom.
EIO0000003313 02/2020 103

M221 Installation
Direct Mounting on a Panel Surface
Overview
This section shows how to install M221 Logic Controller using the Panel Mounting Kit. This section
also provides mounting hole layout for all modules.
Installing the Panel Mount Kit

The following procedure shows how to install a mounting strip:
Step Action
1 Insert the mounting strip TMAM2 into the slot at the top of the module.
Mounting Hole Layout

The following diagram shows the mounting hole layout for TM221C Logic Controller with 16 I/O
channels:
104 EIO0000003313 02/2020

M221 Installation
channels:
channels:
The following diagram shows the mounting hole layout for TM221M Logic Controller:
EIO0000003313 02/2020 105

M221 Installation
Section 3.3
M221 Electrical Requirements
M221 Electrical Requirements

Topic Page
Wiring Best Practices 107
DC Power Supply Characteristics and Wiring 114
AC Power Supply Characteristics and Wiring 119
Grounding the M221 System 122
106 EIO0000003313 02/2020

M221 Installation
Wiring Best Practices
Overview
This section describes the wiring guidelines and associated best practices to be respected when
using the M221 Logic Controller system.
DANGER
indicated.
WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
1
EIO0000003313 02/2020 107

M221 Installation
Wiring Guidelines
The following rules must be applied when wiring a M221 Logic Controller system:
 I/O and communication wiring must be kept separate from the power wiring. Route these 2 types
of wiring in separate cable ducting.
 Verify that the operating conditions and environment are within the specification values.
 Use proper wire sizes to meet voltage and current requirements.
 Use copper conductors (required).
 Use twisted pair, shielded cables for analog, and/or fast I/O.
 Use twisted pair, shielded cables for networks, and fieldbus.
Use shielded, properly grounded cables for all analog and high-speed inputs or outputs and
communication connections. If you do not use shielded cable for these connections,
electromagnetic interference can cause signal degradation. Degraded signals can cause the
controller or attached modules and equipment to perform in an unintended manner.
WARNING
 Use shielded cables for all fast I/O, analog I/O and communication signals.
 Ground cable shields for all analog I/O, fast I/O and communication signals at a single point1.
 Route communication and I/O cables separately from power cables.
1Multipoint
grounding is permissible if connections are made to an equipotential ground plane
dimensioned to help avoid cable shield damage in the event of power system short-circuit currents.
For more details, refer to Grounding Shielded Cables (see page 122).
NOTE: Surface temperatures may exceed 60 °C (140 °F).
To conform to IEC 61010 standards, route primary wiring (wires connected to power mains)
separately and apart from secondary wiring (extra low voltage wiring coming from intervening
power sources). If that is not possible, double insulation is required such as conduit or cable gains.
108 EIO0000003313 02/2020

M221 Installation
Rules for Removable Screw Terminal Block

The following tables show the cable types and wire sizes for a 3.81 pitch removable screw terminal
block (I/Os and power supply):
The following tables show the cable types and wire sizes for a 5.08 pitch removable screw terminal
The use of copper conductors is required.
DANGER
LOOSE WIRING CAUSES ELECTRIC SHOCK
Tighten connections in conformance with the torque specifications.
DANGER
FIRE HAZARD
 Use only the correct wire sizes for the maximum current capacity of the I/O channels and
power supplies.
 For relay output (2 A) wiring, use conductors of at least 0.5 mm2 (AWG 20) with a temperature
rating of at least 80 °C (176 °F).
 For common conductors of relay output wiring (7 A), or relay output wiring greater than 2 A,
use conductors of at least 1.0 mm2 (AWG 16) with a temperature rating of at least 80 °C
(176 °F).
EIO0000003313 02/2020 109

M221 Installation
Rules for Removable Spring Terminal Block

The following tables show the cable types and wire sizes for a 3.81 pitch removable spring terminal
The following tables show the cable types and wire sizes for a 5.08 pitch removable spring terminal
DANGER
FIRE HAZARD
power supplies.
(176 °F).
The spring clamp connectors of the terminal block are designed for only one wire or one cable end.
Two wires to the same connector must be installed with a double wire cable end to help prevent
loosening.
DANGER
Do not insert more than one wire per connector of the spring terminal blocks unless using a
double wire cable end (ferrule).
110 EIO0000003313 02/2020

M221 Installation
Removing the I/O Terminal Block

The following figure shows the removal of the I/O terminal block from the TM221C Logic Controller:
Protecting Outputs from Inductive Load Damage

Depending on the load, a protection circuit may be needed for the outputs on the controllers and
certain modules. Inductive loads using DC voltages may create voltage reflections resulting in
overshoot that will damage or shorten the life of output devices.
CAUTION
OUTPUT CIRCUIT DAMAGE DUE TO INDUCTIVE LOADS
Use an appropriate external protective circuit or device to reduce the risk of inductive direct
current load damage.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.
If your controller or module contains relay outputs, these types of outputs can support up to
240 Vac. Inductive damage to these types of outputs can result in welded contacts and loss of
control. Each inductive load must include a protection device such as a peak limiter, RC circuit or
flyback diode. Capacitive loads are not supported by these relays.
WARNING
RELAY OUTPUTS WELDED CLOSED
 Always protect relay outputs from inductive alternating current load damage using an
appropriate external protective circuit or device.
 Do not connect relay outputs to capacitive loads.
EIO0000003313 02/2020 111

M221 Installation
AC-driven contactor coils are, under certain circumstances, inductive loads that generate
pronounced high-frequency interference and electrical transients when the contactor coil is de-
energized. This interference may cause the logic controller to detect an I/O bus error.
WARNING
CONSEQUENTIAL LOSS OF CONTROL
Install an RC surge suppressor or similar means, such as an interposing relay, on each TM3
expansion module relay output when connecting to AC-driven contactors or other forms of
inductive loads.
Protective circuit A: this protection circuit can be used for both AC and DC load power circuits.
C Value from 0.1 to 1 μF

R Resistor of approximately the same resistance value as the load
Protective circuit B: this protection circuit can be used for DC load power circuits.
Use a diode with the following ratings:

 Reverse withstand voltage: power voltage of the load circuit x 10.
 Forward current: more than the load current.
112 EIO0000003313 02/2020

M221 Installation
Protective circuit C: this protection circuit can be used for both AC and DC load power circuits.
In applications where the inductive load is switched on and off frequently and/or rapidly, ensure
that the continuous energy rating (J) of the varistor exceeds the peak load energy by 20 % or more.
EIO0000003313 02/2020 113

M221 Installation
DC Power Supply Characteristics and Wiring
Overview
This section provides the characteristics and the wiring diagrams of the DC power supply.
DC Power Supply Voltage Range

If the specified voltage range is not maintained, outputs may not switch as expected. Use
appropriate safety interlocks and voltage monitoring circuits.
DANGER
FIRE HAZARD
power supplies.
(176 °F).
WARNING
tables.
114 EIO0000003313 02/2020

M221 Installation
DC Power Supply Requirements

The M221 Logic Controllerand associated I/O (TM2, TM3, and embedded I/O) require power
supplies with a nominal voltage of 24 Vdc. The 24 Vdc power supplies must be rated Safety Extra
Low Voltage (SELV) or Protective Extra Low Voltage (PELV) according to IEC 61140. These
power supplies are isolated between the electrical input and output circuits of the power supply.
WARNING
POTENTIAL OF OVERHEATING AND FIRE
 Do not connect the equipment directly to line voltage.
 Use only isolating PELV power supplies and circuits to supply power to the equipment1.
1 For compliance to UL (Underwriters Laboratories) requirements, the power supply must also
conform to the various criteria of NEC Class 2, and be inherently current limited to a maximum
power output availability of less than 100 VA (approximately 4 A at nominal voltage), or not
inherently limited but with an additional protection device such as a circuit breaker or fuse meeting
the requirements of clause 9.4 Limited-energy circuit of UL 61010-1. In all cases, the current limit
should never exceed that of the electric characteristics and wiring diagrams for the equipment
described in the present documentation. In all cases, the power supply must be grounded, and you
must separate Class 2 circuits from other circuits. If the indicated rating of the electrical character-
istics or wiring diagrams are greater than the specified current limit, multiple Class 2 power
supplies may be used.
EIO0000003313 02/2020 115

M221 Installation
Controller DC Characteristics
The following table shows the DC power supply characteristics:
Rated voltage 24 Vdc
Power supply voltage range 20.4...28.8 Vdc
Power interruption time 10 ms at 24 Vdc
Maximum inrush current 35 A
Maximum power consumption TM221C16T with 4 expansion modules 10 W
TM221CE16T 11 W
TM221C16U 10 W
TM221CE16U 11 W
TM221C24T with 7 expansion modules 13 W
TM221CE24T 14 W
TM221C24U 13 W
TM221CE24U 14 W
TM221C40T 16 W
TM221CE40T 17 W
TM221C40U 16 W
TM221CE40U 17 W
Maximum power consumption TM221M16R• with 7 expansion modules 22.5 W
TM221ME16R• 23.3 W
TM221M16T• 22 W
TM221ME16T• 22.9 W
TM221M32TK 22.3 W
TM221ME32TK 23.2 W
Isolation between DC power supply TM221C Logic Controller 500 Vac
and internal logic
TM221M Logic Controller Not isolated
between DC power supply and protective earth ground 500 Vac
(PE)
116 EIO0000003313 02/2020

M221 Installation
Power interruption
The TM221M Logic Controller must be supplied by an external 24 V power supply equipment.
During power interruptions, the TM221M Logic Controller, associated to the suitable power supply,
is able to continue normal operation for a minimum of 10 ms as specified by IEC standards.
When planning the management of the power supplied to the controller, you must consider the
power interruption duration due to the fast cycle time of the controller.
There could potentially be many scans of the logic and consequential updates to the I/O image
table during the power interruption, while there is no external power supplied to the inputs, the
outputs or both depending on the power system architecture and power interruption
circumstances.
WARNING
 Individually monitor each source of power used in the controller system including input power
supplies, output power supplies and the power supply to the controller to allow appropriate
system shutdown during power system interruptions.
 The inputs monitoring each of the power supply sources must be unfiltered inputs.
DC Power Supply Wiring Diagram

The following figure shows the power supply terminal block removal procedure:
EIO0000003313 02/2020 117

M221 Installation
The following figure shows the wiring of the DC power supply:
* Type T fuse
For more information, refer to the 5.08 pitch Rules for Removable Screw Terminal block
(see page 109).
118 EIO0000003313 02/2020

M221 Installation
AC Power Supply Characteristics and Wiring
Overview
This section provides the wiring diagrams and the characteristics of the AC power supply.
AC Power Supply Voltage Range

If the specified voltage range is not maintained, outputs may not switch as expected. Use
appropriate safety interlocks and voltage monitoring circuits.
DANGER
FIRE HAZARD
power supplies.
(176 °F).
WARNING
tables.
Controller AC Characteristics
The following table shows the AC power supply characteristics:
Voltage rated 100...240 Vac
limit (including ripple) 85...264 Vac
Frequency rated 50/60 Hz
limit 45/66 Hz
EIO0000003313 02/2020 119

M221 Installation
Power interruption time 10 ms at 100 Vac
Maximum inrush at 240 Vac 40 A
current
Maximum power TM221C16R with 4 expansion 46 VA
consumption at modules
TM221CE16R 49 VA
100...240 Vac
TM221C24R with 7 expansion 55 VA
modules
TM221CE24R 58 VA
TM221C40R 67 VA
TM221CE40R 70 VA
Isolation between AC power supply and internal logic 2300 Vac
between AC power supply and protective earth ground (PE) 1500 Vac
Power interruption
The duration of power interruptions where the M221 Logic Controller is able to continue normal
operation varies depending upon the load to the power supply of the controller, but generally a
minimum of 10 ms is maintained as specified by IEC standards.
If there is a minimum load on the controller power supply, the interruption can be as long as 400
ms.
When planning the management of the power supplied to the controller, you must consider the
duration due to the fast cycle time.
There could potentially be many scans of the logic and consequential updates to the I/O image
table during the power interruption, while there is no external power supplied to the inputs, the
outputs or both depending on the power system architecture and power interruption
circumstances.
WARNING
 Individually monitor each source of power used in the Modicon M221 Logic Controller system
including input power supplies, output power supplies and the power supply to the controller
to allow appropriate system shutdown during power system interruptions.
 The inputs monitoring each of the power supply sources must be unfiltered inputs.
120 EIO0000003313 02/2020

M221 Installation
AC Power Supply Wiring Diagram

The following figure shows the power supply terminal block removal procedure:
The following figure shows the wiring of the AC power supply:
* Use an external, slow-blow, type T fuse.
EIO0000003313 02/2020 121

M221 Installation
Grounding the M221 System
Overview
To help minimize the effects of electromagnetic interference, cables carrying the fast I/O, analog
I/O, and field bus communication signals must be shielded.
WARNING
 Use shielded cables for all fast I/O, analog I/O, and communication signals.
 Ground cable shields for all fast I/O, analog I/O, and communication signals at a single point1.
 Route communications and I/O cables separately from power cables.
1Multipoint
The use of shielded cables requires compliance with the following wiring rules:
 For protective ground connections (PE), metal conduit or ducting can be used for part of the
shielding length, provided there is no break in the continuity of the ground connections. For
functional ground (FE), the shielding is intended to attenuate electromagnetic interference and
the shielding must be continuous for the length of the cable. If the purpose is both functional and
protective, as is often the case for communication cables, the cable must have continuous
shielding.
 Wherever possible, keep cables carrying one type of signal separate from the cables carrying
other types of signals or power.
Protective Ground (PE) on the Backplane

The protective ground (PE) is connected to the conductive backplane by a heavy-duty wire, usually
a braided copper cable with the maximum allowable cable section.
122 EIO0000003313 02/2020

M221 Installation
Shielded Cables Connections

Cables carrying the fast I/O, analog I/O, and field bus communication signals must be shielded.
The shielding must be securely connected to ground. The fast I/O and analog I/O shields may be
connected either to the functional ground (FE) or to the protective ground (PE) of your M221 Logic
Controller. The field bus communication cable shields must be connected to the protective ground
(PE) with a connecting clamp secured to the conductive backplane of your installation.
The shielding of the Modbus cable must be connected to the protective ground (PE).
DANGER
ELECTRIC SHOCK
Make sure that Modbus cables are securely connected to the protective ground (PE).
Protective Ground (PE) Cable Shielding

To ground the shield of a cable through a grounding clamp:
Step Description
1 Strip the shielding for a length of 15 mm (0.59 in.)
2 Attach the cable to the conductive backplane plate by

attaching the grounding clamp to the stripped part of the
shielding as close as possible to the M221 Logic
Controller system base.
NOTE: The shielding must be clamped securely to the conductive backplane to ensure a good
contact.
EIO0000003313 02/2020 123

M221 Installation
Functional Ground (FE) Cable Shielding

To connect the shield of a cable through the Grounding Bar:
Step Description
1 Install the Grounding Bar directly on the
conductive backplane below the M221
Logic Controller system as illustrated.
2 Strip the shielding for a length of 15 mm

(0.59 in.
3 Tightly clamp on the blade connector (1)

using nylon fastener (2)(width
2.5...3 mm (0.1...0.12 in.)) and
appropriate tool.
124 EIO0000003313 02/2020

M221 Installation
NOTE: Use the TM2XMTGB Grounding Bar exclusively for Functional Ground (FE) connections.
WARNING
ACCIDENTAL DISCONNECTION FROM PROTECTIVE GROUND (PE)
 Do not use the TM2XMTGB Grounding Plate to provide a protective ground (PE).
 Use the TM2XMTGB Grounding Plate only to provide a functional ground (FE).
EIO0000003313 02/2020 125

M221 Installation
126 EIO0000003313 02/2020

Modicon TM221C Logic Controller
EIO0000003313 02/2020
Part II

4 TM221C16R 129
5 TM221CE16R 135
6 TM221C16T 139
7 TM221CE16T 143
8 TM221C16U 147
9 TM221CE16U 151
10 TM221C24R 157
11 TM221CE24R 161
12 TM221C24T 165
13 TM221CE24T 169
14 TM221C24U 173
15 TM221CE24U 179
16 TM221C40R 185
17 TM221CE40R 191
18 TM221C40T 197
19 TM221CE40T 203
20 TM221C40U 209
21 TM221CE40U 215
22 Embedded I/O Channels 221
EIO0000003313 02/2020 127

128 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221C16R
EIO0000003313 02/2020
Chapter 4
TM221C16R
TM221C16R
TM221C16R Presentation
Overview
The following features are integrated into the TM221C16R logic controller:
 9 digital inputs
 4 fast inputs (HSC)
 5 regular inputs
 7 digital outputs
 7 relay outputs
 2 analog inputs
 Communication ports
 1 serial line port
 1 USB mini-B programming port
The following figure shows the different components of the logic controllers:
EIO0000003313 02/2020 129

TM221C16R
N° Description Refer to
1 Status LEDs –
2 Output removable terminal block Rules for Removable Screw Terminal
Block (see page 109)
3 Clip-on lock for 35 mm (1.38 in.) top hat section rail (DIN-rail) DIN Rail (see page 96)
4 100...240 Vac power supply Power supply (see page 121)
5 USB mini-B programming port / For terminal connection to a USB mini-B programming port
programming PC (EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic) (see page 384)
6 Serial line port 1 / RJ45 connector (RS-232 or RS-485) Serial line 1 (see page 389)
7 SD Card slot SD Card Slot (see page 72)
8 2 analog inputs Analog Inputs (see page 256)
9 Run/Stop switch Run/Stop switch (see page 69)
10 Input removable terminal block and embedded power supply Rules for Removable Screw Terminal
used for connecting sensors to the inputs. (1) Block (see page 109)
11 I/O expansion connector –

12 Cartridge slot –
13 Protective cover (SD Card slot, Run/Stop switch and USB mini- –
B programming port)
14 Locking hook –
15 Removable analog inputs cover –
16 Battery holder Installing and Replacing the Battery
(see page 55)
(1)
Embedded power supply characteristics:
 Voltage: 24 V -15%...+10% isolated
 Imax: 250 mA
 No protection and no overload detection
Refer to Embedded I/O Channels (see page 221).
130 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221C16R
Status LEDs
The following figure shows the status LEDs:
The following table describes the status LEDs:
Label Function Type Color Status Description

Controller States(1) Prg Port Application
Communication Execution
PWR Power Green On Indicates that power is applied.
Off Indicates that power is removed.
RUN Machine Status Green On Indicates that the controller is running a valid
application.
Flashing Indicates that the controller has a valid application that
is stopped.
Off Indicates that the controller is not programmed.
ERR Error Red On* EXCEPTION Restricted NO
Flashing (with RUN INTERNAL Restricted NO
status LED Off) ERROR
Slow flash Minor error Yes Depends on
detected(2) the RUN
status LED
1 single flash No application Yes Yes
* ERR LED is also On during booting process.
NOTE: For information about the LEDs integrated into the Ethernet connector, refer to Ethernet Status LEDs
(see page 388)
(1) For more information about the controller state description, refer to the M221 Logic Controller - Programming
Guide (see Modicon M221, Logic Controller, Programming Guide).
(2) The controller detected an error but remains in RUNNING state. The ERR LED on the controller flashes. For more
information, refer to M221 Logic Controller - Programming Guide.
EIO0000003313 02/2020 131

TM221C16R

SD SD Card Green On Indicates that the SD card is being accessed.
Access
Flashing Indicates that an error was detected during the SD card
(see page 72) operation.
Off Indicates no access (idle) or no card is present.
BAT Battery Red On Indicates that the battery needs to be replaced.
(see page 54) Flashing Indicates that the battery charge is low.
Off Indicates that the battery is OK.
SL Serial line 1 Green On Indicates the status of Serial line 1.
(see page 389) Flashing Indicates activity on Serial line 1.
Off Indicates no serial communication.
(see page 388)
132 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221C16R
Dimensions
The following figure show the external dimensions of the logic controller:
EIO0000003313 02/2020 133

TM221C16R
134 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221CE16R
EIO0000003313 02/2020
Chapter 5
TM221CE16R
TM221CE16R
TM221CE16R Presentation
Overview
The following features are integrated into the TM221CE16R logic controller:
 7 relay outputs
 2 analog inputs
 1 Ethernet port
Description
The following figure shows the different components of the logic controller:
EIO0000003313 02/2020 135

TM221CE16R
1 Status LEDs –
4 Ethernet port / RJ45 connector Ethernet port (see page 386)
used for connecting sensors to the inputs.(1) Block (see page 109)
B programming port)
15 Locking hook –
(see page 55)
(1)
 Imax: 250 mA
136 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221CE16R
Status LEDs

application.
is stopped.
detected(2) the RUN
status LED
(see page 388)
EIO0000003313 02/2020 137

TM221CE16R

Access
(see page 388)
Dimensions
The following figure shows the external dimensions of the logic controllers:
138 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221C16T
EIO0000003313 02/2020
Chapter 6
TM221C16T
TM221C16T
TM221C16T Presentation
Overview
The following features are integrated into the TM221C16T logic controller:
 2 fast source transistor outputs
 5 regular source transistor outputs
 2 analog inputs
Description
EIO0000003313 02/2020 139

TM221C16T
1 Status LEDs –
3 Clip-on lock for 35 mm (1.38 in.) top hat section rail (DIN- DIN Rail (see page 96)
rail)
4 24 Vdc power supply Power supply (see page 114)
5 USB mini-B programming port / For terminal connection to USB mini-B programming port
a programming PC (EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic) (see page 384)
10 Input removable terminal block Rules for Removable Screw Terminal
13 Protective cover (SD Card slot, Run/Stop switch and USB –
mini-B programming port)
14 Locking hook –
(see page 55)
140 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221C16T
Status LEDs

application.
is stopped.
Flashing (with INTERNAL Restricted NO
RUN status ERROR
LED Off)
detected(2) the RUN
status LED
(see page 388)
(1) For more information about the controller state description, refer to the M221 Logic Controller -
Programming Guide (see Modicon M221, Logic Controller, Programming Guide).
(2) The controller detected an error but remains in RUNNING state. The ERR LED on the controller flashes.
For more information, refer to M221 Logic Controller - Programming Guide.
EIO0000003313 02/2020 141

TM221C16T

Access
(see page 388)
Dimensions
142 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221CE16T
EIO0000003313 02/2020
Chapter 7
TM221CE16T
TM221CE16T
TM221CE16T Presentation
Overview
The following features are integrated into the TM221CE16T logic controller:
 2 analog inputs
 1 Ethernet port
Description
EIO0000003313 02/2020 143

TM221CE16T
1 Status LEDs –
B programming port)
15 Locking hook –
(see page 55)
144 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221CE16T
Status LEDs

application.
is stopped.
detected(2) the RUN
status LED
(see page 388)
EIO0000003313 02/2020 145

TM221CE16T

Access
(see page 388)
Dimensions
146 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221C16U
EIO0000003313 02/2020
Chapter 8
TM221C16U
TM221C16U
TM221C16U Presentation
Overview
The following features are integrated into the TM221C16U logic controller:
 2 fast sink transistor outputs
 5 regular sink transistor outputs
 2 analog inputs
Description
EIO0000003313 02/2020 147

TM221C16U
1 Status LEDs –
B programming port)
14 Locking hook –
(see page 55)
148 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221C16U
Status LEDs

RUN Machine Green On Indicates that the controller is running a valid
Status application.
is stopped.
detected(2) the RUN
status LED
(see page 388)
EIO0000003313 02/2020 149

TM221C16U

Access
(see page 388)
Dimensions
150 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221CE16U
EIO0000003313 02/2020
Chapter 9
TM221CE16U
TM221CE16U
TM221CE16U Presentation
Overview
The following features are integrated into the TM221CE16U logic controller:
 2 analog inputs
 1 Ethernet port
EIO0000003313 02/2020 151

TM221CE16U
Description
152 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221CE16U
1 Status LEDs –
2 Output removable terminal block Rules for Removable Screw
Terminal Block (see page 109)
11 Input removable terminal block Rules for Removable Screw
B programming port)
15 Locking hook –
(see page 55)
EIO0000003313 02/2020 153

TM221CE16U
Status LEDs

application.
is stopped.
detected(2) the RUN
status LED
(see page 388)
154 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221CE16U

Access
(see page 388)
Dimensions
EIO0000003313 02/2020 155

TM221CE16U
156 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221C24R
EIO0000003313 02/2020
Chapter 10
TM221C24R
TM221C24R
Overview
The following features are integrated into the TM221C24R logic controller:
 10 relay outputs
 2 analog inputs
Description
The following figure shows the different components of the logic controller:
EIO0000003313 02/2020 157

TM221C24R
1 Status LEDs –
used for connecting sensors to the inputs. (1) Block (see page 109)

B programming port)
14 Locking hook –
(see page 55)
(1)
 Imax: 250 mA
158 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221C24R
Status LEDs

application.
is stopped.
RUN status ERROR
LED Off)
detected(2) the RUN
status LED
(see page 388)
EIO0000003313 02/2020 159

TM221C24R

SD SD Card Access Green On Indicates that the SD card is being accessed.
(see page 72) Flashing Indicates that an error was detected during the SD card
operation.
(see page 388)
Dimensions
160 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221CE24RTM221CE24R
EIO0000003313 02/2020
Chapter 11
TM221CE24R
TM221CE24R
Overview
The following features are integrated into the TM221CE24R logic controller:
 2 analog inputs
 1 Ethernet port
Description
EIO0000003313 02/2020 161

1 Status LEDs –
B programming port)
15 Locking hook –
(see page 55)
(1)
 Imax: 250 mA
162 EIO0000003313 02/2020

Status LEDs

application.
is stopped.
RUN status ERROR
LED Off)
detected(2) the RUN
status LED
(see page 388)
EIO0000003313 02/2020 163


Access
(see page 388)
Dimensions
164 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221C24T
EIO0000003313 02/2020
Chapter 12
TM221C24T
TM221C24T
Overview
 2 analog inputs
Description
EIO0000003313 02/2020 165

TM221C24T
1 Status LEDs –
B programming port)
14 Locking hook –
(see page 55)
166 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221C24T
Status LEDs

application.
is stopped.
detected(2) the RUN
status LED
(see page 388)
EIO0000003313 02/2020 167

TM221C24T

operation.
(see page 388)
Dimensions
168 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221CE24T
EIO0000003313 02/2020
Chapter 13
TM221CE24T
TM221CE24T
Overview
The following features are integrated into the TM221CE24T logic controller:
 2 analog inputs
 1 Ethernet port
Description
EIO0000003313 02/2020 169

TM221CE24T
1 Status LEDs –
14 Protective cover (SD Card slot, Run/Stop switch and USB mini-B –
programming port)
15 Locking hook –
(see page 55)
170 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221CE24T
Status LEDs

application.
is stopped.
detected(2) the RUN
status LED
(see page 388)
EIO0000003313 02/2020 171

TM221CE24T

operation.
(see page 388)
Dimensions
172 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221C24U
EIO0000003313 02/2020
Chapter 14
TM221C24U
TM221C24U
Overview
 2 analog inputs
EIO0000003313 02/2020 173

TM221C24U
Description
174 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221C24U
1 Status LEDs –
B programming port)
14 Locking hook –
(see page 55)
EIO0000003313 02/2020 175

TM221C24U
Status LEDs

application.
is stopped.
detected(2) the RUN
status LED
(see page 388)
176 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221C24U

Access
(see page 388)
Dimensions
EIO0000003313 02/2020 177

TM221C24U
178 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221CE24U
EIO0000003313 02/2020
Chapter 15
TM221CE24U
TM221CE24U
Overview
 2 analog inputs
 1 Ethernet port
EIO0000003313 02/2020 179

TM221CE24U
Description
180 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221CE24U
1 Status LEDs –
B programming port)
15 Locking hook –
(see page 55)
EIO0000003313 02/2020 181

TM221CE24U
Status LEDs

application.
is stopped.
detected(2) the RUN
status LED
(see page 388)
182 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221CE24U

Access
(see page 388)
Dimensions
EIO0000003313 02/2020 183

TM221CE24U
184 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221C40R
EIO0000003313 02/2020
Chapter 16
TM221C40R
TM221C40R
Overview
The following features are integrated into theTM221C40R logic controllers:
 2 analog inputs
EIO0000003313 02/2020 185

TM221C40R
Description
186 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221C40R
1 Status LEDs –

12 Cartridge slot 1 –
B programming port)
15 Locking hook –
(see page 55)
(1)
 Imax: 250 mA
EIO0000003313 02/2020 187

TM221C40R
Status LEDs

application.
is stopped.
detected(2) the RUN
status LED
(see page 388)
188 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221C40R

Access
(see page 388)
Dimensions
EIO0000003313 02/2020 189

TM221C40R
190 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221CE40R
EIO0000003313 02/2020
Chapter 17
TM221CE40R
TM221CE40R
Overview
The following features are integrated into the TM221CE40R logic controllers:
 2 analog inputs
 1 Ethernet port
EIO0000003313 02/2020 191

TM221CE40R
Description
192 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221CE40R
1 Status LEDs –
B programming port)
16 Locking hook –
(see page 55)
(1)
 Imax: 250 mA
EIO0000003313 02/2020 193

TM221CE40R
Status LEDs

application.
is stopped.
detected(2) the RUN
status LED
(see page 388)
194 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221CE40R

Access
(see page 388)
Dimensions
EIO0000003313 02/2020 195

TM221CE40R
196 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221C40T
EIO0000003313 02/2020
Chapter 18
TM221C40T
TM221C40T
Overview
 2 analog inputs
EIO0000003313 02/2020 197

TM221C40T
Description
198 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221C40T
1 Status LEDs –
B programming port)
15 Locking hook –
(see page 55)
EIO0000003313 02/2020 199

TM221C40T
Status LEDs

application.
is stopped.
detected(2) the RUN
status LED
(see page 388)
200 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221C40T

Access
(see page 388)
Dimensions
EIO0000003313 02/2020 201

TM221C40T
202 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221CE40T
EIO0000003313 02/2020
Chapter 19
TM221CE40T
TM221CE40T
Overview
The following features are integrated into the TM221CE40T logic controllers:
 2 analog inputs
 1 Ethernet port
EIO0000003313 02/2020 203

TM221CE40T
Description
204 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221CE40T
1 Status LEDs –
B programming port)
16 Locking hook –
(see page 55)
EIO0000003313 02/2020 205

TM221CE40T
Status LEDs

application.
is stopped.
detected(2) the RUN
status LED
(see page 388)
206 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221CE40T

Access
(see page 388)
Dimensions
EIO0000003313 02/2020 207

TM221CE40T
208 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221C40U
EIO0000003313 02/2020
Chapter 20
TM221C40U
TM221C40U
Overview
 2 analog inputs
EIO0000003313 02/2020 209

TM221C40U
Description
210 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221C40U
1 Status LEDs –
B programming port)
15 Locking hook –
(see page 55)
EIO0000003313 02/2020 211

TM221C40U
Status LEDs

application.
is stopped.
detected(2) the RUN
status LED
(see page 388)
212 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221C40U

Access
(see page 388)
Dimensions
EIO0000003313 02/2020 213

TM221C40U
214 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221CE40U
EIO0000003313 02/2020
Chapter 21
TM221CE40U
TM221CE40U
Overview
 2 analog inputs
 1 Ethernet port
EIO0000003313 02/2020 215

TM221CE40U
Description
216 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221CE40U
1 Status LEDs –
B programming port)
16 Locking hook –
(see page 55)
EIO0000003313 02/2020 217

TM221CE40U
Status LEDs

application.
is stopped.
detected(2) the RUN
status LED
(see page 388)
218 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221CE40U

Access
(see page 388)
Dimensions
EIO0000003313 02/2020 219

TM221CE40U
220 EIO0000003313 02/2020

Embedded I/O channels
EIO0000003313 02/2020
Chapter 22
Embedded I/O Channels
Embedded I/O Channels
Overview
This chapter describes the embedded I/O channels.

Topic Page
Digital Inputs 222
Relay Outputs 239
Regular and Fast Transistor Outputs 247
Analog Inputs 256
EIO0000003313 02/2020 221

Digital Inputs
Overview
The Modicon TM221C Logic Controller has digital inputs embedded:
Reference Total number of digital inputs Fast inputs which can be used as Regular inputs
100 kHz HSC inputs
TM221C16• 9 4 5
TM221CE16•
TM221C24• 14 4 10
TM221CE24•
TM221C40• 24 4 20
TM221CE40•
For more information, refer to Input Management (see page 61).
DANGER
FIRE HAZARD
power supplies.
(176 °F).
WARNING
tables.
222 EIO0000003313 02/2020

Regular Input Characteristics

The following table describes the characteristics of the TM221C Logic Controller regular inputs:
TM221C16• TM221C24• TM221C40•
TM221CE16• TM221CE24• TM221CE40•
Number of regular inputs 5 inputs (I2, I3, I4, I5, 10 inputs (I2...I5, 20 inputs (I2...I5,
I8) I8...I13) I8...I23)
Number of channel groups 1 common line for 1 common line for 1 common line for
I0...I8 I0...I13 I0....I23
Input type Type 1 (IEC/EN 61131-2)
Logic type Sink/Source
Input voltage range 24 Vdc
Rated input voltage 19.2...28.8 Vdc
Rated input current 7 mA
Input impedance 3.4 kΩ
Input limit values Voltage at state 1 > 15 Vdc (15...28.8 Vdc)
Voltage at state 0 < 5 Vdc (0...5 Vdc)
Current at state 1 > 2.5 mA
Current at state 0 < 1.0 mA
Derating See derating curves (see page 225)
Turn on time I2, I3, I4, I5 35 µs + filter value1
I8...I23 100 µs + filter value1
Turn off time I2, I3, I4, I5 35 µs + filter value1
I8...I23 100 µs + filter value1
Isolation Between input and 500 Vac
internal logic
Connection type Removable screw terminal blocks
Connector insertion/removal durability Over 100 times
Cable Type Unshielded
Length Maximum 30 m (98 ft)
1 For more information, refer to Integrator Filter Principle (see page 61)
EIO0000003313 02/2020 223

Fast Input Characteristics

The following table describes the characteristics of the TM221C Logic Controller fast inputs:
Number of fast inputs 4 inputs (I0, I1, I6, I7)
Number of channel groups 1 common line
Rated input voltage 24 Vdc
Input voltage range 19.2...28.8 Vdc
Turn on time 5 µs + filter value1
Turn off time 5 µs + filter value1
HSC maximum frequency Dual Phase 100 kHz
Single phase 100 kHz
Frequency Meter 100 kHz
Supported HSC operation mode  Dual Phase [Pulse / Direction]
 Single Phase
 Frequency Meter
internal logic
Between channel 500 Vac
groups
Connection type Removable screw terminal block
Cable Type Shielded, including the 24 Vdc power supply
Length Maximum 10 m (32.8 ft)
1
For more information, refer to Integrator Filter Principle (see page 61)
224 EIO0000003313 02/2020

Derating Curves (No Cartridge)

The following figures show the derating curves of the embedded digital inputs for a configuration
without cartridge:
X Input simultaneous ON ratio

Y Input voltage
X Ambient temperature
Y Input simultaneous ON ratio
EIO0000003313 02/2020 225

Derating Curves (with Cartridge)

The following figures show the derating curves of the embedded digital inputs for a configuration
with cartridge:

Y Input voltage
226 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221C16R / TM221CE16R Wiring Diagrams

The following figure presents the sink wiring diagram (positive logic) of the inputs to the sensors
for TM221C16R and TM221CE16R:
* Type T fuse
The following figure presents the source wiring diagram (negative logic) of the inputs to the sensors
* Type T fuse
NOTE: The TM221C Logic Controller provides a 24 Vdc supply to the inputs.
The following figure presents the connection of the fast inputs:
Ix I0, I1, I6, I7
EIO0000003313 02/2020 227


* Type T fuse
* Type T fuse
Ix I0, I1, I6, I7
228 EIO0000003313 02/2020


* Type T fuse
* Type T fuse
Ix I0, I1, I6, I7
EIO0000003313 02/2020 229

TM221C••R / TM221CE••R Encoder Examples Wiring Diagrams

The following figures show four wiring examples for TM221C••R and TM221CE••R:
 dual-phase encoder without index
 dual-phase encoder with a limit switch and no index
 dual-phase encoder with index
 dual-phase encoder with index and PNP sensor
TM221C••R / TM221CE••R with a dual-phase encoder without index:
(1) Dual phase encoder without index
TM221C••R / TM221CE••R with a dual-phase encoder with a limit switch and no index:

(2) Limit switch
TM221C••R / TM221CE••R with a dual-phase encoder with index:
(1) Dual phase encoder with index
230 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221C••R / TM221CE••R with a dual-phase encoder with index and PNP sensor:

(2) PNP sensor
TM221C16T / TM221CE16T Wiring Diagrams

The following figure presents the connection of the inputs to the sensors for TM221C16T and
TM221CE16T:
* Type T fuse
A Sink wiring (positive logic).
B Source wiring (negative logic).
Ix I0, I1, I6, I7
WARNING
Do not connect wires to unused terminals and/or terminals indicated as “No Connection (N.C.)”.
EIO0000003313 02/2020 231


TM221CE24T:
* Type T fuse
Ix I0, I1, I6, I7
WARNING
232 EIO0000003313 02/2020


TM221CE40T:
* Type T fuse
Ix I0, I1, I6, I7
WARNING
EIO0000003313 02/2020 233

TM221C••T / TM221CE••T Encoder Examples Wiring Diagrams

The following figures show four wiring examples for TM221C••T and TM221CE••T:
 dual-phase encoder without index
 dual-phase encoder with a limit switch and no index
 dual-phase encoder with index
 dual-phase encoder with index and PNP sensor
TM221C••T / TM221CE••T with a dual-phase encoder without index:
TM221C••T / TM221CE••T with a dual-phase encoder with a limit switch and no index:

(2) Limit switch
234 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221C••T / TM221CE••T with a dual-phase encoder with index:
TM221C••T / TM221CE••T with a dual-phase encoder with index and PNP sensor:

(2) PNP sensor
WARNING
EIO0000003313 02/2020 235

TM221C16U / TM221CE16U Wiring Diagrams

The following figure presents the connection of the inputs to the sensors for TM221C16U and
TM221CE16U:
* Type T fuse
Ix I0, I1, I6, I7
WARNING
236 EIO0000003313 02/2020


TM221CE24U:
* Type T fuse
Ix I0, I1, I6, I7
WARNING
EIO0000003313 02/2020 237


TM221CE40U:
* Type T fuse
Ix I0, I1, I6, I7
WARNING
238 EIO0000003313 02/2020

Relay Outputs
Overview
The Modicon TM221C Logic Controller has 7, 10 or 16 relay outputs embedded:
Reference Number of relay outputs

TM221C16R / TM221CE16R 7
TM221C24R / TM221CE24R 10
TM221C40R / TM221CE40R 16
For more information, refer to Output Management (see page 65).
DANGER
FIRE HAZARD
power supplies.
(176 °F).
WARNING
tables.
EIO0000003313 02/2020 239

Relay Output Characteristics

The following table describes the characteristics of the TM221C Logic Controller with relay outputs:
TM221C16R / TM221C24R / TM221C40R /
TM221CE16R TM221CE24R TM221CE40R
Number of relay outputs 7 outputs 10 outputs 16 outputs
Number of channel groups 1 common line for 1 common line for 1 common line for
Q0...Q3 Q0...Q3 Q0...Q3
1 common line for 1 common line for 1 common line for
Q4...Q6 Q4...Q7 Q4...Q7
1 common line for Q8, Q9 1 common line for
Q8...Q11
1 common line for
Q12...Q15
Output type Relay
Contact type NO (Normally Open)
Rated output voltage 24 Vdc, 240 Vac
Maximum voltage at 2 A 30 Vdc, 264 Vac
Minimum switching load 5 Vdc at 10 mA
Rated output current 2A
Maximum output current 2 A per output
7 A for common 0 7 A for common 0 7 A per common
(Q0...Q3) (Q0...Q3)
6 A for common 1 7 A for common 1
(Q4...Q6) (Q4...Q7)
4 A for common 2 (Q8,
Q9)
Maximum output frequency with 20 operations per minute
maximum load
Derating No derating
Turn on time Max. 10 ms
Turn off time Max. 10 ms
Contact resistance 30 mΩ max
Mechanical life 20 million operations
Electrical Under resistive load See power limitation (see page 242)
life Under inductive load
Protection against short circuit No
240 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221C16R / TM221C24R / TM221C40R /
TM221CE16R TM221CE24R TM221CE40R
Isolation Between output and 500 Vac
internal logic
groups
Connector insertion/removal Over 100 times
durability
Length Max. 30 m (98 ft)
NOTE: Refer to Protecting Outputs from Inductive Load Damage (see page 111) for additional information
concerning output protection.
EIO0000003313 02/2020 241

Power Limitation
The following table describes the power limitation of the relay outputs depending on the voltage,
the type of load, and the number of operations required.
These controllers do not support capacitive loads.
WARNING
Power Limitations
Voltage 24 Vdc 120 Vac 240 Vac Number of
operations
Power of resistive loads – 240 VA 480 VA 100,000
AC-12 80 VA 160 VA 300,000
Power of inductive loads – 60 VA 120 VA 100,000
AC-15 (cos ϕ = 0.35) 18 VA 36 VA 300,000
AC-14 (cos ϕ = 0.7) 36 VA 72 VA 300,000
Power of resistive loads 48 W – – 100,000
DC-12 16 W 300,000
Power of inductive loads 24 W – – 100,000
DC-13 L/R = 7 ms 7.2 W 300,000
242 EIO0000003313 02/2020

Relay Outputs Wiring Diagrams - Negative Logic (Sink)

The following figure presents the sink wiring diagram (negative logic) of the outputs to the load for
the TM221C16R / TM221CE16R:
* Type T fuse
(1) The COM1 and COM2 terminals are not connected internally.
(2) To improve the life time of the contacts, and to protect from potential inductive load damage, you must
connect a free wheeling diode in parallel to each inductive DC load or an RC snubber in parallel of each
inductive AC load
B Sink wiring (negative logic)
* Type T fuse
(1) The COM0, COM1 and COM2 terminals are not connected internally.
inductive AC load
EIO0000003313 02/2020 243

* Type T fuse
(1) The COM0, COM1, COM2 and COM3 terminals are not connected internally.
inductive AC load
NOTE: The assigned fuse values have been specified for the maximum current characteristics of
the controller I/O and associated commons. You may have other considerations that are applicable
based on the unique types of input and output devices you connect, and you should size your fuses
accordingly.
244 EIO0000003313 02/2020

Relay Outputs Wiring Diagrams - Positive Logic (Source)

The following figure presents the source wiring diagram (positive logic) of the outputs to the load
for the TM221C16R / TM221CE16R:
* Type T fuse
inductive AC load
A Source wiring (positive logic)
* Type T fuse
(1) The COM0, COM1 and COM2 terminals are not connected internally.
inductive AC load
EIO0000003313 02/2020 245

* Type T fuse
(1) The COM0, COM1, COM2 and COM3 terminals are not connected internally.
inductive AC load
based on the unique types of input and output devices you connect, and you should size your fuses
accordingly.
246 EIO0000003313 02/2020

Regular and Fast Transistor Outputs
Overview
The Modicon TM221C Logic Controller has regular and fast transistor outputs embedded:
Reference Total number of Transistor outputs Fast outputs

digital outputs
TM221C16T / TM221CE16T 7 5 2
TM221C16U / TM221CE16U 7 5 2
TM221C24T / TM221CE24T 10 8 2
TM221C24U / TM221CE24U 10 8 2
TM221C40T / TM221CE40T 16 14 2
TM221C40U / TM221CE40U 16 12 4
DANGER
FIRE HAZARD
power supplies.
(176 °F).
WARNING
tables.
EIO0000003313 02/2020 247

Regular Transistor Output Characteristics

The following table describes the characteristics of the TM221C Logic Controller regular transistor
outputs:
TM221C16T / TM221C24T / TM221C40T /
TM221CE16T / TM221CE24T / TM221CE40T /
TM221C16U / TM221C24U / TM221C40U /
TM221CE16U TM221CE24U TM221CE40U
Number of regular transistor 5 outputs (Q2...Q6) 8 outputs (Q2...Q9) 14 outputs (Q2...Q15)
outputs (TM221C40T /
TM221CE40T)
12 outputs (Q4...Q15)
(TM221C40U /
TM221CE40U)
Number of channel groups 1 common line for Q0...Q6 1 common line for Q0...Q9 1 common line for
Q0...Q7
1 common line for
Q8...Q15
Output type Transistor
Logic type Source for TM221•••T
Sink for TM221•••U
Rated output voltage 24 Vdc
Output voltage range 19.2...28.8 Vdc
Rated output current 0.5 A
Total output current 3.5 A for channel group 5 A for channel group 4 A for channel group
Q0...Q6 Q0...Q9 Q0...Q7
4 A for channel group
Q8...Q15
Voltage drop 1 Vdc max
Leakage current when switched off 0.1 mA
Maximum power of filament lamp 12 W max
Turn on Q2, Q3 Max. 50 µs
time
Other regular outputs Max. 300 µs
Turn off Q2, Q3 Max. 50 µs
time Other regular outputs Max. 300 µs
Protection against short circuit Yes (TM221C•••T only)
Short circuit output peak current 1.3 A
Automatic rearming after short Yes, every 1 s
circuit or overload
248 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221C16T / TM221C24T / TM221C40T /
TM221CE16T / TM221CE24T / TM221CE40T /
TM221C16U / TM221C24U / TM221C40U /
TM221CE16U TM221CE24U TM221CE40U
Clamping voltage Max. 39 Vdc ± 1 Vdc
Switching Under resistive load 100 Hz max.
frequency
internal logic
Connector insertion/removal Over 100 times
durability
Length Max 30 m (98 ft)
Fast Transistor Output Characteristics

The following table describes the characteristics of the TM221C Logic Controller fast transistor
outputs:
Number of fast transistor outputs 2 fast outputs (Q0, Q1)
4 fast outputs (Q0, Q1, Q2 and Q3) for
TM221•••40U
Number of channel groups 1 common line
Logic type Source for TM221•••T
Sink for TM221•••U
Total output current TM221C16T / TM221CE16T 3.5 A for channel group Q0...Q6
TM221C16U / TM221CE16U
TM221C24T / TM221CE24T 5 A for channel group Q0...Q9
TM221C24U / TM221CE24U
TM221C40T / TM221CE40T 4 A for channel group Q0...Q7
TM221C40U / TM221CE40U 4 A for channel group Q8...Q15
EIO0000003313 02/2020 249

Turn on time (10 mA < output current < 100 mA) Max. 5 µs
Turn off time (10 mA < output current < 100 mA) Max. 5 µs
Protection against short circuit Yes (TM221C•••T only)
Short circuit output peak current 1.3 A max.
Automatic rearming after short circuit or overload Yes, every 1 s
Protection against reverse polarity Yes
Clamping voltage Typ. 39 Vdc +/- 1 Vdc
Maximum output PLS/PWM/PTO/FREQGEN 100 kHz
frequency
Isolation Between output and internal logic 500 Vac
Cable Type Shielded, including 24 Vdc power
supply
250 EIO0000003313 02/2020

Derating Curves (No Cartridge)

The following figures show the derating curves of the embedded digital outputs for a configuration
without cartridge:
X Output simultaneous ON ratio

Y Output voltage
Y Output simultaneous ON ratio
EIO0000003313 02/2020 251

Derating Curves (with Cartridge)

The following figures show the derating curves of the embedded digital outputs for a configuration
with cartridge:

Y Output voltage
252 EIO0000003313 02/2020

Transistor Outputs Wiring Diagrams

The following figure presents the connection of the outputs to the load for the TM221C16T /
TM221CE16T:
* Type T fuse
The following figure presents the connection of the fast outputs:
Qx Q0, Q1
TM221CE24T:
* Type T fuse
(1) The V+ terminals are connected internally.
Qx Q0, Q1
EIO0000003313 02/2020 253

TM221CE40T:
* Type T fuse
(1) The V0+ and V1+ terminals are not connected internally.
(2) The V0- and V1- terminals are not connected internally.
Qx Q0, Q1
Sink Transistor Outputs Wiring Diagrams

The following figure presents the connection of the outputs to the load for the TM221C16U /
TM221CE16U:
* Type T fuse
Qx Q0, Q1
254 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221CE24U:
* Type T fuse
(1) The V- terminals are connected internally.
Qx Q0, Q1
TM221CE40U:
* Type T fuse
(1) The V0- and V1- terminals are not connected internally.
(2) The V0+ and V1+ terminals are not connected internally.
Qx Q0, Q1, Q2, Q3
EIO0000003313 02/2020 255

Analog Inputs
Overview
The Modicon M221 Logic Controller has 2 analog inputs embedded.
DANGER
FIRE HAZARD
power supplies.
(176 °F).
WARNING
tables.
256 EIO0000003313 02/2020

Mounting the Analog Cables

The following procedure describes how to mount the analog cables:
Step Action
1 Use a screw-driver to remove the protective cover.
2 Push until you hear it “click”.
3 Replace the protective cover.
EIO0000003313 02/2020 257

Analog Input Characteristics

The following table describes the characteristics of the M221 Logic Controller with analog inputs:
Characteristic Voltage Input

Number of maximum inputs 2 inputs
Input type Single-ended
Rated input range 0...+10 Vdc
Digital resolution 10 bits
Input value of LSB 10 mV
Input impedance 100 kΩ
Input delay time 12 ms
Sample duration time 1 ms per channel + 1 scan time
Accuracy ± 1 % of the full scale
Noise resistance - maximum temporary ± 5 % maximum of the full scale when EMC perturbation is
deviation during perturbations applied to the power and I/O wiring
Isolation Between input and Not isolated
internal logic
Connection type Specific connector and cable (supplied)
Cable Type Proprietary (supplied)
Length 1 m (3.3 ft)
258 EIO0000003313 02/2020

Analog Inputs Wiring Diagram

The following figure shows the wiring diagram of the M221 Logic Controller analog inputs:
The (-) poles are connected internally.
Pin Wire Color

0V Black
AN1 Red
0V Black
AN0 Red
For more information, refer to the Wiring Best Practices (see page 107).
EIO0000003313 02/2020 259

260 EIO0000003313 02/2020

Modicon TM221M Logic Controller
EIO0000003313 02/2020
Part III

23 TM221M16R / TM221M16RG 263
24 TM221ME16R / TM221ME16RG 281
25 TM221M16T / TM221M16TG 299
26 TM221ME16T / TM221ME16TG 319
27 TM221M32TK 341
28 TM221ME32TK 361
EIO0000003313 02/2020 261

262 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221M16R / TM221M16RG
EIO0000003313 02/2020
Chapter 23
Overview
This chapter describes the TM221M16R / TM221M16RG controllers.

Topic Page
TM221M16R / TM221M16RG Presentation 264
TM221M16R / TM221M16RG Digital Inputs 268
TM221M16R / TM221M16RG Digital Outputs 272
TM221M16R / TM221M16RG Analog Inputs 276
EIO0000003313 02/2020 263

TM221M16R / TM221M16RG Presentation
Overview
The following features are integrated into the TM221M16R (screw) and TM221M16RG (spring)
controllers:
 8 relay outputs
 2 analog inputs
 Communication port
 2 serial line ports
Description
The following figure shows the different components of the controllers:
264 EIO0000003313 02/2020

1 Status LEDs –
3 Output removable terminal block
Rules for Removable Spring Terminal
4 Clip-on lock for 35 mm (1.38 in.) top hat section rail (DIN-rail ) DIN Rail (see page 96)
7 Serial line port 2 / RJ45 connector (RS-485) Serial line 2 (see page 393)
B programming port)
15 Locking hook –
(see page 55)
EIO0000003313 02/2020 265

Status LEDs

application.
is stopped.
Slow flashing Minor error Yes Depends on
detected(2) the RUN
status LED
266 EIO0000003313 02/2020


Access
SL1 Serial line 1 Green On Indicates the status of Serial line 1.
Dimensions
The following figure shows the external dimensions of the controllers:
EIO0000003313 02/2020 267

TM221M16R / TM221M16RG Digital Inputs
Overview
This M221 Logic Controller has embedded digital inputs:
 4 regular inputs
 4 fast inputs which can be used as 100 kHz HSC inputs
DANGER
FIRE HAZARD
power supplies.
(176 °F).
WARNING
tables.

The following table describes the characteristics of the TM221M Logic Controller regular inputs:
Number of regular inputs 4 inputs (I2, I3, I4, I5)
Number of channel groups 1 common line for I0...I7
268 EIO0000003313 02/2020

internal logic
Connection type TM221M16R Removable screw terminal blocks
TM221M16RG Removable spring terminal blocks
1

The following table describes the characteristics of the TM221M Logic Controller fast inputs:
Rated input current 4.5 mA
EIO0000003313 02/2020 269

HSC supported operation mode  Dual Phase [Pulse / Direction]
 Single Phase
 Frequency Meter
internal logic
Connection type TM221M16R Removable screw terminal block
TM221M16RG Removable spring terminal block
1
270 EIO0000003313 02/2020

Wiring Diagram
The following figure presents the connection of the inputs to the sensors:
(1) The COM0 terminals are connected internally.

Ix I0, I1, I6, I7
EIO0000003313 02/2020 271

TM221M16R / TM221M16RG Digital Outputs
Overview
M221 Logic Controller with 8 relay outputs embedded.
For more information on Output Management (see page 65).
DANGER
FIRE HAZARD
power supplies.
(176 °F).
WARNING
tables.
272 EIO0000003313 02/2020


The following table describes the characteristics of the TM221M Logic Controller with relay
outputs:
Number of relay outputs 8 outputs
Number of channel groups 1 common line for Q0...Q3
1 common line for Q4...Q7
Output type Relay
7 A per common
Maximum output frequency with maximum load 20 operations per minute
Electrical life Under resistive load See power limitation (see page 274)
Under inductive load
internal logic
groups
Connection type TM221M16R Removable screw terminal blocks
TM221M16RG Removable spring terminal blocks
NOTE: Refer to Protecting Outputs from Inductive Load Damage (see page 111) for
additional information concerning output protection.
EIO0000003313 02/2020 273

Power Limitation
The following table describes the power limitation of the TM221M16R / TM221M16RG relay
outputs depending on the voltage, the type of load, and the number of operations required.
WARNING
Power Limitations
operations
AC-12 80 VA 160 VA 300,000
AC-15 (cos ϕ = 0.35) 18 VA 36 VA 300,000
AC-14 (cos ϕ = 0.7) 36 VA 72 VA 300,000
DC-12 16 W 300,000
DC-13 L/R = 7 ms 7.2 W 300,000
274 EIO0000003313 02/2020

Wiring Diagram
The following figure presents the connection of the outputs to the load:
* Type T fuse
inductive AC load
A Source wiring (positive logic).
B Sink wiring (negative logic).
based on the unique types of input and output devices you connect, or conformance to local,
national or applicable certification regulations and standards, and you should size your fuses
accordingly.
WARNING
EIO0000003313 02/2020 275

TM221M16R / TM221M16RG Analog Inputs
Overview
The M221 Logic Controllers have 2 analog inputs embedded.
DANGER
FIRE HAZARD
power supplies.
(176 °F).
WARNING
tables.
276 EIO0000003313 02/2020

Step Action
EIO0000003313 02/2020 277



internal logic
Length 1 m (3.3 ft)
278 EIO0000003313 02/2020

Wiring Diagram
The following figure shows the wiring diagram of the M221 Logic Controller analog inputs:
Pin Wire Color

AN0 Red
0V Black
AN1 Red
0V Black
EIO0000003313 02/2020 279

280 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221ME16R / TM221ME16RG
EIO0000003313 02/2020
Chapter 24
Overview
This chapter describes the TM221ME16R / TM221ME16RG controllers.

Topic Page
TM221ME16R / TM221ME16RG Presentation 282
TM221ME16R / TM221ME16RG Digital Inputs 287
TM221ME16R / TM221ME16RG Digital Outputs 291
TM221ME16R / TM221ME16RG Analog Inputs 295
EIO0000003313 02/2020 281

TM221ME16R / TM221ME16RG Presentation
Overview
The following features are integrated into the TM221ME16R (screw) and TM221ME16RG (spring)
controllers:
 8 relay outputs
 2 analog inputs
 1 Ethernet port
Description
282 EIO0000003313 02/2020

1 Status LEDs –
Rules for Removable Spring
B programming port)
15 Locking hook –
(see page 55)
EIO0000003313 02/2020 283

Status LEDs

application.
is stopped.
(see page 388)
284 EIO0000003313 02/2020


detected(2) the RUN
status LED
Access
(see page 388)
EIO0000003313 02/2020 285

Dimensions
286 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221ME16R / TM221ME16RG Digital Inputs
Overview
DANGER
FIRE HAZARD
power supplies.
(176 °F).
WARNING
tables.
EIO0000003313 02/2020 287


internal logic
Connection type TM221ME16R Removable screw terminal blocks
TM221ME16RG Removable spring terminal blocks
1
288 EIO0000003313 02/2020


 Single Phase
 Frequency Meter
internal logic
groups
Connection type TM221ME16R Removable screw terminal block
TM221ME16RG Removable spring terminal block
EIO0000003313 02/2020 289

Wiring Diagram

Ix I0, I1, I6, I7
290 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221ME16R / TM221ME16RG Digital Outputs
Overview
M221 Logic Controller with 8 relay outputs embedded.
For more information on Output Management (see page 65).
DANGER
FIRE HAZARD
power supplies.
(176 °F).
WARNING
tables.
EIO0000003313 02/2020 291


The following table describes the characteristics of the TM221M Logic Controller with relay
outputs:
Number of relay outputs 8 outputs
1 common line for Q4...Q7
Output type Relay
7 A per common
Maximum output frequency with maximum load 20 operations per minute
Electrical life Under resistive load See power limitation (see page 293)
Under inductive load
internal logic
groups
Connection type TM221ME16R Removable screw terminal blocks
TM221ME16RG Removable spring terminal blocks
292 EIO0000003313 02/2020

Power Limitation
The following table describes the power limitation of the TM221ME16R / TM221ME16RG relay
outputs controllers depending on the voltage, the type of load, and the number of operations
required.
WARNING
Power Limitations
operations
AC-12 80 VA 160 VA 300,000
AC-15 (cos ϕ = 0.35) 18 VA 36 VA 300,000
AC-14 (cos ϕ = 0.7) 36 VA 72 VA 300,000
DC-12 16 W 300,000
DC-13 L/R = 7 ms 7.2 W 300,000
EIO0000003313 02/2020 293

Wiring Diagram
* Type T fuse
inductive AC load
A Source wiring (positive logic).
B Sink wiring (negative logic).
based on the unique types of input and output devices you connect, or conformance to local,
national or applicable certification regulations and standards, and you should size your fuses
accordingly.
WARNING
294 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221ME16R / TM221ME16RG Analog Inputs
Overview
DANGER
FIRE HAZARD
power supplies.
(176 °F).
WARNING
tables.
EIO0000003313 02/2020 295

Step Action
296 EIO0000003313 02/2020



internal logic
Length 1 m (3.3 ft)
EIO0000003313 02/2020 297

Wiring Diagram
The following figure shows the wiring diagram of the Modicon M221 Logic Controller analog inputs:
Pin Wire Color

AN0 Red
0V Black
AN1 Red
0V Black
298 EIO0000003313 02/2020

3Modicon M221 Logic Controller
TM221M16T / TM221M16TG
EIO0000003313 02/2020
Chapter 25
Overview
This chapter describes the TM221M16T / TM221M16TG controllers.

Topic Page
TM221M16T / TM221M16TG Presentation 300
TM221M16T / TM221M16TG Digital Inputs 304
TM221M16T / TM221M16TG Digital Outputs 309
TM221M16T / TM221M16TG Analog Inputs 314
EIO0000003313 02/2020 299

TM221M16T / TM221M16TG Presentation
Overview
The following features are integrated into the TM221M16T (screw) and TM221M16TG (spring)
controllers:
 6 regular transistor outputs
 2 fast transistor outputs
 2 analog inputs
Description
300 EIO0000003313 02/2020

1 Status LEDs –
B programming port)
15 Locking hook –
(see page 55)
EIO0000003313 02/2020 301

Status LEDs

application.
is stopped.
detected(2) the RUN
status LED
302 EIO0000003313 02/2020


operation.
Dimensions
EIO0000003313 02/2020 303

TM221M16T / TM221M16TG Digital Inputs
Overview
DANGER
FIRE HAZARD
power supplies.
(176 °F).
WARNING
tables.
304 EIO0000003313 02/2020


Derating see Derating Curve (see page 307)
internal logic
Connection type TM221M16T Removable screw terminal blocks
TM221M16TG Removable spring terminal blocks
1
EIO0000003313 02/2020 305


Current at state 1 2.6 mA
 Single Phase
 Frequency Meter
internal logic
groups
Connection type TM221M16T Removable screw terminal block
TM221M16TG Removable spring terminal block
306 EIO0000003313 02/2020

Derating Curves
The following figures show the derating curves of the embedded digital inputs:

Y Input voltage
EIO0000003313 02/2020 307

Wiring Diagram

Ix I0, I1, I6, I7
308 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221M16T / TM221M16TG Digital Outputs
Overview
The TM221M16T and TM221M16TG have digital outputs embedded:
 6 regular transistor outputs
 2 fast transistor outputs
DANGER
FIRE HAZARD
power supplies.
(176 °F).
WARNING
tables.
EIO0000003313 02/2020 309


The following table describes the characteristics of the TM221M Logic Controller regular transistor
outputs:
Number of regular transistor outputs 6 regular outputs (Q2...Q7)
Logic type Source
Total output current 4A
Turn on time Q2...Q3 Max. 50 µs
Q4...Q7 Max. 300 µs
Turn off time Q2...Q3 Max. 50 µs
Q4...Q7 Max. 300 µs
Protection against short circuit Yes
Switching frequency Under resistive load 100 Hz max.
internal logic
310 EIO0000003313 02/2020


The following table describes the characteristics of the TM221M Logic Controller fast transistor
outputs:
Number of fast transistor outputs 2 outputs (Q0, Q1)
Logic type Source
Maximum output frequency PLS/PWM/PTO/FREQGEN 100 kHz
Isolation Between output and internal logic 500 Vac
Cable Type Shielded, including 24 Vdc power supply
EIO0000003313 02/2020 311

Derating Curves
The following figures show the derating curves of the embedded digital outputs:

Y Output voltage
312 EIO0000003313 02/2020

Wiring Diagram
* Type T fuse
Qx Q0, Q1
EIO0000003313 02/2020 313

TM221M16T / TM221M16TG Analog Inputs
Overview
DANGER
FIRE HAZARD
power supplies.
(176 °F).
WARNING
tables.
314 EIO0000003313 02/2020

Step Action
EIO0000003313 02/2020 315



internal logic
Length 1 m (3.3 ft)
316 EIO0000003313 02/2020

Wiring Diagram
Pin Wire Color

AN0 Red
0V Black
AN1 Red
0V Black
EIO0000003313 02/2020 317

318 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221ME16T / TM221ME16TG
EIO0000003313 02/2020
Chapter 26
Overview
This chapter describes the TM221ME16T / TM221ME16TG controllers.

Topic Page
TM221ME16T / TM221ME16TG Presentation 320
TM221ME16T / TM221ME16TG Digital Inputs 326
TM221ME16T / TM221ME16TG Digital Outputs 331
TM221ME16T / TM221ME16TG Analog Inputs 336
EIO0000003313 02/2020 319

TM221ME16T / TM221ME16TG Presentation
Overview
The following features are integrated into the TM221ME16T (screw) and TM221ME16TG (spring)
controllers:
 2 analog inputs
 1 Ethernet port
320 EIO0000003313 02/2020

Description
EIO0000003313 02/2020 321

1 Status LEDs –
B programming port)
15 Locking hook –
(see page 55)
322 EIO0000003313 02/2020

Status LEDs

application.
is stopped.
(see page 388)
EIO0000003313 02/2020 323


detected(2) the RUN
status LED
Access
(see page 388)
324 EIO0000003313 02/2020

Dimensions
EIO0000003313 02/2020 325

TM221ME16T / TM221ME16TG Digital Inputs
Overview
DANGER
FIRE HAZARD
power supplies.
(176 °F).
WARNING
tables.
326 EIO0000003313 02/2020


The following table describes the characteristics of the TM221M Logic Controller with transistor
regular inputs:
Number of channel groups 1 common line for I0....I7
internal logic
Connection type TM221ME16T Removable screw terminal blocks
TM221ME16TG Removable spring terminal blocks
1
EIO0000003313 02/2020 327


 Single Phase
 Frequency Meter
internal logic
groups
Connection type TM221ME16T Removable screw terminal block
TM221ME16TG Removable spring terminal block
328 EIO0000003313 02/2020

Derating Curves

Y Input voltage
EIO0000003313 02/2020 329

Wiring Diagram

Ix I0, I1, I6, I7
330 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221ME16T / TM221ME16TG Digital Outputs
Overview
The TM221ME16T and TM221ME16TG have 8 digital outputs embedded:
DANGER
FIRE HAZARD
power supplies.
(176 °F).
WARNING
tables.
EIO0000003313 02/2020 331


outputs:
Logic type Source
Q4...Q7 Max. 300 µs
Q4...Q7 Max. 300 µs
internal logic
332 EIO0000003313 02/2020


outputs:
Logic type Source
Maximum output frequency PLS/PWM/PTO/F 100 kHz
REQGEN
Isolation Between output 500 Vac
and internal logic
NOTE: Refer to Protecting Outputs from Inductive Load Damage (see page 111) for additional
information concerning output protection.
EIO0000003313 02/2020 333

Derating Curves

Y Output voltage
334 EIO0000003313 02/2020

Wiring Diagram
* Type T fuse
Qx Q0, Q1
EIO0000003313 02/2020 335

TM221ME16T / TM221ME16TG Analog Inputs
Overview
DANGER
FIRE HAZARD
power supplies.
(176 °F).
WARNING
tables.
336 EIO0000003313 02/2020

Step Action
EIO0000003313 02/2020 337



internal logic
Length 1 m (3.3 ft)
338 EIO0000003313 02/2020

Wiring Diagram
Pin Wire Color

AN0 Red
0V Black
AN1 Red
0V Black
EIO0000003313 02/2020 339

340 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221M32TK
EIO0000003313 02/2020
Chapter 27
TM221M32TK
TM221M32TK
Overview
This chapter describes the TM221M32TK controllers.

Topic Page
TM221M32TK Presentation 342
TM221M32TK Digital Inputs 346
TM221M32TK Digital Outputs 351
TM221M32TK Analog Inputs 356
EIO0000003313 02/2020 341

TM221M32TK
TM221M32TK Presentation
Overview
The following features are integrated into the TM221M32TK (HE10) controllers:
 2 analog inputs
Description
The following figure shows the different components of the controller:
342 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221M32TK
1 Status LEDs –
2 Input HE10 (MIL20) connector HE10 (MIL 20) connector cable list
3 Output HE10 (MIL20) connector
B programming port)
15 Locking hook –
(see page 55)
EIO0000003313 02/2020 343

TM221M32TK
Status LEDs

application.
is stopped.
detected(2) the RUN
status LED
344 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221M32TK

Access
Dimensions
The following figure shows the external dimensions of the controller:
EIO0000003313 02/2020 345

TM221M32TK
TM221M32TK Digital Inputs
Overview
DANGER
FIRE HAZARD
power supplies.
(176 °F).
WARNING
tables.
346 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221M32TK

Number of regular inputs 12 inputs
1 common line for I8...I15
internal logic
Connection type HE10 (MIL 20) connectors
1
EIO0000003313 02/2020 347

TM221M32TK

 Single Phase
 Frequency Meter
internal logic
groups
Connection type TM221M32TK HE10 (MIL 20) connector
1
348 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221M32TK
Derating Curves

Y Input voltage
EIO0000003313 02/2020 349

TM221M32TK
Wiring Diagram with Free-Wire Cable

(1) The COM terminals are not connected internally.

Ix I0, I1, I6, I7
For more information on the cable color for TWDFCW30K/TWDFCW50K, refer to TWDFCW••K
Cable Description (see page 51).
350 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221M32TK
TM221M32TK Digital Outputs
Overview
The TM221M32TK has 16 digital outputs embedded:
DANGER
FIRE HAZARD
power supplies.
(176 °F).
WARNING
tables.
EIO0000003313 02/2020 351

TM221M32TK

outputs:
Logic type Source
Total output current (Q0...Q15) 1.6 A
Maximum power of filament lamp 2.4 W max
Derating See Derating Curves (see page 354)
Q4...Q15 Max. 300 µs
Q4...Q15 Max. 300 µs
internal logic
Connection type TM221M32TK HE10 (MIL 20) connectors
352 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221M32TK

outputs:
Logic type Source
Maximum output frequency PWM 100 kHz
PLS 100 kHz
and internal logic
Connection type TM221M32TK HE10 (MIL 20) connectors
EIO0000003313 02/2020 353

TM221M32TK
Derating Curves

Y Output voltage
354 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221M32TK

* Type T fuse
Qx Q0, Q1
EIO0000003313 02/2020 355

TM221M32TK
TM221M32TK Analog Inputs
Overview
DANGER
FIRE HAZARD
power supplies.
(176 °F).
WARNING
tables.
356 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221M32TK
Step Action
EIO0000003313 02/2020 357

TM221M32TK


internal logic
Length 1 m (3.3 ft)
358 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221M32TK
Wiring Diagram
Pin Wire Color

AN0 Red
0V Black
AN1 Red
0V Black
EIO0000003313 02/2020 359

TM221M32TK
360 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221ME32TK
EIO0000003313 02/2020
Chapter 28
TM221ME32TK
TM221ME32TK
Overview
This chapter describes the TM221ME32TK controller.

Topic Page
TM221ME32TK Presentation 362
TM221ME32TK Digital Inputs 367
TM221ME32TK Digital Outputs 372
TM221ME32TK Analog Inputs 377
EIO0000003313 02/2020 361

TM221ME32TK
TM221ME32TK Presentation
Overview
The following features are integrated into the TM221ME32TK (HE10) controllers:
 2 analog inputs
 1 Ethernet port
Description
The following figure shows the different components of the controller:
362 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221ME32TK
1 Status LEDs –
2 Input HE10 (MIL20) connector HE10 (MIL 20) connector cable list
3 Output HE10 (MIL20) connector
B programming port)
15 Locking hook –
(see page 55)
EIO0000003313 02/2020 363

TM221ME32TK
Status LEDs

application.
is stopped.
(see page 388)
364 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221ME32TK

detected(2) the RUN
status LED
Access
(see page 388)
EIO0000003313 02/2020 365

TM221ME32TK
Dimensions
The following figure shows the external dimension controller:
366 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221ME32TK
TM221ME32TK Digital Inputs
Overview
DANGER
FIRE HAZARD
power supplies.
(176 °F).
WARNING
tables.
EIO0000003313 02/2020 367

TM221ME32TK

Number of regular inputs 12 inputs
1 common line for I8...I15
Turn off time I2...I5: 35 µs1
I8...I15: 100 µs1
internal logic
Connection type HE10 (MIL 20) connectors
1
368 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221ME32TK

 Single Phase
 Frequency Meter
internal logic
groups
Connection type TM221ME32TK HE10 (MIL 20) connector
1
EIO0000003313 02/2020 369

TM221ME32TK
Derating Curves

Y Input voltage
370 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221ME32TK

(1) The COM terminals are not connected internally.

Ix I0, I1, I6, I7
EIO0000003313 02/2020 371

TM221ME32TK
TM221ME32TK Digital Outputs
Overview
The TM221ME32TK has 16 digital outputs embedded:
DANGER
FIRE HAZARD
power supplies.
(176 °F).
WARNING
tables.
372 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221ME32TK

outputs:
Logic type Source
Q4...Q15 Max. 300 µs
Q4...Q15 Max. 300 µs
internal logic
Connection type TM221ME32TK HE10 (MIL 20) connectors
EIO0000003313 02/2020 373

TM221ME32TK

outputs:
Logic type Source
Maximum output frequency PLS/PWM/PTO/FR 100 kHz
EQGEN
and internal logic
Connection type TM221ME32TK HE10 (MIL 20) connectors
374 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221ME32TK
Derating Curves

Y Output voltage
EIO0000003313 02/2020 375

TM221ME32TK

* Type T fuse
Qx Q0, Q1
376 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221ME32TK
TM221ME32TK Analog Inputs
Overview
DANGER
FIRE HAZARD
power supplies.
(176 °F).
WARNING
tables.
EIO0000003313 02/2020 377

TM221ME32TK
Step Action
378 EIO0000003313 02/2020

TM221ME32TK


internal logic
Length 1 m (3.3 ft)
EIO0000003313 02/2020 379

TM221ME32TK
Wiring Diagram
Pin Wire Color

AN0 Red
0V Black
AN1 Red
0V Black
380 EIO0000003313 02/2020

Modicon M221 Logic Controller Communication
EIO0000003313 02/2020
Part IV

29 Integrated Communication Ports 383
30 Connecting the M221 Logic Controller to a PC 397
EIO0000003313 02/2020 381

382 EIO0000003313 02/2020

Integrated Communication Ports
EIO0000003313 02/2020
Chapter 29

Topic Page
USB Mini-B Programming Port 384
Ethernet Port 386
Serial Line 1 389
Serial Line 2 393
EIO0000003313 02/2020 383

USB Mini-B Programming Port
Overview
The USB Mini-B Port is the programming port you can use to connect a PC with a USB host port
using EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic software. Using a typical USB cable, this connection is
suitable for quick updates of the program or short duration connections to perform maintenance
and inspect data values. It is not suitable for long-term connections such as commissioning or
monitoring without the use of specially adapted cables to help minimize electromagnetic
interference.
WARNING
 You must use a shielded USB cable such as a BMX XCAUSBH0•• secured to the functional
ground (FE) of the system for any long-term connection.
 Do not connect more than one controller or bus coupler at a time using USB connections.
The following figure shows the location of the USB Mini-B programming port on the TM221C Logic
Controller:
384 EIO0000003313 02/2020

The following figure shows the location of the USB Mini-B programming port on the TM221M Logic
Controller:
Characteristics
This table describes the characteristics of the USB Mini-B programming port:
Parameter USB Programming Port

Function Compatible with USB 2.0
Connector type Mini-B
Isolation None
Cable type Shielded
EIO0000003313 02/2020 385

Ethernet Port
Overview
The TM221•E••• are equipped with an Ethernet communication port.
The following figure presents the location of the Ethernet port on the TM221C Logic Controller:
The following figure presents the location of the Ethernet port on the TM221M Logic Controller:
386 EIO0000003313 02/2020

Characteristics
The following table describes Ethernet characteristics:
Characteristic Description
Function Modbus TCP/IP
Connector type RJ45
Driver  10 M half duplex (auto negotiation)
 100 M full duplex (auto negotiation)
Cable type Shielded

Automatic cross-over detection Yes
Pin Assignment
The following figure presents the RJ45 Ethernet connector pin assignment:
The following table describes the RJ45 Ethernet connector pins:
Pin N° Signal
1 TD+
2 TD-
3 RD+
4 -
5 -
6 RD-
7 -
8 -
NOTE: The controller supports the MDI/MDIX auto-crossover cable function. It is not necessary to
use special Ethernet crossover cables to connect devices directly to this port (connections without
an Ethernet hub or switch).
EIO0000003313 02/2020 387

Status LED
The following figures show the RJ45 connector status LED:
The following table describes the Ethernet status LEDs:

1: ACT Ethernet activity Green Off No activity, or logic controller is
connected to a hub.
Flashing Activity
2: LINK Ethernet link Yellow Off No link
On Link
A change in the value of system bits %S34, %S35, or %S36 may provoke a reinitialization of the
Ethernet channel. As a consequence, the Ethernet channel may not be available for several
seconds after a change in the values of these System Bits.
388 EIO0000003313 02/2020

Serial Line 1
Overview
The serial line 1:
 can be used to communicate with devices supporting the Modbus protocol as either master or
slave, ASCII protocol (printer, modem...).
 provides a 5 Vdc power distribution.
The following figure shows the location of the serial line 1 port on the TM221C Logic Controller:
The following figure shows the location of the serial line 1 port on the TM221M Logic Controller:
EIO0000003313 02/2020 389

Characteristics
Function RS485 or RS232 software configured
Connector type RJ45
Isolation Non-isolated
Maximum baud rate 1200 up to 115 200 bps
Cable Type Shielded
Maximum length (between 15 m (49 ft) for RS485
the controller and an 3 m (9.84 ft) for RS232
isolated junction box)
Polarization No (1)
5 Vdc power supply for RS485 Yes
NOTE: Some devices provide voltage on RS485 serial connections. Do not connect these voltage
lines to your controller as they may damage the controller serial port electronics and render the
serial port inoperable.
NOTICE
Use only the VW3A8306R•• serial cable to connect RS485 devices to your controller.
390 EIO0000003313 02/2020

Pin Assignment
The following figure shows the pins of the RJ45 connector:
The table below describes the pin assignment of the RJ45 connector:
Pin RS232 RS485

1 RxD N.C.
2 TxD N.C.
3 RTS N.C.
4 N.C. D1
5 N.C. D0
6 CTS N.C.
7 N.C.* 5 Vdc
8 Common Common
* 5 Vdc delivered by the controller. Do not connect.
CTS: Clear To Send

N.C.: No Connection
RTS: Ready To Send
RxD: Received Data
TxD: Transmitted Data
WARNING
EIO0000003313 02/2020 391

Status LED
The following figure shows the serial line 1 status LED of the TM221C Logic Controller:
The following figure shows the serial line 1 status LED of the TM221M Logic Controller:
The table below describes the status LED of the serial line 1:

SL1 Serial Line 1 Green On Indicates the activity of the serial line 1
Off Indicates no serial communication
392 EIO0000003313 02/2020

Serial Line 2
Overview
The serial line 2 is used to communicate with devices supporting the Modbus protocol as either a
master or slave and ASCII Protocol (printer, modem...) and supports RS485 and terminal block.
Characteristics
Function RS485 software configured
Connector type RJ45
Isolation Non-isolated
Maximum baud rate 1200 up to 115 200 bps
Cable Type Shielded
Maximum length 15 m (49 ft) for RS485
Polarization No(1)
5 Vdc power supply for RS485 No
(1) TM221 embedded SL1 and embedded SL2 contains fixed internal high impedance bias network resistors
(4.7 kΩ). Do not use external line termination resistors (standard 150 Ω) without additional external low
impedance line polarization resistors (standard 450 Ω…650 Ω) to secure a proper idle voltage state of
minimum 200 mV between the D1 and D0 data lines.
EIO0000003313 02/2020 393

Pin Assignment
The following figure presents the pins of the RJ45 connector:
The table below describes the pin assignment for RS485:
Pin RS485 Description

1 N.C. No connection
4 D1 Modbus SL: D1 (+/B) RS-485 2-wire
5 D0 Modbus SL: D0 (-/A) RS-485 2-wire
8 Common Common
WARNING
394 EIO0000003313 02/2020

Status LED
The following graphic presents the status LED:
The table below describes the serial line 2 status LED:

SL2 Serial Line 2 Green On Indicates the activity of the serial line 2.
EIO0000003313 02/2020 395

396 EIO0000003313 02/2020

Connecting the M221 Logic Controller to a PC
EIO0000003313 02/2020
Chapter 30
Connecting the Controller to a PC
Overview
To transfer, run, and monitor the applications, connect the controller to a computer, that has
EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic 1.0 or later installed, using either a USB cable or an Ethernet
connection (for those references that support an Ethernet port).
NOTICE
Always connect the communication cable to the PC before connecting it to the controller.
USB Mini-B Port Connection

TCSXCNAMUM3P: This USB cable is suitable for short duration connections such as quick
updates or retrieving data values.
BMXXCAUSBH018: Grounded and shielded, this USB cable is suitable for long duration
connections on a TM221C Logic Controller.
BMXXCAUSBH045: Grounded and shielded, this USB cable is suitable for long duration
connections on a TM221M Logic Controller.
NOTE: You can only connect 1 controller or any other device associated with EcoStruxure Machine
Expert - Basic and its component to the PC at any one time.
WARNING
INSUFFICENT POWER FOR USB DOWNLOAD
Do not use a USB cable longer than 3m (9.8 ft) for USB powered download.
EIO0000003313 02/2020 397

The USB Mini-B Port is the programming port you can use to connect a PC with a USB host port
using EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic software. Using a typical USB cable, this connection is
suitable for quick updates of the program or short duration connections to perform maintenance
and inspect data values. It is not suitable for long-term connections such as commissioning or
monitoring without the use of specially adapted cables to help minimize electromagnetic
interference.
WARNING
 You must use a shielded USB cable such as a BMX XCAUSBH0•• secured to the functional
ground (FE) of the system for any long-term connection.
 Do not connect more than one controller or bus coupler at a time using USB connections.
The communication cable should be connected to the PC first to minimize the possibility of
electrostatic discharge affecting the controller.
The following illustration shows the USB connection to a PC on a TM221C Logic Controller:
The following illustration shows the USB connection to a PC on a TM221M Logic Controller:
398 EIO0000003313 02/2020

To connect the USB cable to your controller, follow the steps below:
Step Action
1 1a If making a long-term connection using the cable BMXXCAUSBH045, or other cable with a
ground shield connection, be sure to securely connect the shield connector to the functional
ground (FE) or protective ground (PE) of your system before connecting the cable to your
controller and your PC.
1b If making a short-term connection using the cable TCSXCNAMUM3P or other non-grounded
USB cable, proceed to step 2.
2 Connect your USB cable to the computer.
3 Open the hinged access cover.
4 Connect the Mini connector of your USB cable to the controller USB connector.
Ethernet Port Connection

You can also connect the controller to a PC using an Ethernet cable.
The following illustration shows the Ethernet connection to a PC on a TM221C Logic Controller:
The following illustration shows the Ethernet connection to a PC on a TM221M Logic Controller:
To connect the controller to the PC, do the following:
Step Action
1 Connect your Ethernet cable to the PC.
2 Connect your Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port on the controller.
EIO0000003313 02/2020 399

400 EIO0000003313 02/2020

Glossary
EIO0000003313 02/2020
Glossary
A
analog input
Converts received voltage or current levels into numerical values. You can store and process these
values within the logic controller.
ASCII
(American standard code for Information Interchange) A protocol for representing alphanumeric
characters (letters, numbers, certain graphics, and control characters).
B
bps
(bit per second) A definition of transmission rate, also given in conjunction with multiplicator kilo
(kbps) and mega (mbps).
C
CTS
(clear to send) A data transmission signal and acknowledges the RDS signal from the transmitting
station.
CW/CCW
ClockWise / Counter ClockWise
D
DIN
(Deutsches Institut für Normung) A German institution that sets engineering and dimensional
standards.
EIO0000003313 02/2020 401

Glossary
E
EIA rack
(electronic industries alliance rack) A standardized (EIA 310-D, IEC 60297, and DIN 41494
SC48D) system for mounting various electronic modules in a stack or rack that is 19 inches
(482.6 mm) wide.
EN
EN identifies one of many European standards maintained by CEN (European Committee for
Standardization), CENELEC (European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization), or ETSI
(European Telecommunications Standards Institute).
F
FE
(functional Earth) A common grounding connection to enhance or otherwise allow normal
operation of electrically sensitive equipment (also referred to as functional ground in North
America).
In contrast to a protective Earth (protective ground), a functional earth connection serves a purpose
other than shock protection, and may normally carry current. Examples of devices that use
functional earth connections include surge suppressors and electromagnetic interference filters,
certain antennas, and measurement instruments.
FreqGen
(frequency generator) A function that generates a square wave signal with programmable
frequency.
G
GRAFCET
The functioning of a sequential operation in a structured and graphic form.
This is an analytical method that divides any sequential control system into a series of steps, with
which actions, transitions, and conditions are associated.
H
HE10
Rectangular connector for electrical signals with frequencies below 3 MHz, complying with IEC
60807-2.
HSC
(high-speed counter) A function that counts pulses on the controller or on expansion module
inputs.
402 EIO0000003313 02/2020

Glossary
I
IEC
(international electrotechnical commission) A non-profit and non-governmental international
standards organization that prepares and publishes international standards for electrical,
electronic, and related technologies.
IEC 61131-3
Part 3 of a 3-part IEC standard for industrial automation equipment. IEC 61131-3 is concerned with
controller programming languages and defines 2 graphical and 2 textual programming language
standards. The graphical programming languages are ladder diagram and function block diagram.
The textual programming languages include structured text and instruction list.
IL
(instruction list) A program written in the language that is composed of a series of text-based
instruction code, and an operand (refer to IEC 61131-3).
instruction list language
A program written in the instruction list language that is composed of a series of text-based
instruction code, and an operand (see IEC 61131-3).
IP 20
(ingress protection) The protection classification according to IEC 60529 offered by an enclosure,
shown by the letter IP and 2 digits. The first digit indicates 2 factors: helping protect persons and
for equipment. The second digit indicates helping protect against water. IP 20 devices help protect
against electric contact of objects larger than 12.5 mm, but not against water.
L
ladder diagram language
A graphical representation of the instructions of a controller program with symbols for contacts,
coils, and blocks in a series of rungs executed sequentially by a controller (see IEC 61131-3).
LD
(ladder diagram) A graphical representation of the instructions of a controller program with symbols
for contacts, coils, and blocks in a series of rungs executed sequentially by a controller (refer to
IEC 61131-3).
M
Modbus
EIO0000003313 02/2020 403

Glossary
N
NEMA
(national electrical manufacturers association) The standard for the performance of various
classes of electrical enclosures. The NEMA standards cover corrosion resistance, ability to help
protect from rain, submersion, and so on. For IEC member countries, the IEC 60529 standard
classifies the ingress protection rating for enclosures.
P
PE
(Protective Earth) A common grounding connection to help avoid the hazard of electric shock by
keeping any exposed conductive surface of a device at earth potential. To avoid possible voltage
drop, no current is allowed to flow in this conductor (also referred to as protective ground in North
America or as an equipment grounding conductor in the US national electrical code).
PTO
(pulse train outputs) A fast output that oscillates between off and on in a fixed 50-50 duty cycle,
producing a square wave form. PTO is especially well suited for applications such as stepper
motors, frequency converters, and servo motor control, among others.
PWM
(pulse width modulation) A fast output that oscillates between off and on in an adjustable duty
cycle, producing a rectangular wave form (though you can adjust it to produce a square wave).
R
RJ45
A standard type of 8-pin connector for network cables defined for Ethernet.
RS-232
A standard type of serial communication bus, based on 3 wires (also known as EIA RS-232C or
V.24).
RS-485
A standard type of serial communication bus, based on 2 wires (also known as EIA RS-485).
RTS
(request to send) A data transmission signal and CTS signal that acknowledges the RTS from the
destination node.
RxD
The line that receives data from one source to another.
404 EIO0000003313 02/2020

Glossary
S
SFC
(sequential function chart) A language that is composed of steps with associated actions,
transitions with associated logic condition, and directed links between steps and transitions. (The
SFC standard is defined in IEC 848. It is IEC 61131-3 compliant.)
T
terminal block
(terminal block) The component that mounts in an electronic module and provides electrical
connections between the controller and the field devices.
TxD
The line that sends data from one source to another.
EIO0000003313 02/2020 405

Glossary
406 EIO0000003313 02/2020

Index
EIO0000003313 02/2020
Index
Symbols F
Short-circuit or Over-current on Sink Transis- fallback
tor Outputs, 68 configuring modes, 67
features
key features, 20, 25
A Filter
accessories, 49 Bounce Filter, 61
analog input modules
specifications, 40
analog mixed I/O modules G
specifications, 42 Grounding, 122
analog output modules
specifications, 41
I
inductive load, output protection
C output protection, inductive load, 111
certifications and standards, 85 Input Management, 61
Communication Ports, 383 Installation, 79
Ethernet Port, 386 Electrical Requirements, 106
Serial Line 1, 389 Logic Controller Installation, 86
Serial Line 2, 393 intended use, 8
USB Programming Port, 384
connecting the controller to a PC
M221, 397 L
Latching, 62
Logic Controller Installation
D Installation, 86
digital I/O modules
specifications, 37, 37, 39, 45, 46
Digital I/O modules
Specifications, 46
E
Electrical Requirements
Installation, 106
Electromagnetic Susceptibility, 83
Environmental Characteristics, 81
EIO0000003313 02/2020 407

Index
M presentation
TM221M16R / TM221M16RG, 264
M221
TM221M16T / TM221M16TG, 300
connecting the controller to a PC, 397
TM221M32TK, 342
TM221C16R, 129
TM221ME16R / TM221ME16RG, 282
TM221C16T, 139
TM221ME16T / TM221ME16TG, 320
TM221C16U, 147
TM221ME32TK, 362
TM221C24R, 157
programming languages
TM221C24T, 165
IL, LD, 25
TM221C24U, 173
IL, LD, Grafcet, 20
TM221C40R, 185
TM221C40T, 197
TM221C40U, 209 Q
TM221CE16R, 135
qualification of personnel, 8
TM221CE16T, 143
TM221CE16U, 151
TM221CE24R, 161
TM221CE24T, 169
R
TM221CE24U, 179 real time clock, 54
TM221CE40R, 191 regular inputs, 37, 37, 39
TM221CE40T, 203 regular transistor outputs, 37, 37, 39
TM221CE40U, 215 relay outputs, 37, 37, 39
TM221M16R / TM221M16RG, 263 Run/Stop, 69
TM221M16T, 299
TM221M32TK, 341
TM221ME16R / TM221ME16RG, 281
S
TM221ME16T / TM221ME16TG, 319 SD Card, 72
TM221ME32TK, 361 Serial Line 1
mounting positions, 90, 93 Communication Ports, 389
Serial Line 2
Communication Ports, 393
N short-circuit or over-current on relay outputs,
notice 68
loss of application data, 72 short-circuit or over-current on transistor out-
puts, 67
specifications
O analog input modules, 40
analog mixed I/O modules, 42
output management, 65
analog output modules, 41
digital I/O modules, 37, 37, 39, 45
P Specifications
Digital I/O modules, 46, 46
Power Supply, 114, 119
specifications
modules, 42
transmitter and receiver modules, 44
408 EIO0000003313 02/2020

Index
T
Tesys modules
specifications, 42
TM221C16R, 129, 129
TM221C16T, 139, 139, 209
TM221C16U, 147, 147
TM221C24R, 157
TM221C24T, 165, 165
TM221C24U, 173, 173
TM221C40R, 185, 185
TM221C40T, 197, 197
TM221C40U, 209
TM221CE16R, 135
TM221CE16T, 143, 143
TM221CE16U, 151, 151
TM221CE24R, 157, 161, 161
TM221CE24T, 169, 169
TM221CE24U, 179, 179
TM221CE40R, 191, 191
TM221CE40T, 203, 203
TM221CE40U, 215, 215
TMC2, 34
transmitter and receiver modules
specifications, 44
U
USB Programming Port
Communication Ports, 384
W
wiring, 107
EIO0000003313 02/2020 409

Index
410 EIO0000003313 02/2020

Modicon TMH2GDB
EIO0000003321 09/2020
Modicon TMH2GDB
User Guide
09/2020
EIO0000003321.01
please notify us.
2 EIO0000003321 09/2020
Table of Contents
About the Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Chapter 1 Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Technical Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Compatibility of The Remote Graphic Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Chapter 2 Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Dimensions and Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Connecting the Remote Graphic Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Updating the Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Chapter 3 How to Use the Remote Graphic Display . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Password Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Chapter 4 Setup Menu Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Setup Menu Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Controller Setup Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Controller State Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Alarm Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Data Table Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Chapter 5 Creating an Operator Interface with EcoStruxure Machine
Expert - Basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Prerequisite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic Display Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
General Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Add/Delete a Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
EIO0000003321 09/2020 3
Configure a Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Export/Import a Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Alarm Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
4 EIO0000003321 09/2020
Safety Information
NOTICE
EIO0000003321 09/2020 5
PLEASE NOTE
6 EIO0000003321 09/2020
About the Book
At a Glance
Document Scope
Use this document to learn how to:
 Connect your Remote Graphic Display to your controller.
 Commission and maintain your Remote Graphic Display.
 Operate your Remote Graphic Display interface with EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic.
NOTE: Read and understand this document and all related documents before installing, operating,
or maintaining your Remote Graphic Display.
Validity Note
Step Action
interests you.
EIO0000003321 09/2020 7
Related Documents

EIO0000003282 (FRE)
EIO0000003283 (GER)
EIO0000003284 (SPA)
EIO0000003285 (ITA)
EIO0000003286 (CHS)
EIO0000003287 (POR)
EIO0000003288 (TUR)
EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic Generic Functions - Library Guide EIO0000003289 (ENG)
EIO0000003290 (FRE)
EIO0000003291 (GER)
EIO0000003292 (SPA)
EIO0000003293 (ITA)
EIO0000003294 (CHS)
EIO0000003295 (POR)
EIO0000003296 (TUR)
8 EIO0000003321 09/2020
DANGER
indicated.
This equipment has been designed to operate outside of any hazardous location. Only install this
equipment in zones known to be free of a hazardous atmosphere.
DANGER
Install and use this equipment in non-hazardous locations only.
EIO0000003321 09/2020 9
WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
WARNING
10 EIO0000003321 09/2020
reduction
requirements
field buses.
EIO0000003321 09/2020 11
(2006/42/EC) and ISO 12100:2010.
12 EIO0000003321 09/2020
Modicon TMH2GDB
Presentation
EIO0000003321 09/2020
Chapter 1
Presentation
Presentation
Introduction
This chapter provides information related to the description, technical presentation, certifications
and standards of the Remote Graphic Display.

Topic Page
Description 14
Technical Presentation 16
Compatibility of The Remote Graphic Display 19
EIO0000003321 09/2020 13
Presentation
Description
Overview
The Remote Graphic Display is a local control unit. It is used in conjunction with the Modicon M221
Logic Controller for monitoring, commissioning, operating, and maintenance activities.
System Description
When connecting the Remote Graphic Display to your logic controller, you can access the Setup
menu (see page 43) page.
You can also define customized pages (see page 55) with EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic.
The Remote Graphic Display can be connected to your logic controller by the serial line (Serial or
Serial 1). For more information, refer to Connecting the Remote Graphic Display (see page 29).
Physical Description
This illustration presents the delivery content for a Remote Graphic Display:
1 Remote Graphic Display Instruction Sheet

2 Remote Graphic Display
3 Anti-rotation tee
4 Installation nut
5 Socket wrench (ZB5AZ905), tightening tool for the installation nut
14 EIO0000003321 09/2020
Presentation
Remote Graphic Display Description

This illustration presents the Remote Graphic Display:
1 F1 key
2 MOD key
3 ESC key
4 R1 to R4 keys
5 Graphic screen
6 Home key
7 Information key
8 F2 key
9 Touch wheel/OK/Arrows
10 Anti-rotation tee
11 Installation nut
12 Socket wrench (ZB5AZ905)
13 RJ45 serial line (RS-485)
14 Connector for functional ground (earth)
EIO0000003321 09/2020 15
Presentation
Technical Presentation
Enclosure Requirements
The Remote Graphic Display components are designed as Zone B, Class A industrial equipment
according to IEC/CISPR Publication 11. If they are used in environments other than those
described in these standards, or in environments that do not meet the specifications in this manual,
the ability to meet electromagnetic compatibility requirements in the presence of conducted and/or
radiated interference may be reduced.
All Remote Graphic Display components meet European Community (CE) requirements for open
equipment as defined by IEC/EN 61131-2.
This equipment meets CE requirements as indicated in the table below. This equipment is intended
for use in a pollution degree 2 industrial environment.
WARNING
tables.
Characteristic Specification
Standard compliance IEC/EN 61131-2
IEC/EN 61010-2-201
Ambient operating temperature -15...50 °C (5...122 °F)
Storage temperature -40...70 °C (-40...158 °F)
Relative humidity Transport and storage
95 % (non-condensing)
Operation
Pollution degree IEC/EN 60664-1 2
Protection degree IEC/EN 61131-2 Front face: IP65 (when properly installed as
instructed)
Back face: IP20
Corrosion immunity Atmosphere free from corrosive gases
Operating altitude 0...2000 m (0...6560 ft)
Storage altitude 0...2000 m (0...6560 ft)
Vibration resistance 2 g 3...150 hz maximum 1.5 mm
Mechanical shock resistance 147 m/s2 (482.285 ft/s2), 15 g for 11 ms duration
16 EIO0000003321 09/2020
Presentation
Electromagnetic Susceptibility
The Remote Graphic Display components meet electromagnetic susceptibility specifications as
indicated in this table:
Characteristic Designed to specification Range

Electrostatic discharge IEC/EN 61000-4-2 8 kV (air discharge)
4 kV (contact discharge)
Radiated IEC/EN 61000-4-3 10 V/m (80 MHz...1 GHz)
electromagnetic field 3 V/m (1.4 GHz...2 GHz)
1 V/m (2...3 GHz)
Magnetic field IEC/EN 61000-4-8 30 A/m 50 Hz, 60 Hz
Fast transient burst IEC/EN 61000-4-4 1 kV
Surge immunity IEC/EN 61000-4-5 CM(1) DM(2)
IEC/EN 61131-2
0.5 kV 0.5 kV
Induced electromagnetic IEC/EN 61000-4-6 10 Vrms (0.15...80 MHz)
field
Conducted emission IEC/EN 55011 (IEC/CISPR DC power line:
Publication 11)  10...150 kHz: 120...69 dBμV/m QP
 150...1500 kHz: 79...63 dBμV/m QP
 1.5...30 MHz: 63 dBμV/m QP
Radiated emission IEC/EN 55011 (IEC/CISPR Class A, 10 m distance:

Publication 11)  30...230 MHz: 40 dBμV/m QP
 230 MHz...1 GHz: 47 dBμV/m QP
(1) Common mode

(2) Differential mode
EIO0000003321 09/2020 17
Presentation
Introduction
The Remote Graphic Display is designed to conform to the main national and international
 IEC/EN 61131-2
 UL 508C
The Remote Graphic Display has obtained the following conformity marks:
 CE
 UL
18 EIO0000003321 09/2020
Presentation
Compatibility of The Remote Graphic Display
Overview
Before using the Remote Graphic Display, verify the compatibility of the Remote Graphic Display
with the version of EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic, the controller firmware version, and the
functional level of the application.
Compatibility With EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic

The installed version of EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic must be equal to or greater than 1.0.
NOTE: To display the installed version of EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic, click About on the
Start Menu.
Compatibility with the Controller Firmware

The firmware version of the M221 Logic Controller must be equal to or greater than 1.3.x.y.
NOTE: To display the firmware version, click Commissioning → Connect, select M221 Logic
Controller, and click Login. Under Selected Controller, the firmware version and controller are
identified.
You can update the firmware using one of the following methods:
 Controller Updates (see EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic, Operating Guide) in EcoStruxure
Machine Expert - Basic
 ExecLoader (Updating Firmware using Executive Loader Wizard (see Modicon M221, Logic
Controller, Programming Guide))
 SD card (Firmware Management (see Modicon M221, Logic Controller, Programming Guide))
Compatibility with the Functional Level of the Application

The functional level of the application must be equal to or greater than level 3.0.
NOTE: For more information, refer to functional level (see EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic,
Operating Guide).
EIO0000003321 09/2020 19
Presentation
Incompatibility Detection
If an incompatibility is detected between Remote Graphic Display and the functional level of the
application, the following use cases occur:
Logic Remote Graphic Display Consequence System Object

Controller Firmware Version Updates
Firmware
Version
>= V1.4.x.y  V1.1IE40 for M221 is  The Remote Graphic Display Update of the Remote
displayed on TMH2GDB shows the Incompatible device or Graphic Display
at power-up incompatible application level firmware is not
 %SW185 = 0100 hex screen. possible with this
 %SW182 = 4: Remote Graphic Remote Graphic
Display firmware update Display firmware
required(1) version.
 %SW183 = 2: Incompatible version
of the display(1)
>=V1.4.x.y  V1.3IEx for M221 is  The Remote Graphic Display Updating the Remote
displayed on TMH2GDB shows the Incompatible device or Graphic Display
at power-up incompatible application level firmware is possible by
 %SW185 = 0103 hex screen. using an SD card
 %SW182 = 4: Remote Graphic script.
Display firmware update
required(1)
 %SW183 = 2: Incompatible version
of the display(1)
(1)
Refer to %SW182 and %SW183 for more details.
20 EIO0000003321 09/2020
Modicon TMH2GDB
Installation
EIO0000003321 09/2020
Chapter 2
Installation
Installation
Introduction
This chapter provides information related to the installation of the Remote Graphic Display.

Topic Page
Dimensions and Clearances 24
Mounting 26
Connecting the Remote Graphic Display 29
Updating the Firmware 35
EIO0000003321 09/2020 21
Installation
Before Starting
software, for a particular application, you must also consider any applicable local, regional, or
DANGER
Replace and secure all covers, accessories, hardware, cables, and wires and confirm that a
WARNING
22 EIO0000003321 09/2020
Installation
This equipment has been designed to operate outside of any hazardous location. Only install this
equipment in zones known to be free of a hazardous atmosphere.
DANGER
Install and use this equipment in non-hazardous locations only.
WARNING
Install and operate this equipment according to the conditions described in the section Technical
Presentation.
WARNING
and standards.
EIO0000003321 09/2020 23
Installation
Dimensions and Clearances
Introduction
This section describes the dimensions and the mounting clearances for the Remote Graphic
Display.
Dimensions
This illustration describes the external dimensions of the Remote Graphic Display:
24 EIO0000003321 09/2020
Installation
Minimum Clearances
WARNING
ventilation.
The Remote Graphic Display has been designed as an IP65 product when properly installed,
excluding the RJ45 connector. The Remote Graphic Display must be installed on the front panel
of the cabinet or enclosure to achieve the IP65 rating. Clearances must be respected when
installing the product.
There are four types of clearances between:
 The Remote Graphic Display and all sides of the cabinet (including the panel door).
 The Remote Graphic Display connector and the wiring ducts. This distance reduces
electromagnetic interference between the Remote Graphic Display and the wiring ducts.
 The Remote Graphic Display and other heat generating devices installed in the same cabinet.
 The Remote Graphic Display and other Remote Graphic Display on the same panel door.
This illustration describes the minimum clearances:
EIO0000003321 09/2020 25
Installation
Mounting
Overview
This section presents how to install the Remote Graphic Display on the cabinet panel.
Mounting Hole Layout

This diagram presents the drilling template for the Remote Graphic Display:
Prerequisites Before Installing the Remote Graphic Display

Before installing the Remote Graphic Display, verify that:
 The gasket must be uniform and undamaged.
 The installation panel or cabinet surface must be flat and smooth, with a tolerance of 0.5 mm
(0.019 in).
 The panel thickness must be between 1.5 mm and 6 mm if the cabinet panel is steel sheeting,
or between 3 mm and 6 mm if the cabinet panel is glass fiber reinforced plastic.
26 EIO0000003321 09/2020
Installation
Installing the Remote Graphic Display

This procedure describes how to install the Remote Graphic Display:
Step Action
1 Insert the anti-rotation tee into the Remote Graphic Display.
NOTE: The rotating torque that can be supported by the Remote Graphic Display is 6 N.m
(53.10 in-lb).
2 Insert the Remote Graphic Display on the cabinet panel.
EIO0000003321 09/2020 27
Installation
Step Action
3 Install the nut and tighten it with the socket wrench (ZB5AZ905).
(1) 1,5...6 mm (0.06...0.24 in) if steel sheet or 3...6 mm (0.12...0.24 in) if glass fiber reinforced
plastic (minimum GF30)
Cleaning the Remote Graphic Display

When the front panel of the Remote Graphic Display needs cleaning, wipe it with a soft cloth. If
necessary, use a neutral detergent.
NOTICE
Do not use any liquids containing acids, organic solvents, alcohol, or abrasive materials to clean
the unit.
Care must be taken when wiping the surface of the Remote Graphic Display. Inadvertently
pressing the keys while doing so may unintendedly engage programmed machine operations.
WARNING
Do not press any of the keys while cleaning the surface of the equipment.
28 EIO0000003321 09/2020
Installation
Connecting the Remote Graphic Display
Overview
The Remote Graphic Display must be connected only to the Serial or Serial 1 port of the logic
controller. These serial ports of the logic controllers provide the 5 Vdc power supply of the Remote
Graphic Display. The Remote Graphic Display must be the only device connected to these serial
ports (do not use a Tap-off box). The connection between the Remote Graphic Display and the
logic controller is RS-485 (Modbus protocol).
EIO0000003321 09/2020 29
Installation
Logic Controller Connection

The following graphics present the location of the Serial or Serial 1 port, depending on the logic
controller reference:
30 EIO0000003321 09/2020
Installation
EIO0000003321 09/2020 31
Installation
Pin Assignment
This illustration presents the pin assignment of the RJ45 connector:
Pin Signal Description

4 D1 Modbus SL: D1 (+/B) RS-485 2-wire
5 D0 Modbus SL: D0 (-/A) RS-485 2-wire
7 5 Vdc Power delivered by the logic controller
8 0 Vdc -
WARNING
Grounding
The grounding lug of the Remote Graphic Display must be connected to the ground terminal screw
of the cabinet.
This table presents the characteristics of the grounding connection:
Minimum wire gauge 2.5 mm² (AWG 14)
Lug size 6.35 x 0.81 mm (0.25 x 0.032 in)
Connection Female spade terminal (AMP 6392-1 or similar)
32 EIO0000003321 09/2020
Installation
Connecting Cables
You can use the following cable for connecting the Remote Graphic Display to the logic controller:
Reference Description Length

XBTZ9980 Modbus serial link cable (2 RJ45 male connectors) 2.5 m (8.20 ft)
VW3A1104R10 Modbus serial link cable (2 RJ45 male connectors) 1.0 m (3.28 ft)
This illustration presents the internal wiring of the RJ45 connection:
1 No connection 1
2 No connection 2
3 No connection 3
4 D1 4
5 D0 5
6 No connection 6
7 5 Vdc 7
8 0 Vdc 8
Shielding Shield Shielding
EIO0000003321 09/2020 33
Installation
WARNING
34 EIO0000003321 09/2020
Installation
Updating the Firmware
Presentation
Firmware updates can be downloaded to the Remote Graphic Display from the PC that is running
For details, refer to Downloading Firmware to the Remote Graphic Display (see Modicon M221,
EIO0000003321 09/2020 35
Installation
36 EIO0000003321 09/2020
Modicon TMH2GDB
How to Use the Display
EIO0000003321 09/2020
Chapter 3
How to Use the Remote Graphic Display
How to Use the Remote Graphic Display
Introduction
This chapter provides information related to the graphic screen presentations, the navigation, and
the password protection of the Remote Graphic Display.

Topic Page
Description 38
Navigation 39
Password Protection 41
EIO0000003321 09/2020 37
Description
Graphic Screen Description

This is a graphic screen example of the Remote Graphic Display:
This table describes the areas of the graphic screen:
Item Name Label Description

1 Header Alarm Informs you that at least 1 alarm is active on the Alarm View
page (see page 49).
NOTE: This field is empty if no alarm is active or if no Alarm
View (see page 77) page has been defined.
Page title –
Date and time –
2 Menus or Pages – Menus, submenus, parameters, values, or other content are
displayed in scrolling window format on five displayed lines.
3 Footer R1 to R4 Labels corresponding to actions if configured at a page level.
For more information, refer to Actions (see page 75).
Home Page
After connecting the Remote Graphic Display, it displays the home page that has been chosen in
EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic (see page 55).
The default home page is the Setup Menu that allows you to configure and monitor the general
parameters of your logic controller (see page 43).
38 EIO0000003321 09/2020
Navigation
Overview
This table describes the navigation controls of the Remote Graphic Display:
Name Function Comment

F1 key Executes actions defined with EcoStruxure For more information, refer to Actions
Machine Expert - Basic for that key. (see page 75).
MOD key Moves to the next selectable object. In a page with a scroll bar, this key is disabled.
ESC key Goes back to the previous page. You can go back up to 12 pages.
R1 to R4 keys Execute an action. The actions are either fixed, such as those
found in Setup pages, or defined/assigned with
EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic for
Operator Interface pages. For more
information, refer to Actions (see page 75).
Home key Goes back to the Home page. For more information, refer to Home Page
(see page 38).
Information Displays a contextual help page. The help pages are either fixed, such as those
key found in Setup pages, or defined/assigned with
EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic for
Operator Interface pages. For more
information on help pages, refer to the
Template Pages (see page 62).
F2 key Executes actions defined with EcoStruxure For more information, refer to Actions
Machine Expert - Basic for that key. (see page 75).
Touch wheel Depending on the page, it can either: –
Up/down  Select the next/previous elements
arrows displayed
 Increment/decrement the selected
object
Right/left Select the next/previous selectable object. In a page with a scroll bar, right/left arrows are
arrows disabled.
OK  Opens a menu, submenu, or page. For more information, refer to Edit Pages
 Enables modification for the numerical (see page 46).
value of a parameter.
NOTICE
Do not use hard or pointed objects to operate the device.
EIO0000003321 09/2020 39
Access Protection
The access to some pages can be restricted by a password. For more information, refer to
Password Protection (see page 41).
40 EIO0000003321 09/2020
Password Protection
Overview
You can use EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic software to define a password. If enabled, this
unique password helps to protect:
 the selected page(s) of the Operator Interface
 The Setup pages that can perform an action on the logic controller:
 Controller Setup
 Controller State
 Data Table
 Alarm Reset
For more information, refer to Set General Parameters (see page 60).
Password Management in the Remote Graphic Display

When you try to access a protected page on the Remote Graphic Display, you need to enter the
password:
If... Then ... Comment

The entered password is You can consult the pages. The password is valid for 10 minutes or
correct until you press the Home key.
The entered password is An error message appears. When leaving the error page, you can
incorrect enter the password again. If you cancel,
the Home page is displayed.
EIO0000003321 09/2020 41
42 EIO0000003321 09/2020
Modicon TMH2GDB
Setup Menu Functionality
EIO0000003321 09/2020
Chapter 4
Introduction
This chapter provides information related to the menus present in the Setup of the Remote Graphic
Display.

Topic Page
Setup Menu Presentation 44
Controller Setup Menu 45
Controller State Menu 47
Alarm Menu 49
Data Table Menu 51
EIO0000003321 09/2020 43
Setup Menu Presentation
Menu Structure
This table lists the menu and submenus present in the Setup Menu of the Remote Graphic Display:
Menu Submenu Comment

Controller Information Device Name –
Firmware Version
Last MAST cycle
Min. MAST cycle
Max. MAST cycle
Controller Setup Date and Time For more information, refer to the Controller Setup
Serial 2 Menu (see page 45).
Ethernet
Display Setup Language The language, the contrast and backlight timeout
Contrast values are saved inside the Remote Graphic
Backlight timeout Display.
The default backlight timeout is 10 minutes, it can
be set from 0 (no timeout) to 10 minutes maximum.
Controller State – For more information, refer to the Controller State
Menu (see page 47).
Controller Status Application Each status can have these values:
Boot App  OK
IO Bus  Not OK
Cartridge
Alarm Menu View For more information, refer to the Alarm Menu
History (see page 49).
Delete History
Data Table – For more information, refer to the Data Table Menu
(see page 51).
SD Card Information – It is a help page that explains how to transfer
firmware, application, and post configuration from:
 The logic controller to the SD card
 The SD card to the logic controller
NOTE: Keeping the backlight ON continuously reduces the lifetime of the device.
NOTICE
Set the Backlight timeout of the device between 1 and 10 minutes.
44 EIO0000003321 09/2020
Controller Setup Menu
Overview
This table lists the submenus that are present in the Controller Setup menu of the Setup:
Submenu Function Comment

Date and Time Allows you to set the logic controller The format of date and time can only be
internal date and time. configured in EcoStruxure Machine Expert -
Basic. Refer to Set the General Parameters
(see page 60).
Serial 2 Allows you to configure the Serial 2 Serial 1 cannot be configured as it interrupts
(depending on the parameters (1): the ongoing communication with the Remote
logic controller  Physical Medium Graphic Display.
reference)  Baud rate
 Parity
 Format
 Stop Bits
 Modbus Address
 Polarization
Ethernet Allows you to configure the Ethernet If the IP Address and Mask are incorrect, your
(depending on the parameter (1): logic controller is automatically configured with
logic controller  IP Mode the default values.
reference)  IP Address
 Mask
 Gateway
 Device Name
(1) The entered parameters are saved into the Post Configuration file. The parameters are retained after a
power cycle.
NOTE: For more information on how to modify the Serial 2 or Ethernet parameters, refer to Edit
Pages (see page 46).
EIO0000003321 09/2020 45
Edit Pages
This graphic presents the Edit IP page:
This procedure explains how to modify selected parameters in the Serial 2 and Ethernet
submenus:
Step Action
1 Select Setup → Controller Setup.
2 Select Serial 2 or Ethernet.
Result: The Serial 2 or Ethernet page is displayed.
3 Select the parameter with the touch wheel and press OK to modify it.
Result: One of these pages is displayed:
 Edit Parameter
 Edit IP
 Edit Name
4 Select the digit using the MOD key or right/left arrows.

5 Increment or decrement the selected digit using the touch wheel or up/down arrows. Turn the
touch wheel in the same direction for more than 2 seconds to accelerate the scrolling of digits.
6 Press:
 R1 (Valid) to apply the modification.
 R4 (Cancel) to discard the modification.
NOTE: Press the ESC key to discard the modification and go back to the previous page.
46 EIO0000003321 09/2020
Controller State Menu
Overview
The Controller State menu allows you to see the present state of your logic controller and perform
commands in the logic controller.
Remote Control Considerations

Care must be taken and provisions made for use of this product as a control device to avoid
inadvertent consequences of commanded machine operation, state changes, or alteration of data
memory or machine operating parameters.
WARNING
 Place operator devices of the control system near the machine or in a place where you have
full view of the machine.
 Protect operator commands against unauthorized access.
 If remote control is a necessary design aspect of the application, ensure that there is a local,
competent, and qualified observer present when operating from a remote location.
 Configure and install the Run/Stop input, if so equipped, or, other external means within the
application, so that local control over the starting or stopping of the device can be maintained
regardless of the remote commands sent to it.
WARNING
the Run/Stop input.
 Use the Run/Stop input to help prevent the unintentional start-up from a remote location.
EIO0000003321 09/2020 47
Logic Controller Commands

This procedure explains how to perform the logic controller commands:
Step Action
1 Select Setup → Controller State.
2 Press:
 R1 (Run) to start the logic controller
 R2 (Stop) to stop the logic controller
 R3 (Init) to initialize the logic controller
3 When a confirmation page is displayed, select Yes or No.

4 Press:
 R1 (Valid)
 R4 (Cancel)
For more information, refer to the Controller States and Behaviors part of your logic controller
programming guide.
48 EIO0000003321 09/2020
Alarm Menu
Overview
The Alarm Menu contains these submenus:
 View
 History
 Delete History
Alarm View
The Alarm View page displays the active alarms. Alarm messages are configured in EcoStruxure
Machine Expert - Basic. For more information, refer to the alarm definition (see page 77).
Alarms are associated with specific memory bits within the logic controller. Those bits are
monitored and, when TRUE, are included in the Alarm View.
When system bit %S122 is set to 1, the Alarm View page is displayed automatically when a rising
edge is detected on an alarm bit.
When system bit %S123 is set to 1, the backlight on the Remote Graphic Display turns red when
an alarm is active. For more information, refer to system bit (%S122 and %S123) description
NOTE: Alarm bit must be ON for at least 50 ms before it is included in the Alarm View.
NOTE: Alarms are not saved when the controller goes through a power cycle.
Alarm History
The History page displays a maximum of 40 alarm messages with the date and time when the
alarm either became active or was resolved, along with an up arrow to indicate when the alarm
became active and a down arrow when it is resolved. The most recent alarm is at the top of the list.
EIO0000003321 09/2020 49
Alarm Reset
The Alarm Reset page is used to clear the alarm history:
Step Action
1 Select Setup → Alarm Menu → Delete History.
Result: The Alarm Reset page is opened.
2 Press R1 (Delete) to clear the alarm history.
Result: The Alarm History page is empty.
50 EIO0000003321 09/2020
Data Table Menu
Overview
In the Data Table page, you can add/delete or modify the value of a variable:
 Memory objects
 System objects
 I/O objects
A maximum of 20 entries is displayed in this page.

NOTE: This table is not saved after a power cycle of your logic controller.
Remote Control Considerations

Care must be taken and provisions made for use of this product as a control device to avoid
inadvertent consequences of commanded machine operation, state changes, or alteration of data
memory or machine operating parameters.
WARNING
 Place operator devices of the control system near the machine or in a place where you have
full view of the machine.
 Protect operator commands against unauthorized access.
 If remote control is a necessary design aspect of the application, ensure that there is a local,
competent, and qualified observer present when operating from a remote location.
 Configure and install the Run/Stop input, if so equipped, or, other external means within the
application, so that local control over the starting or stopping of the device can be maintained
regardless of the remote commands sent to it.
EIO0000003321 09/2020 51
Object Types
These memory objects are available:
 System bit (%S)
 System word (%SW)
 Memory bit (%M)
 Memory word (%MW)
 Constant word (%KW)
 Memory double word (%MD)
These I/O objects are available:

 Input bit (%I)
 Output bit (%Q)
 Input word (%IW)
 Output word (%QW)
 Input status word (%IWS)
 Output status word (%QWS)
Add/Delete a Variable
This procedure explains how to add a variable in the Data Table page:
Step Action
1 Select Setup → Data Table.
2 Press R1 (Add).
Result: The Object Type page is displayed.
3 Select the object types.
For more information on object types, refer to the list (see page 52).
4 Press R1 (Select).
5 Enter:
 The address for a memory object.
 The module and channel values for an I/O object.
6 Press R3 (Edit) or use the touch wheel.

7 Select the displayed representation (Decimal or hexadecimal).
8 Press R1 (Add) to add the variable in the data table.
9 Repeat steps 2 to 8 to add another variable to your monitoring list.
NOTE: You can delete a variable from the table by pressing R2 (Delete).
52 EIO0000003321 09/2020
Edit a Variable
You can modify the value of an existing variable.
NOTE: Editing a variable is not allowed when the logic controller state is EMPTY.
Follow the procedures below when editing:
 A word or double word variable
 A memory bit variable
 An I/O bit variable
Edit a Word or a Double Word Variable

This procedure explains how to modify the value of a word or a double word variable in the Data
Table page:
Step Action
2 Select the word or double word variable to modify.
3 Press R3 (Edit) to modify the variable.
Result: The Edit Word or Edit DWord page is displayed.
4 Select the digit using the MOD key or right/left arrows.
5 Increment or decrement the selected digit using the touch wheel or up/down arrows.
6 Press:
 R1 (Apply) to apply the modification.
7 Repeat steps 2 to 6 to modify another word or double word variable.
Edit a Memory Bit Variable

This procedure explains how to modify the value of a memory bit variable in the Data Table page:
Step Action
2 Select the memory bit variable to modify.
Result: The Edit bit page is displayed.
4 Select Off or On using the touch wheel or up/down arrows.
5 Press:
6 Repeat steps 2 to 5 to modify another memory bit variable.
EIO0000003321 09/2020 53
Edit an I/O Bit Variable

Forcing input and output values in a running logic controller can have serious consequences to the
operation of a machine or process. Only those who understand the implications in the controlling
logic, and who understand the consequences of forced I/O on the machine or process, should
attempt to use this function.
WARNING
You must have prior knowledge of the process and the controlled equipment before attempting
to force logic controller physical inputs/outputs, or writing values to logic controller memory
locations.
This procedure explains how to modify the value of an I/O bit variable in the Data Table page:
Step Action
2 Select the I/O bit variable to modify.
Result: The Edit I/O bit page is displayed.
4 Select Off or On using the touch wheel or up/down arrows.
5 Press:
 R2 (Force) to force the I/O value.
 R3 (Unforce) to unforce the I/O value.
6 Repeat steps 2 to 5 to modify another I/O bit variable.
54 EIO0000003321 09/2020
Modicon TMH2GDB
Creating Operator Interface
EIO0000003321 09/2020
Chapter 5
Creating an Operator Interface with EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic
Creating an Operator Interface with EcoStruxure Machine

Expert - Basic
Introduction
This chapter provides information on how to build an Operator Interface in the Display tab of

Topic Page
Prerequisite 56
EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic Display Tab 58
General Properties 60
Add/Delete a Page 62
Configure a Page 71
Export/Import a Page 74
Actions 75
Alarm Definition 77
EIO0000003321 09/2020 55
Prerequisite

To configure the Serial/Serial 1 line in EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic:
Step Action
1 Select the Configuration tab.
2 Click the SL1 (Serial Line) node in the hardware tree.
3 Select TMH2GDB in the Protocol field.
The Remote Graphic Display uses fixed serial line communication parameters:
4 Click Apply.
Result: The serial line is configured to communicate with your Remote Graphic Display and the
Display tab is activated.
5 Click the Display node that appears below the SL1 (Serial Line) node in the hardware tree to
display device settings.
56 EIO0000003321 09/2020
This graphic presents the Device settings in the Configuration tab of EcoStruxure Machine Expert
- Basic:
EIO0000003321 09/2020 57
EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic Display Tab
Overview
The Operator Interface is a component of the application.
 For more information on creating projects, refer to Creating Projects With EcoStruxure Machine
Expert - Basic (see EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic, Operating Guide).
 For more information on transferring applications, refer to Downloading and Uploading
Applications (see EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic, Operating Guide).
The Operator Interface is built with the Display tab in EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic:
1 Tree
2 Buttons
3 Visualization area
4 Editable area
58 EIO0000003321 09/2020
Button Description
The buttons apply to the pages of the Operator Interface:
Button Menu Function

AddPage Add a page (see page 62).
DeletePage Delete a customized page (see page 70).
ExportPage Export a page (see page 74).
ImportPage Import a page (see page 74).
Tree Description
This table lists the menus and submenus present in the tree in the Display tab:
Menu Submenu Comment

Messages – If there is an error detected, a message is displayed.
General F1 Key To set the general parameters (see page 60).
Properties F2 Key
Setup Alarm View To define a set of alarms (see page 77).
Operator – To create customized menus, submenus and pages
Interface with the predefined templates (see page 62).
EIO0000003321 09/2020 59
General Properties
Overview
The General Properties node allows you to set the general parameters of the Remote Graphic
Display.
You may select time and date formats, the home page for the Operator Interface that you have
defined, and the password used for the Remote Graphic Display. The password is effective in
helping to protect the Operator pages that you have selected to be protected, and, if you choose,
the Setup pages that affect the logic controller state and data.
NOTE: The page defined as the home page cannot be protected by password. Setting a page
protected by password as the home page automatically removes its password protection.
A password, randomly selected, is automatically assigned as a default every time you create a new
application. In addition, the Password protect Setup option is selected by default.
Set General Properties

This procedure explains how to set the general properties of the Display tab:
Step Action Comments

1 Select the General Properties node in the tree. –
2 Select the date format in the Date format field. The date and time formats are used in the
standard header and in the alarm history.
3 Select the time format in the Time format field.
4 Enter a password to protect the selected Operator NOTE: You may change the default password,
Interface pages and, optionally, the Setup. or unselect the optional Setup protection.
5 Activate the Password protect Setup check box to use the For more information, refer to Password
password to protect the Setup. Protection (see page 41).
6 Select the home page. The home page is the first page The Setup menu page is selected by default. Any
displayed once your application has been downloaded other operator interface pages you have created
into the controller and also when you press the Home can also be selected. For more information, refer
button on the Remote Graphic Display. to Add a page (see page 62).
60 EIO0000003321 09/2020
F1 and F2 Key Assignments

This procedure explains how to assign actions to F1 Key and F2 Key:
Step Action
1 Select the F1 Key or F2 Key node in the tree.
2 Select the Action type that you want to associate with the key. For more information, refer to
Action (see page 75).
EIO0000003321 09/2020 61
Add/Delete a Page
Overview
To build your Operator Interface, you need to create pages in the Display tab by using templates.
Add a Page
This table explains how to add a page in the Operator Interface:
Step Action
1
Click the (AddPage) button.

Result: The Select a page template window is displayed.
2 Select the template page:
 Menu template (see page 63)
 Monitor template (see page 64)
 Control table template (see page 65)
 Bargraph template (see page 66)
 Double bargraph template (see page 67)
 VU meter template (see page 68)
 Toggle control table template (see page 69)
3 Click Ok to validate.
Result: The page is added in the tree (see page 59).
4 Configure the properties of the page as described in Configure a page (see page 71).
5 Repeat steps 1 to 3 to add another page in your Operator Interface.
62 EIO0000003321 09/2020
Menu Template
A menu page allows the user to navigate between several pages.
The user can press Select (R1) button to display the selected page.
To configure a menu page:
Step Action
1 Select the Elements node in the tree.
2 Enter the text to display.
3 Select a Destination page.
4 Click Add.
5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 to configure other destination pages. You can add a maximum of 30
elements to the page.
6 Configure the R2, R3, and R4 Key assignments (see page 73).
TMH2GDB example:
Elements node in EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic example:
EIO0000003321 09/2020 63
Monitor Template
A monitor page allows the user to monitor memory or I/O variables.
If the Write access is activated, the user can press Edit (R1) button to modify the selected variable
value.
To configure the monitor page:
Step Action
2 Enter the text to display.
3 Enter the variable to monitor.
Refer to the available variable type (see page 72) or refer to the text that is displayed when the
pointer is on Variable.
4 Click Add.
5 On the created line, activate the Write access check box to allow the user to modify the variable
value.
6 Repeat steps 2 to 5 to configure other variables to monitor. You can add a maximum of 30
TMH2GDB view:
64 EIO0000003321 09/2020
Control Table Template

A control page allows the user to control memory or I/O bit values.
This page allows you to associate a text string to each bit value.
If the Write access is activated, the user can press On (R1) or Off (R2) buttons to change the
selected bit value.
To configure the control page:
Step Action
2 Enter the variable to control.
3 Enter the Text when value is TRUE.
4 Enter the Text when value is FALSE.
5 Click Add.
value.
7 Repeat steps 2 to 6 to configure other variables to monitor. You can add a maximum of 30
8 Configure the R3 and R4 Key assignments (see page 73).
TMH2GDB view:
EIO0000003321 09/2020 65
Bargraph Template
A bargraph page allows the user to control a memory or I/O variable value with a bargraph
representation of the variable value.
If the Write access is activated, the user can press Edit (R1) button to change the value.
To configure the bargraph page:
Step Action
3 Enter the Unit.
4 Enter the Minimum scale value.
5 Enter the Maximum scale value.
6 Activate the Write access check box to allow the user to modify the variable value.
TMH2GDB view:
66 EIO0000003321 09/2020
Double Bargraph Template

A double bargraph page allows the user to control 2 memory or I/O variables value with a bar graph
representation for each variable value.
If the Write access is activated, the user can edit the BarGraph1 variable with the Edit.1 (R1) button
and the BarGraph2 variable with Edit.2 (R2)
To configure the double bargraph page:
Step Action
3 Enter the Unit.
7 Repeat steps 2 to 6 to configure the second variable. You can add a maximum of 30 elements
to the page.
8 Configure the R3 and R4 Key assignments (see page 73).
TMH2GDB view:
EIO0000003321 09/2020 67
VU Meter Template
A VU meter page allows the user to control a memory or I/O variable value with a VU meter
representation of the variable value.
If the Write access is activated, the user can press Edit (R1) button to change the value.
To configure the VU meter page:
Step Action
3 Enter the Unit.
68 EIO0000003321 09/2020
TMH2GDB view:
Toggle Control Table Template

A toggle control page allows the user to control memory or I/O bit value.
This page allows you to associate a text string to each bit value.
If the Write access is activated, the user can press Not (R1) button to toggle the selected bit (TRUE
to FALSE or FALSE to TRUE).
To configure the toggle control page:
Step Action
3 Enter the Text when value is TRUE.
4 Enter the Text when value is FALSE.
5 Click Add.
value.
7 Repeat steps 2 to 6 to configure other variables to control. You can add a maximum of 30
EIO0000003321 09/2020 69
TMH2GDB view:
Delete a Page
This table explains how to delete a page in the Display tab:
Step Action
1 Click the page that you want to delete under the Operator Interface node in the tree.
2
Click the (Delete Page) button, or right-click and choose Delete page.
Result: A confirmation window appears.
3 Click Yes.
Result: The page is deleted.
70 EIO0000003321 09/2020
Configure a Page
Overview
In the tree, the added page is represented as follows:
 Page ID
 Elements
 R1 key (if available)
 R3 key
Page Properties
This procedure explains how to define the Page properties:
Step Action Comment

1 Click the page ID node in the tree. You can rename the page ID by double-
Result: The Page properties appear. clicking or right-clicking and choosing
Rename page.
2 Enter a page title in the Title field. –
3 Enter a help text in the Help text field if needed. The help text is displayed when pressing the
Information key on the Remote Graphic
Display. (1)
4 Activate/deactivate the Password protect check box For more information, refer to Password
to protect this page with the password or to exclude Protection (see page 41).
this page from the protection.
(1) If no text is entered, the Information key has no effect on this page.
The Page index displayed is automatically generated by EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic and
can be written in a user program to display the page, or read in a user program to detect the page
currently being displayed.
For more information, refer to system word (%SW184) description (see Modicon M221, Logic
EIO0000003321 09/2020 71
Elements
The configuration of elements depends on the template.
Enter customized text and/or appropriate values according to each template. For more information,
refer to Template Pages (see page 62).
You can add a maximum of 30 elements to a page.
This table describes the object types that can be entered in the Variable, Unit, Minimum, and
Maximum fields for the template:
%I %Q %IW %QW %IWS %QWS %M or %S %MW %KW %MD %SW Numeric Text
%MWi. value
Xk
Variable/Variable1
Monitor x x x x x x x x x x x x – –
Control x x – – – – x x – – – – – –
table
Toggle x x – – – – x x – – – – – –
Control
table
Bargraph – – x x – – – – x – x x – –
Double – – x x – – – – x – x x – –
Bargraph
VU – – x x – – – – x – x x – –
meter
Variable/Variable2
Double – – x x – – – – x – x x – –
Bargraph
Unit
Bargraph – – – – – – – – – – – – – x
Double – – – – – – – – – – – – – x
Bargraph
VU – – – – – – – – – – – – – x
meter
72 EIO0000003321 09/2020
%I %Q %IW %QW %IWS %QWS %M or %S %MW %KW %MD %SW Numeric Text
%MWi. value
Xk
Minimum/Maximum
Bargraph – – – – – – – – – – – – x –
Double – – – – – – – – – – – – x –
Bargraph
VU – – – – – – – – – – – – x –
meter
Fill in the fields following the rules described in Language Objects (see EcoStruxure Machine
Expert - Basic, Generic Functions Library Guide).
R1, R2, R3, and R4 Key Assignments

When a key appears in the tree, you can assign an action and a label to it:
Step Action
1 Select the key node in the tree.
2 Select the Action type that you want to associate with the key. For more information, refer to
action (see page 75).
3 You can optionally rename the default label that is displayed above the corresponding key of the
Remote Graphic Display. To do so, double-click the node or right-click and choose Rename.
NOTE: The templates have a key configured by default to go to the Alarm View page. You can
choose to change the default action and the label of this key.
EIO0000003321 09/2020 73
Export/Import a Page
Overview
Any page of the Operator Interface can be:
 Exported to the PC
 Imported from the PC
Export a Page
To export a page, click the (ExportPage) button.

The page is saved in a specific format on your PC.
Import a Page
To import a page, click the (ImportPage) button.

The page can then be imported in the same application, or in another application, with EcoStruxure
74 EIO0000003321 09/2020
Actions
Overview
An action can be associated to some keys:
 R1, R2, R3, or R4 Key (when available) for each page. Refer to R1, R2, R3, and R4 Key
Assignments (see page 73).
 F1 Key or F2 Key for all the pages. Refer to F1 and F2 Key Assignments (see page 61).
The action is executed when pressing the keys.
Defining Actions
There are two types of actions:
 Function
 Navigation
Function
Forcing input and output values in a running logic controller can have serious consequences to the
operation of a machine or process. Only those who understand the implications in the controlling
logic, and who understand the consequences of forced I/O on the machine or process, should
attempt to use this function.
WARNING
You must have prior knowledge of the process and the controlled equipment before attempting
to force logic controller physical inputs/outputs, or writing values to logic controller memory
locations.
These functions are available:

 WRITE_VALUE
 FORCE
 UNFORCE
 INCREMENT
 NOT
EIO0000003321 09/2020 75
This graphic presents an example of a function in the Display tab:
Function Object Types

This table describes the object types that can be entered in the Variable, Value, Increment Step,
Minimum and Maximum fields for the functions, when appropriate:
%I %Q %IW %QW %IWS %QWS %M or %S %MW %KW %MD %SW Nu- Text
%MWi. meric
Xk value
Variable
WRITE_ – x – x – – x x x – x x – –
VALUE
FORCE x x – – – – – – – – – – – –
UNFORCE x x – – – – – – – – – – – –
INCREMENT – – – x – – – – x – x – – –
NOT – x – – – – x x – – – – – –
Value
WRITE_ x x x x x x x x x x x x x –
VALUE
Increment Step
INCREMENT – – – – – – – – x – – – x –
Minimum/Maximum
INCREMENT – – – – – – – – – – – – x –
Fill in the fields following the rules described in the part Language Objects (see EcoStruxure
Machine Expert - Basic, Generic Functions Library Guide).
Navigation
The Navigation action allows you to go to another page.
In a dropdown list, you can choose a Destination page that corresponds to:
 Any page defined in your Operator Interface
 A page from the Setup
76 EIO0000003321 09/2020
Alarm Definition
Overview
The Alarm View page allows you to define a customized set of alarm messages associated with
memory or I/O bits. The text of the alarm is then displayed on the Remote Graphic Display when
a rising edge of the associated bit is detected. You can define a maximum of 20 alarm messages.
NOTE: Alarms are not saved when the controller goes through a power cycle.
For more information on the alarm in the Remote Graphic Display, refer to the Alarm Menu
(see page 49).
Alarms have to be first configured in the Alarm View > Elements page of the Display tab in
Alarm Configuration
This graphic presents the Alarm View > Elements page of the Display tab:
Enter customized Alarm text and Variable values.

The object types that can be entered in the Variable field are:
 %I
 %Q
 %M
 %S
 %MWi.Xk
Fill in the field following the rules described in the part Language Objects (see EcoStruxure
Machine Expert - Basic, Generic Functions Library Guide).
EIO0000003321 09/2020 77
78 EIO0000003321 09/2020
Modicon TMH2GDB
Glossary
EIO0000003321 09/2020
Glossary
!
%I
According to the IEC standard, %I represents an input bit (for example, a language object of type
digital IN).
%IW
According to the IEC standard, %IW represents an input word register (for example, a language
object of type analog IN).
%KW
According to the IEC standard, %KW represents a constant word.
%MW
According to the IEC standard, %MW represents a memory word register (for example, a language
object of type memory word).
%Q
According to the IEC standard, %Q represents an output bit (for example, a language object of type
digital OUT).
%QW
According to the IEC standard, %QW represents an output word register (for example, a language
object of type analog OUT).
%S
According to the IEC standard, %S represents a system bit.
%SW
According to the IEC standard, %SW represents a system word.
B
Boot application
(boot application) The binary file that contains the application. Usually, it is stored in the controller
and allows the controller to boot on the application that the user has generated.
D
DWORD
(double word) Encoded in 32-bit format.
EIO0000003321 09/2020 79
Glossary
E
EN
EN identifies one of many European standards maintained by CEN (European Committee for
Standardization), CENELEC (European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization), or ETSI
(European Telecommunications Standards Institute).
Ethernet
A physical and data link layer technology for LANs, also known as IEEE 802.3.
I
I/O
(input/output)
ID
(identifier/identification)
IEC
(international electrotechnical commission) A non-profit and non-governmental international
standards organization that prepares and publishes international standards for electrical,
electronic, and related technologies.
IP
(Internet protocol Part of the TCP/IP protocol family that tracks the Internet addresses of devices,
routes outgoing messages, and recognizes incoming messages.
M
master task
A processor task that is run through its programming software. The master task has 2 sections:
 IN: Inputs are copied to the IN section before execution of the master task.
 OUT: Outputs are copied to the OUT section after execution of the master task.
ms
(millisecond)
R
RJ45
A standard type of 8-pin connector for network cables defined for Ethernet.
RS-485
A standard type of serial communication bus, based on 2 wires (also known as EIA RS-485).
80 EIO0000003321 09/2020
Glossary
W
WORD
A type encoded in a 16-bit format.
EIO0000003321 09/2020 81
Glossary
82 EIO0000003321 09/2020
Modicon TMH2GDB
Index
EIO0000003321 09/2020
Index
A E
action electromagnetic susceptibility, 17
definition, 75 enclosure requirements, 16
function, 75 environmental characteristics, 16
key assignments, 61, 73
navigation, 76
object types, 76 F
adding/deleting pages in operator interface, function, 75
62 object types, 76
alarm
alarm reset, 50
configuration, 77 G
alarm history, 49 general properties, 60
alarm view, 49 graphic screen, 38
alarms, defining, 77 grounding, 32
B H
bargraph templates, 66 home page, 38
C K
certifications and standards, 18 keys, assigning in operator interface, 75
clearances, 24
connection, 29
control table templates, 65 M
menu templates, 63
monitor templates, 64
D mounting, 26
description
display, 15
physical, 14 O
system, 14 object types, 52
dimensions, 24 operating interface
display tab creating, 55
button description, 59 operator interface
prerequisite, 56 adding/deleting pages in, 62
set properties, 60 assigning keys in, 75
tree description, 59 defining alarms in, 77
double bargraph templates, 67
EIO0000003321 09/2020 83
Index
P U
page updating the Remote Graphic Display firm-
add, 62 ware, 35
configuring, 71
deleting, 70
edit, 46 V
export, 74 variable
home, 38 add, 52
import, 74 delete, 52
properties, 71 edit, 53, 53, 53, 54
password VU meter templates, 68
management, 41
password-protecting the Remote Graphic
Display, 41
pin assignment, 32
properties, general, 60
R
Remote Graphic Display firmware, updating,
35
S
serial line configuration, 56
setup menus, 43
T
template
elements, 72
TMH2GDB
connecting the Remote Graphic Display,
29
creating an operator interface for the, 55
general properties of, 60
operator interface, adding/deleting pages
in, 62
password-protecting the Remote Graphic
Display, 41
setup menus, 43
using the Remote Graphic Display, 37
toggle control table template, 69
84 EIO0000003321 09/2020
Modicon TMC2
EIO0000003329 12/2018
Modicon TMC2
Cartridges
Programming Guide
12/2018
EIO0000003329.00
please notify us.
2 EIO0000003329 12/2018
Table of Contents
About the Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Chapter 1 I/O Configuration General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
I/O Configuration General Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
General Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Using Cartridges in a Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Configuring Cartridges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Chapter 2 TMC2 Standard Cartridges Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . 15
TMC2AI2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
TMC2TI2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
TMC2AQ2V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
TMC2AQ2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
TMC2SL1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Chapter 3 TMC2 Application Cartridges Configuration . . . . . . . . . . 29
TMC2HOIS01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
TMC2PACK01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
TMC2CONV01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Chapter 4 TMC2 Analog Cartridge Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
TMC2 Analog Cartridge Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Index ......................................... 41
EIO0000003329 12/2018 3
4 EIO0000003329 12/2018
Safety Information
NOTICE
EIO0000003329 12/2018 5
PLEASE NOTE
6 EIO0000003329 12/2018
About the Book
At a Glance
Document Scope
This document describes the software configuration of the TMC2 cartridges for logic controllers
supported by EcoStruxure Machine Expert – Basic. For further information, refer to the separate
documents provided in the EcoStruxure Machine Expert – Basic online help.
Validity Note
Related Documents

EIO0000003282 (FRA)
EIO0000003283 (GER)
EIO0000003284 (SPA)
EIO0000003285 (ITA)
EIO0000003286 (CHS)
EIO0000003287 (POR)
EIO0000003288 (TUR)
EIO0000003298 (FRA)
EIO0000003299 (GER)
EIO0000003300 (SPA)
EIO0000003301 (ITA)
EIO0000003302 (CHS)
EIO0000003303 (POR)
EIO0000003304 (TUR)
EIO0000003314 (FRA)
EIO0000003315 (GER)
EIO0000003316 (SPA)
EIO0000003317 (ITA)
EIO0000003318 (CHS)
EIO0000003319 (POR)
EIO0000003320 (TUR)
EIO0000003329 12/2018 7
Modicon TMC2 Cartridges- Hardware Guide EIO0000003337 (ENG)
EIO0000003338 (FRA)
EIO0000003339 (GER)
EIO0000003340 (SPA)
EIO0000003341 (ITA)
EIO0000003342 (CHS)
EIO0000003343 (POR)
EIO0000003344 (TUR)
at https://www.schneider-electric.com/en/download
WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
WARNING
8 EIO0000003329 12/2018
Modicon TMC2
I/O Configuration General Information
EIO0000003329 12/2018
Chapter 1
Introduction
This chapter provides general information to help you configure TMC2 cartridges in EcoStruxure
Machine Expert – Basic.

Topic Page
I/O Configuration General Practices 10
General Description 11
Using Cartridges in a Configuration 12
Configuring Cartridges 13
EIO0000003329 12/2018 9
I/O Configuration General Practices
Match Software and Hardware Configuration

The I/O that may be embedded in your controller is independent of the I/O that you may have
added in the form of I/O expansion. It is important that the logical I/O configuration within your
program matches the physical I/O configuration of your installation. If you add or remove any
physical I/O to or from the I/O expansion bus or, depending on the controller reference, to or from
the controller (in the form of cartridges), then you must update your application configuration. This
is also true for any field bus devices you may have in your installation. Otherwise, there is the
potential that the expansion bus or field bus no longer function while the embedded I/O that may
be present in your controller continues to operate.
WARNING
Update the configuration of your program each time you add or delete any type of I/O expansions
on your I/O bus, or you add or delete any devices on your field bus.
10 EIO0000003329 12/2018
General Description
Introduction
The TMC2 cartridges connect to Modicon TM221C Logic Controllers to increase the number of
I/Os or serial lines available on the controller.
Cartridges can be either:
 Analog cartridges
 Serial line cartridges
Cartridge Features
The following table describes the TMC2 cartridge features:
Reference Description
TMC2AI2 TMC2 cartridge with 2 analog voltage or current inputs (0...10 V, 0...20 mA, 4...20 mA),
(see page 16) 12 bits
TMC2TI2 TMC2 cartridge with 2 analog temperature inputs (thermocouple, RTD), 14 bits
(see page 18)
TMC2AQ2V TMC2 cartridge with 2 analog voltage outputs (0...10 V), 12 bits
(see page 21)
TMC2AQ2C TMC2 cartridge with 2 analog current outputs (4...20 mA), 12 bits
(see page 22)
TMC2SL1 TMC2 cartridge with 1 serial line (RS232 or RS485)
(see page 23)
TMC2HOIS01 TMC2 application cartridge with 2 analog voltage or current inputs for hoisting load
(see page 30) cells
TMC2PACK01 TMC2 application cartridge with 2 analog voltage or current inputs for packaging
(see page 32)
TMC2CONV01 TMC2 application cartridge with 1 serial line for conveying
(see page 34)
EIO0000003329 12/2018 11
Using Cartridges in a Configuration
Adding a Cartridge
TMC2 cartridges can be connected to Modicon TM221C Logic Controller with 1 or 2 cartridge slots.
NOTE: It is not possible to add 2 serial line cartridges to the same logic controller. For more
information on cartridge compatibility with specific controllers, refer to the Hardware Guide of your
logic controller.
The following steps explain how to add a cartridge to a logic controller in an EcoStruxure Machine
Expert - Basic configuration:
Step Description Result

1 Click the Configuration tab in the –
EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic
window.
2 In the hardware catalog area of the –
window, select M221 Cartridges.
3 Select a cartridge reference. A description of the physical characteristics of the selected
cartridge appears in the bottom right-hand corner of the
EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic window.
4 Drag and drop the cartridge onto an The cartridge is added to the MyController → IO Bus area of
empty cartridge slot of a Modicon the device tree.
TM221C Logic Controller logic For serial line cartridges, the SL2 (Serial line) node appears.
controller. For analog cartridges, the Analog inputs or Analog outputs
subnode appears immediately below the cartridge reference.
The following information about the selected cartridge is
displayed in the lower central area of the EcoStruxure
Machine Expert - Basic window:
 Information about the current status of the cartridge.
 For application cartridges, a list of project templates
available for the cartridge.
Replacing an Existing Cartridge

To replace an existing cartridge with a difference reference, drag and drop the new cartridge onto
the cartridge to be replaced.
A message appears asking you to confirm the operation. Click Yes to continue.
Removing a Cartridge
To remove a cartridge from a controller, either click on the cartridge and press the Delete key, or
right-click on the cartridge and click Remove on the contextual menu that appears.
If the cartridge contains at least one address being used in the user logic of the program, a
message appears asking you to confirm the operation. Click Yes to continue.
12 EIO0000003329 12/2018
Configuring Cartridges
Overview
You can configure cartridges on:
 The Configuration tab
 The Programming tab
Displaying Configuration Details

The Configuration tab allows you to configure cartridge modules.
The steps below describe how to view the configuration of digital inputs on the Configuration tab:
Step Description
1 Select the Configuration tab.
2 For analog cartridges, select Cartridge 1 or Cartridge 2 in the device tree on the left of the
EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic window then click on the Analog inputs or Analog
outputs subnode.
For serial line cartridges, select SL2 (Serial line) in the device tree on the left of the
EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic window
The properties of the selected cartridge are displayed.
3 Refer to TMC2 Standard Cartridges Configuration (see page 15) or TMC2 Application
Cartridges Configuration (see page 29) for configuration details.
EIO0000003329 12/2018 13
Displaying Programming Properties

The Programming tab allows you to configure programming-related properties of analog
cartridges, such as symbols and comments.
To display analog cartridge properties in the Programming tab:
Step Description
2 Click Tools → I/O objects → Analog inputs or Tools → I/O objects → Analog outputs
A list of I/O addresses appears in the lower central area of the EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic
window.
3 Scroll down to the range of addresses corresponding to the cartridge you are configuring. The
following properties are displayed:
 Used. Whether the address is being used in your program
 Address. The analog input or analog output address. Refer to I/O Addressing (see EcoStruxure
Machine Expert - Basic, Generic Functions Library Guide) for details.
 Symbol. An optional symbol associated with the address.
Double-click in the Symbol column and type the name of a symbol to associate with this input.
If a symbol already exists, right-click in the Symbol column and choose Search and Replace to
find and replace occurrences of this symbol in the application.
 Comment. An optional comment associated with the address.
Double-click in the Comment column and type a comment to associate with this address.
14 EIO0000003329 12/2018
Modicon TMC2
TMC2 Standard Cartridges Configuration
EIO0000003329 12/2018
Chapter 2
Introduction
This chapter describes how to configure the TMC2 standard cartridges.

Topic Page
TMC2AI2 16
TMC2TI2 18
TMC2AQ2V 21
TMC2AQ2C 22
TMC2SL1 23
EIO0000003329 12/2018 15
TMC2AI2
Introduction
The TMC2AI2 is a standard cartridge featuring 2 analog voltage or current input channels with 12-
bit resolution.
The channel input types are:
 0...10 V
 0...20 mA
 4...20 mA
For further hardware information, refer to TMC2AI2 (see Modicon TMC2, Cartridges, Hardware
Guide).
If you have physically wired the analog channel for a voltage signal and you configure the channel
for a current signal in EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic, you may damage the analog circuit.
NOTICE
Verify that the physical wiring of the analog circuit is compatible with the software configuration
for the analog channel.
16 EIO0000003329 12/2018
Configuring the Module

For each input, you can define:

Used True/False False Indicates whether the address is being used in a
program.
Address %IW0.x0y - The address of the input channel, where x is the
module number and y is the channel number
Type Not used Not used Select the mode of the channel.
0 - 10 V
0 - 20 mA
4 - 20 mA
Scope Normal Normal The range of values for a channel.
Min. 0 - 10 V -32768...32767 0 Specifies the lower measurement limit.
0 - 20 mA 0
4 - 20 mA 4000
Max. 0 - 10 V -32768...32767 10000 Specifies the upper measurement limit.
0 - 20 mA 20000
4 - 20 mA 20000
Filter 0...100 0 Specifies the filtering value. Multiply by the Filter
Unit value to obtain the filtering time.
Filter Unit 100 ms 100 ms Specifies the unit of time for the filtering value.
Units - - -
EIO0000003329 12/2018 17
TMC2TI2
Introduction
The TMC2TI2 is a standard cartridge featuring 2 analog input channels with 14-bit resolution.
 K Thermocouple
 J Thermocouple
 R Thermocouple
 S Thermocouple
 B Thermocouple
 E Thermocouple
 T Thermocouple
 N Thermocouple
 C Thermocouple
 PT100
 PT1000
 NI100
 NI1000
For further hardware information, refer to TMC2TI2 (see Modicon TMC2, Cartridges, Hardware
Guide).
NOTICE
18 EIO0000003329 12/2018


Used True/False False Indicates whether the address is being used
in a program.
Address %IW0.x0y - The address of the input channel, where x is
the module number and y is the channel
number
Type K Thermocouple K Thermocouple Choose the mode of the channel.
J Thermocouple
R Thermocouple
S Thermocouple
B Thermocouple
E Thermocouple
T Thermocouple
N Thermocouple
C Thermocouple
PT100
PT1000
NI100
NI1000
Scope Normal Normal Choose the temperature units for a channel.
Celsius (0.1°C)
Fahrenheit
(0.1°F) (except
Thermocouple B
and C)
Fahrenheit
(0.2°F) (for
Thermocouple B
and C only)
Min. Temperature See the table below Specifies the lower measurement limit.
Max. Temperature See the table below Specifies the upper measurement limit.
Filter 0...100 0 Specifies the filtering value. Multiply by the
Filter Unit value to obtain the filtering time.
Filter Unit 100 ms 100 ms Specifies the unit of time for the filtering
value.
Units See the table below Displays the temperature unit configured.
EIO0000003329 12/2018 19
Type Customized Celsius Fahrenheit

Min. Max. Min. Max. Units Min. Max. Units
K Thermocouple -32768 32767 -2000 13000 0.1 °C -3280 23720 0.1 °F
J Thermocouple -32768 32767 -2000 10000 0.1 °C -3280 18320 0.1 °F
R Thermocouple -32768 32767 0 17600 0.1 °C 320 32000 0.1 °F
S Thermocouple -32768 32767 0 17600 0.1 °C 320 32000 0.1 °F
B Thermocouple -32768 32767 0 18200 0.1 °C 160 16540 0.2 °F
E Thermocouple -32768 32767 -2000 8000 0.1 °C -3280 14720 0.1 °F
T Thermocouple -32768 32767 -2000 4000 0.1 °C -3280 7520 0.1 °F
N Thermocouple -32768 32767 -2000 13000 0.1 °C -3280 23720 0.1 °F
C Thermocouple -32768 32767 0 23150 0.1 °C 160 20995 0.2 °F
PT100 -32768 32767 -2000 8500 0.1 °C -3280 15620 0.1 °F
PT1000 -32768 32767 -2000 6000 0.1 °C -3280 11120 0.1 °F
NI100 -32768 32767 -600 1800 0.1 °C -760 3560 0.1 °F
NI1000 -32768 32767 -600 1800 0.1 °C -760 3560 0.1 °F
20 EIO0000003329 12/2018
TMC2AQ2V
Introduction
The TMC2AQ2V is a standard cartridge featuring 2 analog voltage output channels with 12-bit
resolution.
The channel output types are:
 0...10 V
For further hardware information, refer to TMC2AQ2V (see Modicon TMC2, Cartridges, Hardware
Guide).
NOTICE
Configuring the Cartridge Module

For each output, you can define:

in a program.
Address %QW0.x0y - Shows the address of the output channel,
where x is the cartridge number and y is the
channel number
Type 0 - 10 V 0 - 10 V The mode of the channel.
Fallback value Min....Max. 0 (Min. if 0 is not Specifies the fallback value of the output
in the range) channel.
Units - - -
EIO0000003329 12/2018 21
TMC2AQ2C
Introduction
The TMC2AQ2C is a standard cartridge featuring 2 analog current output channels with 12-bit
resolution.
The channel output types are:
 4...20 mA
For further hardware information, refer to TMC2AQ2C (see Modicon TMC2, Cartridges, Hardware
Guide).
NOTICE
Configuring the Cartridge Module

For each output, you can define:

in a program.
Address %QW0.x0y - Shows the address of the output channel,
where x is the cartridge number and y is the
channel number
Type 4 - 20 mA 4 - 20 mA The mode of the channel.
Min. 4 - 20 mA -32768...32767 4000 Specifies the lower measurement limit.
Max. 4 - 20 mA -32768...32767 20000 Specifies the upper measurement limit.
Fallback value Min....Max. 0 (Min. if 0 is not Specifies the fallback value of the output
in the range) channel.
Units - -
22 EIO0000003329 12/2018
TMC2SL1
Introduction
The TMC2SL1 is a standard cartridge module featuring 1 serial line.
For further hardware information, refer to TMC2SL1 (see Modicon TMC2, Cartridges, Hardware
Guide).
The serial line can be configured for any one of the following protocols:
 Modbus RTU
 Modbus ASCII
 ASCII
You can configure both physical and protocol settings for the serial line. Serial lines are configured
for the Modbus RTU protocol by default.
NOTE: You can only add one serial line cartridge to the controller.
EIO0000003329 12/2018 23

Step Action
1 Click the SL2 (Serial line) node in the Hardware Tree to display the serial line properties.
This figure shows the properties of the serial line for Modbus RTU and Modbus ASCII protocols:
This figure shows the properties of the serial line for ASCII protocol:
2 Edit the properties to configure the serial line.

For detailed information on the serial line configuration parameters, refer to the table below.
24 EIO0000003329 12/2018
This table describes each parameter of the serial line:

Physical settings
Baud rate Yes 1200 19200 Allows you to select the data
2400 transmission rate (bits per second)
4800 for the modem from the drop-down
9600 list.
19200
38400
57600
115200
Parity Yes None Even Allows you to select the parity of the
Even transmitted data for error detection.
Odd Parity is a method of error detection
in transmission.
When parity is used with a serial
port, an extra data bit is sent with
each data character, arranged so
that the number of 1 bits in each
character, including the parity bit, is
always odd or always even.
If a byte is received with the wrong
number of 1 bits, the byte is corrupt.
However, an even number of
detected errors can pass the parity
check.
Data bits Yes 7 7 for Modbus Allows you to select the number of
(only for the 8 ASCII, 8 for data bits from the drop-down list.
ASCII Modbus RTU The number of data bits in each
protocol character can be 7 (for true ASCII) or
8 (for any kind of data, as this
matches the size of a byte). 8 data
bits are almost universally used in all
applications.
Stop bits Yes 1 1 Allows you to select the number of
2 stop bits from the drop-down list.
A stop bit is a bit indicating the end of
a byte of data. For electronic
devices, 1 stop bit is usually used.
For slow devices like
electromechanical teleprinters, 2
stop bits are used.
EIO0000003329 12/2018 25

Physical medium Yes RS485 RS485 Allows you to select the physical
True/False True medium for communication.
You can only select either the RS485
RS232 or RS232 medium. Enabling one
True/False medium disables the other one.
communications is the transmission
path over which a signal propagates.
It is an interface for interconnection
of devices with the logic controller.
Polarization Yes Yes No Polarization resistors are integrated
No in the cartridge module. Specify
whether to switch on or off
polarization.
Protocol settings
Protocol Yes Modbus RTU Modbus RTU Allows you to select the protocol
Modbus ASCII transmission mode for
ASCII communication from the drop-down
list.
protocol. Refer to the following
figures and tables.
Protocol settings for the Modbus RTU and Modbus ASCII protocols:
Addressing Yes Slave Slave Allows you to select the addressing
Master mode. You can only select either of
the Slave or Master addressing.
Enabling one addressing mode
disables the other one.
Address [1...247] Yes 1...247 1 Allows you to specify the address ID
of the slave.
master, this field does not appear on
the screen.
Response time (x 100 ms) Yes 10...255 ms 10 Allows you to specify the response
time of the protocol to the queries.
Time between frames (ms) Yes 3...255 ms 10 Allows you to specify the time
between frames of the protocol.
26 EIO0000003329 12/2018

Protocol settings for the ASCII protocol:
Stop condition
Response time (x 100 ms) Yes 1...255 10 Allows you to specify the response
Frame length received Yes 0...255 0 Allows you to specify the frame
length received.
Frame received timeout (ms) Yes 0...255 10 Allows you to specify the frame
received timeout.
Frame structure
Start character Yes 0...255 58 (if check box Allows you to specify the start
is selected) character of the frame.
First end character Yes 0...255 10 (if check box Allows you to specify the first end
Second end character Yes 0...255 10 (if check box Allows you to specify the second end
Send frame characters Yes True/False False Allows you to enable or disable
sending first end character of the
frame to the ASCII protocol.
EIO0000003329 12/2018 27
28 EIO0000003329 12/2018
Modicon TMC2
TMC2 Application Cartridges Configuration
EIO0000003329 12/2018
Chapter 3
Introduction
This chapter describes how to configure the TMC2 application cartridges.

Topic Page
TMC2HOIS01 30
TMC2PACK01 32
TMC2CONV01 34
EIO0000003329 12/2018 29
TMC2HOIS01
Introduction
The TMC2HOIS01 is an application cartridge module for hoisting, featuring 2 analog voltage or
current input channels with 12-bit resolution.
 0...10 V
 0...20 mA
 4...20 mA
For further hardware information, refer to TMC2HOIS01 (see Modicon TMC2, Cartridges,
Hardware Guide).
NOTICE
30 EIO0000003329 12/2018


in a program.
number
Type Not used Not used Choose the mode of the channel.
0 - 10 V
0 - 20 mA
4 - 20 mA
Scope Customized Customized The range of values for a channel.
0 - 20 mA 0
4 - 20 mA 4000
0 - 20 mA 20000
4 - 20 mA 20000
Filter 0...100 0 Specifies the filtering value. Multiply by the
Filter Unit value to obtain the filtering time.
Filter Unit 100 ms 100 ms Specifies the unit of time for the filtering
value.
Units) - - -
EIO0000003329 12/2018 31
TMC2PACK01
Introduction
The TMC2PACK01 is an application cartridge module for packaging, featuring 2 analog voltage or
current input channels with 12-bit resolution.
 0...10 V
 0...20 mA
 4...20 mA
For further hardware information, refer to TMC2PACK01 (see Modicon TMC2, Cartridges,
Hardware Guide).
NOTICE
32 EIO0000003329 12/2018


in a program.
number
Type Not used Not used Choose the mode of the channel.
0 - 10 V
0 - 20 mA
4 - 20 mA
Scope Customized Customized The range of values for a channel.
0 - 20 mA 0
4 - 20 mA 4000
0 - 20 mA 20000
4 - 20 mA 20000
Filter (x 100ms) 0...100 0 Specifies the filtering time (0...10 s).
Units) - - -
EIO0000003329 12/2018 33
TMC2CONV01
Introduction
The TMC2CONV01 is an application cartridge module featuring 1 serial line for conveying.
For further hardware information, refer to TMC2CONV01 (see Modicon TMC2, Cartridges,
Hardware Guide).
The serial line can be configured for any one of the following protocols:
 Modbus RTU
 Modbus ASCII
 ASCII
You can configure both physical and protocol settings for the serial line. Serial lines are configured
for the Modbus RTU protocol by default.
NOTE: You can only add one serial line cartridge to the controller.
34 EIO0000003329 12/2018

Step Action
1 Click the SL2 (Serial line) node in the Hardware Tree to display the serial line properties.
This figure shows the properties of the serial line for Modbus RTU and Modbus ASCII protocols:
This figure shows the properties of the serial line for ASCII protocol:
2 Edit the properties to configure the serial line.

For detailed information on the serial line configuration parameters, refer to the table below.
EIO0000003329 12/2018 35
This table describes each parameter of the serial line:

Physical settings
Baud rate Yes 1200 19200 Allows you to select the data
2400 transmission rate (bits per second)
4800 for the modem from the drop-down
9600 list.
19200
38400
57600
115200
Parity Yes None Even Allows you to select the parity of
Even the transmitted data for error
Odd detection.
Parity is a method of error
detection in transmission.
When parity is used with a serial
port, an extra data bit is sent with
each data character, arranged so
that the number of 1 bits in each
character, including the parity bit,
is always odd or always even.
If a byte is received with the wrong
number of 1 bits, the byte is
corrupt. However, an even number
of detected errors can pass the
parity check.
Data bits Yes 7 7 for Modbus Allows you to select the number of
(only for the 8 ASCII, 8 for data bits from the drop-down list.
ASCII protocol Modbus RTU The number of data bits in each
character can be 7 (for true ASCII)
or 8 (for any kind of data, as this
matches the size of a byte). 8 data
bits are almost universally used in
all applications.
Stop bits Yes 1 1 Allows you to select the number of
2 stop bits from the drop-down list.
A stop bit is a bit indicating the end
of a byte of data. For electronic
devices, 1 stop bit is usually used.
For slow devices like
electromechanical teleprinters, 2
stop bits are used.
36 EIO0000003329 12/2018

Physical medium Yes RS485 RS485 Allows you to select the physical
True/False True medium for communication.
You can only select either the
RS232 RS485 or RS232 medium.
True/False Enabling one medium disables the
other one.
communications is the
transmission path over which a
signal propagates. It is an interface
for interconnection of devices with
the logic controller.
Polarization Yes Yes No Polarization resistors are
No integrated in the cartridge module.
Specify whether to switch on or off
polarization.
Protocol settings
Protocol Yes Modbus RTU Modbus RTU Allows you to select the protocol
Modbus ASCII transmission mode for
ASCII communication from the drop-
down list.
protocol. Refer to the following
figures and tables.
Protocol settings for the Modbus RTU and Modbus ASCII protocols:
Addressing Yes Slave Slave Allows you to select the
Master addressing mode. You can only
select either of the Slave or Master
addressing. Enabling one
addressing mode disables the
other one.
Address [1...247] Yes 1...247 1 Allows you to specify the address
ID of the slave.
master, this field does not appear
on the screen.
Response time (x 100 ms) Yes 10...255 ms 10 Allows you to specify the response
Time between frames (ms) Yes 3...255 ms 10 Allows you to specify the time
between frames of the protocol.
EIO0000003329 12/2018 37

Protocol settings for the ASCII protocol:
Stop condition
Response time (x 100 ms) Yes 1...255 10 Allows you to specify the response
Frame length received Yes 0...255 0 Allows you to specify the frame
length received.
Frame received timeout (ms) Yes 0...255 10 Allows you to specify the frame
received timeout.
Frame structure
Start character Yes 0...255 58 (if check box Allows you to specify the start
First end character Yes 0...255 10 (if check box Allows you to specify the first end
Second end character Yes 0...255 10 (if check box Allows you to specify the second
is selected) end character of the frame.
Send frame characters Yes True/False False Allows you to enable or disable
sending first end character of the
frame to the ASCII protocol.
38 EIO0000003329 12/2018
Modicon TMC2
TMC2 Analog Cartridge Diagnostics
EIO0000003329 12/2018
Chapter 4
Introduction
For analog cartridges, the operating status of each I/O channel is given by the objects:
 %IWS0.x0y for input channel y of cartridge x
 %QWS0.x0y for output channel y of cartridge x
The real-time values of these objects can be read when in online mode, using either an animation
table (see EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic, Operating Guide) or the application.
Input Channel Status Description

This table describes the possible values of the %IWS input channel status word:
Byte value Description

0 Normal
1 Data conversion in progress
2 Initialization
3 Input operation setting error or cartridge with no input
4 Undefined
5 Wiring error detected (input voltage/current high limit exceeded).
6 Wiring error detected (input voltage/current low limit exceeded).
7 Non-volatile memory error
8...255 Undefined
EIO0000003329 12/2018 39
Output Channel Status Description

This table describes the possible values of the %QWS output channel status word:
Byte value Description

0 Normal
1 Undefined
2 Initialization
3 Output operation setting error or cartridge with no output
4 Undefined
5 Undefined
6 Undefined
7 Non-volatile memory error
8...255 Undefined
40 EIO0000003329 12/2018
Modicon TMC2
Index
EIO0000003329 12/2018
Index
Symbols E
%IWS input channel status, 39 EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic
%QWS output channel status, 39 device tree, 12
project, 12
A
analog cartridges, 11 F
application cartridges features
TMC2CONV01, 34 cartridge, 11
TMC2HOIS01, 30
TMC2PACK01, 32
H
hoisting application cartridge, 30
C
cartridge
adding to an EcoStruxure Machine Expert I
- Basic configuration, 12 I/O configuration general information
configuring, 13 general practices, 10
description, 11 input channel status (%IWS), 39
features, 11
removing, 12
replacing, 12 O
comments output channel status (%QWS), 39
displaying, 14
configuring
cartridges, 13 P
conveying application cartridge, 34 packaging application cartridge, 32
programming details
displaying, 14
D
description
cartridge, 11 R
device tree, 12 removing a cartridge, 12
diagnostic bytes (%IWS, %QWS)), 39 replacing
displaying a cartridge, 12
programming details, 14
EIO0000003329 12/2018 41
Index
S
serial line
configuration, 24, 35
introduction, 23, 34
serial line cartridges, 11, 23, 34
symbols, displaying, 14
T
TMC2 analog cartridges
diagnostics, 39
TMC2 analog I/O modules
TMC2AI2, 16
TMC2AQ2C , 22
TMC2AQ2V , 21
TMC2HOIS01, 30
TMC2PACK01, 32
TMC2TI2 , 18
TMC2 cartridges
adding to a configuration , 12
TMC2AI2, 16
TMC2AQ2C, 22
TMC2AQ2V, 21
TMC2CONV01, 34
TMC2HOIS01, 30
TMC2PACK01, 32
TMC2SL1, 23
TMC2TI2, 18
42 EIO0000003329 12/2018
Modicon TMC2
EIO0000003337 12/2018
Modicon TMC2
Cartridges
Hardware Guide
12/2018
EIO0000003337.00
please notify us.
2 EIO0000003337 12/2018
Table of Contents
About the Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Part I TMC2 General Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Chapter 1 TMC2 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
General Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Chapter 2 TMC2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.1 TMC2 General Rules for Implementing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Environmental Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.2 TMC2 Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
TMC2 Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2.3 TMC2 Electrical Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Wiring Best Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Grounding the M221 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Part II TMC2 Standard Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Chapter 3 TMC2AI2 Analog Voltage, Current Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . 39
TMC2AI2 Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
TMC2AI2 Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
TMC2AI2 Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Chapter 4 TMC2TI2 Analog Temperature Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
TMC2TI2 Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
TMC2TI2 Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
TMC2TI2 Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Chapter 5 TMC2AQ2V Analog Voltage Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
TMC2AQ2V Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
TMC2AQ2V Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
TMC2AQ2V Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Chapter 6 TMC2AQ2C Analog Current Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
TMC2AQ2C Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
TMC2AQ2C Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
TMC2AQ2C Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
EIO0000003337 12/2018 3
Chapter 7 TMC2SL1 Serial Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
TMC2SL1 Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
TMC2SL1 Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
TMC2SL1 Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Part III TMC2 Application Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Chapter 8 TMC2HOIS01 Hoisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
TMC2HOIS01 Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
TMC2HOIS01 Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
TMC2HOIS01 Wiring Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Chapter 9 TMC2PACK01 Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
TMC2PACK01 Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
TMC2PACK01 Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
TMC2PACK01 Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Chapter 10 TMC2CONV01 Conveying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
TMC2CONV01 Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
TMC2CONV01 Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
TMC2CONV01 Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
4 EIO0000003337 12/2018
Safety Information
NOTICE
EIO0000003337 12/2018 5
PLEASE NOTE
6 EIO0000003337 12/2018
About the Book
At a Glance
Document Scope
This guide describes the hardware implementation of TMC2. It provides the parts description,
characteristics, wiring diagrams, and installation details for TMC2.
Validity Note
The information in this manual is applicable only for TMC2 products.
Step Action
interests you.
EIO0000003337 12/2018 7
Related Documents

Modicon TMC2 Cartridges - Programming Guide EIO0000003329 (ENG)
EIO0000003330 (FRA)
EIO0000003331 (GER)
EIO0000003332 (SPA)
EIO0000003333 (ITA)
EIO0000003334 (CHS)
EIO0000003335 (POR)
EIO0000003336 (TUR)
EIO0000003314 (FRA)
EIO0000003315 (GER)
EIO0000003316 (SPA)
EIO0000003317 (ITA)
EIO0000003318 (CHS)
EIO0000003319 (POR)
EIO0000003320 (TUR)
at https://www.schneider-electric.com/en/download
DANGER
indicated.
8 EIO0000003337 12/2018
DANGER
 Only use this equipment in non-hazardous locations, or in locations that comply with Class I,
Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D.
 Do not substitute components which would impair compliance to Class I, Division 2.
 Do not connect or disconnect equipment unless power has been removed or the location is
known to be non-hazardous.
WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
1
WARNING
EIO0000003337 12/2018 9
reduction
requirements
field buses.
10 EIO0000003337 12/2018
(2006/42/EC) and ISO 12100:2010.
EIO0000003337 12/2018 11
12 EIO0000003337 12/2018
Modicon TMC2
TMC2 General Overview
EIO0000003337 12/2018
Part I

1 TMC2 Description 15
2 TMC2 Installation 17
EIO0000003337 12/2018 13
14 EIO0000003337 12/2018
Modicon TMC2
TMC2 Description
EIO0000003337 12/2018
Chapter 1
TMC2 Description
TMC2 Description
General Description
Introduction
The cartridges are designed to be connected to the Modicon TM221C Logic Controller range.
Cartridges Features
The following table describes the TMC2 cartridges features:
Reference Description
TMC2AI2 TMC2 cartridge with 2 analog voltage or current inputs (0...10 V, 0...20 mA, 4...20 mA),
(see page 39) 12 bits
TMC2TI2 TMC2 cartridge with 2 analog temperature inputs (thermocouple, RTD), 14 bits
(see page 45)
TMC2AQ2V TMC2 cartridge with 2 analog voltage outputs (0...10 V), 12 bits
(see page 51)
TMC2AQ2C TMC2 cartridge with 2 analog current outputs (4...20 mA), 12 bits
(see page 57)
TMC2SL1 TMC2 cartridge with 1 serial line (RS232 or RS485)
(see page 63)
TMC2HOIS01 TMC2 application cartridge with 2 analog voltage or current inputs for hoisting load
(see page 71) cells
TMC2PACK01 TMC2 application cartridge with 2 analog voltage or current inputs for packaging
(see page 77)
TMC2CONV01 TMC2 application cartridge with 1 serial line for conveying
(see page 83)
EIO0000003337 12/2018 15
TMC2 Description
Logic Controller Compatibility

NOTE: For more information on cartridge compatibility with specific controllers, refer to your
controller-specific hardware guide.
The following table describes the number of TMC2 cartridges that can be installed in a Modicon
TM221C Logic Controller:
Reference Cartridge Slots Compatible Cartridges Combination

TMC2AI2 TMC2SL1
TMC2TI2 TMC2CONV01
TMC2AQ2V
TMC2AQ2C
TMC2HOIS01
TMC2PACK01
TM221C16R 1 1 0
TM221CE16R
0 1
TM221C16T
TM221CE16T
TM221C24R
TM221CE24R
TM221C24T
TM221CE24T
TM221C40R 2 (1) 1 0
TM221CE40R
0 1
TM221C40T
TM221CE40T 1 1
2 0
NOTICE
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE
 Verify that empty cartridge slots have their covers in place before applying power to the
controller.
 Do not touch the contacts of the cartridge.
 Only handle the cartridge on the housing.
 Take the necessary protective measures against electrostatic discharges.
16 EIO0000003337 12/2018
Modicon TMC2
TMC2 Installation
EIO0000003337 12/2018
Chapter 2
TMC2 Installation
TMC2 Installation

Section Topic Page
2.1 TMC2 General Rules for Implementing 18
2.2 TMC2 Installation 21
2.3 TMC2 Electrical Requirements 30
EIO0000003337 12/2018 17
TMC2 Installation
Section 2.1
TMC2 General Rules for Implementing
TMC2 General Rules for Implementing

Topic Page
Environmental Characteristics 19
18 EIO0000003337 12/2018
TMC2 Installation
TMC2
TMC2 cartridge environmental characteristics are the same as the Modicon TM221C Logic
Controller (see Modicon M221 Logic Controller, Hardware Guide).
EIO0000003337 12/2018 19
TMC2 Installation
Introduction
The M221 Logic Controllers are designed to conform to the main national and international
 IEC/EN 61131-2
 UL 508
The M221 Logic Controllers have obtained the following conformity marks:
 CE
 CSA (except for TM221C•••U)
 EAC
 RCM
 UL
 cCSAus Hazardous Location (except for TM221C•••U)
20 EIO0000003337 12/2018
TMC2 Installation
Section 2.2
TMC2 Installation
TMC2 Installation

Topic Page
TMC2 Installation 24
EIO0000003337 12/2018 21
TMC2 Installation
Before Starting
software, for a particular application, you must also consider any applicable local, regional or
Disconnecting Power
All options and modules should be assembled and installed before installing the control system on
a mounting rail, onto a mounting plate or in a panel. Remove the control system from its mounting
rail, mounting plate or panel before disassembling the equipment.
DANGER
indicated.
22 EIO0000003337 12/2018
TMC2 Installation
WARNING
In addition to the Environmental Characteristics, refer to Product Related Information in the
beginning of the present document for important information regarding installation in hazardous
locations for this specific equipment.
NOTE: For important safety information and the environment characteristics of the TMC2
cartridges, see the M221 Logic Controller Hardware Guide.
WARNING
 Install and operate this equipment in an enclosure appropriately rated for its intended
environment and secured by a keyed or tooled locking mechanism.
 Use the sensor and actuator power supplies only for supplying power to the sensors or
actuators connected to the module.
 Power line and output circuits must be wired and fused in compliance with local and national
regulatory requirements for the rated current and voltage of the particular equipment.
and standards.
NOTE: JDYX2 or JDYX8 fuse types are UL-recognized and CSA approved.
EIO0000003337 12/2018 23
TMC2 Installation
TMC2 Installation
The TMC2 cartridge is designed to operate within the same temperature range as the controllers,
including the controller derating for extended temperature operation, and temperature restrictions
associated with the mounting positions. Refer to the controller mounting position and clearance
(see Modicon M221 Logic Controller, Hardware Guide) for more information.
Installation
DANGER
ELECTRIC SHOCK OR ARC FLASH
covers or doors, or installing or removing any accessories, hardware, cables, or wires.
indicated.
 Use protective gloves when installing or removing the cartridges.
NOTICE
controller.
24 EIO0000003337 12/2018
TMC2 Installation
The following table describes the different steps to install a TMC2 cartridge on the controller:
Step Action
1 Disconnect all power from all equipment prior to removing any covers or installing a cartridge.
2 Remove the cartridge from the packaging.
3 Press the locking clip on the top of the cartridge cover with an insulated screwdriver and pull up the
cover gently.
4 Remove by hand the cartridge slot cover from the controller.

NOTE: Keep the cover to reuse it for the de-installation.
EIO0000003337 12/2018 25
TMC2 Installation
Step Action
5 Place the cartridge in the slot on the controller.
6 Push the cartridge into the slot until it clicks.
26 EIO0000003337 12/2018
TMC2 Installation
De-installation
DANGER
ELECTRIC SHOCK OR ARC FLASH
covers or doors, or installing or removing any accessories, hardware, cables, or wires.
indicated.
 Use protective gloves when installing or removing the cartridges.
NOTICE
controller.
EIO0000003337 12/2018 27
TMC2 Installation
The following table describes the different steps to de-install a TMC2 cartridge from the controller:
Step Action
1 Disconnect all power from all equipment, including connected devices, prior to removing a cartridge.
2 Press the locking clip on the top of the cartridge with an insulated screwdriver and pull up the
cartridge gently.
3 Remove by hand the cartridge from the controller.
28 EIO0000003337 12/2018
TMC2 Installation
Step Action
4 Place the cartridge slot cover in the slot on the controller.
5 Push the cartridge slot cover into the slot until it clicks.
EIO0000003337 12/2018 29
TMC2 Installation
Section 2.3
TMC2 Electrical Requirements
TMC2 Electrical Requirements

Topic Page
Wiring Best Practices 31
Grounding the M221 System 34
30 EIO0000003337 12/2018
TMC2 Installation
Wiring Best Practices
Overview
This section describes the wiring guidelines and associated best practices to be respected when
using the M221 Logic Controller system.
DANGER
indicated.
WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
1
EIO0000003337 12/2018 31
TMC2 Installation
Wiring Guidelines
The following rules must be applied when wiring a M221 Logic Controller system:
 I/O and communication wiring must be kept separate from the power wiring. Route these 2 types
of wiring in separate cable ducting.
 Verify that the operating conditions and environment are within the specification values.
 Use proper wire sizes to meet voltage and current requirements.
 Use copper conductors (required).
 Use twisted pair, shielded cables for analog, and/or fast I/O.
 Use twisted pair, shielded cables for networks, and fieldbus.
Use shielded, properly grounded cables for all analog and high-speed inputs or outputs and
communication connections. If you do not use shielded cable for these connections,
electromagnetic interference can cause signal degradation. Degraded signals can cause the
controller or attached modules and equipment to perform in an unintended manner.
WARNING
 Use shielded cables for all fast I/O, analog I/O and communication signals.
 Ground cable shields for all analog I/O, fast I/O and communication signals at a single point1.
 Route communication and I/O cables separately from power cables.
1Multipoint
For more details, refer to Grounding Shielded Cables (see page 34).
NOTE: Surface temperatures may exceed 60 °C (140 °F). To conform to IEC 61010 standards,
route primary wiring (wires connected to power mains) separately and apart from secondary wiring
(extra low voltage wiring coming from intervening power sources). If that is not possible, double
insulation is required such as conduit or cable gains.
The cartridge connectors are not removable.
NOTICE
Do not attempt to remove the connectors from the cartridge.
32 EIO0000003337 12/2018
TMC2 Installation
Rules for Non-Removable Screw Terminal Block

The following table shows the cable types and wire sizes for a 3.81 mm (0.15 in.) pitch non-
removable screw terminal block:
DANGER
Tighten connections in conformance with the torque specifications.
DANGER
FIRE HAZARD
 Use only the correct wire sizes for the current capacity of the I/O channels and power supplies.
(176 °F).
EIO0000003337 12/2018 33
TMC2 Installation
Grounding the M221 System
Overview
To help minimize the effects of electromagnetic interference, cables carrying the fast I/O, analog
I/O, and field bus communication signals must be shielded.
WARNING
 Use shielded cables for all fast I/O, analog I/O, and communication signals.
 Ground cable shields for all fast I/O, analog I/O, and communication signals at a single point1.
 Route communications and I/O cables separately from power cables.
1Multipoint
The use of shielded cables requires compliance with the following wiring rules:
 For protective ground connections (PE), metal conduit or ducting can be used for part of the
shielding length, provided there is no break in the continuity of the ground connections. For
functional ground (FE), the shielding is intended to attenuate electromagnetic interference and
the shielding must be continuous for the length of the cable. If the purpose is both functional and
protective, as is often the case for communication cables, the cable must have continuous
shielding.
 Wherever possible, keep cables carrying one type of signal separate from the cables carrying
other types of signals or power.
Protective Ground (PE) on the Backplane

The protective ground (PE) is connected to the conductive backplane by a heavy-duty wire, usually
a braided copper cable with the maximum allowable cable section.
34 EIO0000003337 12/2018
TMC2 Installation
Shielded Cables Connections

Cables carrying the fast I/O, analog I/O, and field bus communication signals must be shielded.
The shielding must be securely connected to ground. The fast I/O and analog I/O shields may be
connected either to the functional ground (FE) or to the protective ground (PE) of your M221 Logic
Controller. The field bus communication cable shields must be connected to the protective ground
(PE) with a connecting clamp secured to the conductive backplane of your installation.
The shielding of the Modbus cable must be connected to the protective ground (PE).
DANGER
ELECTRIC SHOCK
Make sure that Modbus cables are securely connected to the protective ground (PE).
Protective Ground (PE) Cable Shielding

To ground the shield of a cable through a grounding clamp:
Step Description
1 Strip the shielding for a length of
15 mm (0.59 in.)
2 Attach the cable to the conductive

backplane plate by attaching the
grounding clamp to the stripped
part of the shielding as close as
possible to the M221 Logic
Controller system base.
NOTE: The shielding must be clamped securely to the conductive backplane to ensure a good
contact.
EIO0000003337 12/2018 35
TMC2 Installation
Functional Ground (FE) Cable Shielding

To connect the shield of a cable through the Grounding Bar:
Step Description
1 Install the Grounding Bar directly on the conductive
backplane below the M221 Logic Controller system
as illustrated.
2 Strip the shielding for a length of 15 mm (0.59 in.
3 Tightly clamp on the blade connector (1) using

nylon fastener (2)(width 2.5...3 mm (0.1...0.12 in.))
and appropriate tool.
NOTE: Use the TM2XMTGB Grounding Bar exclusively for Functional Ground (FE) connections.
WARNING
ACCIDENTAL DISCONNECTION FROM PROTECTIVE GROUND (PE)
 Do not use the TM2XMTGB Grounding Plate to provide a protective ground (PE).
 Use the TM2XMTGB Grounding Plate only to provide a functional ground (FE).
36 EIO0000003337 12/2018
Modicon TMC2
EIO0000003337 12/2018
Part II

3 TMC2AI2 Analog Voltage, Current Inputs 39
4 TMC2TI2 Analog Temperature Inputs 45
5 TMC2AQ2V Analog Voltage Outputs 51
6 TMC2AQ2C Analog Current Outputs 57
7 TMC2SL1 Serial Line 63
EIO0000003337 12/2018 37
38 EIO0000003337 12/2018
Modicon TMC2
TMC2AI2 Analog Voltage, Current Inputs
EIO0000003337 12/2018
Chapter 3
Overview
This chapter describes the TMC2AI2 cartridge, its characteristics, and its connections.

Topic Page
TMC2AI2 Presentation 40
TMC2AI2 Characteristics 41
TMC2AI2 Wiring Diagram 43
EIO0000003337 12/2018 39
TMC2AI2 Presentation
Overview
The following features are integrated into the TMC2AI2 cartridge:
 2 analog inputs (voltage or current)
 non-removable screw terminal block, 3.81 mm (0.15 in.) pitch
Main Characteristics
Signal type Voltage Current
Number of input channels 2
Input range 0...10 Vdc 0...20 mA
4...20 mA
Resolution 12 bits (4096 steps)
Connection type 3.81 mm (0.15 in.) pitch, non-removable screw terminal block
Weight 15 g (0.53 oz)
40 EIO0000003337 12/2018
TMC2AI2 Characteristics
Introduction
This section provides a general description of the TMC2AI2 cartridge characteristics.
WARNING
tables.
Connectors
The following diagram shows a TMC2AI2 cartridge marking and connectors:
EIO0000003337 12/2018 41
Input Characteristics
The following table describes the cartridge input characteristics:
Characteristics Value
Signal Type Voltage Current
Rated input range 0...10 Vdc 0...20 mA
4...20 mA
Input impedance > 1 MΩ < 250 Ω
Sample duration time 10 ms per enabled channel
Input type single-ended
Operating mode self-scan
Conversion mode SAR type
Maximum accuracy at ambient ± 0.1 % of full scale
temperature: 25 °C (77 °F)
Temperature drift ± 0.02 % of full scale per 1 °C (1.8 °F)
Repeatability after stabilization time ± 0.5 % of full scale
Non-linearity ± 0.01 % of full scale
Maximum input deviation ± 1.0 % of full scale
Digital resolution 12 bits (4096 steps)
Input value of LSB 2.44 mV (0...10 Vdc range) 4.88 μA (0...20 mA range)
3.91 μA (4...20 mA range)
Data type in application program scalable from –32768 to 32767
Input data out of detection range yes
Noise maximum temporary ± 4.0 % of the full scale maximum when EMC perturbation is
resistance deviation during applied to the power and I/O wiring
perturbations
cable type and maximum twisted-pair shielded
length
< 30 m (98.4 ft)
crosstalk (maximum) 1 LSB
Isolation between inputs and internal logic not isolated
Maximum continuous overload allowed 13 Vdc 40 mA
(without damage)
Input filter software filter: 0...10 s (with 0.1 s increment)
42 EIO0000003337 12/2018
TMC2AI2 Wiring Diagram
Introduction
This cartridge has a non-removable screw terminal block for the connection of the inputs.
Wiring
See Wiring Best Practices (see page 31).
Wiring Diagram
The following figure shows an example of the voltage and current input connection:
(1): Current/Voltage analog output device
NOTE: Each input can be connected to either a voltage or current input.
EIO0000003337 12/2018 43
44 EIO0000003337 12/2018
Modicon TMC2
TMC2TI2 Analog Temperature Inputs
EIO0000003337 12/2018
Chapter 4
Overview
This chapter describes the TMC2TI2 cartridge, its characteristics, and its connections.

Topic Page
TMC2TI2 Presentation 46
TMC2TI2 Characteristics 47
TMC2TI2 Wiring Diagram 50
EIO0000003337 12/2018 45
TMC2TI2 Presentation
Overview
The following features are integrated into the TMC2TI2 cartridge:
 2 analog temperature inputs (thermocouple or RTD)
Signal type Thermocouple 3 wires RTD
Input range type: K, J, R, S, B, E, T, N, C type: Pt100, Pt1000, Ni100, Ni1000
Resolution 14 bits
46 EIO0000003337 12/2018
TMC2TI2 Characteristics
Introduction
This section provides a general description of the TMC2TI2 cartridge characteristics.
WARNING
tables.
Connectors
The following diagram shows a TMC2TI2 cartridge marking and connectors:
EIO0000003337 12/2018 47
Signal Type Thermocouple 3 wires RTD
Rated input range thermocouple type: RTD type:
K: –200...+1300 °C Pt100: –200...+850 °C
(–328...+2372 °F) (–328...+1562 °F)
J: –200...+1000 °C Pt1000: –200...+600 °C
(–328...+1832 °F) (–328...+1112 °F)
R: 0...+1760 °C Ni100: –60...+180 °C
(+32...+3200 °F) (–76...+356 °F)
S: 0...+1760 °C Ni1000: –60...+180 °C
(+32...+3200 °F) (–76...+356 °F)
B: 0...+1820 °C
(+32...+3308 °F)
E: –200...+800 °C
(–328...+1472 °F)
T: –200...+400 °C
(–328...+752 °F)
N: –200...+1300 °C
(–328...+2372 °F)
C: 0...+2315 °C
(+32...+4199 °F)
Input impedance > 1 MΩ
Sample duration time 125 ms per enabled channel 250 ms per enabled channel
Maximum accuracy K, J, E, T, N: ± 0.1 % of full ± 0.1 % of full scale at ambient
scale at ambient temperature: 25 °C (77 °F)
± 0.4 % of full scale at
temperature < 0 °C (32 °F)
R, S: ± 6 °C (10.8 °F) of full
scale for measured
temperature range:
0...200 °C (32...392 °F)
B: not specified
C: ± 0.1 % of full scale at
ambient temperature: 25 °C
(77 °F)
48 EIO0000003337 12/2018
Signal Type Thermocouple 3 wires RTD
Digital resolution thermocouple type: RTD type:
K: 15000 steps Pt100: 10500 steps
J: 12000 steps Pt1000: 8000 steps
R: 17600 steps Ni100: 2400 steps
S: 17600 steps Ni1000: 2400 steps
B: 18200 steps
E: 10000 steps
T: 6000 steps
N: 15000 steps
C: 23150 steps
Input value of LSB 0.1 °C (0.18 °F)
perturbations
cable type and maximum shielded
length < 30 m (98.4 ft)
(without damage)
Behavior when the temperature sensor is input value = upper limit
disconnected or broken
EIO0000003337 12/2018 49
TMC2TI2 Wiring Diagram
Introduction
Wiring
Wiring Diagram
The following figure shows an example of RTD and thermocouple probe connection:
(1): Thermocouple
NOTE: Each input can be connected to either an RTD or thermocouple probe.
WARNING
50 EIO0000003337 12/2018
Modicon TMC2
TMC2AQ2V Analog Voltage Outputs
EIO0000003337 12/2018
Chapter 5
Overview
This chapter describes the TMC2AQ2V cartridge, its characteristics, and its connections.

Topic Page
TMC2AQ2V Presentation 52
TMC2AQ2V Characteristics 53
TMC2AQ2V Wiring Diagram 55
EIO0000003337 12/2018 51
TMC2AQ2V Presentation
Overview
The following features are integrated into the TMC2AQ2V cartridge:
 2 analog voltage outputs
Signal type Voltage
Number of output channels 2
Output range 0...10 Vdc
52 EIO0000003337 12/2018
TMC2AQ2V Characteristics
Introduction
This section provides a general description of the characteristics of the TMC2AQ2V cartridge.
WARNING
tables.
Connectors
The following diagram shows a TMC2AQ2V cartridge marking and connectors:
EIO0000003337 12/2018 53
Output Characteristics
The following table describes the cartridge output characteristics:
Signal Type Voltage
Rated output range 0...10 Vdc
Load impedance > 2 KΩ
Application load type resistive load
Conversion time 20 ms
Total output system transfer time 40 ms
Overshoot 0%
Maximum output deviation ± 1.0 % of full scale (including ripple)
Output value of LSB 2.44 mV
Data type in application program 0...4095 scalable from –32768 to 32767
perturbations
length
< 30 m (98.4 ft)
Isolation between outputs and internal not isolated
logic
54 EIO0000003337 12/2018
TMC2AQ2V Wiring Diagram
Introduction
This cartridge has a non-removable screw terminal block for the connection of the outputs.
Wiring
Wiring Diagram
The following figure shows an example of the voltage output connection:
(1): Voltage analog input device
WARNING
EIO0000003337 12/2018 55
56 EIO0000003337 12/2018
Modicon TMC2
TMC2AQ2C Analog Current Outputs
EIO0000003337 12/2018
Chapter 6
Overview
This chapter describes the TMC2AQ2C cartridge, its characteristics, and its connections.

Topic Page
TMC2AQ2C Presentation 58
TMC2AQ2C Characteristics 59
TMC2AQ2C Wiring Diagram 61
EIO0000003337 12/2018 57
TMC2AQ2C Presentation
Overview
The following features are integrated into the TMC2AQ2C cartridge:
 2 analog current outputs
Signal type Current
Number of output channels 2
Output range 4...20 mA
58 EIO0000003337 12/2018
TMC2AQ2C Characteristics
Introduction
This section provides a general description of the TMC2AQ2C cartridge characteristics.
WARNING
tables.
Connectors
The following diagram shows a TMC2AQ2C cartridge marking and connectors:
EIO0000003337 12/2018 59
Output Characteristics
The following table describes the cartridge output characteristics:
Signal Type Current
Rated output range 4...20 mA
Load impedance < 500 Ω
Application load type resistive load
Conversion time 20 ms
Total output system transfer time 40 ms
Overshoot 0%
Maximum output deviation ± 1.0 % of full scale (including ripple)
Output value of LSB 3.91 μA
Data type in application program 0...4095 scalable from –32768 to 32767
perturbations
length
< 30 m (98.4 ft)
Isolation between outputs and internal not isolated
logic
60 EIO0000003337 12/2018
TMC2AQ2C Wiring Diagram
Introduction
This cartridge has a non-removable screw terminal block for the connection of the outputs.
Wiring
Wiring Diagram
The following figure shows an example of the current output connection:
(1): Current analog input device
WARNING
EIO0000003337 12/2018 61
62 EIO0000003337 12/2018
Modicon TMC2
TMC2SL1 Serial Line
EIO0000003337 12/2018
Chapter 7
TMC2SL1 Serial Line
TMC2SL1 Serial Line
Overview
This chapter describes the TMC2SL1 cartridge, its characteristics, and its connections.

Topic Page
TMC2SL1 Presentation 64
TMC2SL1 Characteristics 65
TMC2SL1 Wiring Diagram 67
EIO0000003337 12/2018 63
TMC2SL1 Serial Line
TMC2SL1 Presentation
Overview
The following features are integrated into the TMC2SL1 cartridge:
 1 serial line (RS232 or RS485)
Standard Serial line RS232 Serial line RS485
64 EIO0000003337 12/2018
TMC2SL1 Serial Line
TMC2SL1 Characteristics
Introduction
This section provides a general description of the TMC2SL1 cartridge characteristics.
WARNING
tables.
Connectors
The following diagram shows a TMC2SL1 cartridge marking and connectors:
EIO0000003337 12/2018 65
TMC2SL1 Serial Line
Serial Line Characteristics

The following table describes the cartridge serial line characteristics:
Software configurable standard RS232 RS485
Baudrate 1200...115200 bps
Wires Rx, Tx, common DA, DB, common
Protocol selection software programmable
Line polarization – software programmable
Line end adapter in the cartridge no
cable type shielded
length < 3 m (9.8 ft) < 15 m (49.2 ft)
Isolation between lines and internal logic not isolated
66 EIO0000003337 12/2018
TMC2SL1 Serial Line
TMC2SL1 Wiring Diagram
Introduction
This cartridge has a non-removable screw terminal block for the connection of the serial line wires.
Wiring
Wiring Diagram
The following figure shows an example of RS232 serial line connection:
NOTE: Only 1 serial line (RS232 or RS485) can be connected to the cartridge.
NOTE: Only 1 TMC2SL1 cartridge is managed per logic controller.
EIO0000003337 12/2018 67
TMC2SL1 Serial Line
68 EIO0000003337 12/2018
Modicon TMC2
EIO0000003337 12/2018
Part III

8 TMC2HOIS01 Hoisting 71
9 TMC2PACK01 Packaging 77
10 TMC2CONV01 Conveying 83
EIO0000003337 12/2018 69
70 EIO0000003337 12/2018
Modicon TMC2
TMC2HOIS01 Hoisting
EIO0000003337 12/2018
Chapter 8
TMC2HOIS01 Hoisting
TMC2HOIS01 Hoisting
Overview
This chapter describes the TMC2HOIS01 cartridge, its characteristics, and its connections.

Topic Page
TMC2HOIS01 Presentation 72
TMC2HOIS01 Characteristics 73
TMC2HOIS01 Wiring Diagram 75
EIO0000003337 12/2018 71
TMC2HOIS01 Hoisting
TMC2HOIS01 Presentation
Overview
The following features are integrated into the TMC2HOIS01 cartridge:
 2 analog inputs (voltage or current) for hoisting load cells
4...20 mA
72 EIO0000003337 12/2018
TMC2HOIS01 Hoisting
TMC2HOIS01 Characteristics
Introduction
This section provides a general description of the TMC2HOIS01 cartridge characteristics.
WARNING
tables.
Connectors
The following diagram shows a TMC2HOIS01 cartridge marking and connectors:
EIO0000003337 12/2018 73
TMC2HOIS01 Hoisting
4...20 mA
3.91 μA (4...20 mA range)
perturbations
length
< 30 m (98.4 ft)
(without damage)
74 EIO0000003337 12/2018
TMC2HOIS01 Hoisting
TMC2HOIS01 Wiring Diagram
Introduction
Wiring
Wiring Diagram
EIO0000003337 12/2018 75
TMC2HOIS01 Hoisting
76 EIO0000003337 12/2018
Modicon TMC2
TMC2PACK01 Packaging
EIO0000003337 12/2018
Chapter 9
Overview
This chapter describes the TMC2PACK01 cartridge, its characteristics, and its connections.

Topic Page
TMC2PACK01 Presentation 78
TMC2PACK01 Characteristics 79
TMC2PACK01 Wiring Diagram 81
EIO0000003337 12/2018 77
TMC2PACK01 Presentation
Overview
The following features are integrated into the TMC2PACK01 cartridge:
 2 analog inputs (voltage or current) for packaging
4...20 mA
78 EIO0000003337 12/2018
TMC2PACK01 Characteristics
Introduction
This section provides a general description of the TMC2PACK01 cartridge characteristics.
WARNING
tables.
Connectors
The following diagram shows a TMC2PACK01 cartridge marking and connectors:
EIO0000003337 12/2018 79
4...20 mA
3.91 μA (4...20 mA range)
perturbations
length
< 30 m (98.4 ft)
(without damage)
80 EIO0000003337 12/2018
TMC2PACK01 Wiring Diagram
Introduction
Wiring
Wiring Diagram
EIO0000003337 12/2018 81
82 EIO0000003337 12/2018
Modicon TMC2
TMC2CONV01 Conveying
EIO0000003337 12/2018
Chapter 10
Overview
This chapter describes the TMC2CONV01 cartridge, its characteristics, and its connections.

Topic Page
TMC2CONV01 Presentation 84
TMC2CONV01 Characteristics 85
TMC2CONV01 Wiring Diagram 87
EIO0000003337 12/2018 83
TMC2CONV01 Presentation
Overview
The following features are integrated into the TMC2CONV01 cartridge:
 1 serial line (RS232 or RS485) for conveying
Standard Serial line RS232 Serial line RS485
84 EIO0000003337 12/2018
TMC2CONV01 Characteristics
Introduction
This section provides a general description of the TMC2CONV01 cartridge characteristics.
WARNING
tables.
Connectors
The following diagram shows a TMC2CONV01 cartridge marking and connectors:
EIO0000003337 12/2018 85
Serial Line Characteristics

The following table describes the cartridge serial line characteristics:
Software configurable standard RS232 RS485
Baudrate 1200...115200 bps
Wires Rx, Tx, common DA, DB, common
Protocol selection software programmable
Line polarization – software programmable
Line end adapter in the cartridge no
cable type shielded
length < 3 m (9.8 ft) < 15 m (49.2 ft)
Isolation between lines and internal logic not isolated
86 EIO0000003337 12/2018
TMC2CONV01 Wiring Diagram
Introduction
This cartridge has a non-removable screw terminal block for the connection of the serial line wires.
Wiring
Wiring Diagram
NOTE: Only 1 serial line (RS232 or RS485) can be connected to the cartridge.
NOTE: Only 1 TMC2CONV01 cartridge is managed per logic controller.
EIO0000003337 12/2018 87
88 EIO0000003337 12/2018
Modicon TMC2
Glossary
EIO0000003337 12/2018
Glossary
M
Modbus
P
PE
(Protective Earth) A common grounding connection to help avoid the hazard of electric shock by
keeping any exposed conductive surface of a device at earth potential. To avoid possible voltage
drop, no current is allowed to flow in this conductor (also referred to as protective ground in North
America or as an equipment grounding conductor in the US national electrical code).
EIO0000003337 12/2018 89
Glossary
90 EIO0000003337 12/2018
Modicon TMC2
Index
EIO0000003337 12/2018
Index
C T
cartridge TMC2
compatibility, 16 cartridge, 37, 69
description, 15 TMC2AI2
features, 15 cartridge, 39
TMC2, 37, 69 TMC2AQ2C
TMC2AI2, 39 cartridge, 57
TMC2AQ2C, 57 TMC2AQ2V
TMC2AQ2V, 51 cartridge, 51
TMC2CONV01, 83 TMC2CONV01
TMC2HOIS01, 71 cartridge, 83
TMC2PACK01, 77 TMC2HOIS01
TMC2SL1, 63 cartridge, 71
TMC2TI2, 45 TMC2PACK01
certifications and standards, 20 cartridge, 77
compatibility TMC2SL1
cartridge, 16 cartridge, 63
TMC2TI2
cartridge, 45
D
description
cartridge, 15 W
wiring, 31
E
environment, 19
F
features
cartridge, 15
G
Grounding, 34
R
RS232, 63
RS485, 63
EIO0000003337 12/2018 91
Index
92 EIO0000003337 12/2018

M221 USer Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

M221 USer Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

M221 USer Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SQL Gateway

1 Modicon M221 Logic Controller Part I

Title of Documentation Reference Number

What Is in This Part?

About the Modicon M221 Logic Controller

What Is in This Chapter?

TM221C Logic Controller Description

Real Time Clock

Memory Type Size Used to

Embedded Communication Features

Remote Graphic Display

TM221C Logic Controller

1 TM221C Logic Controller Instruction Sheet

TM221M Logic Controller Description

Real Time Clock

Memory Type Size Used to

Embedded Communication Features

Remote Graphic Display

TM221M Logic Controller

Reference Digital Input Digital Output Analog Communication Terminal Type

Reference Digital Input Digital Output Analog Communication Terminal Type

1 TM221M Logic Controller Instruction Sheet

What Is in This Chapter?

What Is in This Section?

Object Type Object Object Function Description

Object Type Object Object Function Description

Object Type Object Object Function Description

Object Type Object Object Function Description

Object Type Object Object Function Description

Object Type Object Object Function Description

Addressing I/O Objects

Object Type Syntax Example Description

Object Type Syntax Example Description

Object Type Syntax Example Description

Object Type Syntax Example Description

Maximum Number of Objects

Maximum Number of Objects Description

Objects M221 Logic Controller References

Objects M221 Logic Controller References

Objects M221 Logic Controller References

Objects M221 Logic Controller References

Maximum Number of PTO Objects Description

Categories/Objects M221 Logic Controller References

What Is in This Section?

Tasks and Scan Modes

Maximum Number of Tasks and Priorities

Controller States and Behaviors

What Is in This Section?

Controller States Diagram

Controller States Diagram

Controller States Description

Controller States Table

Controller State Description Communication Application LED

Controller State Description Communication Application LED

Controller State Transitions

 Remote Graphic Display.

 Run/Stop (see Modicon M221 Logic Controller, Hardware Guide) input:

 EcoStruxure Machine Expert - Basic online button:

 Remote Graphic Display.

 Run/Stop (see Modicon M221 Logic Controller, Hardware Guide) input: